CENTENARY MEETING OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

The Centenary Meeting was held in the Mawson Theatre in the University of Adelaide,

on 24 September 1953, in the presence of the Society’s Patron, His Excellency the

Governor of South Australia, Air Vice-Marshal Sir Robert George, K.B.E., L.B., M.C.,

and Lady George

> VP,

CENTENARY OF THE SOCIETY

By S. B. Dicx1nson*

President of the Society

On this occasion of the centenary of the foundation of the Royal Society

of South Australia it falls to my lot as President to extend to Your Excel-

lency a cordial and warm welcome. We are honoured to have you as our

patron and we also bear in grateful memory the services which have been

rendered by your predecessors. We are equally delighted and honoured that

Lady George has been able to attend this historic meeting.

We welcome the Hon. R. Rudall, Minister of Education, representing

the Government which has given the Society its support over many years.

I also welcome the representatives of kindred societies and other scien-

tific bodies and the many distinguished scientists who have honoured us with

their presence.

Messages of greeting have been received from:

The Royal Society of London; The Linnean Society of New South Wales;

The Royal Society of Australia; The Royal Society of New South Wales; The

Royal Society of Victoria; The Royal Society of Western Australia; The Royal

Society of Tasmania; The Royal Society of Queensland.

On an occasion such as this, when the Royal Society of South Australia

has completed a century’s honourable service to the community, something

different, it seems, should be said, something in recognition of the special

occasion.

We have great cause to be thankful that our Society has been permitted

to survive the full span of 100 years. We are thankful for the honoured place

' it holds in the community, for its friendly association with its kindred scien-

tific societies, for its achievements. Many of its fellows have gained high

renown.

It is natural on this occasion to let our minds wander back and think of

our beginnings when the Society was originally launched on its voyage on

January 10th, 1853. On that day five prominent Adelaide citizens met

together to organise learned discussions on subjects connected with literature and

art. At this meeting the Adelaide Philosophical Society was formed, which later

became the Royal Society by merely a change of name.

I do not intend to say anything about our early history, as much on that

subject will be found meticulously recorded in past numbers of the Trans-

actions™, except to remind you that our originators, besides pledging them-

©) R. S, Rogers—“A History of the Society, particularly in its relation to other

Institutions in the State.” Presidential address, Transactions and Proceedings of the

Royal Society, 46, 1922.

C. T. Madigan —"“The Past, Present, and Future of the Society, and its relation

to the Welfare and Progress of the State.” Presidential address, Transactions and Pro-

ceedings of the Royal Society, 60, 1936.

* S. B. Dickinson, M.Sc., Director of Mines, South Australia.

en ee

selves to the promotion of public interest in literature and art, also dedicated

themselves to the pursuit of scientific knowledge. This association of scien-

tific and literary interests was perhaps the most outstanding feature of our

early beginning. A more enlightened objective can scarcely be put forward

today when it is becoming more and more apparent that education and cul-

tural interests need to include something of science as well as of literature.

With these noble aspirations it 1s no wonder the Society grew and

flourished.

In the year 1880 Her Majesty Queen Victoria graciously acknowledged

the Society by becoming its Patron. Her Majesty also approved the Society

being styled the Royal Society of South Australia. This title is one of our

most precious possessions, To us it implies a direct association with the

Royal Society of the United Kingdom, and with it the inheritance of a great

name and great responsibilities. We acknowledge gratefully the continued

patronage accorded to us by your Excellency. Jt preserves this link with

the Mother Country, with the Royal Societies of the British Commonwealth,

and the traditions and work which have won the respect of the scientific

world.

In these brief introductory remarks I have not sufficient time to bring

to your attention the many achievements of the Society. Neither is it pos-

sible for me to pay tribute to the many fellows, both past and present, whose

energy and devotion to the pursuit of truth have built up the Society’s

treastire house of knowledge. From the subsequent addresses, however, I

feel you will gain a clear concept of the debt we owe to our members, who

during the past 100 years have given worthy intellectual and scientific guid-

ance to the people of South Australia,

Tt is difficult for the man of the world to understand the altruistic spirit

which induces men of science to band themselves together in societies having

for their sole aim the advancement of knowledge in particular directions; and

in very many cases sacrifice their leisure, and draw upon their limited

resources, not only that knowledge may be increased, but also that the gain

may be published to the world, which is free to make use of it; yet such is

the case.

The publications of otiginal scientific work by the society have been

continuous for 76 years and are to be found on the shelves of every important

scientific library throughout the world.

In its early years the Society participated much more prominently in

public affairs than it does today. It was not uncommon for the Governor

of the State to occupy the Chair, and for the Chief Justice, the Judges, the

Surveyor-General, the Postmaster-General, and leading educationalists and

newspapes editors to engage in lengthy discussions and present reports on

matters relating to development of the Colony. Actually it was the only body

in the country, at that time, which could speak with any authority on matters

of education and pure and applied sciences. The old Society was thus the

forerunner of many of our public institutions and of nearly all the scientific

bodies which have arisen since. It played a major role in the establishment of

the Public Library, the Museum, and the Art Gallery. Its efforts led to the

establishment of many of the Government departments. It was prominent

in the original movement for the establishment of the University in this State.

It is thus fitting that we should be celebrating this historic occasion within the

University. I desire to express our thanks to the Chancellor, the Vice-

Chancellor and members of the staff of the University for their undiminished

support of our efforts. It has aided us immensely in living up to our professed

objective—the advancement of knowledge.

iil

With the establishment of the educational institutions in the State,

especially the University, the interests of the Society gradually turned to

essentially scientific pursuits. Professor Ralph Tate, the first Professor of

Natural History in the University, became the soul of the Society during

these transition years. Besides encouraging original work, an equally strong

desire prompted him to spread scientific knowledge and promote its general

use by the ordinary citizen. His untiring efforts led to the establishment of

the Field Naturalists’ Section of the Society, which encourages the study of

natural history essentially as a hobby. This Section has become a very active

body. Its efforts in collaboration with those of the Fauna and Flora Pro-

tection Committee have been responsible for much of the legislation relating

to the protection of ainmals and plants and also for the establishment of our

National Parks.

In its career of scientific endeavour, which we may date from the foun-

dation of the University, the Society may properly claim to have done out-

standing service. It makes one award for distinction in scientific work and

that is the Sir Joseph Verco Medal. Sir Joseph Verco was one of the greatest

workers and most outstanding personalities in our later history. The award

is made at such times as the Council considers there is a worthy recipient.

They have been made to Professor Walter Howchin, Mr. J]. M. Black, Sir

Douglas Mawson, Professor J. B. Cleland, Professor T. Harvey Johnston,

Professor J. A. Prescott, Mr. H. Womersley, Professor J. G. Wood, Dr. C. T.

Madigan and Mr, H. M. Hale, whose names are prominently recorded in our

annals of science.

Throughout its career the Society has been materially assisted by the

Government of the State in many ways, and continues to enjoy its support.

The annual Government grant largely provides the means of publishing the

results of investigations. For such Government assistance the Council is

truly grateful.

In conclusion I would like to strike a note of dedication. Every conquest

of science brings the human race nearer the day when it will have complete

control over the forces of nature and be able to use them for its own purposes.

I think it is obvious to us all that we have now moved into an era in

which science can be no longer regarded as something extraneous or additional.

On the other hand, it has become an essential part of our everyday life. There

must therefore be no resting, satisfied with achievements, but persistent

endeavour.

Success in the discovery of new natural facts and relationships, however,

is not enough. Whether good or evil uses are made of these discoveries

depends on the aims and character of the community, rather than upon the

studies themselves.

~ I would therefore urge the Society towards a new outlook of service to

the community as well as to science itself. What is more urgent now is to

integrate scientific work and human needs and to do something to lessen the

gap of ignorance between the scientists and the public—a gap that is widen-

ing as scientific specialisation proceeds, Let us hope that the Society will

have an even greater influence in the future than it has had in the past 100

years in this country of ours.

THE BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

By Wititam P. Rocers *

The body of knowledge which we call the biological sciences covers a

wide field; it embraces a complex of interrelated disciplines. Until recently

it was convenient to divide these disciplines into two groups. One, descrip-

tive biology, included such subjects as morphology, natural history and

taxonomy. The other was called experimental biology and covered such

subjects as ecology, genetics and physiology. But today this type of distinc-

tion between the different biological sciences is going. ‘There is now, for

instance, a branch of biology known as experimental morphology; at one

time the two words would have been regarded almost as contradictory, The

systematist, once regarded as a completely descriptive biologist, cannot even

grasp the significance of his fundamental unit, the species, if he has not an

understanding of ecology and genetics. And, in turn, both these sciences

are Jargely based on an understanding of physiology.

The modern division of biology is not so much between experimental

and descriptive biology but rather between analytical biology and its opposite.

This distinction is tnportant; the major contributions in modern biology,

however diverse they may be, have certainly been made by the analytical

treatment of biological problems. It is difficult to define non-analytical

biology. In Medawar’s words, its field “is hardly yet coherent enough to

have earned itself a special name, but the distinction is partly co-extensive

with the antithesis between vitalism and mechanism, and yet again with the

antithesis between Lamarckism and selection theory.” Indeed, Medawar

considers that, “the threefold belief in vitalism, holism and the inheritance

of acquired characters, combined with an active detestation of mathematical

analysis is a syndrome which has now acquired an almost clinica] dignity.”

This, I think, is the best way to regard non-analytical biology.

In the history of biology in any country we see first the growth of

descriptive biology and later, its merging with experimental biology which,

in its broader aspects, becomes analytical biology. This is the typical and

proper growth of biological science and we see something of this sort of

development in the papers of the Proceedings and Transactions of the Royal

Society of South Australia. The descriptive phase gives us the anatomy and

classification of the plants and animals of this State. Later, with this know-

ledge as background, the examination of the relationships of the organisms

with one another and the environment began and publications in ecology

appeared. At this stage, interest in physiological and genetical investigations

also developed.

As our knowledge of biology passes through these phases it loses more

and more of its local character and becomes, part of general biological science

without particular geographical significance.

The history of biological science in South Australia was fully discussed

by several speakers on the occasion of the centenary of South Australia in

1936. In particular, the late Professor Harvey Johnston looked back over

our publications in zoology. Professor J. G. Wood chose rather to look

forward and ended his address with a discussion on the role of plant

physiology. I will not attempt to review the matters so ably discussed on

that occasion. Rather I would like to discuss what I think would be the

most fruitful way in which biological sciences should develop here in the

future.

* Professor W. P. Rogers, Ph.D., University of Adelaide.

I suggest that problems should be investigated not only for their local

interest, but largely with the view that such investigations can make valuable

contributions to biological science in general. Two examples from investi-

gations in animal biology already carried out here will show what I mean.

In a C.S.I.R.O. laboratory, under the leadership of Mr. H. Marston,

what was first a problem in the biology of ruminants of particular signifi-

cance in South Australia has developed into a study of importance the world

over. Thus a problem arising from the deficiency of cobalt in certain pastures

of South Australia has developed into a problem in the metabolism of

vitamin B,,.

In the University, Dr. W. R. Adey has been studying the anatomy and

physiology of the marsupial brain. The marsupial is an animal which is

almost exclusively Australian and thus this work had initially a particular

local flavour. But the results obtained have a very wide significance and

throw light on the cortical perception of deep-seated sensations in mammals

generally and thus are of importance in the general field of animal biology.

If this sort of pattern of development of biological science is to be fol-

lowed in South Australia, what are the chief investigations which have local

significance and yet would have an important bearing on biological science

in general? In animal biology, I think that these problems are fairly obvious.

The first deals with animal ecology. We have in South Australia

ecological problems which are almost unique and the solving of these prob-

lems will have important repercussions in the general field of ecology, The

climate and terrain, the animals and plants in many parts of South Australia

are such that investigations can lead to clear cut results which could not

be obtained in the more complex ecological conditions which prevail in many

other countries. In fact, 1 believe that the investigation of these problems

js something of an obligation; the problems are ours and we have a particular

responsibility to examine them.

The second field of investigation that I think we should take pains to

encourage is that of biology of the marsupials and monotremes. Here we

have a host of problems which are peculiarly Australian but the solving of

them would be of great importance in gaining a fuller understanding of the

higher mammals. The early biologists in South Australia have recognised

these problems and much fine work on the anatomy and natural history of

the marsupials has already been published. But the study of the physiology

of these animals has hardly been attempted, Admittedly the problems are

difficult but that only serves to make our responsibility the greater.

You may perhaps wonder why I should, at this centenary meeting of

the Royal Society of South Australia, give so much emphasis on the matter

of future development of biological science in this State. It is because I

feel very strongly that the Society should take a more active part in encour-

aging the development of biological research. In the past the Society has

played an important but somewhat passive role; it has provided a meeting

place where people could discuss their work and has provided a journal in

which results could be published. It has initiated many schemes which have

aided the development of science in South Australia. In this way it has

given outstanding service in assisting science, particularly in the early years

of South Australia, but in the future, particularly in relation to academic

biological research, I believe that it has an even more important and active

part to play.

To give you the premises on which I base this suggestion I must

briefly review the changes which have occurred in biological science generally

since the activities of the Society were reviewed in 1936. Since that time

two inter-related factors have had considerable effects on the development

of biology. These factors were the growth, or rather the practice of certain

extreme political philosophies and the war of 1939-1945. Both these factors

have led to an increased pressure on biology, both from the “philosophical”

and technicological points of view.

It has become clear that the distortion of biological science to serve

particular brands of political philosophy can have most unfortunate effects,

and, indeed, can lead to the undermining of fundamental importance of fac-

tual evidence on which science is built. It is of course unlikely that circum-

stances in Australia will change and that science here will have to suffer the

indignities that it has in some countries. Nevertheless, bodies such as the

Royal Society of South Australia, which are devoted entirely to the further-

ance of scholarship and research now have an increased responsibility in

preserving the independence of scientific thought.

Now let me consider the effect of the war on the technicological devel-

opment of biological science. During the war the scope of applied biology

was suddenly expanded into a wide variety of previously unconsidetred fields.

Biologists took part in the development of operational research; air, tank,

and submarine crew physiology became important fields of investigation ;

entomologists worked with the troops in many forward areas, Parasitolo-

gists, particularly from America, moved from their laboratories and applied

their knowledge to practical matters in the field. Biologists became involved

in the researches of biological and chemical warfare. There was a wide

recognition of the part biology can play in practical matters and this has led

to an increased pressure on the application of biology for economic purposes.

In those fields of applied biology such as agriculture and medicine which

have been so important in the development of mankind, the importance of

fundamental research has been recognised and efforts have been made to

maintain a basis of fundamental knowledge on which application depends.

But I fear that the application of biological science to economic problems

generally may soon, if it has not already, outstrip our fund of basal informa-

tion, and become even more empirical than it has been in recent years. If we

are to keep a proper balance between applied and academic biological

research, the increased support for applied biology should be paralleled by an

increased support for academic investigations.

I have in this discussion somewhat exaggerated the division between

applied and fundamental biology. As far as the more able biologists are

concerned, this distinction does not really exist. The biologist studying the

economic problem usually has to return continually to the fundamental

aspects if he is to solve his economic problem. But in many parts of the

world those on whose support biologists are dependent for the wherewithal

to carry out their work frequently make an undue and false distinction

between what is “useful” biological research and what is not.

It is here again that I think events have thrust increased responsibilities

on learned societies as supporters of academic research. The success of the

Royal Society of South Australia during the next century of its history may

well depend upon the vigour with which it upholds the independence of

scientific thought and the value of scholarship in scientific research,

vii

AGRICULTURAL SCIENCES

J. A. Prescott *

In the early years of any organization such as a learned society a great

deal of interest is usually taken in the “Arts” as well as the “Sciences,” and

by the arts we understand all those branches of human activity which demand

some special personal skill whether this be handling the plough, painting a

picture or producing a fire by rubbing two sticks together. It is appropriate

therefore that the early records of the Adelaide Philosophical Society should

have included a number of papers on agriculture which dealt with such mat-

ters, on the traditional level of the art, as the fertility of soils, the drying of

fruits, the preservation of meat, viticulture and the fermentation of grape

juice, all of which subjects had already acquired a skill based on long tradition

and experience in overseas countries. The science of agriculture was to come

later, first in its efforts to explain traditional practice and later, by research,

to enlarge the basis of knowledge on which the art itself could be developed.

In a young country such as Australia, traditional experience sometimes

breaks down or is of no avail and research becomes in fact, as no doubt it has

always been, an art itseli—that of manufacturing experience. C. T, Madigan

in his presidential address in 1936 to celebrate the Centenary of the State

recorded that the word “Arts” was quietly dropped out of the interests of

the Society when the rules were revised in 1902.

In dealing with the development of agricultural science in South Aus-

tralia the Society contributed notably through the awareness of one of its

Presidents, E. H. Rennie. In two presidential addresses, those of 1889 and

1901, Rennie concerned himself with the application of his own science of

chemistry to the agricultural needs of the Colony and State, The land now

occupied hy Roseworthy College had been purchased and established as an

experimental farm in 1881 and the College itself opened in 1884 under J. D.

Custance. It was under W. Lowrie’s direction from 1887 until 1901, and

Rennie was in close touch with Lowrie during this period and subsequently,

It was Rennie who took me to see Lowrie on his farm at Echunga when I

reached Adelaide in 1924.

In his address of 1889, Rennie concerned himself with the reputed decline

in wheat yields in relation to soil exhaustion. He referred to the need for

conserving all materials for manurial purposes, such as wood ash, bones and

farmyard manure and deplored the export of superphosphate and sulphate of

ammonia from the colony which was then actually taking place. He realised,

moreover, that the conservation of all possible materials of manurial value

would still be inadequate. “Is it not desirable,” he said, “that experiments

should be undertaken with a view to discovering what are the best methods

of farming in this colony under varying conditions?” He advocated among

other non-agricultural things the production of salt by solar evaporation.

In 1901, when Rennie gave his second address, the agriculture of the

newly formed State was passing through a critical period. Since his pres-

idential address eleven years before, the average yield of wheat in the Colony

had been rather less than five bushels per acre. He claimed there was a

“crying need for accurate scientific investigation, such investigation being

necessary, not merely to elucidate scientific theories but to improve our

material condition.” He was deeply impressed by the very recent European

work on nitrification and nitrogen fixation and recognised the importance of

* Professor J. A. Prescott, C.B.E., D.Sc, A.LC., F.R.S., Director, Waite Agri-

cultural Research Institute, Adelaide.

vili

using peas as a crop for raising the nitrogen level of the soil. He recalled

that Lowrie was puzzled by the small responses of wheat to nitrogenous

fertilisers and that he had attributed this to something that took place in the

process of barefallowing. To Lowrie, the most likely process appeared to be

the fixation of nitrogen by bacteria in symbiosis with algae. Later scien-

tific work established, however, that the nitrification of the reserves of nit-

rogen already in the soil adequately accounted for this.

Scientific investigations on behalf of agriculture of the kind envisaged by

Renhie had to wait, however, nearly 25 years, with the foundation of the

Waite Institute by the University in 1924, Even the need for such a Federal

body as the Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organization

was foreseen by Rennie for he referred to the advocacy by Sir John Quick

in the first Federal Parliament for an organisation similar to that of the

United States Department of Agriculture. Referring to the current develop-

ments in America and in New South Wales, Rennie said, “We must have

similar work done here.”

I have no doubt whatever that he had a great influence with the Council

of the University in determining its policy when the splendid gift of Peter

Waite became available for the benefit of agriculture in South Australia.

Some practical problems needing urgent attention according to Rennie

were the losses, failures and distresses in the irrigation settlement at Ren-

mark, the depredations of insect pests, the pathology of plant diseases, dis-

eases of wines and rural engineering, Apart from rural engineering, the need

for which is still being discussed, the others have all been taken up at the

Waite Institute either as activities of the University or of the Commonwealth

Research Organization. The soil survey of Australia began in fact at

Renmark.

In the earlier years there were occasional papers, to the Society on some

of these problems. Diseases of wheat had been discussed by the Philosoph-

ical Society. In 1879, J. G. O. Tepper presented a paper on wheat rust and

in 1880 on potato moth. In 1884 F. S. Crawford dealt with the disease of

apricots. Samuel Dixon (1884-1892) took a special interest in native shrubs

as fodder plants and in the effects of settlement and pastoral occupation on

these plants, an interest later to be reflected in the work of T. G. B. Osborn

and J. G. Wood at the Koonamore Vegetation Reserve and published by the

Society in 1925,

The first meeting of the Society which I had the privilege of attending

was that of October 1924 and I recall the important paper then presented

by T. Harvey Johnston on the relation of climate to the spread of Prickly

Pear in Australia. This proved to be the first of a series of papers in applied

climatology to be presented to the Society during the next twenty five years

or so dealing with climate in relation to insect pests, to agricultural pos-

sibilities and to plant introduction. Most, if not all, of this work has been

contributed by officers of the Waite Institute, including J. Davidson, H. C.

Trumble and J. A. Prescott and has had as its background the search for

better criteria of the efficiency of the rainfall than could be provided by the

crude rainfall figures themselves. This work has emphasized the importance

of the evaporative power of the air in modifying the value of the rainfall and

there has been a constant conscious search for criteria which would have the

widest possible application. An interesting development of this work has

been the study of evaporation by C. W. Bonython (1950) arising out of the

need to measure the efficiency of the production of salt by solar evaporation

which may be recalled was mentioned by Rennie in 1889.

This work in climatology also illustrates one of the functions of a society

such as ours. Climatology is the meeting ground of meteorology and geog-

raphy. Any new principles involved in its study must be tested out against

a geographical background and South Australian agriculture and biology

have provided such a background, with Australia as a whole as an extension

of South Australian experience. The Transactions of the Society provide the

ideal medium of publication for such work and it is only at a later stage when

the concepts have matured and been tested in time and can be applied with a

wider geographical framework that publication overseas becomes appropriate.

The most characteristic contribution of the South Australian school of

climatology as recorded in our Transactions has been the establishment of

criteria whereby the length of the season favourable to agricultural and pas-

toral production can be determined as well as that favourable to certain

aspects of insect activity. New methods of characterising temperatures in

terms of the mathematical analysis of the wave form of the annual curve of

mean monthly temperatures have enabled temperature regimes to be more

conveniently defined and this method has been proved particularly useful in

seeking parallel climatic regimes in other parts of the world, specially in

relation to the introduction of new plants to Australia and in relation to the

understanding of the success or failure of species already introduced. The .

success for example of the Monterey pine (Pinus radiata) in South Australia

is related, as was shown by J. A. Prescott and C. EF. Lane-Poole (1947), to the

close parallels in many respects of the climatic regimes of the coast of Cali-

fornia and of south eastern Australia.

Climate is, however, but one aspect of the South Australian environment

and it is natural that the two other ecological components, namely vege-

tation and soils, important in biology, as in agriculture, should have received

attention.

. The basal information on which all vegetation studies must be based is

the systematic account of all the plant species to be encountered in South

Australia—those that are native and those that have been introduced. The

outstanding contribution is, of course, that of J. M. Black whose 45th

addition to the Flora of South Australia appeared in the volume for 1950,

In another field, that of enumeration of species and in relation to their

geography, J. B. Cleland has made important contributions. The first con-

tribution on ecology proper—that is the relationship of plants to their sur-

roundings—came in 1922 when T. G. B. Osborn published two papets in our

‘Transactions—one relating to the Franklin Islands and the second in collab-

oration with R. S. Adamson, a visitor from South Africa, dealing with Ooldea

on the Transcontinental railway. In 1924 there followed the account by these

same two authors of the ecology of the Mount Lofty Ranges and there was

then established by Osborn’s student and successor J. G. Wood and by

Wood’s own students a series of contributions on the ecology of South

Australia which form the basis of the understanding of the vegetation

associations of the State and have further presented opportunities for testing

out ecological concepts developed overseas in an Australian environment.

The plant associations of many parts of South Australia are now reason-

ably well established and one need mention only the work in more recent

years of R. L. Crocker (1944, 1946) R. W. Jessup (1946, 1948, 1951) R. L.

Specht (1948, 1951) and C. D. Boomsma (1946, 1948) to realise how much of

the State has been covered. To one, like myself, who has watched this

development and made frequent use of the information so obtained there is

a continuous tradition starting with Goyder and his line of rainfall presented

in a Parliamentary paper (1866), through the work of our Land Surveyors

and land Valuers to this modern assessment of the resources of the State.

It is fortunate that we have in Australia such large areas of unspoiled

native vegetation, so closely dependent on soil and climate. The surveyors

of this State, as of the other States, have been able to use the description of

our native vegetation as an aid to land classification and this has been

extended to the modern work in soil surveys. These soil surveys and other

work of a more general character on the soils of South Australia have estab-

lished the existence of a range of fertility levels in our native soils which can

most frequently be defined in terms of phosphate content in the soil. Wood

(1939) was able to demonstrate how closely the vegetation associations then

recognised in the State, could be related to this level of soil fertility, to the

degree of soil acidity and to the rainfall.

In the agricultural development of the State, it is almost always necessary

to replace the native vegetation, particularly where this is heath or scrub,

by new associations of pasture plants needing a very much higher level of

soil fertility. The ecological principles established in the study of our native

vegetation can still be applied by the agronomist to the introduced pastures

and to the crops with their associated weeds. There are still however—and

we tend to overlook this—large areas of native grassland and shrub steppe

where the most important problem at the moment is the management of these

areas so as to maintain for all time what is in itself a yaluable asset to the

State. The work of the University Schools (Botany and Waite Institute)

at Koonamore and Yudnapinna should play an important part in, the devel-

opment of scientific principles of pastoral management and this could be

extended to the nearer pastoral country of our mid-north.

The native and introduced plants provide food for a wide fauna, and the

ecology of this fauna, particularly of the insects, has afforded an opportunity

for a series of studies on insect ecology of which the most typical are perhaps

those relating to the two grasshoppers with which we have been plagued

from time to time. The work of J. Davidson (1936) and H. G, Andrewartha

(1940, 1944) are outstanding examples of this kind of work,

The edaphic element in the environment has been the subject of a series

of papers on soils, starting with the paper by Prescott (1927) on the reaction

of our South Australian soils in which the close dependence of soil acidity

on rainfall was first demonstrated for the State and paved the way for further

studies of soils in relation to the climate in which they were encountered.

This led further to the recognition that some soils, those derived from laterite,

and common in the State, owed many of their properties to conditions in the

Pliocene or Miocene and our transactions include a few papers dealing with

laterite. The two major soil groups, the Mallee and the Red Brown Earths

were described in 1932 and 1938 and many of you may recall the extraordin-

ary interest displayed by our members in a paper by C. S. Piper (1932) on

the soils used in the preparation of turf wickets. Formal soil surveys are

not normally suitable for discussion in our Transactions but they afford

many opportunities for pedological discussion amongst which we may include

the mathematical presentation of C. G. Stephens (1947) on soil forming

factors.

Agriculture, as crop and pasture husbandry and even as animal hus-

bandry is in one sense applied ecology and there will always be a scope for

the Society in dealing with the South Australian environment. In the second

sense of applied physiology the opportunity is experimental rather than des-

criptive and for this reason is rarely presented to or discussed in our meetings

—even some aspects of climatology are now reaching the experimental] stage.

in which the water needs of plants are being determined directly by experi-

ment rather than deduced from observations on natural phenomena.

There is still scope however for much descriptive work; our arid regions

in particular, afford abundant scope for studies of soils and climate in relation

to geo-morphology. In soil chemistry there is in sight the possibility of much

work in defining the geochemical provinces of the State, particularly as the

geology and particularly the petrology of the State is so much better known

than was the case 25 years ago. Such studies will give a sounder chemical

background to the understanding of the nature of our problems in soil fertility

particularly with respect to phosphate, to potassium and to the micro

elements.

On the more purely ecological side I should like to see a greater devel-

opment of interest in the physical properties of the soil profile, particularly

the capacity for retaining useful water.

These two groups of studies linking geology through the soil with the

plant associations could be conveniently defined as edaphics. It is in this

direction, I believe, that descriptive science will have most to offer to

agriculture in the next twenty five years or so.

THE ROLE OF GEOLOGY

IN THE ACTIVITIES OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By D. Mawson *

What was later to be known as the Royal Society of South Australia

was initiated on the 10th January, 1853, under the title of The Adelaide Phil-

osophical Society. At that time the membership was small but comprised

the State Governor and most of the leading citizens of the period. Their

deliberations were stated to comprise discussion of “all subjects concerned

with science, literature or art.”

Observations of a geological nature were in a minority in those days,

During the 23 years period prior to the change of status in 1876, when it

became known as the Royal Society of South Australia, geological discussions

amounted to only about 10 per cent of the transactions.

The first geological paper was introduced in the gold rush period, at the

October meeting of 1854, That was: “The Geology of Bendigo Gold Field

with speculations on the origin of the Gold” contributed by W. H. Light, who

had been engaged in gold mining at Bendigo, Referring to the auriferous

quartz reefs he advocated that these have a plutonic origin and “were prob-

ably injected in a liquid state from great depths below into veins and crevices

in the stratified rocks.” An explanation which, you will agree, is correct only

in part unless we interpret his “liquid state” as an aqueous solution,

The most notable contributions of that time so far as geology is con-

cerned were several papers by the Rev. Tennison Woods, who was a really

able geologist of that period. He dealt with fossils in the Marine Tertiary

Limestones of the South East of the State. Also there was delivered by the

same author a general paper on the Geology of that area.

The Chief Justice, Hanson, also contributed a lengthy observation on

the geology of the South East, in part intended to correct what he regarded

as weaknesses in Tennison Woods’ arguments. However the latter showed

the amateur geologist Hanson to be in error,

By the year 1872 the Adelaide Philosophical Society had reached a very

low ebb, in fact meetings were suspended for a time. There then arrived in

Adelaide, in the person of Professor Ralph Tate, a dynamic character who lost

no time in reorganising the Society. From thence onward, as the Royal

Society of South Australia it has flourished: a very active organisation and

valuable recording medium for discoveries and developments of scientific

interest within the State.

This advance in the status of the Society coincided with the establishment

of the University of Adelaide which resulted in an accession to the community

of men of scientific and literary standing. That geology should figure prom-

inently thereafter was to be expected, with Professor Tate in the role of prime

mover and President for some years. However, Tate was absorbed not only

in Geological studies but as Professor of Natural Philosophy was required to

cover Botany as well as Geology, With these two interests at heart he soon

reconnoitred large areas of the State and set the foundations for the Geology

of South Australia.

To the time of Tate’s arrival the known fossiliferous strata were

restricted to the Cainozoic Era, and in that division Tennison Woods had

already pioneered the ground in the South Eastern division. Tate rapidly

advanced knowledge of the nature and fossil contents of the marine Tertiary

strata of South Australia, well illustrated in his series of papers published in

the Royal Society’s volumes.

* Professor Sir Douglas Mawson, O.B.E., D.Sc, B.E., F.R.S., University of

Adelaide.

xiii

Tn 1875 trilobites and coral-like fossils from near Maitland on Yorke Penin-

sula were submitted for identification. The latter were eventually identified as

archaeocyathids, The rock formation in which they were obtained was in

the first instance, referred to the Silurian Period, but was later determined as

Cambrian. That discovery was however an isolated occurrence. It was not

until long afterwards that Cambrian fossils were located, widely distributed

in many parts of South Australia.

For years Tate kept a sharp lookout for fossils in the older rocks of the

Mount Lofty Ranges. He was so far unsuccessful that in 1896 he was so cer-

tain that those formations would not be found to yield fossils that he wagered

he would “eat my hat” if Professor T. W. E. David, then visiting Adelaide,

should succeed in discovering any. A few days later David when in company

with the Reverend Walter Howchin, in a field trip south of Adelaide, found

fossil archaeocyathids in the limestones of Sellick’s Hill.

About the time of Tate’s arrival in South Australia, Mesozoic fossils were

found in the far north and it became apparent that the Great Artesian Basin

extended from New South Wales and Queensland far into North Eastern

South Australia.

Thus it was apparent that Tate and the revitalised Royal Society were

responsible for a marked advance in the study of Geology in this State. But

the Society’s influence did not stop there, for in 1877 they pressed the Govern-

ment to appoint a Government Geologist. It was realised that a territory the

size of South Australia, then the largest section of all Australia, for it

included under its jurisdiction Central Australia and the Northern Territory,

must embrace important ore deposits and geological problems of great

national interest such as underground water supplies. The outcome of this

advice to the Government was the appointment of H.Y.L. Brown as the first

Government Geologist and the initiation of the Department of Mines and

Geological Survey; the latter, in these days of our present President, has

blossomed forth on a grand scale.

Thus it was that Tate, during his 25 years of active association with the

Royal Society greatly advanced knowledge of the geology of South Australia.

During the last decade of that period these advances were stimulated by

another active and enthusiastic geologist who for some 40 years did yeoman

service for the Royal Society as its able honorary editor. This was the Rev.

Walter Howchin who had arrived in ill health in South Australia in 1882.

The salubrious climate soon restored his health and he gradually took an

increasing interest in local geological phenomena until in later years, after

appointment as lecturer in Geology and Palaeontology at the University of

Adelaide, he published “The Geology of South Australia.”

Howchin dedicated himself first and foremost to the self-imposed hon-

orary task of editing the Society’s volumes.

In his official position with the Society and with increasing geological

status, Howchin did much to maintain the geological tradition established by

Tate in matters relating to the Society.

Perusing the records I find that during the past 100 years about 364

papers dealing with definitely geological matters have been read before the

Society. Since Tate’s time, that is in the present series of volumes, the

strictly geological contributions have averaged 22% of the papers presented.

During the past 30 years, scientific activities in South Australia have been

greatly increased both by new developments and by expansion of existing

bodies. The scientific life of our community has become more specialised.

The Society no longer listens to dissertations on sewage. problems, reform-

atories and education. Other bodies specialising in more limited spheres of

xiv

enquiry have been established. The chemists, the physicists, the engineers

and the medical fraternity now all have their own organisations. However,

the parent body still remains in full vitality and should always constitute a

forum for students of general and fundamental science though less so for

those involved in the specialisations of applied science.

Our Society should not only provide a medium for the publication of the

results of local scientific research, but would do well to foster a wider field

of activity. It could well be the local disseminator of the latest developments

in the world of science and guardian of the interests of Science in South

Australia. It was in these latter roles that the Adelaide Philosophical Society

functioned one hundred years ago.

Many far-sighted and beneficial developments in South Australia owed their

origin to the Society’s influence in matters of national importance. Thus

through the representations of our Society the following developments were

effected: the establishment of the State Geological Survey; the establishment

of the South Australian Museum and appointment of the Director; the estab-

lishment of the National Park and Flinders Chase; the gazetting of several

fauna and flora reserves. In fact the Royal Society, pressing for the Govern-

ment to undertake beneficial works, prompted most of the major develop-

ments in the State: amongst these may be mentioned the introduction of

universal Public Instruction and the Sewerage System for Adelaide.

Beginning somewhat more than 50 years ago, fostered by the Royal

Society, there was a period of pressure for soil and agricultural research. This

undoubtedly had an influence on the establishment of the Waite Agricultural

Research Institute.

AUSTRALIAN NEREIDAE INCLUDING DESCRIPTIONS OF THREE NEW

SPECIES AND ONE GENUS, TOGETHER WITH SUMMARIES OF

PREVIOUS RECORDS AND KEYS TO SPECIES

BY OLGA HARTMAN (COMMUNICATED BY S. J. EDMONDS)

Summary

The Australian (and New Zealand) Nereidae are recorded with 47 species in 13 genera. One genus,

Anstralonereis is new; two species, Ceratocephala edmondsi and Micronereis halei, and one

subspecies, Platynereis dumerilii antipoda are newly described. There are many new records of

distribution, particularly for the species occurring in the Flindersian and Peronian provinces. The

recorded data of all the species are summarised in a series of charts.

AUSTRALIAN NEREIDAE

Including descriptions of three new species and one genus,

together with summaries of previous récofds and keys to species.

By Guica HartMaAn *

Communicated by S. J. Edmonds

[Read & May 1953]

SUMMARY

The Australian (and New Zealawi) Nereidae are recorded with 47 species in 13 genera.

One genus, Ansiralonereis is ews two species, Ceratocephala edmonds and Micronerets halvi,

and one subspecies, Platyaereis diaverili antipoda ate newly described. There are many new

records, of distribution, particularly for the species occtirring in the Flindersian and Peronian

provinces. The recorded data of all the species are summarised in a series of charts.

INTRODUCTION

The polychaetous annelids of the family Nereidae are among the more con-

spicuous, well represented groups of marine invertebrates in the Commonweaith

of Australia. and the Dominion of New Zealand, As in other known geographic

areas, they are largely littoral. Curiously, however, the present study indicates

that the nereids, at least for the southern half of Australia, are unusually diversi-

hed and modified, probably more so than in any other geographic area of comi-

parable size. Thus, among the 47 species in 13 genera, there are some with very

primitive characters, such as presence of setae in the first segment; others, such

as Australonereis, have functional coelomoducts and papillaled ventrum. These

facts make it particularly desirable to recognize their positions or affinities with

the nerejds of other parts. of the world.

In spite of the fairly large number (47) recorded here, it can haedly be

assutned that the number of species is even nearly complete. Much of the coast-

line remains almost unknown with respect to its polychaetous fauna. The records

ta date are largely those made by incidental collecting. There have been no

extensive surveys of coastal arcas such as was done for the echinoderms (Clark,

1946),

Recent. studies by Knox (1951) on the nereids of New Zealand indicate that

there are conspicuous differences in the fauna of the Dominion and the Com-

monvwealth, at least for its southern halt, Coimparison has been difficult in many

cases for the literature is scattered and sometimes obsctire in essential details.

Type collections, if existing, are often deposited in museums outside of Australia.

Au attempt is here made to correlate and assemble these scattered data.

Charts I to IV summarize the records of the 47 species, including: acceptable

naine, date and source of original publication, place of origin, diagnostic accounts,

synonyms, distributional data and new records, ecologic niche. unique charac-

teristics, method of reproduction in so far as known, and the formulae of the

proboscidial processes,

The materials on which these studies are hased were collected mainly from

littoral zones of South Australia, Victoria and New South Wales, thus are largely

south-eastern Australia, These areas fall within the Peronian and Flindersian

provinces of Iledley. Kased on studies of the echinoderm fauna, H. L, Clark

(1946) finds that these two provinces have the most numerous endemic species

(82% of the Peronian and 89% of the Flindersian echinoderms are endemic in

Australiz), If the annelids are equally unique, as a comparison of the charts

indicates, one may expect a widely diversified polychaetous fauna.

* Allan Hancack Foundation of the University of Southern California.

Contribunon No. 148,

Trans Ruy Sac. S. Aust., 77, July, 1954

I am indebted to the following people and institutions for the collections on

which the present study is based: Mr. Herbert M. Hale and associates of the

South Australian Museum, Mr. S. J. Edmonds of the University of Adelaide,

and Miss Barbara Dew of Cronulla, New South Wales. The Administration of

the Allan Hancock Foundation of the University of Southern Californa pro-

vided material aid and support to conduct these studies, Illustrations are by

Anker Petersen of the Allan Hancock Foundation.

Types and complete series of species are deposited in the institutions from

which the collections originate. Duplicate series are in the Allan Hancock

Foundation.

‘adAq se ‘preyouelg sdasypsponb

sysn2tT ‘saiseds ates aij 410; pasodoid aiam saureu Daas log “[g6[ ‘Woqrenag DyasswIC-T IJ9AO Ayaowd sey ‘“G[H] “Wyptaquey S724aUDIDAT »

6Z8L ‘29[]az

-usrey, opodsxo (nyyp) stad

(soyaq aas) (i) gle ‘ouasny

pyuopotyo “lBA SisuajanGsay St94a NT

9161

‘uieyUsg vyDIUuapoaIDUsAD 5134a,NT

yauainy sisuatungin syasany

$I3}O PUL GPRT

pseyoueyq sdarxynsponb sysv2\T

aus

syasmban “S$ se aures at Apqissog

(gee ‘oruOW, apy) spss

-apsyyhsa “3 sapnysult A[qeuonsand

OFST ‘qnIH

apjso? * SB ames at Alqissog

998

‘Z1IAqUIS] DIM[NIDJway S1d49M0jDAID

SE6T “OLUOpT s4a/Ya

Swaauojay pue “g[6gl ‘“s98uS

-Bny sssapya (sayouuoay) stasany

say

‘p19 “S ‘geet ‘osu0p

QO1-P9T ‘dd ‘E16, ‘euesNYy

‘ore “d “p26 ‘Jeuadny

MOTI

eT “G ‘olor “wequag

ek ‘d ‘pz6] ‘s0uadny

'¢CT-6pl “dd ‘gT61 ‘seuasny

(yeurdiyo aag)

‘s3y

‘pre-zre ‘dd ‘606r ‘weyuog

MOP

‘s3y

‘epT-ger “dd ‘qolel ‘wequag

‘s3y

Olr-Z0r “dd ‘TET ‘feaneg

(jeulsiJo 33g)

QOT-99T ‘dd ‘eT6y, “iauasny

s2y

ZBI-O8t ‘dd “p26t 4810

'TZI-g91 “dd ‘g[6T ‘zanedny

MOPy

MO}q pue

‘ezo-g19 dd ‘ge, ‘oun0yy

uedef urayjynag

Spurs] udpendiayy

eyeisny ys

puejeaz Man

'M'S'N ‘uosxoef{ Id

"TN 'BiNsuNBg syreg

ato

elenisny yynos

Byperysny ynog

pue_purjeaz Man

Tessesepeyy

“Wea

Baie JaARY UBS

spugys] euddyryg

erg

Pyensny YyNoG

‘vale JAR UEMS

‘say

Tzt-0zt ‘Sd ‘6291

“$2

d2z-Sez ‘dd "CRT

Of-62 “dd ‘C061

LZ1 ‘8 ‘9981

‘SRY

‘lee-Sze “dd ‘1961

‘say

‘cz ¢ ‘6r8l

urasay]

f6e-zoe "dd ‘egTé]

's3g

90s-Sos “dd ‘QTér.

PeI-1ZE “dd ‘ETT

04-69 “4d 'gz81

OLT ‘4 “oORT

waso}]

's2y

‘spt-ert ‘Sd ‘ETT

(aapjazuaieyy) ppodtxo sayjunaNy

(ysoyUyIPL) siruayanOsay sai{sand AT

(saa[qq) vyynNGor149 Ieau “saypune

(Sane) DYIDUGOINLI SIujuva Ny

Broquiy sjova sayjuvay

XOUY SHMIUDNISID UOIN

(prey

-ue[g)} saayoupond 4s1a4auviKD N

‘ds ue ‘19/04 Stadauosarpy

WMeyusg Sypwuojsrsad stasauopay

ppAneq sisuaansyXsa sradauoynsay

sousany syasinban sia4auojnsa yD

aqniyy sisuaiidn, $3942401D42)

Biaqury signs s1asauojoaa’)

“ds ‘U ‘ispuourpa vjoygar0;049.)

(san9dny) ss4azya Siezauo;Dagsnp

ee ae Se

swAYOUdS

yunooae st}souseiq

ulgqO JO seq

woryEorqnd ja

aosnos pue ajyeq

Saizadg jo aweyy

III

TI LYvyHo

SO6L ‘SI3NY oIumvIunA stasa Ny

£16] ‘euasny saproj

“HOpOJIINL =DIUMOpOLaZay SiasaUrsaT

LOST ‘epseuryag eying sngapiaca Ny

9981 ‘“B1aqury apip

-UDIJOY-IDAOKu stadaursagd |! TORT

“EpavUlyIG opuopotjquip spdapiasa Ar

TS6t

‘HOY stsuatiosag nuonjDI s194aN

Tso

‘Oy suosdiuoys (saypivany) siada nz

‘sBy “ast “d

S16l ‘euadny siswauossisay sia4a 7

£26 ‘Hauasny imasuazvous siasayy

TZ6T ‘PANey Nesapnny sada ny

COST “APTITAN Dapsofiun stada Ay

(jeurii20 aag)

(jeurs110 3a)

‘say

‘lzz-0zz “dd ‘[g6, = ‘xouy

‘s3y

‘ozé-612 “dd ‘yogT = ‘xouwy

“s3y

‘6le-s1z ‘dd ‘Teg, ‘xouy

(Mojaq pue peusr1o 3ag)

"Soy

‘ee lee “Sd ‘[S6T ‘xousy

(Inyiqnop ‘[eUIs110 ag)

(InFaqnop + eursi10 aag)

(MoJaq pues peurs110 2ag)

(Mojaq pure yemsizo 99g)

‘s3y

‘cOI-e01 “9 ‘Ts6t ‘voy

Z1¢ 4 ‘p26 ‘reuasiny

‘s3y ‘oct “d ‘pie, ‘rouasny

(Mojeq pue jReUduoO 3ag)

‘63g

‘O¢-Te “de “Ezot ‘touasny

‘sy ‘[1-g ‘dd ‘Tz6] ‘aaneg

(JEUISIIO 3ag)

([eulSt10 aag)

£1 ‘d ‘TE6] ‘omuayy

puryeaz MAN

eelysny

wisysey PUR AA'S'N

(dxq panne jy)

purfs] sqnegq 3S

aim

WM ‘Aueqry

‘WSN ‘Wosyouf 4g

puryeazy MaN

"M’S'N ‘wosysef 7g

"VIM. “PS uungyD05

‘WM ‘Woiag qwuog

ETelsy Us2}69A\

‘ASN ‘nosyoel 4g

"VM ‘Aegr syseys

uoysa7)

eyedsny

WajseM-yHOS YO

WM ‘heq syzeys

woyAa’)

“e3y

‘Zs€-6re “dd ‘p61

‘say

‘OZE-81E ‘dd ‘ozET

‘s3y

ERI-O8T “dd ‘vezey

£L1-OZ1 “dd ‘99g

O9t-6sT “dd ‘zcgr

"s3y

‘@8I-6Z1 “dd “STér

"$8Y

901 ‘d ‘TORT

SeS-Frs “dd ‘SORT

69 “& ‘oog1

‘sy

‘OST-€ST “dd ‘eT6y

‘say

‘ZOI-10L “dd ‘167

‘sBy

‘cor-eoT “d ‘TS61

691 ‘ ‘9981

“say

‘OSI-9ST ‘dd ‘eter

‘ss

‘LIL “ “S061

‘s8y

ZU o “6f61

‘ssy

érI-Stl “dd ‘eT 6t

‘soy

L£e-1£2 “Ad ‘SO6T

JUAN Y sisuamiund siasautsa J

OIUO]y PADGADG SIILIULLI FT

LUENY Sapoumbuuys srazaurad 7

(AqNID) Shearaadg stasauisay

(aqnsy) anya siasauisag

AUWATHY PjpjuapotavaA siasaurta

pa : Aaa?

(eprewyss) Dywopodjquey stosaumag

SABRyIIJENC) VpsnGos “sada

Biaqury opyitiuny siasayy

Jaussny sistauangyI02 sada Ay

YOM swswawosag Sr9san

Poy mosguoy7 srasany

B1aqury imosyoo! ma1aNy

AMAsNY Siwusuoyuap s1asa Ny

;

(Adi) vtdnapof siasa Ay

OLUOPY HAUL StacaUnz

C'3qy stjosysnGun s1a43a 7 you)

(ruasny) syoayusniuo sayzunay

CIITA) vpdiIsv Lun saypuna x

surcuousg

yunozse Jysoudeicy

UPsIIO JO I] J

uoneoygnd yo

aoinos pue ae

sareds jo aureyy

‘AJuo autu jdisosnueus @ Aqeuinsasd st (¢Tz ‘dO ‘[¢6T) xoux Aq pays weyuag o2punjvazoau siasany (é)

‘JAYS Jayyer pue papviie are iI aepnoejua} ‘aieq are sMsoqoid ay} Jo TA PUE A

Seare Jey} Ul BAG popiOdeI SayzupaAt JO sateds Isyjo WoIy siayIp I ‘sees snosaspuids AJua savy erpodojou souis sayzuvany Jo sarads B aq 0}

saeodde 3] “puryeaz Many HO pueysy wreyyeyD worz peqnosap ueaq sey (CT-OT ‘say 'g “1d ‘Gz-pe “dd ‘cOHT) S1aWYA Sdartfns srasany ‘uONIppe UT

IS6L ‘HOM pyOyIIM sasaar

(Mojaq aas)

(Mo]aq 33s)

(Ma]pPqG 2a5)

Eprewips sippsgsnp siadauodaja yy

(JueeA) DINDIUDU Stadaue

-49q ‘ROBT ‘aQnax) ppbv) sadayy

decoy

‘Jaussny swswaysok Siasaitiaa

6t6l

OLUOF] IPY) uMmGwitvyI “J 10 4437/3y

Mesaulag se auivs ay} Ajqissog

‘sBy ‘corto “dd “TS61

‘HOM ‘ror “F ‘ZZol “Ane

281-481 “dd ‘egy ‘sauedny

(Mojq_39S )

[eurs10

pue ‘pti “a ‘zest ‘panez

ae. rial

“LET “Od Ogg] ‘oruopy ‘say

‘Z0T-90T “Ud ‘OgET ‘osuepy

(Aojaq 39g)

*$3y,

‘cee-sez “dd) [Set ‘xouyy

‘$3.

‘EI-st ‘dd ‘Teg, = ‘oru0yy

‘S23

‘SI-+T “dd ‘Te6T = ‘or0py

“soy

‘SI-91 “dd ‘Te6L ‘ormopy

ce-pe “dd ‘'¢eoT

‘panty ip, ‘d ‘1 ¢eET ‘osuopy

“sayy

‘ped ‘Goz6T “FoIesny

(1eutz10 29g)

BIE 'O kage, ‘osuOP,

vag pay

"ST Waar ‘}sou}}0Y

epee

‘puRIs] JaAnooure A,

spueys, aywed yynosg

ote)

‘ueladepy jo seas

BeNsny yg

purfeaZ Man

spurs, auiddyryg

spugjsy auiddaryg

spursy emddyiyg

PURIST ALQOOINY

AVE

Biyesrjsny

majseq Pue 'A'S'N

arty

‘s3y

‘261-161 “dd ‘1Q6T

Z81-r81 “4d 'ETSL

601 “& ‘¢9RT

“sy

‘ozz-61z “Sd ‘6T6L

£Zt “a ‘9981

‘ Walapy

‘s3y

Tor ‘¢ ‘T9RT

soy

‘6g-28 “dd “Y7RT

z3-1g ‘dd ‘g731

28-98 ‘dd 'g/8T

XX “¢ ‘g98T

“sBy

“PLI-LZT “Ad “6g8T

“‘$8y

‘oze-si¢ “44 '9Z6T

‘sBy

‘ogi-eel “dd ‘zz6t

ABARIN) NNWOUD s1a4auOpNIS

Jauainy vunysauzjos Stadauopnas<y

(pareg) oppmaiqnunaig sra4ausj0yy

Ureplequiey7) Duyposijog srasautpn) y

S1aquy sisuanypohou siasudzni

saiseds

Mau ‘ppodyun tyiuauinp siadautjo)d

(epremiysg) sypagsnn stazautzord

aqniny ouimGiwund stasauieay

aQMad) Mafjay Sie4aunde

agnay) vjyorsnf[qo siasauidg

(349[Yq) DIanDIUDA S1a4auLsag

(ISIOH]) vpo{Iundosbu syasaurgagT

O1UOW] suDWzDI Siasaursag

qeua

-Buy vembuupropnasd siesaursag

suaxAuousS

qunosse SIsouseIq

UPIIIO JO aeIq

uoyeoyqnd ja

aoinos pus aed

sarvads jo atey

{umouy 107)

(te6T ‘osu0py) syaa1 UK

(Be61 ‘orUOWY) “Y"A\ ‘UBANY WeAS ayy Jo YNOPY

(€16t ‘Jauedny) pues ur tsys01 pur syaar ug

(sprowpsy

[ 'S) Dipjoaypy ‘pyndias ay} jo samojoa uy

‘suL} SG OF [EPUzazBT

(1661 ‘OusT) peam pue 4901 ‘pons Suomy

_ (S6I

‘xouy) ‘tbs sad g¢y 0} dn aaquinur { aamsodxa

Sunol ¢ 0} dn yyiM sotsenjsa jo pnw ut sMormng

(€Z61 ‘Aanasny) sauoz jepy

~Fayt Ysny Jo saniuyes Furtier wr santoys Jepup)

(PH “Wo 'H) J924 Fo a8pa sano ‘pasodxa yy

COT6I ‘Weyuag) Suray

*997y JO ‘qeId YRusay YIM [ays podosyses uj

(6 “4 ‘Opel ‘epmyO) sisqap [e109

ur i (ggeT ‘oruoyy) syasinbap ~ JOF se ames

(E161

‘gouaany) SUON;pPuUOD duLseW ut puesjs ayy BuoTy

(q6E6T ‘OLUOWY) ‘SuAy Op OF

10s Buoje tsueozodsq puwe sasuods ‘said ug,

(1e6T ‘oruopy)

Syoor UO pie pus ut ‘yaaes jjays pue yoor uy

(spuoupy ‘f[ °S) Apues

aqny :syey yep Apues pue Appnur ut noumuos

(eq “q) saqm

pedeys--) ‘any Burddnovo ‘syey pr Apes uy

weajsny wiaysayy ‘Aeg syreys

(TE6T ‘omuoWy) Jeoy aaLeg yearr

(8€61 ‘omuoyy)

RyeIsNy jseaM-YINoS feu fueder

(F261 ‘auasny) snosejuy

-qng pue eueusey tpueyeay Man

(£161 ‘sauasny pur ‘[c6] ‘xouy)

BYesny wWoajsay, ‘pureazy MAN

(B6E61

‘OMUOW,) BluBsEy fpurjyaz won

purjeez man

(S161 ‘seauesny) wouzy ysamyinos

£(6061 ‘Weyuegq) puereay May

'(€z6l ‘“uasny) pues, pueppany

wag

HeYeIsNy YNOS pue purlyrazy Many

(gf6r ‘osu0yy)

‘WM ‘JRART UeMg pue ‘aeosesepeyy

RIE

AAR URMG |Y] Je EIPE YSU W1a}sa Ay

(46f61. ‘OrUOPy

SE16T auasny) eyensny wi9jsa\4

SBas Urea Ul @UEPUnIWWTII

BYEASNY UsOIsSaA\ ‘Bare IaATY uEMS

‘shy "WS

IPYIS pue BsunqtA\ 310g

‘sny "INS ‘purrsy

ooleduey ‘aA uESeWy

‘MSN

“eynuory Sys ‘apreppy

Hog pue towuag yxIT]ES

SaJBAA INOS Many

HSny “IS ‘puelsy comsuey

erusO se)

‘sty “IBS ‘Ipeag spYLaS

“ASN ‘Seg uayorg

FAM SOA ‘soueIUsy

SOYBT W'S ‘eBunyIAA 10g

99} OF Ul eoys usa

“sam SYS ‘yng s200eds

“SHY "WS 'puRsy ooresuey

aouEsIUA SayBT ye eL0}91A,

SHpoIsyseoud Satyuva yy

Hynvspfiun sayjuDayy

mpofkro sayjuva yy

SisuajanGaay Sayjuna ny

pyJDUDOM42 IeAU SayjUDaNT

oyutionss sayjupa Ny

$000 SayjunaNy

SISUAMDNISID MOItNT

sqaaypapond siasauoutn Ay

1O/DY Staaauoarry

SHDIMMOS ad SsaUOpay 7)

Swuaansyjlsa stasaiojosa’y

SHasinban siasayoyvaey

Sisuabsurgy] srasauopnsa

SHIQD4E S1849U0ID42)

Wpuoupa pjoydarojn4a-)

$49/ya SiasauopDasnpy

———<$<—<—<— eee

ayo WFo;OaT

UONNGUYSIP dAISUa}Xa B10;

Ayyedo] MAN

saneds Jo aweyy

S—_ ——e—Tr—XxXkee a

Tl LYWHO

(e6g6t ‘ouopy) vrueusel, ‘UEqoT]

‘ART yoaad Jeo] ‘syIBW apt} waaIMjog

(¢z6T ‘teuasny) 38e09 ay} Buope sauojys sapur)

(uMouy 10N)

(TS61 ‘xouyy) “sty CF O} ‘sauO}s Jopun epIszaqET

(IS6T ‘xouyy) oynjjoa “gq YN poze

-120SSe ‘pn pue pues UF SMOLING fsaltenyse Ul

(16, ‘xouy) sMor

-ANq pauy-auys ‘Burypouesq uy ‘sauoys Zuowe

pn ut teinsodxa Inoy ¢ 0} Jovem MOT ‘TeprsaqUy]

(7H ‘W‘'H)

S}aal JUO}JSaUT] Ut pue spood Hoos ur sauojs oI 4

(maq ‘q pue spuomp7

*f °S) vunjoajpy jo sdump we pue supeyo dur

-100U pus sayid WO fsyRY piu ur pue sysor Japuy)

{umoux JON)

(umouy 1ON)

(2189 WH) stood 44901 ur sauo}s

wor; pue (spuowpy “{ “S) suuo0yyejd yo01

SNosleajed UO S}seyppOY atey} pues sesye Buowy

(1S6E ‘OM) SyD0A S[qQeqorg

(umouy JON)

(eq “q) Arenjsa ur azefd Supnoy

HO {saljaw Pp] 0} ar0ys ‘satoys AyIOr 4o Apueg

(E16) ‘soueSNy) seajaw [| OF Tepyszaquy

(ez61 ‘seuadny)

S9U0}S JYIOYY sapun ‘suzy cp ul weo, Apues uy

(umouy JON)

(6g61 ‘oauopy) eyurur

“Sey [purjesz MAN alt Ursynos

(pz6i ‘teuedny) ode yon

{spurjsy pueppny +pueleaz MON

"A'S'N ‘uosypel 40g

puryeay Many ‘ayiyd wsetpnog

(1s6t “ouy) eqersny

udaysa\\ ‘IYI A-Opu] -puejesz Man

(1S6T “xouM)

RYyesny wlayINog ‘pueyeez MAN

(CT6T ‘sereAny) wrpELIsMYy 119759,\\

(rot ‘Pane * 1561

‘xOUy] SSB g-Opuy ‘pueyesz Man

Leyesjsny waysa\\ pue Usayynos

puepray Awan

"AV'S'N ‘uosspef 340g

Byers W19q89,A4

BIEISNY 119jS9,\\

"VAM ‘dnjewion ‘aA05

SYPIUPTY pue uosaq jutog ‘Wseuoy

(F261 ‘s9uarNy * Zp6T

‘ane 5261 “OluOPT) SATE AA

ynog Man Peyeasny “MS pue “Ss

(O16, ‘wequeg) eres}

“sny ynog pure elfersny jsaayinasg

(zoe “4 ‘SE6t

‘pane f[g6y ‘xouy) yeodosyqns

{puejesz Mon laeasedepeyy ‘u0psap

Saz}our

29 UL eYeIsNYy YsIASIMYyNGG HO

eMBUISEL “AN ‘preduc A

wWog WS “Wee WPS

"ASN ‘uOsyoe{ 340g

Sys ‘esuntA Wo t's]

oo1eduEYy ‘IIA Uesieury

M'S'N “V's ‘peg

PUPS pue purjsy oomsuey

SIEM YIHOG MIN

Hsny “iPS ‘yeag ypMT]S

SaTeAA WINES Many

oumBuupzopnasg St49ti42 J

sisuantuod Si4aUulsa J

DADQADY StA4IUuMIT

Saptommnbmups siasausiag

SHsIIaLY Stasausag

DINYOA s1adautsa gy

DIDjUapOLaD Sradaursa q

DwOponqiun SasaUursa 7

DISHGOS $1849 NT

ppinduo] S343

SHMIUINGYIOI $7349.

Sisuarnodad $1343 NT

tosduioy? Sau3N

suosyovl s1a47 Nv

ssuanenyuap St942

DynIpof sy249N

MDW SIZLIUNT

ay D180;OIT

uornAgriysip BAISUIINS BIOPT

Ayes] Ata

satsads jo amen

——— roo eee

(TS6T 031) pasar

pue syoo1 Suowe (4761 ‘ApAesg) satioys spur,

(E16, ‘euesny) syaar Moreys uC

S}seJpjoy pue aseaje sucwy

uo ued ul sasejs snoyoydy

(ssaid

UL "Zo6T ‘“URUIeE]) sjseypjoy pue sere Suouy

(Mojaq 3as) sjoar auojsautty

uo ‘sXonq Sutsoour uo ‘sapid uo ‘ae8je suowy

CIE6T ‘Xouy) “sway Qg or yepHaazur tsaqny

Surkdndo0 ‘pues pie sywewBery pays Zuoury

(16 ‘O1U0yy) sysoOI yerod Buoy

CIE6I ‘OluOpy) Jeor pes09 UT

(Teat ‘omopy) Jeoy soreg yeaig jo uoosey uy

(uMmouy 3ON;)

ce6l

‘Jouasny) Duindiunr sradaurag YIM pareroossy

(Moq ‘q) sapd uo pue sysezpjoy

djey ur sysos tapun ‘wravzoajpy jo saqn} suowy

—_—_- _—_—S SSS

BYAU IiBoOpGI7y

(F261 ‘ISI0H]) sarpuy iseq ¢ (1061

‘PIAVI) BS pay ‘([S6I ‘HOM

PUL ZZ6l ‘PANEY) BIyersny w19}59,\\

(S61 “epnyQ) uedef

(E16. ‘uasIny) eensny woysayy

Epeuey 1a

“389 0} DYPeG WEIYIIO_Y tuemeyzy

(TE6T ‘oruoyy) Joey Jausing

yarg + (TE6l “PAnez) yDeg-opuy

(£Z6L ‘Jouasny) pueesz

MAN UsayINog pue sToIEyIY-qns

C1S6r ‘Xouy fozer ‘49

“UVENY 'CQ61 ‘saaTyA) puejeaz Man

[got ‘o4

-UOP) Jay Jose yeatg £ (Zz6T

‘ISNY) Byersny YON pur seq

(TE6T ‘oru0yy) yoay Jawieg

wears + (OF6l “epm{Q) syPeq-opuy

(Te6t ‘osuop_) Joo sarIeg

soymeg-opuy =f saurddynyg

(ezoL ‘TaAneq)

pueaz MaN pus sauiddiytyg

*(T€6l ‘om0py) jJaoy soseq jea15

(1e6t ‘orm py)

JOY Jouie_g year ! (zzGl ‘ssa

-8ny) eyegsny yon foymeg-opuy

yearn

(9Z61 ‘o2uopT)

eyeasny wiojseq pue vag BUTYyD

UOTNGUIsIP satsuajxa a10yy

(MoO]eq 39S) BIIOTITe>)

pue soyeA\ Yynog Many

SJB Nes

MON pire eyeasny yynog

“WSN Wate fou

pue Aegq vayorg ‘yoyemyrg

‘moqueyy 'pAg ‘uosysef 3g

AYTeIOT Ma. NT

—W SK SFSSSFFSSSFSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSesseeeF

HDMOUD Siasauopnasg

DUDYSINIJOS SladauopHaIS f

DIDRIUDIIG sasaUdjo] F

putpvosC jog saaaudpD} 4

Sisuapypbpus srasauszos 7

ppogiuo

BpdauUNp sSrasaUuCqD] T

SYDAISND $1949uK{D] J

puinbiun2 StIADUTAT T

shazjay Stadauida Ff

DMISH{gO SiasIurer 7

DIANDIUDA S13LdUrdd J

opojoundosbe Siasaursag

PUDUEINI SrasdutdaT

satvads jo aur jy

suorsa1 Apoq Z WIM + 1Z/0Z

ye ayeWay '61/Ql Ww ryeN

S}UIWISes rO119}s00

O£-0Z pue ‘uerpow ve ‘ro119}

“ue QZ :suoIBe1 ¢ YIM Apog

42/9e We ayeuag

(payeis Jou xas) CT/pl IW

6T/81 Fe FEW

Ayoudy _

C1is6t ‘xouyy) Ajouday

POU

(uMonly JON)

(zt “¢ ‘oTet

‘meyuag) AxoIdsT

(umouy JON)

(uMOoIy JON)

(zor “¢

‘IS6T ‘NOy) Ayondg

(ost ‘d

#26] ‘ISt0H{) Ayondy

(umouy JON)

paiup Ajqeumsaig

elpod

-O1Ndlt 0} pay siaspyejz

eipod

-O1NdU UT sia3~jey ydinos

-o1a}94y «= paBepuadde-BuoT

MOP s10s

-Ty[B] pue saoqe sussnnds

siasnnds duos

-OlUOY “PUY suo Jo aeyas ITV

eIpod

-O1NIU OF Pay, sass] ET

erpodosmeu

ay pepe ‘syisodwica

pue ajduis yjoq siasoyeyq

eipod

-O1Nal OF PayUNy ssasoyey

erpod

-OIMa 0} payOI, ssastoye.7

erpod

-OJNIU OF pay] ssasyeg

eipod

-O1nau 0} payluy ssasiypey

erpod

-OINaU O} payMoy sresaypeq

|fews Afayesopowy saqoy yerpod

-ered tyunoo jeyjeusered ysrpy

snousesiq eipodeied

‘syleusesed syoey stosogolg

-ysnoiy} snowesun urpodeseg

snosasias pue

jetpodered si yusuidas § 4sity

uimimioysoid dopa

-ua Aysed 0} apis peayusa

uo = pesucjord = un twoysi9g

syusudas IO1IE4

-sod ur siaSyye} ayduus adie]

peonpal

AjyeasB 111d [esjuaA pur jesiog

suo]

JOU TID Tessiop faijua wn

-oysold «JO UlsieW JoUaLy

Buoy AIBA 1.419

jesiop = tyulasraatp = Ajapyan

wniyoysoid jo pula sjouaTYy

srasogoid

jo s8ulz yjog uo aeyided Bu0T

aejided Jo

SMOJ ISIOASUEI] WIM tonyua A.

LyNVA Saypund NY

SISHILAONISAD WOItN

Sdarypspond Sracauniuy Vv

1]DY S1a4dUOAINTY

SUDNUOISIAaG StasIUoTIay 4

SIMIIDAYIN LI $1949U04DAI)

syasinbap $1949u0}D43)

sisuaBiuigny $124940jD49)

SHIQNANU SIB4IuOJDAI)

aspuowpa vjoyger0jp4a7

$843]49 StasouopDAsnPe

Aue jt

‘uOHEoIyIpour Jo womIsog

uoyonpoider

jo porpsyy

aeyas Dysouserqy

sonsajsesey anbmy

soiseds Jo aweyy

TI LaVHo

(peyeis jou xes) pI/E] IV

(payejs jou xas) CT /py 38

aBueyo :suower Z ym Apog

Peyrpout

“un sjuamiges gg sey pue

FI/El 48 sodueya yerpodesed

sayeuW Ur soe: GF YM Apog

61/81

ye deur Sf Z1/yf we ayeW

pang

(46 ‘¢ “Is6t ‘Hoy)

(i) yuasaid 40 Juasqy

(1s6t ‘HOM) Ayoudy

(zze 4 ‘bet

‘sauasny) Axyoudy

(umouy JON)

(pot-eci “dd

$261 3stOHT) AyopdA

(umouy JON)

; ; (eel

afed ‘9161 ‘arequog

aag) ‘esp sdeyasd

(umoy ION)

(umowy 70N)

alejuap A],

“ISIEOD Slas—Ie} [epodojoN

ayeuap -g¢ JO -g A]

“ISIVOD SLIBTI[Ey [eIpodojoNy

ayejuap -f IO -Z AT

-3S1BOI SIVZOyeF Terpodojon

ayejuap

-€ 10 -¢ Ajasavod aFepuadde

UWA Sdasropey = yerpodojony

ayeluap-¢ 10 -¢

st asuepusdde yoy ut

SIaFWeF YPM = ETpodojoNy

erpod

-O1NU OF paywy sas oyeg

erpod

“OLN 0} Pay ssias1DpeYy

yussqe siad

-19yey Apu ssastunds yA,

eipod

-OIN3U 0} PIPUN] s1astI[eJ

eipod

-OANIU OF POUUMl_ siasoye7

elpod

-O1ne OF paynuy sradoype.y

Sisuauinyuap "Ay Ut

UeYy] dys JUNO. [eYyleusereg

Sau0) MOT YI

srosoqoid fyoeq ut <Aypide.

saysiumuyp = ago, yetpodojony

peonper apy eqoy jetpodo30y

sipjeusered

Ad} YPM 3O a1eq Butz elo

$yUO1y Ul pasijur ummmojsorg

syjeusered syory

stgsogoid jo sun Areyixeyy

sTPprat

ye peypeye sni yesiop

yy eynduen} «sts eIpod

-O}OU IOLIZ}SOd Jo aqo] yessog

spueq

WMOIq peoOIq yyw UMsiop

ssyjeusered sxe, A By

SNIID [es1op Fo

aseq jO sapis yjoOg uo Ayjeo18

sasiepue = saqoy,:=—s [eipodojony

sjustuZas to1eysod

UL SaYsTItIp aqo jetpodojony

suo

Aun JO sMor Aueu pues aviv]

JO MOL 9UO YIM Bull JEIO

saue0d jo Bull snonunuos

WM spsogord fo Baw jeig

1MOsgiuoyy Sasa Ny

mosyIVE Siasa

Sistampyuap $134aN

pMo7Df staan

1L4DUG StasdUNT

SyjosysnDun sayzupa jy

DIDIISD{UN Say{MDI NT

wpodtxo saysunany

SwuajanGsay SayjunaN

pysoUsors) Lea sayzwna

OYIDUBOMAD Saysuna Ny

Aue jr

‘uoRKoT pou Jo uONsog

oR INpoldat

JO poy

aEByas Djsouseicy

sotsajoereys onbiup

Sa1sadsg jo wen

(poyejs jou x98) {1/91 TV

G2/be OF OT Fe PEWS

LV/9L Fe aeue7

(amouy JON)

(umouy ON)

(amo 30N1)

(umowy 3ON)

. (zz “4

‘1S6l ‘xouy) Ayoudy

(oee “¢ ‘TS6%

xouwy) Wearp sdeysag

(Sir “¢ ‘6T6T ‘Pane

Ppapiosar sayo}daqns

(umowy 0N)

(eve “d *bz61

‘auaany) — Ayondgy

(umouy JON)

(umouy 30N))

Faye

jo Judy ur Aoydg

‘ipod

-OITIU 0} PAU] s1991I]e,7

erpod

-O1nau 0} pay sade

som]

4q ango0 «eynaie =f erpod

-OINDU 0} pay sted1djey

yduro3

-ou1oy sia3tuids [te : eipod

-OINaU O} PIU] siadoye7

PIpou

-OINaU 0} pay ssas1I[e7

erpod

-O1MRU 0} Paw ssssd]eJ

erpod

-OlNau O} pay siosyjey

wipod

-o1nNau OF pay ssas jez

eipod

-O1NIU 0} paw] sles pyeT

(umoux JON)

(umoux iON)

eipodajou je ut jua

-soud siadijey yduosowoyy

syuawses JOLa}sod ut

yuasaid ssadpye} ydwod

-omoy pesepuadde - 31045

—" (amomy 10N)

Aue jt tlononpoider aejas D)souseI]

UONESFIPOUL JO VOHSOd FO powpeyy

dqO] oye1pneb ‘peoig 0}

peypeye “zoys smi pesiop

‘ageq sisoqoid jo A ewuy

pus ]eisip

eau = paylasuy «snes

-1op yyIM poduopoid Ayjeard

aqoy = erpodojou = s10110js0,g

(AI HeYD 9s)

srsogoid jo JA pue A euy

CAT Wey 923s)

siosoqoid jo TA pue A way

(AI HeYD 2s)

stosogoid Jo JA pue A Bay

(AI HEYD

gas) smsoqaid Jo A euy

(AT Bey 928)

srasogoid Jo [A pue A tay

(AL Mey 2s)

stosogoid Jo JA pue A stay

xeinduejse1 ‘pasuoy

-o1d ago] jerpodojou 101ajsoq

sunosqa

ainasqg

spury Z Jo siaBpojey perpodojon

pesuojosd aqoy yerpod

-OJOU FO BSeq { MOI BSFGASULI}

€ Ur souod ¢ IBIM JI] ey

sonsizajsezeys anbiuy

sUDULIDI Srasautsag

puinGuunzopnasd stasaunsa gy

sisuaimuog s194dut4ag

nanqang Siasdutsag

SoproumOuuns siacoursa gd

TrssIIIAG SisIUs4ag

DjNIOA Siasaursa gy

DjDWAapOUDA SisIUrsaT

Djuopokiquip siasauraa qT

DISNQOA Std4a AT

ppmbuny Stas Ny

SISuIuANGYIOI Sasa Ny

Sasuawwosad $1249 7

Sepads jo awen

ZI/9L 3 apeuag

2/T2 10 12/02 1 BTeEW

€2/ez Je sew

ST/PL Fe FEW

9e/S2

ye ayewag f[z/oz 3 2eW

2/22 We eeu

(Mopaq

gas) #2/eZ 3 40 ‘02/6T

ye BPW FTe/Og ye ajewoq

SI/Zt

we Weway ‘pi/er we IAW

61/8T

ye ayemag {fot/c, ye aN

j (ser “4 ‘106t

Jamey) = Ayourd a

(usouy 3ONT)

(acjaq aas) Ayo}dy

(szz ‘6 ‘6161 ‘Ut

~zaquiey) — Ayoudy

(2681

siya) Ayondgy

(Mojaq aas) Ayoydg

(sI9}0 pue

POST ‘S98 ! L9RL

‘epremps) Ajoydy

(uMouy OKT)

(umouxy JON)

' (91d

Tg6] ‘omuoypy) Ayoytdy

(uALoRy OT)

(IZ ‘d

G88l WAOFP) Ajond A

¥ipodoinau ur saa

-pyey ydwosorayay jus

-aid stadiayey yduosouoypy

Bipodoinea ul si98

“IBF yduodorsjay ‘yues

“qe sioz1yey ydmodouozxy

ayisoduioa sias

-Pye} yerpodoineu ‘siaz

“TEE adwiis mim wipodojon

Spua yeysip

Ul paqqii aeyzas jerpodojoyy

S1I31IQje} pus

saadmids ya eipodoinau

‘srasinids yim erpodajoyy

$193

-ids pue sradpyes yduios

-OWoy = TAA BIpodoJONT

adepuedde Japuss ‘suoy

YM sresiypey ydiuosowozy

tIpod

-O1NsU OF PII, siasopeq

epod

-OUNeU OF Pa}, sas ey

erpod

-OJND0 OF Pay] s4asioye.7

eIpod

“OND OF PI}, Sradtayeq

eipod

~O1NIU OF} Pay sissye yy

(DuDiYsak}jos “gq OF IByMWIS)

(AI BeyD 295) siasoqoid jo

JA pue A stare favaunnoas

‘Buoy Saqoy yerpodojou sowa}sog

a ye yiep Aljensn pue sno

“Hadsuos ssds1oje~ perpodoyony

tantuojysou

pasuojoid Ajjears YT sayo}

-1d3 ‘syuawgas iowajsod avy

ul @eys pagqi jasiaasuesy,

snonatdsuosut

JO Juasqe szas1a[e} jerpodojoN

pesepuedde-jioys siaSiuids

‘Ayyeystp = Japuays ‘aseq) ye

414} 41D [eIWWOA pue [essop

‘UMOIG YEP OF YS ENIDY

-OJOU aos UT Juasaud suai

“Jef Yyduosowoy ‘gg sasyes

WOrF aewlay ut avjas A1oyEyEN

(ST “d “[g6T ‘ouuoy) 4204s

wind yesiop f(AT 3ey

a9s) spsogoid Jo [J] katy

CAI 4eyD

298) slosoqoid jo [J] vary

aspls padino alzurs

B yy stosoqoid jo JA wary

(AT HeyD

das) stosogoid jo [A Pay

pied saddn ur pestoy

-o1d) = etpodojou = Jotuaysod

ssyyeuseied 7 0} YIM y vary

UIPULOND Slasauopnasg

DUDYSAU}O4 Stasauopnas |

DDRIyoUnIIG SwasdUtjO) T

DIMjDISN|Og S1849UCzD) 7

Sisuapyyoboiw srasaucjny 7

ppogiun

pMaMND StadoUCtOTT

Syvarsny SiasaudpnyT

DUINGIMD? StasautdaT

149/]2Y Si9sautsag

DIDISH{[qO sw4IuI4IT

DIMUNDIUDA S19K9ut49 T

Dj WndosHra Sras9MIdd J

ue Ht

‘moHeIgipow jo uosog

no1onpordes

f° poy

92]28 ISOUSEICT

Sdysiap ee snbiap,

Saedg jo ame

TA Wa

(Aoj9q pur

SnonuT}uOo = ‘SMOr 10

€-Z UE sou0d Qo ¢-Z Io a,sue a]suer} dnoiz SMOI SMOL ¢ wapue3 ur ‘Ze, “d ‘Eley ‘seuasny)

moge jo pueq Y -}901 BUI fp e@ Ul g¢ aBIe[ VUELOS INOqy = FY _~“UE Cz Jnoqy qnoqe ul ZI-O1 Zz 10 | ‘yon SayjunaN

(sez ‘d ‘[g6r ‘xouy)

oO oO oO Oo oO oO oO SISUMULONJSAD UOILAT

(zz ‘d ‘6061 “weyuog)

(@) oO Oo oO oO oO Oo SPIIMNDAPOND S1PsIUDULD AT

(Mopq 29g)

O oO 16) oO oO O oO $2/DY Spa4aUodary

syjeuseied SMOI PaAINo

Aueut jo pueq € 10 Z jo yoyed asisa yated asiazasues] = WwapuE} ut (eee “ TS6L ‘xouy)

snonunuos Ww dnoLd jeAQ oO yoved sepnBuejoor Zo -Suva} BOUT SMOL ¢ B® Ut sMOI ¢ Z 40 [ SHDMMO Sag SiasaUopVay >

TIT pue ‘II sau0o sauod

Wy stlonuyuos pue SMOL Je[NFaiI1 ZL ynoge YH yews (gor “4 ‘“6T6T ‘Teaneyt)

oO oO oO dnors e ud Auepl = jedoaas ur Aueyy SMO PaAINdD Z 9 01 Zz SISUAADAYJAI MIAIUOPDAID

dnois

e UL 6-9

SMO1 f-¢ JO yua9sa1> so‘wapur} = (¢/t ‘dé ‘gT6, aouesny)

ra) Oo Oo dnoig asmoasuen yo dnoiz peoiq y e ur Aueyy mW ¢-¢ syasinbap Siadauojps3y

aysue aSUR}III ISA Aol a1qnop (Z9T “¢ ‘E16T ‘seuesny)

Oo oO oO -lij @ Ul pl OF ZI SURI} BUT ZO pF Bul OL OF Z oO SisHaOuign] S1a48u0jN43 >

(OzI ‘4 “E161 ‘19ua8ny)

oO oO oO sau0d 9, INMoqy sauod Qf jnoqy sau0d OT 9} Z ro) SHIQDAIM St9AIU0INAD

MOI QUO UE de] AOI U0 UT erpided (Moyaq 339)

-jided ws0j1419 6 )~=oeyyided aug Oo aegyided waoywai ¢ oO Buoy ao wspuowupa nypydasojp4a

MOI BUCO UL aeTIded (Aojaq 99S)

(@) re) Oo Aapuays “SLO, YAS potaaoa Sur Ayeprxey 1843)YI StasaMapDAsnp”

TILA BIIA StY OTA Pay ‘A Bary “AI Ba1V ‘III ery TI ey ‘I ey saldads Jo aureyy

SIDSOdOUd AHL 4AO SONTM CIIIA"A) T¥Y¥O GNVY (CAI“I) AUVTTIIXVIN

‘AI LYWHO

NO SHSSS9D0Ud TIVHLVNDOVaVd

auau 40

‘01 @ Ul p=] 40

- Afuo 40 '7 Jnoge

jO Mor apsus Y

AOL agIaAsuel] B

Ul SauU0d IaBIE] QT

“ET 49 OT-8 INOGY

s9uo3 Aur jo

Jaqumnu = a] qeLeA

ys 410 MOL ®&

Ur SeUOD aBIET 6-2

SMOZ

p qoge yo pueq

snonuyucs

SapIs 24} 78

daap ¢-z Ajuo o}

Ayjesjuaapr deep

¢ ‘pueq peoiq VW

Sau0) 3ue7

-sIp ¢ jo MOL VY

SMO1 p-£

jo pueq asieds

snonuquos y

MOL

asiaasuel} & I ¢

auou 40

‘au0 40 ‘MOI

eB ul ff aw

dno1d [jews y Oo

SMO1

aingsqo Z Ut

SoUOd T[eLUS g oO

O O

sauod Au}

jo taysnjo

ews vy 1e)

sMor Zz JO pueq snonun

-102 & WIM TA pue “A

yajed

pepuno1

eB ul 6-9 QO

dnoi3

ASIDASUEIY

jews z

UT Sav09 g-¢ oO

yoyed

aeinom eB

Ur 6 jHOgy aloo auO

Juo 3uCQ Oo

apis ATeT[IXeUs ayy UO Sau0) sJasIe[

jO MOs OIBUIS @ pues SMOI AULT Ut sata

Aueut Jo piteq snonuyuos & ym ‘TITA 9A

"9-5 40 p-¢ AfuO

ARUN SMOL BY} IO ‘SMOI 6 IO Q UT SAO.

AveW JO peg snonuyuos & IM ‘JITA OF “A

auou 40 ‘SMOt

£-2 Ut Orso fo

ypyed onuaosa1n V

SMOL }

AO G UL PZ 40 Yz-ZT

sauod QT

dnois s1yuadse19

dno sedueLy}

asse] & ut cz ynOgy

SMOl /-9

UI satos cg jnoqy

SMO] Z

JO yozed jpeuis

yoved

ajpndueny & Ut QT-g

yajed repnsue

“Hy B Ur Og Imoqy

yajed aemsue

“ye OT Op Inoqy

a]2uey 40) MOL B Lt

suo

£-S-E Jo yajed assaa Aju0 0} ‘May E 40

rSuEI} & 40 SON

MOL

adits} & Ul Q2Z-/1

MOL [ UF Z

JOSsNyo ayqeuea W

dnoid [BAO asioA

-suel} & US ZT moqy

dnoid

asieasues} & UT

SMOS Hf WI CZ-02

Aju 3uQ

ayBuei) B UT C-p

Jaysnpo assaasuel

B ul Op moqy

Taysnyo SSTIASUEI]

® Ul pg joqy

‘SMOS PIAINI E-Z oO

MOL aqnop Wapuey

eB uF 9i-tt @ 40 T

sauoo ¢ oO

SMOI poAind ¢-Z O

Oo 0

ypayed anbygo ue yazed yeao

Ur OZ Se] Fy Ue UT BZ

MOL a[qnop auol 40

e Ut gI-py au03 30

SMOL £ wWapury

jo upyed [eAQ uw Z

Aol 3/qQnop

anbrygo ue ul /-9 oO

quaur

-oFue11e

a[suet} aqeipenb

UE py moqy UE § INOGY

aaenbs

pueq anbriygo e ut

ue ur gg moqy = INoqy

(291 ‘ “ler ‘19ua8

AY +66 “d “IS6L OM

tzl2 ‘a ‘igor ‘xouyy)

suosy rf sia43N

(SSI ‘4 ‘gT6y ‘ssuaany)

SISUAIMDYMAD 1249 NT

SSAAId YOTYyAL

(S061 'APTILAA UF SE 70%)

(siz ‘d ‘Ts61 ‘'xouy)

prAvajof siada

(411 SF ‘661 ‘osuoyq)

BADE S184IUNT

(6rt “E ‘E16, ‘s9ue8ny

syporysnbun sayjupa Ny

(pst “ 'p261 ‘ISI0HT)

DIDIISD SUN SIYIUDIN

(S19 “d ‘gr6T ‘oruopy)

opodiso sayzupaN

(sol “d ‘ele, ‘auesny)

sesuajanGaay saysuva yy

(Mo]aq 39S)

DYDUBOI4) eau Sayzune Ny

(yor “o “E16T “Tauesny

tate “d “1c6, “xouy)

pyyoubor42 SayyuUvaN

IITA ¥ ITA seaty

TARY A eaY

AT ey

Til tv

11 By [ way

sataads jo oureyy

SMOL 0-7 UT

squo0d j[elus = pue

aziz, og 9 dO

a1OU AO

B® JO SMO 959A

-suel}] injndaia ¢

pausyeyy 3q

ew yey} Souod Jo

SMOL BZuryeusajye ¢

Sapls 219

ye MOl ] Ajuo oj

‘mojaq ~SMOT Q-¢

Ur Sau02 Og Jnoqy

SMOL JEMPaIII Z

Ul Sao Qg jnoqy

sopis 78 deap $-Z

pue mojaq deep

£g ‘sevoo Aue

jo pueq peoiq Vv

pury

-aq SMOZ Q Jnoge

sa3pit asrea =a Bue}

-suel} uo] ut Sallo3

(g 1419) z aBJE] ¢

M02 3SIQA

-suel, @ ul $ 10

S9U0D Jey 10 apsuery

TeSiuo> OZ-(1 eure

aysuery

MOI 3S13A4 e ur f

-suel} B@ ul -¢ JO ‘yDEq

O¢-8 49 GZ «ARF fas

apis oes

uo saapla sMmOol Z Ul

aSsoASURL] Z saUOI O

puryeq p

_ 3 suo yey

aSpll paaind -ea & yp

ajauis y g Aypens

$so1> yoyed

JO 3J9sI B UE PBAO ue UT

Sau0d ade] ¢ ~SMOI Z UL O

sauod CT-Z

jo dnoiz anbyqo

43}snj3 INUeasaIo VY

Jaysnf> eB

Ur seuod Oz yoqy

sMOx ¢ UI ZT InOqy

yojed 1eNsuv1} ¥

SMo3 €-Z jo yaed

JENSuEII eu TI-S

S90 JIJEWIS g-¢

opis

yoea uo sauod ¢-[

Ta Yored ayeapen()

zajsnyja &

Ul sauo> +] ynoqy

SMOI

Z JO yoyed asisa

-sueay @ Jp ‘Z AUG

yayed 3aepnsuen} y

SMOL E-Z JO

dnoi8 anbiyqo

A9zSNp> ..

iejnsuenn y

32U02 QI-9

smos anbrygo

Z UE 6 moqy

yoyed sensuev4

B UL SMOI p-¢

(‘aaoge sdnoiz ¢ pue

‘pueq © yyM Burts Areyrxew fapis yesiop uo sdnozd yerajey g pue opis [eiwea uo pueq peoiq © YM Buu pesong

“BUIZ [BIO JO BSOY} UEY} AapeMs yonu Bui Areyixeu jo syyeusered ‘ajqeyquap! Ajivays you svare ayy ‘!aanasqg)

wapue} Ur Z

Mor aiqnop

anbiygo ue ut g

aucd

az1e] 1

SaUOd f-T

S9UGD E-T

¢ Ajo

10 Aueu

% OT

wopwrey 11

sauoa $-7

(wmowryuy) )

HOY, mosysof sy4aQr JO yey OF septs,

(1Z2 ‘d ‘1G61 ‘xouy)

Sapoumbwans siasaursa 7

(ozz “d ‘Ig6t ‘xouy)

SUMéIAII SIaLauIAaT

(821 “ ‘E16r ‘reueany

‘6le “d ‘[Set “xoux)

DIDDR Shasauida

(zit 4 ‘Ts6l ‘HOM

Tat ‘4 ‘ei6y, ‘Jauesny)

OD MapOsNA s194IUI4dT

(zez ‘d “156, ‘xouy)

DuOpok;quiy Siadaurte 7

(seg

‘sodezorjend)

DISHQOs St343N

‘d ‘SO8T

(69t “d ‘gogt “Br9qury)

opinbuny ssa Ny

(atojaq pur

Sc ‘do ‘E161 ‘seuezny)

SIUIUINGYIOI Sta43 NT

(tol @ ‘1c61 ‘0M)

Swusmosag 53343 N

Ul soue Jayyews a]sueL} SMOI 3SI39A

Aueur pue sauos apsueyzaa4 BULSau0D -sueI}] IeMsaiu ¢-z pulyaq | pue Mor urepue} ut (rOT “d ‘TS6T HOM)

Jase] JO MOL Wo eusaorp aBiey ¢ ut sauod Qz ynoqgy e& UT ¢ YM sau0d - smo anbiyqgo Z Z 401 MMOSduUsOYyy S1249.NT

ITA PITA Sty CTA PTY A ely AT e1V III Paty IT Pay I ealy sapads Jo suey

saul] }Saj1ed

(ware — snonaidsuos

dno13

dSIaASuet} y[etws

avurjsod apna = =a $-g FO ysour ayy) seuad e@ wut aeusad Jo (pzz “Ef ‘TS4T ‘xouxy)

jo sdnois yews ¢ yayed yews v oO JO sMOL JelaAag saul poydnssajur ¢-p oO oO SYDAISND Sra4aUhJD) J

(st ‘d ‘Te6y ‘oruoyy)

(aaoqe das ‘tayjay Siasauiuag Ul SV) DUINOWDI $33469UuI4d

apts

MOL apis Tova uo yoe3 UO Wapuy} UI Z

s[qnop Jepnzesit = aapLr asia aysueny ypoyed pue ‘souoa 6 jo 3u0 yoyed ayer urapuey (+L ‘of ‘Te6T ‘ommoye)

ue ut /[T moqy -suel] Vy ® WZ = yeao ue UT QT INOqy UeIpam e fsdnois ¢ -penbqns ut Z ur Z Mai]IY 8194347

apis ysea uo yajyed anbrgo yoyed asia MOL 910114 SSO1) & UL (gt ‘od *Te6L “osuopy)

AOL alqnop y asp | aZie] auo «ue oUt «gg «(yMoqgy -suRl}EUICZgIonqy fe Ut cz yoqy sau02 ¢ DwIsHfga SstaLautda J

‘TA. aus

snonuyues !sau0s

ITIL] YPM TOL}

-sod & pue ‘sa03

Jayeus pue 33 s9uo yelase] ‘|[[PLuS

-1E] {IAL Jolajue = apis B uo a]s4eny 40 red U pue ‘adary $9103 iapuey (ez “4 ‘qzzet “auesny)

he ‘spurq peolq Z saspir 7 Burg souod jews Aue; UeIpaut ev ‘sdnoid ¢ yrewis Aue, ut Z DICANDINDD Stacauyes

Sepls dy} Je MOL paymod

[ Ajuo 0} ‘smo Aypeqs tp ajZuely = sMmol f Ul IO jue. yojed Mor ajduz so =©6dnoid ayer (GZ “0 “ZZ6T ‘yauasny )

z ul ¢¢ ynoqy aap | Burg sade Ul fez Noqy jeao we ur¢Z jMoqy aqnop ve ur yy -penb ur / DyppaundosGiu SiadaUtsa

S9u03 ZT OF OT jo a3pu dor anbiqo dnoi3 MOL arqnop wapury (ele ad ‘9z6T ‘oauoyy

MOL JE[NSa1II UW aSJaAsURI) [ O he ur SMOr ¢ JMoqy aSraAsueI} [pels Vv anbijqo uy ul Z WDULDI S1942Ut49

dnois

SMOI ¢ JO purq eB aspu apBueny & dnoid 1] jeAo ue ut sMol yayed wapury (Ope “¢ ‘pzat ‘eueiny)

Ul SQUOD Zp NOGY ISISASUEIZ T UT sa0d g -NGUEII] B UI g7-72 ASIDASUNH] f UI [] [BAO ue UI QI-g ul Z pumbuunzopnasd Stasaurdad

‘LA Bary Wor apis yous ye paje

pajeiedas = Ajapry apis yea SMOL $-F UT ~[OSf [ pue a[pplur sauod ¢ AjuO 10 8 8=6wWepury (1s¢ d pz6T ‘seuesny)

SMOLZ UL SauUOI CZ WoO saspia pp Ajuo auo (¢y-z~ Ajuo so) ze 3 (p AJUO OF) QT ‘smol Z ur [[-OT Ul Z 40 T swuamuog Siedautsa

daap SMO Z

(6-8 93) $ INoqe apra asia ssola & dnoiz (#1 30) UL ZI JnogE Jo wapuey (zie “& ‘9z61 foru0ypy)

pueq asreasuvy, VW “sur, WV Ut saved g = IJMEdSaIO asIET 6 jo dnois jews ypyed anbyqo ul Z DADgGADG SiadaUtsa J

JITA 8B ILA 88ty IA vary A By Al R1y Il] Bry If tary J Puy sa1ads JO aueNy

MMOs

aqnop = suyeuis}

-yje ue ut Jo ‘mor

& Ul s9u0D asIEp

MOr

SISASUEI] ©

6 9F GT yogy UE SatOD O-¢ oO

aeutjoed

avn JO SMOL

~sed JO pueq MOI = asaOASUTI}

-ieu shonuyuos ys seyndarmt ¢ oO

Jaqsnya auo

MOL a;qnop Vy ayeurjpad io 3u0U

seurjood

JO Salas poje aenyaad

-Fedas-jJam ‘assaa auy yo

-sueI] ¢ INoqY sMOI Buc ¢ oO

pofisdut

SYDAISND “Ff UL Se aso ¢-z oO

WIA @ ITA staty TA Baty A Bay

(‘aaoge ‘puDYysaujjos Stasauopnasg JO Jey OF tes)

sauo0o apdurs

§ ose 10 aeurzsad

Auwur JO SMOI ¢-p

(Adojaq 93s)

aeunoad JO sMmOl g-7

ssaysnjo a}euroad

(eae snonoidsuo9

ysout ay}) aeurjoad

yO SMO 19}104S

@ pue sasuo, ¢

SUDAISHD “gq ul sy

vale

aupnsuejoe1 Iejnsar

-11 ue UE aeurjsad aeutjzad yO smor

Auvur jo sMol fp

aeurjoad

JO SMOI asJaAsuet}

S-- ‘ale peoiq V

saajsn[o ayeurjood

avuryoed jo

sMOl pajydnisajur ¢

SynssHD “of ut SW

AT Puy

TTT By

MOI Fayjo

-ue jo red 10

(6 “¢ ‘1661 ‘HOM

“pop ‘2261 ‘PAneY)

DIDWOUD StI4IUOPNIS J

ATWO (991 ‘d ‘e161 ‘auesny )

JeNsa1t ¢-¢ auod T DUDYSIUTJOA SWIAIUOPNAS J

(Mopaq 32g),

Oo oO DIDININOUDIIG Sta49uUhjD] .]

(sit “4 ‘Ze61 ‘Panez)

oO oO piupprstiog siasaudynty

(09 “¢ ‘epeT ‘ueunrepy)

O oO Sweapyjoipu siasauijpoy]

(mojaq 999)

ppoquyun

0 0 HiLsauinp SrasauhyD]

J] 8e2y J] Pay sarads Jo atten

os TA) OT emt ee

AuWinbpw

oOo DeOnnvonnm

Less

Key To GENERA AND SPECIES

Parapodia uniramouy i wae ae Nea tarnerets quadraticeps

Parapodia biramous after the second Perdponltnn tee rset gage fh quitin” Seapine (> the

First segment with parapodia (hg: t aT mous wee Mtcromereis halet

Fist segment a smooth ring (fig. 3 Pr | Tes Y Saar) Oe PS

Peristomium prolonged forward ventrally to encompass the prostomium

Cheilanereis peristomiatis

Peristominm not prolonged forward ...

Ventrum of antenor segments with rows of apie ( fig, 2) Australonereis ‘chlersi

Ventrum without rows of papillae... - fa. Was ei pros

Proboseis with fleshy, cirmis-like papillae (fig. 13) . eel uw Ceratocephala edmondss

Probescis with dark horny paragnaths on some or wll areas as «! “ui the

Probescis without processes, its epithelium smooth or at most wrinkled

Nicon uestuariensis

Paragnaths absent from oral tihng of proboscis .... ss00 min a. Ceratonereis

Paragnaths absent from maxillary Ging of proboscis... ane wis Eunereis marrt

Paragnaths typically presetit on hoth oral and maxillary rings of proboscis...

Parsgnaths in the form of pectinated rows on sume or all gress ke sth ina

Paragnaths in the form of conical, separated processes, ..., etal

Maxillary ring with conical, and oral ting with pectinated processes Preudunereis

Thoth Fings af proboscis with pectinated processes, or areas 1, If and V tstally bate

Platynerets

Area VI of proboscis with transverse ridges, or the ridges broken up inta poitits in

a straight transverse row a este Shee tees es Perinereis

Area VI of proboscis. with conical processes day S

Median and posterior notopodia with falcigers (fig. 30) ‘OF r also. ‘sflinigers is » Nereis

Notopodia with spinigers; lacking falcigers ..., se a4 ati Neonthes

Prostomium deeply incised at midfront; dorsal cirri very long Ceralonerets wivabilis

Prostomium hot incised in front; dorsal cirri nat unusually long .

Neuropodia with simple and composite Foleigers ine wu Ceratonereis er wihracensis

Neuropodia without simple falcigers ..

Dorsal and ventral cirri greatly reduced: area J “of proboscis “with 34 or “to 6.9.

Pointed patagnaths .... oft Ceratonereis anquisetis

Dorsal and ventral arri not ‘greatly “reduced; area J of prohoscis bare

Ceratonereis lapinigensis

Notopodia without homogomph falcigers .... 4360 a. Pseudonereis rotinestiana

Notopodia with homogomph falcigers in posterior segments Pseudonereis anomala

Notopodia with simple, heavy falcigers (fig. 38) in median and posterior segments

Platynerets bicanaliculate

Notopodia without simple falcigers. dao ses

Posterior notopodia with composite setae in which the aypetmboes “is strikingly

tidged transversely... dose ond Platynereis polyscalma

Posterior notapodia without setac that are ‘distally ridged Las ang ia dn

Posterior notopodia with homogomph falcigers (fix, 37) Oe EES be “ee

Pasterior notopodia without falcigers or only an occasional ineotispicuous one

Plafynereis nunalhacnyts

Modified natatory parapodia in female present afier segment 2

Peenieots dumenhi antipoda

Modified natatory parapodia in female present after segment 30

Platynercix australts

Area VI of proboscis with a single ridge on each side

(Includes Perinerets amblyodonta, barbara, calmani, helleri, cam

guina, obfuscuta, nigropunctata and pseudocamnguinu. See Chart 1V

for distinguishing characteristics of each.)

Area VI of proboscis with two ridges on each side

(Includes Perinerets camiguinaides, variodentafa and vancaunicit. See

Chart IV for distinguishing characteristics, )

Area VI of proboscis with four ridges on a side ..., we Pevingrcis ponmtensts

Area VI of proboscis with a continuous transverse series of cones that extends

across areas V and VI

(includes Perinerets vallata and brevicirrts. See Chart TV for dis-

tinguishing characteristics.)

Notopodial lobe diminishes in size ( fig. 26) in posterior segments a so vere

Nutopodial lobe does not diminish in size Rosterionly we amas oii

Homogomph falcigers distally boldly bifid (fig. a) vr <n Nereis jacksoni

Homogomph falcigers not hoklly bifid (fg, 30) ... vee wey Neveis cockburnensts

22 =Prostomium deeply incised at middle front ii; tee we ue Neveis falearia

22 'Prostomium not incised at middle front .. om Wo daily ee g fain Ps ae

23 + Notopodial faleigers boldly bifid -.. 2 ne ee Nereis denhamonsis

23 Notopodial faleigers not boldly Wiftl we Nerets peromiensts

24 Notopodial lobe comes to be very large on both sides of dorsal cirrus in medium

and posterior segments

: sha — a — ee wee Meanthes oxypoda

24 Notopodial lobe does not come to be so large ne ew tee ee e5

25 Areas 1 and V of proboscis nearly or quite hare .... =r tied niet mene aw «20

25. Area I, or also V of proboscis with paragnaths dete Hiee try erst 27

26 Notopodial lobe diminishes in posterior segments —~. we Neanthes kerguelensis

26 Notopodial lobe does not diminish in size in back sass wre Neanthes unrfasciata

27. Area V of proboscis bare; area I with 7 or §& comes in an oval patch

Neanthes anyusticallis

27 Area V with paragnaths; area [otherwise yi ter nsey tens nay none 28

28 Area l was only lor 2. comes... 0 cee ee ree Neanthes vaahi

28 Area 1 with many more cones .... pan any lume leads 7a we vs wa 29

29 Arcas V to VIII with a continuous band of many cones in 8 or 9 rows, to only

3 of 4 rows; area J with aboul 40 comes... ae ane Neanthes cricognatha

29 Areas V to VIII with a continuous band of cones, including @ single row of larger

cohes on the maxillary side of the area; area | with about 9 cones

Neanthes, neat ericugnatha

Australonereis, new genus

Type A, saverss (Augener), 1913

This differs from other nereid geticta most strikingly for having paired

fleshy transverse ridges (fig, 2) on the ventrum of anterior segments. The

armature of the proboscis consists of paired distal jaws and soft papillae on the

maxillary ring only; the oral ting is bare. The first segment ot peristomium is

a smooth, apodous. ring. The first two parapodial segments are uniramous; all

others are biramous. Notopodia have spinigerous, comrpesite setae and single

acicula; neuropodia have spinigers and falcigers. In ovigerous adults the median

and posterior segments have paired, papillar processes, presumably coelomostomes,

located on the dorsal side of notopodia, within the base of the dorsal cirrus.

Australonereis approaches Tylonereis Fauvel (1911, p. 376) in its pharyngeal

strictures, but in the latter all setae are homogomph spinigers. Leonnates Kin-

berg (1866, p. 168) also has membranous processes on the proboscis, but they

are limited to the oral ring, whereas the maxillary ring has horny paragnaths.

A single species, 4. chlersi (Augener) is referable to it,

AUSTRALONEREIS EHLERS! (Augener) 1913

Fig. 1-£1

Nereis (Leonnates) ehlersi Augener, 1913 pp. 142-145, pl, 3, fig. 53, text-ig,

WZ a-c,

Leonnates ehtlersi and Leptonereis ehlersi Monro, 1938, pp. 618-623, fig. 7-13.

Locality—Numerous individuals come from Lakes Entrattce, Victoria, on the

inner side of Ninety-mile Beach, where there 1s a considerable tidal current, and

where the watlet ig marine, [rom a sand spit uncovered at low tide; the worms

form beds and occupy U-shaped tubes in which the ends are uncovered (obserya-

tions by Miss Barbara Dew).

‘Australonereis ehlersi has remained known only through sparse catches from

the Swan River area, Western Ausiralia. The present numerous individuals came

from Lakes Entrance, Victoria. They are conspicuously large, measure to 140 mm.

long and 12 nm, wide with parapodia. The body is greatly depressed, especially

in its median and posterior regions, The following description 1s based on speci-

mens from Victoria,

On the everted proboscis the oral ring is dusky and smooth or irregularly

rugose; it lacks processes. The maxillary ring is pale and has a continuons band

of many, more than 50, short, cirrus-like processes in 3 to 5 irregular rows,

Fig. 1-6. Anstralonercis ehlersi

- Anterior end in dorsal view, including first 3 setigers, x 10+5.

Ventral side of body showing segments 10 to 17, x 5*2,

Anterior parapodium from papillated region, seen from the front, x 10+5

4A pire from the middle region of the body, seen from the front,

x 10-5.

$. A slightly more posterior parapodium seen in posterior view; x 10-5.

& A far posterior parapodium showing the Jarge coelomostome adjacent to

the small dorsal cirrus, x 51.

They are fewest at the sides and most numerous midventrally; those on the oral

end are slightly larger than those on the maxillary one. They are limited to 2 band

that separates maxillary and oral parts, giving the impression, especially on the

retracted proboscis, of being oral, not maxillary (hence Augener’s observation

that they are oral). The jaws are translucent, light yellow to horny brown dis-

tally ; they have 7 to 9 short, oblique teeth along the cutting edge.

The first 6 parapodial segments have each a slender ventral cirrus on a

papillar elevation. From the seventh segment the ventriim has an additional eleva-

tion within the hase of the ventral cirrus and on the next 9 or 10 segmenits these

papillations increase to about 6 or 7 on a side (fig. 2). The ventrum in this region

is rugose, After segment 30 the papillations diminish rapidly and are absent from

posterior segments.

Parapodia of the first 17 to 19 segments differ from those farther back in

that their distal lobes (both notopodia and neuropodia) are thick and glandular,

The glands are most conspicuous at anterior sides of parapodia and reach their

maximum thickness and extent in segments 10 to 18, where the uppermost lobe

comes tn be transversely rugose and resembles the furrows of the venermtin in

the same region. After about segment 20 these parapodial areas are abruptly

absent, Dorsal and ventral cirri are slender, short and inconspicuous; they are

simple and tapering throughout the body.

Setae are in thick, yellow fascicles and most numerous in anterior segments.

Those in notopodia are entirely spinigerous (fig. 11). Neuropodia have both

spinigers and falcigers (fig. 7-10). The latter have a cutting edge with a single

series of denticles (fig. 7, 9); they terminate in a curved process that is bounded

hy a series of denticulations continuous from the cutting edge Acicula occur

singly in parapodial rami; each is a slender, distally tapering, straight black rod;

the deeply embedded base is pale,

In postmedian segments, from about segment 50 in shorter, to about segment

68-70 in longer, individuals, there is present, immediately within the base of the

dorsal cirrus, a papillar organ which comes to increase im size to surpass that of

its corresponding dorsal cirrus (fig: 6); its distal end is penetrated by a pore,

By means of microtome sections @* it is possible fo trace ducts which penetrate

these papillae, and to follow their coutse inte the coelomic spaces. Occasionally

ohe can find larger ova in the cut. It can hardly be doubted but that these are

coelomoducts which function at maturity for release of gonadial products.

Whether primitively retained from ancestral stages, or secondarily derived might

be determined from a study of the development of this species, Among the

numerous individuals examined, I have found only ovigerous ones, all showing

the coclomostomes present from an anteromedian region to the posterior end of

the body.

In this connection it is interesting to recall a statement by the late F. 5.

Goodrich (1945, p. 173): “In species of Nercidae, co-existing with metanephridia

are a pait of specialized coclomostomes, the so-called ‘dorsal ciliated) organs.’ .. -

They occur in all species... bul may vary somewhat in size. They appear in the

young, persist throughout life, though in the heteronereid phase they are usually

reduced or absent. That this ‘dorsal ciliated organ’ is indeed the representative

in the Nereidae of the coclomoduct or genital funnel of the Capitellidae and other

Polychaeta, .... there can now be no doubt .. . But it has lost its original genital

function in the Nereidae, no longer requires an opening to the exterior, and has

become converted into a ‘ciliophagocytal organ,’ at all events in the majority of

species in which the genital products are known to escape by dehiscence . - . It

is possible, however, that some species still exist which have no specialized

epitokous stage, and that in them the caelamostomes still function as genital dicts.”

be ey OS ed ne "ee

7) J am indebted to My, Donald J. Reish for the preparation of the sections,

It seems probable that Australonereis ehlersi is indeed such a species in

which the dorsal ciliated organ is replaced by the coelomostome, and that it func-

tions as a genital duct, acquiring an opening to the exterior. There is no indication

of epitoky or parapodial transformation in the individuals that have been examined,

The pygidium is a terminal, dark brown collar; a pair of long, cirriform

processes is inserted ventrally; each is about as long as the last 10 segments.

Fig, 7-11

Australonerets ehlerst

Neuropodial falciger seen

from the side, x 521.

. Distal end of a neuro-

podial falciger showing

details of cutting edge

and terminal fang, x 2010.

Neuropodial falciger seen

from the cutting edge,

showing arrangement of

single row of denticula-

tions, x 521.

Distal end of a neuro-

podial falciger seen from

the cutting edge, x 2010.

Portion of a homogomph

spiniger seen from the

side, the tapering pointed

tip not shown, x 521.

Australonerets ehlersi was first assigned to the genus Leonnates (Augener,

1913) and later to Leptonerets (Monro, 1938, p. 618). Augener thought that the

oral ring is papillate; Monro found the maxillary ring to have papillae. Augener

found no falcigers above the neuroaciculum; Monro found them in anterior

segments; Augener called the falcigers heterogomph; Monro said they are nearly

to quite homogomph. These discrepancies can readily be attributed to subjective

interpretations. The species cannot be assigned to Leonnates Kinberg or

Leptonereis Kinberg. In the first the maxillary ring of the proboscis has horny

paragnaths ; in the second the proboscidial rings are both bare.

Australonereis. ehlersi is now known from opposite sides of the southern

half of Australia, at Swan River, Western Australia and Lakes Entrance, Victoria.

CreratocepHaLa Malmgren, 1867, emended

Type C. tovenr Malmgren

The generic diagnosis is here expanded to include species in which the

pharyngeal papillar processes are present on both rings of the proboscis instead

of only the oral ring (see Hartman, 1952, pp. 15-18, for detailed account),

Ceratocephala edmondsi, n. sp.

Fig. 12-17

Locality—American River, Kangaroo Island, South Australia; very common

in the sand of a cockle (Katelysia sp.) bank (9 specimens}, coll. S. J. Edmonds.

Length of a larget, posteriorly incomplete, individual is 27-39 mm.; width

at the widest (anterior) part is 3-4 mm.; number of segments is more than 60.

The general colour (preserved) is pale with melanistic spots on dorsal and

yentral sides; it resembles that of species of Platynercis, The prostomiuni has

two pairs of eyes that are large, subequal, in trapezoidal arrangement; the

anterior ones are wider apart. The ptoboscis (everted) shows the following parts:

area I (fig, 12) has one papilla, If and V are bare; TIT and EV together have

5 cirriform papillae in a transverse row; V1 has a single papilla on a side; VIL

and VIII have 9 cirriform papillae in a transverse row (fig. 13). Jaws are thin,

translucent, horny brown; they have 7 to 9 shallow crenulations at the cutting

edge.

The first 2 parapodia on a side are uniramous; each has composite spinigers

and falcigers; succeeding parapodia are biramous. From the third a notopodium

is developed and has a full fascicle of composite spinigers. At the cighth or ninth

notopodium there are 15 to 20 spinigers and single black acicula. Neuropodia have

a supra-acictilar bundle of about 10 spinigers and 9 falcigers, and single black

acicula that taper distally and are turned upward at the tip. The sub-acicular setal

bundle has about 14 falcigers (fig. 16) and 7 spinigers (fig. 17). Dorsal and

ventral cirri are simple throughout. A fiftieth parapodium is shown in hg. 14

and an eighth one in fig, 15-

The habitat is sandy beaches in which cockle shells occur; the nereid accupies

a sandy tube constructed with a thin. gelatinous matrix (observation by Mr. S. J.

Edmonds). .

Ceratocephala edmondsi differs from other species of the genus in that the

maxillary ring of the pharynx has papillae instead of lacking them; ventral citri

are simple throughout, instead of double on sume or all segments, The genus is

4 small one, known for only 5 or 6 other species or subspecies (Hartman, 1952,

p. 19) from widely scattered parts of the world. C. edmondsi is the only one

known from Australia, C. sibogae Horst, off Dutch Fast Indies, is the nearest

in geographic range. It is clearly separable from C, edmondsi in. its pharyngeal

processre in that ihe former has papillae nearly absent, with only 2 present on

area V. |

Tt is a pleasure to dedicate the species to its collector, Mr. 5. J. Edmonds

of the University of Adelaide, South Australia.

C. ediondst is known from only one locality, American River, Kangaroo

Island, South Australia, littoral,

13,

14,

15,

16.

17.

Fig. 12-17. Ceratocephala edmondst

Anterior end with everted proboscis and first 6 setigers, in dorsal view,

»% 15.

Anterior end with proboscis everted, in. ventral view, x 15,

Fifticth parapodium seen from the front, x 45,

Eighth parapodium seen from the front, x 45.

Neuropodial falciger from a posterior parapodium, x 700.

Articulating portion of a spiniger, seen from the side, x 700

Micronerets Claparéde, 1863

Type M. vartecaTta Chiparéde

Micronereis halei, n. sp.

Fig. 18-21

Locality—Sellick Beach, South Austtalia, at outer edge of reef, 16 Januany

1936, at low tide from stones in rock pools (12 individuals), coll, Mr. HW, M.

Hale and Mr. K. Sheard.

This is a small, white species, greatest length is about 7 mm. ; width 0°55 mm,

without and 0°85 mm, with parapodia, Number of segments is 20 to 25. The

prostomium is broadly quadrate (fig. 18); its posterior margin is clearly marked

off from the first segment. There are 2 pairs of lenticulaied eyes, with the anterior

pair slightly larger and wider apart than the posterior one; all are similar in that

the basal part is dark red and there is a large, spherical pate lens. The frontal

margin of the prostomium is weakly indented, and the smal] oval paired palpi

can be seen only by viewing the prostomium from below. There are no prostomial

frontal antennae. The four pairs of tentacular cirri are directed forward and

outward; all are similar with slight variation in length; the antero-ventral pair

are shortest and the dorsal posterior pair arc longest. All 8 are on short bases

(not shown in fig. 18). Each has a slight subdistal swelling, diffusely brown in

colour, with a simulted articulation just below the brown pigment.

The first segment has uniramous parapodia in which the setal lobe is long,

compressed, directed laterally ; it has a cirriform ventral cirrus that is attached

near the middle of the parapodial base; it extends distally not as far as the Jobe.

Stumps of 8 to 10 slender setae and single acicula are visible. The second para-

podium is’ similar to the first but a little larger.

The third and successive segments have biramous parapodia. Notopodia

and neuropodia are widely separated from eath other, The dorsal cirrus is a long,

cirriform process at the upper, outer edge; the ventral citrus is similar but

somewhat shorter afd attached near the middle of the lower base of the para-

podium. In addition, both notopodia and neuropodia have a long, digitate lobe

that extends distally, attached one at the inferior outer edge of the notopodium,

the other at the superior outer edge of the neuropodium (fig. 20). These Inbes

resemble dorsal and ventral cirri but they are not so thick and extend laterally

not quite as far as the cirri. Acicular lobes are compressed, broadly triangular and

have an acute tip.

All setae are homogomph spinigers (fig. 2) with the longest appendages

several times as long as the shortest ones. The uppermost have the longest

appendage and the length diminishes gradually ventrally. Notopodia have 15 to

25 spinigers and single yellow acicula, Neuropodia have 15 to 20 spinigers and

single yellow acicula,

The pharyngeal apparatus (seen only by dissection since the proboscis was

not everted on any individual) is a subspherical, muscularized mass. It connects

distally with the mouth and proximally with the thin-walled, alimentary tract.

There are no paragnaths, A pair of large translucent, yellow jaws are inserted,

one on either side of the muscular tissue. Each jaw is broadly oval at the base

and continued distally to end in about 6 triangular teeth along the concave cutting

edge (fig. 19). If the jaws are dimorphic in this species as they have been

described for M. variegata Claparéde ( Racovitza, 1893), it may be presumed that

the description is based on the jaws of a female individual.

‘The only other known species of the genus is Micrunereis viriegata Cla-

paréde, from the Mediterranean Sea, more widely recorded from western Canada

(Berkeley and Berkeley, 1948, p. 60), though with some doubt. M. variegala

Claparéde differs from M. hale? in that digitate lobes are lacking fron: the inner,

Fig. 18-21. Micronereis halet

18. Anterior end in dorsal view, proboscis retracted, x 94,

19, An entire jaw plate showing distal toothed edge and embedded part,

x 417,

20. A median parapodium in posterior view, x 62:5,

21. Spinigerous seta from a median parapodium, x 1638,

proximal margins in the first; the pharyngeal jaws lack the broad base, and the

first parapodia have conspicuous tufts of setae. Prostomial and peristomial struc-

tures also differ (see Fauvel 1923, pp. 332-333, for illustrated account).

It is a pleasure to name this species for its collector, Mr. Herbert M. Hale,

Director of the South Australian Museum.

Micronereis halet has been found only from littoral zones in South Australia.

Namanerzrs. Chamberlin, 1919

Type N. guapraticers (Blanchard)

NAMANEREIS QUADRATICEPS (Blanchard), 1849

Lycastis quadraticeps Benham, 1909, pp. 242-244, pl. ix, fig. 2-10.

This brackish nereid was fitst described from Chile. Benham (1909, p. 244)

recorded it from Campbell Island, on shore near the exit of a creek from the

flank of Mount Honey; the shore above high-water mark is traversed by numerous

little watercourses oozing through the earth above (Benham); also in sea pools,

Benham's detailed description compares so favourably with individuals I have

examined from southern and central California, from a similar brackish niche,

that specific identity seems probable, The only differences 1 can find are these:

The pygidium shown by Benham (his fig. 5) as a constricted collar with a pair

of divergent lateral processes, is shorter and has a longer venttal lobe with the

anal aperture between the upper and lower parts; the ventral portion has a pair

of small, oval papillae inserted at the distalmost margin. Neuropodial falcigers

are shown by Benham with a single series of subequal crenulations at the cutting

edge; I see a single row of teeth that are longest near the base and diminish in

size to near the distal third. The pharyngeal jaws have teeth that are long, sharp,

obliquely inserted. These differences may haye no specific importance,

Namanereis quadraticeps may be expected to occur in high mtertidal zones

of the southern shores of Australia; it should be sought especially in zones where

there is only a light spray of sea-water,

Neantues Kinberg, 1866

Type N. vaari Kinberg

The collections have made possible an examination of the type species from

the type locality, for a gentis which is widely represented in littoral zones of the

Northern Hemispdere. Both atokal and epitokal individuals of both sexes are

represented, The account below is based om these collections.

NEANTHES VAALIY Kinherg, 1866

; Fig. 22-25

Neanthes vaalii Kinberg, 1866, p, 171.

Nereis albanyensis Augener, 1913, pp. 149-154, pl. ii, fig. 6, text fig. 14,

Neanthes vaalic Augener, 1922, pp. 20-21-

Localities—American River, Kangaroo Island, in mud flats (5 individuals),

call. S. J. Edmonds; Port Adelaide, in tidal river (2 male and 8 female epitokes),

coll. S. J. Edmonds; Rushcutters Bay, Port Jackson, scraped off hull of a yacht,

6 Oct. 1950, (1), coll. B. Dew; Athol Bight, public jetty, off piles, 12 Oct. 1950,

(2), coll. B. Dew; Milsons Point, Port Jackson, off piles and mooring chains,

23 Oct., 1950, (3), coll. B. Dew; Venus Bay Inlet, Eyre Peninsula, South Aus-

tralia, associated with clusters.of Modiolus, (3), coll. S- J. Edmonds; Point

Wynyard, north-west Tasmania, Apr. 1936 (4 tiny individuals), coll. H. M. Hale

and N. B, Tindale,

Preserved, the pigment pattern resembles that of Platynercis species in having

dark segmental spots over the dorsum and parapodia. Length of atoke individuals

(preserved) is 70 mm. Notopodia have spinigers only; neuopodia have a supra-

acicular fascicle of homogomph spinigers and heterogomph falcigers, and a sub-

acicular fascicle of heterogomph spinigers and heterogomph falcigers (fig. 25),

There are no notopodial falcigers.

In male epitokes the first 7 sepments have thickened dorsal cirri; the first

18 segments are otherwise unmodified, or the eighteenth is slightly changed with

a jew accessory lobes, Natatory setae are present from segment 19. Natatory

parapodia are present to the end of the body; the pygidium has a rosette of many

similar, slender papillae. Overall size is somewhat less than that for the female

which measures to 50 mm. long.

Typical natatory parapodia (fig. 24) have dorsal cirri that are crenulate,

and accessory lobes, In epitokal females modified natatory setae are present from

segments 21 to 89; parapodia from 90 to 102 (posterior end) differ in having

only single dark acicula in each ramus (setae lacking); the body terminates in a

pygidium with a constricted smooth collar,

In mature individuals the 4 prostomial eyes are enlarged, arranged in a

rectangle; each is a circular convex disk, purplish red at the periphery, fading

centrally ; each has a tiny white circular lens,

In atokal individuals the notopodia lack conspicuous preacicular and post-

acicular lobes such as characterize northetn reptesentatives of the genus Neanthes,

notably N. virens (Sars) and N, brandi (Malmgren). Median (fg. 22) and

posterior (fig, 23.) parapodia are similar to one another.

The pharyngeal processes (based on a female epitokal individual from Port

Adelaide) are arranged thus: I has 2 cones in tandem; If has 10 cones in @

triangular area; III has about 22 cones in a broadly oval patch; IV has a large

crescent of about 30 cones of larger and smaller cones; area V has 3 cones in a

triangle; V1 has 3 cones in a transverse line; VII and VIII (continuous) have

2 or 3 irregular rows of 30 or more cones.

Nerets ulbanyensis Augener, 1913, p. 152. froni Western Australia has been

referred to Neanthes vaalii Kinberg (Augener, 1922, p. 20). Nereis (Neanthes)

albanyensis Kott (1951, p. 106) from Peint Peron, Western Australia, is another

species and belongs to the genus Nereis, s,s, since there are dorsal falcigers in

notopedia.

The distribution of Neanthes vaaltt is indicated in Chart I.

NEANTHES, near CRICOGNATHA {Ehblers) 1905

Nereis cricognatha Ehlers, 1905, p. 29; Augener, 1913, pp. 163-164.

Neanthes cricognatha Knox, 1951, pp. 217-218, pl.45, fig. 6-8; Fauvel, 1947, p, 8.

Nereis arenaceodentata Benham, 1916, p. 134, pl. 46, fig. 1-3.

Lacalities—American River, Kangaroo Island, {2}, coll. S, J. Edmonds;

Port Adelaide, otiter harbour pilings, sublittoral fouling materials, (1), coll, S. J.

Edmonds; Sellick Beach, South Australia, on edge of reef permanently covercd,

(2), coll, H. M. Hale.

[Length attains about 30 mn. Notopodia lack homogomph falcigers, thus this

is regarded as a species of Neanthes. Parapodial lobes are bordered with a dark,

glandular margit. On the proboscis both oral and maxillary rings have complete

circlets of many paragnaths.

The present individuals differ from Neanthes ericognatha previously recorded

(see synonymy above) in that areas V to VIIL of the proboscis have a circlet of

larger cones on the maxillary side, and 4 to 7 rows of uniformly much smaller

cones on the oral side,

The distribution of the stem species js indicated in Chart Il.

Fig. 22-25 Neanthes vaalti

22. A median parapodium in anterior view, showing maximum deyelopment

of acicular lobe, x 35-7.

23. Fifteenth last parapodium in anterior view, x 63°2,

24. Thirtieth parapodium from an epitokous male specimen, x 15-7.

25. Falcigerous neuropodial hook from an unmodified parapodium, x 658.

NEANTHES KRRGUELENSIS (McIntash), 1885

Nereis kerguelensis McIntosh, 1885, pp. 225-227, pl. 35, fig. 10-12, pl. 16s, fig. 17,

18; Fauvel, 1916, p, 433: Benham, 1916, p. 122.

Locatities—Port Willunga, S, Aust., 18 Nov,, 1945, (2), coll. 5. J. Edmonds;

and Sellick Beach, S$. Aust., on edge of reef, Jan. 1936, (1), coll, H. M. Hale,

Notopodia have spinigers only, thus this is referred to Neanthes Kinberg. On

the proboscis areas I and V are bare; VI has one cone ona side; VII and VIIT

have a single row of 9 cones; each of areas Il, IT] and IV has a heap of small

paragnaths. In posterior parapodia the notopodial lobe diminishes in size and is tar

surpassed by the acicular lobe of the same segment.

Nereis kerguelensis oligodonte. Augener (1913, pp. 164-166), from Westeru

Australia, also lacks homogomph falcigers and is presumably a species of

Neanthes, It differs frony the stem species in having only 3 cones in a transverse

row on areas VIT and VIIT.

NEANTHES ANGUSTICOLLIS (Augener), 1913

Nereis angusticolis Augener, 1913, pp. 145-149, pl. 2, fig. 14. text fig. 13.

Not Kinberg, 1866, p. 169.

Notopodial falcigers are absent, thus this is referred to Neanthes Kinherg.

On the proboscis area I has 7 or & cones in an oval heap, IT has at feast 20 in

an oblique triangular area; [11 has about 12 in an oblique oval group; IV has

about 25 cones in a triangle; V is bare; VI has 9 or 6 in a rounded group; VIL

and VIII fotm a broad transverse band with 2 ar 3 ta 5 rows, the band widest

midventrally and narrowing toward the ends, Acicula are black and occur singly

in parapodial bases,

Nereis angusticollis Kinberg (1866, p. 160) from Tahiti is a Nereis, sensu

stricto, since there are homogomph falcigers in notapodia.

Nereis Litnaeus, 1758

Type N. Pe_acica Linnaeus

The species of Nereis from the southern half of Australia are peculiar for

having several in which the notopodial lobe diminishes in size going back, and

homogomph falcigers have a large lateral tooth near the apex. These characters

are known for N. falearia, N. jacksoni, N. denhamensis and N. thompsont {see

helow). In others the oral ring is nearly to quite bare, approaching a condition

in species of Ceratonereis Kinberg; such are the species N. jacksom and N. fal-

coria, Others have tentacular (buceal) cirri that are annulate, as in N. cockburn-

ensis. These features are neither generic nor limited to Australian species, but

are more frequently encountered among species from the southern hemisphere

than elsewhere, Thus, the coarsely toothed homogomph falciger is known for

N, sonata-persica Fuuvel from Persia, and for N, fusachalensis Langerhans trom

Madeira, The postericr notopodial lobe diminishes in size in Neanthes kerguelensis

(Melntosh) (see Ehlers, 1897). Annulation of tentacular cirri is encountered in

other species and genera, notably Nereis eugeniae (see Ehlers, 1897), Nereis

angusta Kinberg (1866), Neanthes kerguelensis {see Ehlers, 1897), Neanthes

ruficeps (Ehlers, 1905) and Platynereis australis (see Ehlers, 1905), all from

the Southern Hemisphere.

The several species discussed below ate those which have oceurred in

greatest abundance and for which some details have been obscure-

NeREIS DENHAMENSIS Angencr, 1913

Nerets denhamensis Augener, 1913, pp. 156-159, pl. 3. fig. 51, text fig. 16;

Fauvel, 1922, p. 494; Kott, 1951, pp. 99-101, fig. 3, 4-

Homogomph falcigers first. appear alter seginent 20 to 30 and number 3 or 4

in a fascicle; they are thicker than their accompanying spinigers. The falcate

appendage is short, weakly curved and projects from the end of the shaft for

only about hali its length; the cutting edge has 2 or 3 small teeth.

On the proboscis area J has 1 or 2 cones in tandem; I! has about 12 cones

in 2 rows; IIT has about 12 cones in 3 rows; IV has 12 to 15 cones in a triangular

patch; V has none; VI has 8 to 10 in an oval patch of 2 or 3 rows; VIT and VIII

have a single row of 8 to 10 larger cones.

In epitokal male individuals the parapodial change to natatory condition ts

at segment 15. Dorsal cirri of modified segments are sharply geniculate in their

distal extremity and crenulate along the outer margin of the basal pert.

One character named by Augener (1913, p. 158) but not commented on

further, states that: “An den vorderen Rudera mit dorsalen Gratenborsten ist die

Spitze der ventralen Sicheln gedeckt.” If this indicates the presence of a hooded

condition of anterior neurofalcigers, it describes a character unique for this

species.

See Chari 1 for distribution.

Nereis JACKSON] Kinberg, 1866

Fig. 26-29

Nereis jacksoni Kinberg, 1866, p. 169; Augener, 1922, pp. 27-30, fig. 6; Augener,

1927, pp, 130-133; Knox, 1951, pp. 216-217; Kott, 1951, pp. 95-98; fig, 3.

Nereis heirissonensis Augener, 1913, pp. 159-163, pl. 3, fig, 52, text fig. 17.

Localities—Sellick Beach, Sth, Aust,, on edge of recf permanently covered

and at low tide, Jan. 1936, (1), coll. H, M. Hale and K. Sheard; Shell Point,

Botany Bay, N.S.W,, from a 6-month fouling plate, estuarine, Feb, 1947, (4),

coll, B. Dew; Cape Cove, Port Jackson, N.S.W., dredged in 3-4 fms, from a

gritty bottom, Oct, 1950 (4), coll. B. Dew; Hungry Paint, Cronulla, N.S.W.,

under rocks, Sept. 1950, (2), coll. B. Dew,

The proboscis has few paragnaths; areas T and VY have none; EH and IIT

have a few cones and 1V has a few more; V1 has 1 to 4 only; VII and VIII have

a single row of only 2 fo about 7 cones (see also Chart 1V), Jaws are dark

amber in colour, thin, and haye 5 or 6 oblique teeth at the cutting edge.

Prostomial antennae are long; they extend forward to near the distal end

of the palpi. Peristomial cirri are short, the longest reaches back only to about

the second setigerous segment and others are shorter; all are irregularly

annulated. The 4 eyes are embedded and visible through the smooth epithelium;

the 2 of a side are neater together but widely separated from those of the opposile

side; the anterior ones are the larger, Each eye bas a reddish purple iris and a

large pale to white Jens, nearly or over half as large as the diameter of the eye.

The anterior margin of the prostomitim is entire, not incised.

In posterior segments the notopodial, or supra-acicular, lobe diminishes

(fig. 26) conspicuously in size but is visible as a distinct lobe to the end of the

hady. Homogomph falcigers are present in median and posterior segments ; their

earliest presence varies from the fourteenth, or not before segment 17 or 18.

They have an appendage (fig. 27, 28) that is short, distally bifid; those in front

are similar to those behind or the latter may Jack the basal-most teeth (fig. 29),

Some individuals from Shell Point, Botany Bay, taken 2 Feb, 1941, are

ovigerous, with large ova crowding the body cavity from the third setiger more

posteriorly. There are no signs of epitoky, such as the presence of modified lobes

or specialized setae. Indications are that development is direct. This is in contra-

diction to what Kort (1951, p. 97) found for individuals from Western Australia.

Augener (1913, pp. 159-60) examined about 50 specimens taken from May to

September and found them all atokal,

The more extended distribution is indicated in Chart IV.

; NeEREIS THOMPSONI Kott, 1951

Nereis (Neanthes) thompsoni Kott, 1951, pp. 103-105, fig. 5.

This is here referred to Nerets since notopodia have homogomph falcigers.

lt bears resemblance to Nerets denhamensis (see above) but differs in its much

higher paragnathal count, See Charts I to IV for diagnostic characteristics.

Fig, 26-29 Nereis jacksoni

26, Twenty-sixth parapodium seen from the front, x 40.

27, A homogomph falciger from twenty-sixth parapodium seen from the

side, x 620. ;

28. A homogomph falciger from twenty-sixth parapodium seen from the

cutting edge, x 620.

29. A homogomph falciger from a far posterior parapodium, x 400.

NEREIS PERONIENSIS Kott, 1951

Neréis callaona peroniensis Kott, 1951, pp. 101-102, fig. 4,

This is here erected to specific category since its affinities are believed to be

more remote from Nerets callaoana Grube than its author thought. In N. per-

oniensis the homogomph. falcigers of posterior notopodia taper distally to a blunt

point and have a coarse tooth at the cutting edge. In N. callaona Grube the

corresponding falciger has a much longer appendage that is distally anchylosed

and there are no coarse teeth along the cutting edge (see N, pseudonereis Hart-

man 1940, pls: 26, 27, a synonym of Nereis callaona Grube, for further charac-

teristics). N. cailaona Grube ts known only from Peru.

) I am indebted to Mr. Donald J. Reish for having made a comparison of type

specimens. 7

N. peroniensis Kott comes nearer Nereis sonata persica Fauvel, as described

by Pruvot (1930, pp. 47-50, pl. 3) from New Caledonia, In both the pharyngeal

armature and notopodial falcigers show great resemblance.

NEREIS COCKBURNENSIS Atigener, 1913

Fig, 30-32

Nereis cockburnensis Augener, 1913, pp. 153-156, fig. 15 a-c.

Localities—Sellick Beach, 5. Aust., from stones in rock pools, Apr. 1936

(about 31 individuals meluding some epitokes), coll. H. Hale; Sellick Beach,

St, Vincent Gulf, from limestone reef covered at dead low water, Jan. 1937, (10),

coll. H. M. Hale; Royal Australian Navy torpedo range at Pittwater, Broken Bay,

from piles and under tocks, (5), coll. B. Dew; Pennington Bay, south coast of

Kangaroo Island, (3), coll. S. J, Edmonds,

Tentacular cirri are annulate, resemble those of a eunicid [thus not as shown

by Augener, 1913, pl. 3, fig. 47). The longest cirri when laid back, reach to the

hfth setigerous segment,

A wnique and heretofore undescribed feature is the presence of 2 kinds of

notopodial falcigers. Anterior segments, from the first biramous one, haye homo-

gomph falcigers with a toothed cutting edge (fig. 30) resembling that of the

corresponding neuropodial, heterogomph falciger (31). In median and posterior

segments these notopodial falcigergs are replaced by ohe which has a shorter

appendage and traces of transverse ridges (fig. 32).

On the proboscis area I has a single tooth or 3 small cones in tandem

(Augener described none); II has 10 cones in 2 rows (Augener gave 8 cones

in 2 rows); II] has only 4 to 6 cones (Augener said 2 m tandem) ; 1V has about

18 cones in 3 rows with the largest ones on the side toward the jaws (Augener

gave 5 to 11 cones in 2 or 3 rows). Area V has about 8 smaller cones or varying

to only 1 cone (Augener gave 6 coties in 2 tows); VU has 5 or 4 cones in a

circular area (as Augener stated) ; VIL and VIII have a continuous band of many

paragnaths with a single row of about 9 larger ones on the side toward the jaws

(Atgener described a broad band of many), and 5 to 7 irregular rows of many

closely spaced cones on the side toward the mouth,

In postmedian segments the upper notopodial lobe comes to be small, triangu-

lar and diminishes farther back as an inconspicuous Jobe,

An epitokal ovigerous individual, from Sellick Beach, 11 April 1936, has

homogomph faleigers present from the first biramous parapodium. Accessory

natatory lobes are first present from segment 17, at the upper base of the dorsal

cirrus. Natatory setae are also present, but not yet emergent, from seement 17.

The last 11 segments lack accessory Johes, indicating the presence of a third body

region in epitoky.

Nerets cockhyrnensis was first described from Sharks Bay in 244. meters,

and Cockburn Sound, South Channel in 63-8 metres on a rocky bottom. The

present collections come from South Australia and New South Wiles,

Peeineneis Kinberg, 1866

Type P. ametyoponta (Schmarrda)

The 14 species indicated on Charts I io IV (see above) are largely tropical

or subtropical, thus belonging mainly to the Damperian and Solanderian pro-

vinces or to New Zealand. A few species oceur along southern shores of Aus-

tralia (see below).

PERINEREIS AMBLYODUNTA (Schmarda), 1861

Nereis amblyodonta Schinarda, 1861, p, 106; Ehlers, 1905, p. 28.

Perinereis novae-hallandiaeg Kinberg, 1866, p. 175 and 1910, pl. 20, fig. 9.

Nereis (P arpersis) amblyodonta Augencr, 1913, pp. 174-175; Augener, 1922,

pp. 22-23.

Localt#ies—American River and lagoons, Kangaroo Island, under rocks and

in mud flats; also in Venus Bay jetty, with colonies of Gealeolaria, (8), coll. S. J.

Edmonds; Port Willunga, S. Aust., in colonies of Hormosira, (4), coll. Miss P.

Mawson; Port Jackson, Sydney Harbour, N.S.W., under rocks and in chimps

of Galeolaria, (7), coll. B. Dew; Milsons Point, Port Jackson, N.S.W., wharf

piles and on mooring chains, (1), coll. B. Dew.

Nerets cockburnensts

Fig. 30-32

30. A notopodial — falciger

from sixth parapodium,

x 650.

31. A nenropodial falciger

from sixth parapodium,

x 650.

32. A notopodial — falciger

from a far posterior seg-

ment, x 650.

This species is easily identified for the presence of long dorsal lobes of

posterior notopodia, and for the arrangement of paragnaths on areas V and VI.

See Charts I to IV for further details and more extended distribution.

PERINEREIS VARIODENTATA Augener, 1913

Nereis (Perinereis) variodentata Augener, 1913, pp. 179-182, pl. 3, fig. 50, text

fig. 19.

Localities—Sellick Beach, St. Vincent Gulf, S, Aust., from stones in rock

pools at low tide and from limestone reef covered at dead low water, (2), coll.

H. M. Hale; Pt, Wynward, north-west Tasmania, April 1936, (2), coll N, B.

Tindale.

See Charts [ to IV for distinguishing characteristics and distribution.

PERINEREIS VALLATA (Grube) 1857

Nereilepas pacifica Schmarda, 1861, p. 107.

Nereis (Periagress) vailata Augener, 1913, pp. 175-177; Augener, 1923, pp. 26-

Perinereis vallata Fauval, 1932, pp. 108-109; Knox, 1951, pp. 218-219, pls, 45-46.

Locelity—Port Willunga, S. Aust., (1), coll. 5. J. Edmonds.

See Charts I ta IV for further details.

PratyNertis Kinberg, 1866

Type P. wacaLHarnsis. Kinberg

Among the 5 species to be encountered in littoral zones in Australia and

New Zealand, 1, P. australis (Schmarda) is perhaps limited to New Zealand;

another, P. polyscalma Chamberlin, is tropical. P. magalhaensis Kinberg, P. dum-

erilii antipoda, new subspecies, and P. bicenaliculata (Baird) occur in the

Peronian and Flindersian proyinces but all are not limited to them. See also

Charts I-IV, above.

PLATYNEREIS DUMERILIT ANTIPODA, new subspecies

Fig, 33-37

Nereis (Platynereis) australis Augener, 1913, pp. 182-184, and Augener, 1923,

pp. 35-39. Not Schmarda, 1861. .

Localities—Pennington Bay, south coast of Kangaroo Island, among algae,

(5), coll. S. J. Edmonds; Pittwater, Broken Bay, N.S5.W., on piles. Sept, 1949,

associated with Nereis cockburnensis and Perinereis calmani, (2, including 1 sub-

epitoke), coll. B. Dew; Hungry Point, Cronulla, N.S.W., Aug. 1950, (2) coll.

B. Dew: Elizabeth Bay, Port Jackson, N,S.W., from mooring buoy, 28 Oct.

1950 (1 subepitoke female), coll. B. Dew; Point Wynward, north-west Tas-

mania, (5), coll. H. M. Hale; Sellick Beach, St. Vincent Gulf, 5. Aust., lime-

stone reef covered at dead low water (8 juveniles), coll. H. M. Hale.

These individuals have been compared with Platynerets dumerii (Audouin

mn M. Edwards) from the Mediterranean Sea. A comparison of diagnostic parts

ollows:

P_d. antipoda P. dumerilit

South Australia Mediterranean Sea

Notopodial spinigers in median and 1-3/40, thus ure shorter- 1/80, ius are longer-

posterior segments have a length/ appendaged appendaged

width ratio of:

Median parapodia, at about seg- 3 spinigers and 10 spinigers only

ment 40, have a supra-acicular 3 falcigers

fascicle oft

First presence of notopodial (fig. Anteromedian segments, Postmedian segments, and

37) faleigers is in: where they are numer- they are incolispicuous

ous and conspicuous and few

Acicula are coloured: light to dark brown black

Dorsal lobe of median and posterior subquadrate subtriangular

segments is:

Paragnaths of area VI are: obscure, with 2 weakly 2 well-developed rows. of

developed rows of pectinae —pectitiae

Dorsal cirri of posterior segments very long (fig. 36) not so long

are;

In female epitoke, the upper base a long digitate lobe a short foliaceous lobe

of the ventral cirrus has: (fig. 35)

In female epitoke, the posterior a dipitate process no digitate process

neuroacicular Jobe has: (fig. 36)

In female epitoke, the parapodial segment 22/23 segment 22-23/24 or

change is at: 22/23, or 24/25

In the female epitoke the first 7 pairs of dorsal cirri enlarge (fig. 33) gradually.

The phatyngeal armature (specimen from Pt. Wynyard, Tasmania) shows

areas I, IT and V bare; JIT has 2 rows of obscure pectinae; 1V is the most con-

spicuous area of the pharynx, with about 4 transverse series of pectinae; VI has

2 or 3 short lines of very weak pectinae; VII and VIII is an interrupted band

with about 5 patches of 2 short rows each,

Individuals from Tasmania have simple gregarines in the alimentary tract,

through middle and posterior third regions of the body.

P. dumerilii ocellata Pruyot (1930) from New Caledonia differs from

P. dumerilii antipeda in that area VI of the proboscis is hare; the prostomium is

marked with 3 dark spots, resembling eyes, hence the varietal name.

P, dumerilit antipoda is known only from the Flindersian province,

PLATYNEREIS MAGALIAENSIS Kinberg

Platynercis magalhaensis Kinberg, 1866, p. 177.

Nereis (Perinercis) magalhaensis Augener, 1923, pp, 28-39.

Locality—Sellick Beach, $8. Aust., low tide, 16 Jan., 1936, (2), coll. H. M.

Hale and K. Sheard.

This is hardly separable from P. australis (Schmarda} from New Zealand,

except in its epitokal stages. In this the male epitoke has the first 21 segments

unmodified and natatory setae from segment 22; the female has 25 segments

unmodified and natatory setae from segment 26. In both species the notopodia

nearly or quite lack falcigers; a weakly developed one may be found in posterior

segments, Other characteristics are detailed in Charts I to IV, above.

PLATYNEREIS BICANALICULATA (Baird), 1863

Fig. 38, 39

Nereis bicanaliculata Baird, 1863, p. 109,

Nereis agassizi Ehlers, 1868, pp. 542-546, pl. 23, fiz. 1.

Localities—Hungry Point, Cronulla, N.S.W., on fouling plate, 28 Sept.,

1950 (1 female); Athol Bight, public jetty, 12 Oct. 1950, on kelp root (9);

Camp Coye, Watsons Bay, Port Jackson, in 6-8 fms., 6 Oct. 1950 (6, including

subepitokes) ; Port Jackson, on piles and mooring chains, 23 Oct. 1950 (15);

all collections are from New South Wales, made by Miss Barbara Dew,

This strikingly characterized species is well known from the north-east

Pacific as Platynereis agussizi (Ehlers), It was arresting to find it well repre-

sented in the collections. from New South Wales. This led to a re-examination

of large series from various parts af the Pacific, including some from Hawaii,

33,

34,

35.

36.

de.

Fig. 33-37, Platynereis dumerilii antipoda

wan et parapodium from female epitoke, showing enlarged dorsal cirrus,

x 100,

Twenty-second parapodium from female epitoke, in posterior view, x 70,

Twelfth epitokal parapadium from female, in posterior view, x 50. d

ce posterior parapodiym from female epitoke, seen from the front,

x B83, ;

A notopodial falciger from a posterior segment (specimen from Tas-

mania), x 832,

Nereis bicanaliculata Baird from Vancouver Island, western Canada, and many

other collections from widely scattered parts of the eastern Pacific. I am unable

to distinguish them morphologically, and am therefore indicating the synonymy

above,

Fig. 38-39

Platynereis bicanaliculata

38. A simple notopodial fal-

ciger from a specimen

from New South Wales,

x 500.

39, A comparable notopodial

falciger from one from

California, x 500,

Most individuals (preserved) from New South Wales are melanistic, have

paired dark patches over the sides of the body and along the parapodial bases.

Large, simple, notopodial falcigers (fig. 38) are present from about segment 10

or 12 to the posterior end of the body; they occur singly or by twos or threes

and have a dark brown to black tip. A corresponding falciger taken from a

specimen from California is shown in fig. 39.

Neuropoilial falcigers ate composite, first present from about segment 50

and continue to the end of the body; they are most numerous in a fascicle in front

and diminish in number behind.

On the pharynx the Australian individuals differ slightly from those of Cali-

Fotis a that area IV of the proboscis is less, instead of more, conspicuous than

area UE.

The presence of simple notopodial falcigers is not limited to this genus ofr

species, hence cannot be regarded as generic, Ceratonereis erythraeensis Fauvel

has similar hooks in neuropodia,

The type collection of Nereis bicanaticulata Blaird (1863) deposited in the

British Museum (Natural History) contains 8 pale (faded) specimens in good

condition, The largest one, somewhat over 50 mm. long (thus about 2 inches as

Baird stated) consists of about 96 segments; it is posteriorly incomplete. In some

individuals the parapodia are subepitokous but none has natatory setae. In all,

there are one or 2 dark brown, simple notopodial falcigers, first present in para-

podia from segment 12 or 13 to the postertor end. On the proboscis areas I, Il

and V are bare; LII has a broad, oval patch; [V has a broad crescent of 7 to 10

irregular rows (this is the most conspicuous region) ; VI has 2 or 3 rows of

pectinae; VII and VIII, continuous, have 5 transverse rows of pectinae with faint

indications af 2 other rows at the ends proximal to area VI. Jaws have 7 oblique

tevth and a distal fang. These individuals are inseparable from what has usually

beet cae? Platynereis agassisi (Ehlers), widely known from the north-east

acmec,

Throughout its range, Pletynercis bicanaliculata is apt to occur with (or near)

Plaiynereis dumerilii (Aydouin and M, Edwards) or one of its varieties. They

ate easily separable in that P. bicanaliculuta has large, simple falcigers in noto-

ia whereas P, dumerilii (and its subspecies or varieties) have composite

alcigers in notopodia, P. bicanaliculata remains unknown except in northern and

southern parts of the Pacific; P. dumerilii is cosmopolitan in warm. seas.

LITERATURE CITED

Avcenen, H, 1913 Die Fauna Stidwest-Australiens. Polychaeta Erzantta. Merausg. von

Michaelsen und Hartmeyer, Jena, Bd. 4, pp. 45-304, 2 pls., 42 figs:

Aucenex, H, 1918 Polychaeta. Beitrage zur Kesntnis des Meeresfauna West-Afrikas.

Herausg. vor. W. Michaelsen, Hamburg, 2, Lief, 2, pp. 67-625, 6 pls.

Aucuner, H, 1922a Litorale Polychaeten von Juan Fernandez. The Natural History of Juait

Fernandez and Easter Island. Ed. by Dr. Carl Skottsberg, 3, pp. 161-218, 1 pl.

Aucensr, H, 1922b Australische Polychaeten des Hamburger zooloisches Museums. Arch

Naturg., Bertin, 88, Abt. A, pp. 1-37, 9 figs.

Aucener, H. 1922¢ Revision der Australisehen Polychaeten-Typen von Kinberg, Ark. Zool.

Stockholm, 14, pp. 1-42

Avarver, BH, 1922d Results of Dr. E. Mjdberg’s Swedish Scientific Expedition to Australia,

1910-13. Polychaeten. Vetensk, Akad. Stockhalm, Handl., 63, No. 6, pp. 1-49, 10 figs.

Ancexer, H. 1923 Polychaeten von den Auckland und Campbell Inseln, Vidensk. ‘Medd,

Naturh. Foren. Copenhagen, 75, pp. 1-115, 44 figs. :

Aucener, H, 1924 Polychaeta von Neuseeland. I. Errantiz. Jbid., 75, pp. 241-441, 11 figs,

Aucener, 1, 1927 Polychaeten yon Siidost- und Siid-Austrulien (Papers from Dr. Th,

Mortensen's Pacific Expedition 1914-16. No, 38). Ibid., 83, pp, 71-275, 17 figs.

Baigo, W. 1863 Descriptions of several new Species of Worms belonging to the Annelida

i ir Sedentaria or Tubicola of Milne Edwards. Zool, Soc. London, Proc.,

. 106-

Finanan, W. B. 1909 Report on the Polychaeta of the sub-Antaretie Tslands of New

land. In Reports based on obsetvations and collectians made during an expedition

on the Government steamer Hinemoa in November 1907, 1, pp. 236-250, 1_pl.

Bexaam, W, B. 1916a Notes on New Zealand Polychaeta. [1. New Zealand Inst. Proc.

Trans., 48, pp. 386-396

Tirweay, W.B. 1916b Report on the Polychaeta obtained hy the F,I.S. Exdeayour on

the coasts of New South Wales, Victoria, Tasmania and South Australia. Pr. 2.

Sydney, H. C Dannevig, 4, pis. 2 and 3, pp. 125-162, pls, 46-48

Bennam, W. B. 1927 Polychaete, British Antarctic Terra Nova Expedition, 1910. Nal.

Hist. Rep., Zool., 7, No, 2, pp, 47-182, 6 pls.

Beexecty, E, and BerkeLey, C. 3948 Annelida, Polychaea errantia. Canad. Pac, Fauna,

No. 96, (1). Fish. Res. Bd, Canada, Toronto, pp, 1-100, 160 figs.

Brancnarp, E. 1849 Anelides dy Chile, in Gay's Historia fisica ¥ politica de Chile. Segui

documentos adguiridos en esta republica durante doce anos de residencia en alla.

Zoologia. Paris, 3, pp, 9-52

Coamekeiin, RV, 1919 The Annelida Polychaeta. Mus Comp. Zool, Warvard, Mem. 48,

pp, 1-514, 80 pls.

Crank, Jl, 1, 1946 The Mchinoderm Fauna of Australia. Its composition and its origin,

Pub, Carnegie Inst, Wash,, No. 566. Washington, D.C. pp, iv and 567

Erures, E, 1408 Die Borstenwiirmer, Leipzig, W. Engelmann. xx and 748 pp, 24 pls,

Exrers, E. 1897 Polychaeten. Hamburger Magalhaenischen Sammelreise, Hamburg. Pricd-

richsen & Co, 148 pp., 9 pls,

Enters, F. 1905 Neuseelandische Auneliden, K. Ges. Wiss., Gottingen, Math-Phys. Kl,

neue Folge, 3, No. 1, pp, 1-80, 9 pls.

Fauyer, P. 1911 Anmneélides polychétes du golfe Persique reeueillies tar M, M, Bagovaw-

lensky. Arch. zool, exp. gén. Paris, ser. 5, 6, pp. 353-439, 3 pls.

Fauver, P, 1916 Annélides polychétes des Iles Falkland recueillies par M, Rupert Valléntin

{1902-1910}. Lbid., 55, pp. 417-482, 2 pls.

Fauver, P. 1917 Annélides polychétes de |’Australie moridionale lid, 56, pp 159.278,

6 pls, 2 charts

Faover, P. 1918 Annélides polychétes nouvelles de PALtique orientale, Mts. Hist. nat.

Paris, Bull. 24, pp. 503-509, 4 figs.

Fauve, P. 1919 Annélides polychétes de Madagasear, de Djibouti et du solfe Persapue.

Arch, zool, exp. gén. Paris, 58, pp. 315-473, pls. 15-17

Fauver, P. 1931 Polychetes de Madagascar, du. Museum d'Histoire naturelle recdeillies par

Mu. le Dr. W. Kandern en 1912, Ark. Zoul Stockholm, 13, No. 24, pp. 1-32, 0 pl,

2 fiys.

Fauven, P. 1922 Annélides polychétes de Varchinel Houtman Abrolliol (Australie occi-

dentule) recueilltes par M le Professeur W. G. Dakin, Linn Soc, London, Jour., 34,

pp. 487-500, 2 figs.

Fauyer, P. 1923 Annélides polychétes des iles Gurnbier et de la guvane francaise. Accatl:

Nuovi Lincei Rome, Mem., sér. 2, 6, pp, 1-59, 8 figs,

Fauyit, P, 1930 Annelida Potychaeta of the Madras Goverment Museum, Madras Govt.

Mus. Bull, ns., Nat. Hist. Soc. 1, No, 2, pp. 1-72, 18 fips.

Fauver, FP. 1932) Annelida polychaeta of the Indian Maseum, Caleutta. Tndian Mus Caletsita,

Mem., 12, No. 1, pp, 1-262, 9 pls., 40 figs,

Fanven, P. 1933 Arnélides polychétes du golfe du Pei Tehen Lyde ta callevtion ele Musée

Hoang ha Pai ho, Mus. Howngho Pai hu Tien-Tsin, Pub., 15, rm, 1-67, & es.

Favvel, P 1936 Sur quelques Annélides polvehétes de "ile de Paques. Mus, Hist, nat. Parts,

Bull, sér. 2, 8, pp. 257-258

Fauver, P, 1947 Annétides polychétes de Nouvelle-Calédonie et des iles Gambier. Faune dle

“VEmpire Francais, VILL 108 pp. 90 figs.

Fevernors, If, 1931 Neue marine Einwanderer iler Binnengewisser vow Tava wid Sumatra.

Forschung und Fortschritte, Berlin, No. 17

Goopsicn, E. 1945 The study of nephridia arid genital ducts since 1895, Micr Sc, London.

; Quar. Jour., 85, “32-4, pp. 113-392, fies.

Gravery, F. 1927 The fittaral fauna of Krusadai Island in the Gulf of Manaar. Chaetoprla.

Madras Govt. Mus., Bull., ns, Nat. Hist. 1, pp. 55-86, 2 pls,

Gaavres, C. 1901 Contribution a étude des Annélides polychétes de la Mer Rouge. Nany,

Arch, Mus. Puris, sér, 4, 3, pp. 147-268, figs. 160-285, 4 pls.

Gauer, E. 1857 Arnulata Oerstediana. Pt 2, pp. 158-166

Geupr, F. 1868 Reise der Oesterreichischen Fregatte Novara um dic Erde in den Jaliren

1857, 1858 und 1859. Zool. Theil, Bd. 2, Abt 3. Aoneliden. Wien pp. 1-48, 4 pls,

Grune, E. 1869 Beschreibung never von der Nora Expedition mitvebrachter Aymelirter

und einer Tandplanarie, Zool-Bat. Gesells.. Wien, Verh., 16, pp. 173-184

Grune, E, 1878 Annulata Semperiana. Acad. Sci St. Petersburg, Mem., 25, 3M pp. 15 pls.

Hartman, ©. 1940 Polychaetous annelidg, Ft, 2, Chrysopetalidae to Gowiadidae. Hanenck

Pacific Exped, 7, pp. 173-287, 14 pls,

Hartman, ©, 1948 ‘The Marine Annelida erected by Kinbere with notes on some other

types in the Sweilish State Museum. Arlo Zool, Stockholm, 424, pn. 1-137, 18 pls.

Hartman, O, 1952 Iphitime and Ceratocephala (Polychaetous annelids) fram California,

Southern Calif. Acad, Sci., Bull., 51, pp. 9-20, 2 pls.

HaerMax, ©. 1953 Non-pelacic Polychaeta. Swedish Antarctica Exped, (901-1903, Further

Soclosical Results of the Swedish Antarctic Expedition, 4, No, 11, yp, 1-83, 1 chare,

21 figs.

Hforsr, R. 1889 Contributions towards the Knowledge of the Avinelida Polychaeta. Notes

Leyden Mus. Jentini, 11, pp. 161-184, 2 pls.

Horst, R. 1924 Polychaeta. errantia of the Sihoga-Expedition. Netreidae and Hesionidae,

Sihoga-Exped. Leyden, 99, (Motiogr, 24, Ic), pp. 145-198, 7 pls.

Kirxeer¢, J, 1866 Annulata nova. Oerv. Vet. Akad, Stockholm, 22, pp. 167-169 and 239-258

KinperG, J. 1910 Annulater. Kongliga Svenska Fregatten Eugenies Resa omkring jorden,

1851-53. Uppsala and Stockholm, Almoauist and Wicksells., 78 pp. 29 pls.

Kwox, G. A. 1951 The Polychaetous Amnelids of Banks Peninsula. Rec, Canterbury Mus.,

5, pp. 213-229, pls: 44-50

Kort, ParrrctA 1951 Nereidae and Ennicidac of South-western Australia; also notes on the

Ecology of Western Australian Limestone Reefs, Roy. Soc. West, Australia, Jour., 33,

pp, 85-130, 7 figs. >

McIstosn, W. C. 1885 Report on the Annelida Polychacta collected by H.M-S. Challenger

during the years 1873-76, Challenger Reports, 12, pp. 1-554, 55 and 39a pls.

MAkENZELLER, FE. vow. 1879 Stidjapanische Anneliden. Akas. Wiss. Wien, Denkschr., 41,

pp. 109-152, 6 pls.

Monro, C. 1926 On the Polvchaecta collected by H-MLS. .4lert, 1881-1882. Fannhes Hesioni-

dae and Nereidae. Linn Soc. London, Jour,, 36, pp, 311-323

Monro, C. 1930 Polychaete Worms, Discovery Reports, 2, pp. 1-222, 91 figs.

Monro, C, 1931 Polychaeta, Oligochaeta, Echiuroidea and Sipunculoidea, Great Barrier

Reef (Qld) Exp. 1928-20. Sci. Rep. Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.), 4 (1), pp. 1-37,

15 figs.

Monro, C. 1936 Polychaete Worms. If, Discovery Reports, 12, pp. 59-198, 34 figs,

Monro, C, 1937 The John Murray Expedition 1933-34. Scientific Reports, Polychateia.

8, No. 8 pp. 243-321, 28 figs,

Monro, C. 1938 On a small collection of Polychaeta from Swan River, Western Australia.

Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. London, ser, 11, 2, pp. 614-624, 13 figs. |

Monro, C. 19399 Polychaeta Antarctic Research Expedition, 1929-1931. Adelaide, Australia.

Reports, Ser. B (Zoology and Botany), 4, pt. 4, pp. 89-156, 28 figs.

Monro, C, 193%) On some Tropical Polychaeta in the British Museum, mostly collected by

Dr. C, rpeslat al Zanzibar, Tahiti and the Marquesas, Novitat. Zool, Landon, 41,

pp. 302-30.

Oxupa, §. 1938 Polychaetous Annelids from the vicinity of the Mitsui Institute of Marine

Biology. Japan, Jour. Zool., 8, pp. 75-105, 15 figs.

Oxuna, S. 1940 Polychactous Annelids of the Ryukyn Islands. Biogeogr. Soc. Japan, Bull.,

10, No. 1, pp. 1-24, 9 figs,

Pruvot, G. 1930 Annélides Polychétes de Nouvelle-Caledome recueillies par M. Francois.

Arch, zool. exp, gen. Paris, 70, pp. 1-94, & figs. 3 pls. ;

Quatreraces, A. pr. 1865 Histoire naturelle des Annéles marina et d'eau douce. Patis,

1, pp, 1-588

Racovirza, E. 1893 Sur la Micronercis variegata Clpd, Acad, Sci. Paris, C.R., 116, pp: 1,390-

1,392

Scamarpa, L, 1861 Neue wirbellose Thicre beobachtet und gesanimelt auf einer Reise um

die Erde, 1853 bis 1857. Leipzig. Pt. 2. pp. 1-164, 22 pls. R

Winey, A, 1905 Renort on the Polychaeta collected hy Professor Herdman, at Ceylon, in

1902. Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fisheries, Suppl. Rep., pt. 4, pp. 243-324, 8 pls.

THE MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF THE PLIOCENE STRATA UNDERLYING

THE ADELAIDE PLAINS

BY N. H. LUDBROOK

Summary

The molluscan fauna of the South Australian Pliocene is best developed and preserved in the Dry

Creek Sands which have been thrown down to the west of the City of Adelaide by the Para Fault.

red

THE MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF THE PLIOCENE STRATA UNDERLYING

THE ADELAIDE PLAINS

PART I

By. N. H. Luprroox *

[Read 9 April 1953]

SUMMARY

Thé molliscan fauna of the South Australian Pliccene is best deyeloped and pre-

served in the Dry Creek Sands which have been thrown down to the west of the City

of Adelaide by the Para Fault.

Pliocene strata were deposited unconformably on a post-Burdigalian erosion surface,

and are overlain by Pleistocene to Recent sands and clays, mainly of freshwater origin,

and nodular kunkar. In the Adelaide Basin shell heaps concentrated by ctrrents are

frequent im the north-eastern portion, and are of economic importance since they

generally mark the aquifer.

Readily distingttishable lithologically, the light-grey fine sharp quartz sands carry

a well-preserved rich molluscan fauna, mainly of the epineritic environment.

The molltisca cotistitute essentially a tropical marine fauna in which four distinct

elements may be recognized: a dominant Indo-Pacific, a Tethyan Eocene, a Recent

Australasian, and a cosmopolitan, The presence of undoubted Tethyan Eocene subgetiera

js of particular interest. The stage at which these reached Australia ts not at present

determinable, but it is Hkely that they date at least from the Oligocene. Distinct from

the two tropical elements are a large autochthonous Australasian element probably

derived from an endemic stock, and a fourth element coimposed of cosmopolitan of

widespread subgenera.

Since 5790 of the species are restricted to the fauna, the age is detertninable only

by correlation with known Pliocene faunas in Australia. Available evideiice suggests

that the strata may be slightly younger than Pliocette strata (“Kalimian") in Eastern

Victoria, but much work remains to be done before complete correlation is achieved.

I, INTRODUCTION

During the past 70 years the Adelaide Plains, comprising the eastern portion

oi the St. Vincent Gulf—Adelaide Plains graben on which the City of Adelaide is

built, have been at first intermittently and recently intensively drilled in the search

for a supplementary or alternative water supply for the domestic and agricultural

needs of the city and its environs.

For the fiity years following the drilling of the first deep hole at Kent Town,

close to the city area, borings were sunk at sporadic intervals by landowners for

agricultural purposes. With the growth of the city and threatened failure of

normal water supply from storage reservoirs in times of drought, a programme

of drilling was initiated by the South Australian Mines Department in 1934 and

greatly intensified in 1945. The area drilled covers some 250 square miles

from the Gawler River 18 miles north of Adelaide, south to Brighton 9 miles

south-south-west of the city, bounded on the west by Gulf St. Vincent and on

the east by the foothills of the Mount Lofty Range along the line of the Burnside

and Eden Faults.

Practice has heen to seal the Government bores until drought necessitates

opening them to supplement the city water supply.

Material from several of the borings. was submitted to the writer by the

South Australian Mines Department for palaeontological exaniination. Results

of examination of the mollusca are embodied in the present study.

During the past twenty years, Australian molluscan systematics have become

confused by the reluctance of some workers to recognize generic affinitres between

most of the Australian species and their relatives elsewhere. As a result, accurate

* Department of Mines, South Australia.

Trans. Rey Suc. S. Aust., 77, July, 1954

and detailed correlation of faunas has not been attempted. An additional problem

arises from the fact that faunas from type areas are imperfectly known, Collect-

ing has been done from easily accessible localities where fossils are numerous,

but little systematic sampling has been carried out.

With the aim of reducing some of the anomalies so created a representative

series of the mollusca contained in the bores submitted to the writer was taken

to London for comparison with type and other material in the British Museum.

The fauna has now been completely revised and the nomenclature brought into

line with that employed by specialists outside Australia,

The stage name “Adelaidean” previously in use for the strata is abandoned

in accordance with the suggestion of Mawson and Sprigg (1950, p. 69), Howchin

(1928. p. 422) proposed the term for the richly fossiliferous marine sub-surface

strata, which he considered to be of Upper Pliocene age, known only from borings

within short distances of Adelaide. Smce confusion is always hkely to arise from

the use of the term Adelaidean for the Pliocene marine sands when there is the

well-established Adelaide System (formerly Series) of Pre-Cambrian age, Glaess-

ner (1951, p. 280) has recommended its replacement by the name Dry Creek

Sands,

‘II. HISTORICAL SURVEY

The Dry Creek Sands were first discovered in 1889 when a deep bore ih

search of water was sunk at Dry Creek, 6 miles due north of Adelaide, by the

Australian Smelting Company. On this classical boring the discovery of marine

deposits younger than beds then considered to be of Miocene age and older than

admitted Pleistocene strata was claimed.

In the following year a bore was sunk at Croydon 34 miles north-west of

Adelaide and reported upon by Tate (1890b), who published a section showing

that the Pliocene strata recognized in the Dry Creek Bore were penetrated at

340 feet; a thickness of 406 fect for the Pliocene was postulated. The boring

was stopped at 800 feet. Subsequently a second bore was sunk at Croydon to

a depth of 2.296 feet, adjacent to the first. The Pliocene and underlying strata

were again reported upon by Tate (1898}, Pliocene being identified from 395

to 715 feet.

No detailed palaeontological work was done to advance the knowledge of

the fauna, although varying and speculative opinions on the age of the strata

and their relative stratigraphical position were published, These may be briefly

summarized as follows:

Tate and Dennant (1896, p. 148) placed them above the beds now known as

Kalimnan in Victoria and in the Pliocene.

Hall and Pritchard (1902, p. 80) named the Kalimnan (p. 78) and con-

sidered the beds described by Tate from Dry Creek to be contemporaneous and

therefore of “Miocene” age.

Howchin (1914, p. 156) differentiated them from the Kalinman (“Second

Marine Series? Miocene”) as “Third Marine Series—Older Pliocene.”

Chapman (1916, p. 156) accepted the view of Hall and Pritchard that the

beds were contemporaneous with the Kalimnan, but supported the tarlier view

of McCoy and the Geological Survey of Victoria that the Kalimnan was Lower

Phiocene in age. -

Howchin (1928, p. 422; 1929, p, 235) mtroduced the name Adelaidean, and

“proposed to distinguish ..., the Adelaidean Upper Pliocene” from the Werri-

kooian Upper Pliocene of Victoria.

In a preliminary note on the stratigraphical position of the beds the writer

expressed the view (Ludbrook, 1938, p. 445) that the beds now known as the

Dry Creek Sands were probably contemporaneous with other beds of accepted

Lower Pliocene age in Southern Australia. This opinion was strongly opposed by

Howchin and Parr (1938, p. 289) and Parr (1939) who continued to maintain

an Upper Pliocene age for the fauna, Chapman (in Howchin and Parr, 1938,

p. 290) agreed with Howchin that the Dry Creek Sands were younger than the

Kalimnan, but considered them contemporaneous with the Pliocene beds at Hallett

Cove.

Singleton (1941, p, 22) established and defined the Adelaidean as a Stage.

MAP SHOWING POSITION OF BORES STUDIED

978 e207

BORE al?

SECTION LINE

hye

Fig. 1

Bore 215 is within the boundary of the

City of Adelaide.

On completion of a systematic study and analysis of the gastropod fauna

of Abattoirs Bore, and taking into account the view of Howchin and Parr that

the foraminifera had a more recent aspect than those of the Kalimnan, the writer

(1941, p. 80) placed the Dry Creek Sands in the Lower-Middle Pliocene.

Since the present work was completed the publication of a comprehensive

report on the geology and underground water resources of the Adelaide Plains

area (Miles, 1952) has added greatly to the knowledge of the subsurface geology

of the area. In an appendix to the report Crespin and Cotton (1952) have corre-

lated the Pliocene strata with the Kalimnan of Victoria, the faunal differences

being attributed to facies.

In the present study the molluscan fauna has been increased to 380 species,

78 of which have not been previously described; four new subgenera have been

erected, The composition of the fauna has been determined as accurately as

possible, its relationships with other comparable faunas analysed and its bearing

upon the stratigraphical position of the strata discussed. The establishment beyond

doubt of a faunal link between the European Eocene, Australian Pliocene, and

the Recent Indo-Pacific Region is an important fact to emerge. Some faunal

migration, probably by way of Tethys, has almost certainly taken place, and

closer study of faunas linking Australia to the Northern Hemisphere is

warranted. There is at present no evidence of any faunal link with known

American Tertiaries, and the study confirms the opinion that the deep waters of

the Pacific Ocean have always been a barrier between the faunas of its western

shores and those of the east, except in the extreme north and south where move-

ment along the coastline has been possible.

SECTION ALONG LINE 4B FROM BORES7 TO BORE 2i5

5 2 Unfestireaue matted chy

cis [ix] Untmusfereve sands & grovel

Sy Chay

20 ES Ged, wreund

‘ sy clay

| beeniah sendy cley

DET.

EF Masato

PLEISTOCENE TO RECENT

200 Bd Sand gravel 305 be

ES alvishelay 415

330. el Lineatone

HOT SAMPLED IN DETAIL!

NOT SAMPLED 1

Dark send, chy

Fes} Kegilfaceaur amid

ET Te he

| an pendy mart

fa Blue blac mudiparen,

Yeltes dandy mar!

MIOCENE /

HORIZONTAL SCALE

ce]

MILES

Fig. 2

UI. GENERAL AND STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY

Pliocene strata ate exposed as isolated remnants at irregular intervals along

the eastern coast of Gulf St, Vincent from Aldinga Bay in the south 10 the

City of Adelaide in the north (Howchin, 1923; Segnit, 1940). Pliocene lime-

stone formerly outcropped along the banks of the River Torrens (Howchin, 1923,

p- 283) and has been exposed in quarries on the south bank of the River at the

tear of Government House (Tate, 1882, p. 40) and in the University grounds.

ft has been frequently penetrated in shallow well sinkings and in borings in the

City area at about 50 10 70 feet depth, including Kent Town Bore (Tate, 1882),

Black Forest Bore (Howchin, 1935), Bank of the New South Wales Well

(Cotton, 1947), and was noted by the writer in West End Brewery No, 2 Well,

Hindley Street, at depth from 69 to 70 feet, Fossils typical of the Dry Creek

Sands were present mainly as moulds. Elsewhere the Pliocene has been penetrated

only by borings into the Dry Creek Sands from Gawler River in the north to

Glenelg in the south. The average depth below datum level at which the beds

are penetrated ig 315 feet. Where the thickness is proved, the beds are generally

from 150 to 180 feet thick, although an exceptional thickness of 320 teet was

passed through in the Croydon Bore (Tate, 1898, p. 195). The average thickness

iu six bores which reached the Miocene is 190 feet.

The greater thickness of the Dry Creek Sands as compared with that of the

sandy limestones in the City area and in exposures south of Adchiide is consequent

upon tectonic movements which disturbed the area in Jate Tertiary and Quaternary

times. The Moimt Lofty Ranges and Adelaide Plains are units in a system of

regional meridional block faulting in which the St. Vincent Gulf-Adelaide Plains

form a graben and the Mount Lofty Ranges a horst to the east. The general

structure of the fault system has been described chiefly by Benson (1911),

Fenner (1930), and Sprigg (1945). The major faults in the Adelaide Plains

and Western Mount Lofty Ranges are shown on fig. | The trend Imes are broadly

N.N.E.- §.5,W.

Fenner (1930, p. 15} has suggested that two periods of block iawlting are

probably involved; while there is at present no direct evidence that this is the

case, it is not improbable that the orogenic movements which elevated the Mount

Lofty Ranges horst antedated the deposition of the Dry Creek Sands and their

subsequent down-faulting to the west of the Para Fault.

To the south and east of the Para Fault in the immediate neighbourhond of

Adelaide only the more resistant caleareaus equivalents of the Dry Creek Sands

have been preserved at shallaw depth. West of the Para Fault, however, the

sediments have been thrown down to a maximum of the order of 350 feet, and

an average thickness of 190 feet of unconsolidated sands has been preserved

beneath a cover of later marine and freshwater sediments. The subsurface rela-

tionship of the Dry Creek Sands to the overlying and underlying sedi-

ments and to the Para Fault is shown in the section (fig. 2) dtawn along the

line AB of fig. 1. The position of the Pliocene remnant underlying the City is

shown hy the narrow band 69 feet below the surface in Bore 215 to the east

of the fault.

IV. SEDIMENTATION AND LITHOLOGY

The Dry Creek Sands and their equivalents in the Phocene were deposites!

in a2 shallow bay or gulf of the Pliocene seas after the depression af the ol:ler

strata which had been reduced to base surface at the end of the Mesozoic ane

submerged during the early Tertiary,

At the close of the Lower Miocene a cycle of erosion occurred in South

Australia, where, unlike Eastern Victoria, no continuous sequence from Lower

Miocene to Pliocene is revealed and a marked unconformity separates the

Pliocene from the underlying strata, the youngest of which sre Lower Miocene,

with the restricted Lower Miocene foraminifer, dustrotrillina howchinit.

On this Tertiaty erosion surface the Dry Creek Sands and the sandy Hme-

stones were deposited. As revealed in the borings, the Dry Creek Sands are

a well-defined lithological and palaeontological unit usually readily distinguishable

from the underlying tarlier Tertiary strata. The Miocene is generally but not

always a yellowish sandy marl or calcareous santstone. The sand grains are

frequently muck encrusted, Overlying the Miocene, the light-grey or sitvery, fine.

sharp Pliocene sands and clays, carry a rich marine fauna. Intercalated bands of

grey and white limestone occur apparently irregularly throughout the strata,

Present knowledge does not permit the correlation of these bands in any way.

They may be the equivalents of the more resistant members of the Phocene which

underlie the City to the east of the Para Fault, but the writer’s opinion is that

the sandy limestones to the east of ihe Para Fault represent the shallow littoral

facies.

Bores examined in detail demonstrate that very fossiliferous bands occur

at more than one level in the Pliocene, their position probably being

determined by the operation of currents in the bay in which the sands were

deposited, The indication is that the general direction of such currents was north-

easterly. This would account for the unusually rich bands penetrated in Abattoirs,

Weymouth’s, and Salisbury Bores in the north-eastern portion of the basin.

These highly fossiliferous bands were not deposited evenly on the floor of the

_COMPOSITION OF THE FAUNA

eb - boo BO

ih ow

\~wae

J = "Tanjukus’, L © “Lenpferdian”, B} > “Baresferdian y Baiconbien’, By © Baiensdahen’ ce 'Chetlenharnian™

Fig. 3

basin in still water, but were produced by the concentration of shells along the

shore lines by surface currents. Variation in intensity of the currents would

account for the uneven distribution of the load. As the highly fossiliferous shelly

band is most frequently the aquifer, boring generally stops when it is reached.

Where the band has been passed through and the boring continued, less fossilifer-

ous strata are revealed.

Overlying the Dry Creek Sands are approximately 300 feet of superficial

clays, sands, and gtavels of Pleistocene to Recent age of alluvial deltaic origin

consequent upon the upliit of the Mount Lofty Ranges horst. They form a helt

af piedmont alluvitim widening northwards and about 10 miles wide in the

immediate vicinity of Adelaide. North of Adelaide remains of extinct marsupials,

including Diprotodon, have been found in the alluvium.

Except for two recent incursions of the sea, cach represented by less than

five feet of sediments (Miles, 1952, p. 32) there was no general submergence

of the Adelaide Plains during the Quaternary.

The downward succession from Recent to Miocene may be exemplified by

Filsell’s Bore (No, 169), examined by the writer and sampled to a depth of

540 [vet when boring ceased in the Miocene;

Surface -302 feet.

302-517 feet.

—- 317-348 feet,

| 343-360 Feet.

360-373 feet.

Clays and gravels of Pleistocene to Recent age.

Greyish-brown fine glauconitic sand with Rotalia beccarii,

Ostrea. sp. and “Mactra” sp,

Greemsh-grey silt with a similar fossil content.

Fine grey sand, highly fossiliferous, with typical assemblage,

mainly imolltsca,

Fine sharp quartz sand, highly fossiliferous with mostly

small mollusca and foraminifera, together with six species

of bryozna.

378-382 feet.

382-396 feet,

396-409 Feet.

ADOPTS Feet.

443-452 feel.

4152-192 feet.

Dark-grey fine fossiliferous sand.

Fine silver-grey sand, very highly fossiliferons, with a

typical molluscan assemblage, mostly pelecypoda.

Fine grey fossiliferous silt, 90% disappearing on washing,

with the pelecypod Cond ylocardia tenuicostae and associated

but not restricted foraminifera and gastropoda,

Fine grey fossiliferous silt.

flard grey fossiliferous limestone.

Grey fossiliferous sands with brynzoa and an admixture of

Pliocene and Miocene fossil species. indicating that the

lowest level of the Pliocene hus been reached and the

Miocene penetrated,

Yellowish sands, much encrusted with calcium carbonate,

with the Miocene foraminifer. Operculina wictoriensis and

bryozoon Mecynoetia proboscidea.

Hard yellow limestone with Operculina victoriensis and an

associated Miocene fauna,

Greyish-brown sands with a similar fossil content.

492-504 feet.

S(i4¥-524 feet.

524-530 feet.

From the manner of collecting the samples only over broad intervals accurate

zoning cannot be achieved, From the surface to 302 feet the typical alluvial clays

and gravels forming the stitface cover of the Adelaide Plains are probably of

Pleistocene to Reeent age. These correspond to the 341 feet of sand and clay

penetrated in Abattoirs Bore (level of collar 170 feet). From 302 feet to 348 feet

the section may be Upper Pliocene in age, No restricted fossils are present; they

are generally few. and Recent in character. The Dry Creek Sands occur from

348 feet to approximately 475 fcet, the highly fossiliferous band being between the

382 and 396-fnot level, Pre-Pliocene beds occur below 492 feet and the lithology

shows a protiounced change at that level, the characteristic yellow colour replacing

the grey sainds of the Pliocene. The Miocene foraminifer Operculina victoricusis

makes its appearance. The change from Dry Creek Sands to the underlying

Miocene may also be indicated by the sudden increase in the number of bryazoa

which are not common in the Pliocene, although they do occur in some nitinbers

representing numerous species in certain borings, such as Hindmarsh.

The sandy limestones underlying the City of Adelaide carry Dry Creek

mnolluscs—mainly in the form of moulds of Pwurritelia (Haustator) avricula

adefaidensis, Polinices (Conuber) balteatella, and species of Polinices, 'Mar-

ginella,” Emarginula, Euchelus, and “Venus.” Where they are belter preserved as tn

the unleached block removed in the excavations for the foundations of the Bank

of New South Wales building the determinable fauna is similar to that of the

calcareous sandstones exposed at [Hallett Cove and Ainge Bay, with Chlamys

antiausiralis, Chlamys (Equichlamys) consobrinus, Chlamys (Equichlamys)

sublifrons, Spondylus spondylotdes, OStrea arenicola, Glycymeris (Veletuceta)

subradians, Diastoma provisi, and Polinices (Conuber) batteatella, The lime-

stones are allochthonous, of the fassiliferous-fragmental type commonly found in

association wilh quattzose sandstone (Krumbein and Sloss, 1951, p. 139), Accord-

ig to those authors, such associated rucks are depusited under essentially stable

conditions with mild subsidence ot the depositional area.

V, PALAEOECOLOGY

The environmental and climatic conditions under which the community

preserved in the Dry Creek Sands lived are determinable ouly by the thanato-

coenose or assemblage of fossils so well represented in borings such as Abattnirs

(No. 89), Weymouth’s (No. 207), snd Hindmarsh (No. 6). That it is most

unlikely that the mollusca existed in fife in the position in which they were

deposited has already been suggested in the pteyious section, where the role

played by surface currents in deposition of the sediments is briefly cescribed.

That many of the mollusca were dead before their shells were deposited is

demonstrated by the fact that large numbers of pelecypnds and gastropods, many

of them very small, have been bored by predatory mollusca, perhaps the Hinia

(Reticunassa) which occurs numerously in the Hindmarsh Bore. Shells were

obviously piled in heaps by surface currents operating towards the north-east,

such heaps constituting the shelly band of “oyster bed” which is generally the

aquifer in the Dry Creek Sands and in which the oyster Ostrea arenicole is one

of the conimonest species,

Notwithstanding the mode of deposition, the fauna is sufficiently uniform

for an accurate estimate of the ecology to he made, It has long been recognised

that Australian Pliocene and Miocene mollusca belonged in the main to tropical

genera chiefly inhabiting the Indo-Pacific region today. However, no serious

attempt has been made to correlate them in any detail, The origin and relation-

ships of the Dry Creek Sands fauna will be discussed in detail in the sueceed-

ing séclien and separately, under such species as are concerned, in the taxonomic

study of the species,

The Dry Creek Sands carry essentially a tropical marine fauna, with a large

percentage of its subgenera tepresented in the Indo-Pacific region today. The

subgenus, as a practical indicator of climatic conditions (Chavan, 1949) has been

freely employed throughout this study. The living community now partly pre-

served in the Dry Creel Sands undoubtedly inhabited a sandy bay of the Pliocene

seas with relatively sheltered conditions and little disturbance except from surface

currents, Apart from the evidence of differential deposition of load, the presence

of bryozoa which require circulating waters for their existence indicates that

the sediments were not lai] down in still waters. The environment was epineritic,

with shallow water species and subgenera prevailing, East of the Para Fault the

limestones ate tnore characteristic of the littoral environment and littoral species

af Chlumys and Polinices (Conuber) are more common.

The geaus Terebratia, formerly identified from the Dry Creek Sands and

apparently indicating tropical mangrove swamp conditions (Crespin and Colton,

1952, p. 233) similar to these of the native habitat in Northern Australia, has

been erroneously identified. The restricted species described as Terebralia ade-

laidensis Howchin and Cotton is not a Terebrafia but a Thericinm belonging to

a lineage represented in the Italian Pliocene, Recent Indo-Pacific, and probably

the Parisian Eocene.

Tropical subgenera of the littoral or epineritic environment which occur in

the Dry Creek Sands include the pelecypoda Arca, Cucullaca, Pinctada, Sportelia,

Belluctna, Prophetilora, Vasticardixm, and the gastropoda Notohaliotis, Laetifur-

tor, Pulehrastele, Calthalotia, Tugali, Gena, Cocculinella, Nina, Pelecydint,

Obtortio, Semibittium, Semivertagus, Amaes, Margineulima, Agatha, Pyrga-

lampros, Cypraeerato, Globularia, Trunculariopsis, Pterochelus, Latiaxis, Fusinis,

Bavyspira, Turrancilla, Mitra, Tudicla, Cymbiola, Aulicina, Cancellaphero,

Gibberula, Closia, Volvarina, Tomopleura, Etrema, Veprecula, Floraconus.

Subgenera inhabiting warm seas but with a greater range of thermal tolerance

than the above are the pelecypoda Barbatia, Tucetona, Tucetilia, Chama, Milthe,

Regozara, and the gastropoda Emarginula, Astele, Phasianotrochus, Euriclaneulus,

Minolia, Spectamen, Phenacolepas, Tenagodus, Ataxacerithium, Hirtoscala, Niso,

Syrnola, Puposyrnola, Turbanilla, Chemnitzia, Pyrgiscus, Cheilea, Sabia, Argo-

buccinnm, Cymatiella, Murexsul, Homolocantha, Phos, Reticunassa, Serrata.

The distribution table (pp, 56-62) attempts to show the horizontal distribution

of cach of the species constituting the molluscat fauna recovered from the

Pliocene of 14 borings. Hores are arranged from north to south from the most

northerly, Tennant's Bore (No. 189), to the most southerly, Brooklyn Park

(No. 17). Numbers of the bores are as follows: Tennant’s (189}, Weymouth’s

(207), Abattoirs (89), Dry Creek (178), Glanville (57), Filsell’s (169),

Holden’s (81), York (14}, Croydon {51}, Hindmarsh (6), Bore 65, Cowandilla

(5), Kooyonga (105), Brooklyn Park (17). The inference to be drawn from

the table is that there is greater concentration of species in the northerly bores.

and that in the southerly bores those that are to the east and nearer the Para Fault

and the presumed shoreline are more fossiliferous, Such concentrations have been

effected apparently on or near the shore line, generally towards the north-east

of the bay.

The associated foraminiferal fauna contains a number of genera living today

in shallow warm waters, including the Peneroplid genera Peneroplis, Sorites,

Amphisorus, and Marginopora, Marginopora vertebralis is extremely common in

some borings, and together with Peneroplis planatus ts exposed on weathered

surfaces of the sandy limestones of the littoral facies. Rotalia beccarit is found

in almost every sample and is perhaps the mast commonly occurring foraminifer

in the Dry Creek Sands. Its presence in large numbers is indicative of a bay-

littoral environment. Associated with the Peneroplidae and Rotaliidae are species

typical of the Recent Flindersian Province such as Flintina triguetra ( Brady) and

Nubecularia luctfuga vat, lapidea Wiesner.

VIL FAUNAL RELATIONSHIPS

Four distinct elements may be recognised in the fauna: a dominant Recent

Indo-Pacific, a Tethyan Eocene, a Recent Australasian, and a cosmopolitan,

A. Tue Recent Inpo-Pacipic ELEMENT

The dominant element in the fauna is Indo-Pacific. Although the

tropical character of Australian Tertiary molluscs has always been recog-

nised, no detailed attempt has hitherto been made to correlate Australian

Tertiary faunas with the living faunas of the Indo-Pacific Region. With the

possible exception of one or two species living today in North Queensland, with

which examples in the Dry Creek Sands appear to be conspecific. the fauna has

nO species in common with the Recent Indo-Pacific, but the resemblance or affinity

in many cases is remarkably close and the species are subgenerically identical.

The affinities between species of pelécypoda appear ta be less striking than those

between gastropod species. This is perhaps due to the fact that the gastropoda

are more restricted and generally shorter ranging than pelecypoda, and such

affinities as do occur are more conspicuous.

Species of pelecypoda which may he directly correlated with Indo-Pacific

or Northern Australian specics are: Montlilora (Prophetilora) chavani sp. nov.

with M. (P.) arizelo Iredale; Vasticardtum submaculosum sp, nov, with V.

maculosum Wood, V. transcendens Melvill and Standen, and V. mauritianum

Deshayes ; Antigona {Proxichione) cognata (Pritchard) with A, (P.) listert Gra

and A. (P.) refiexlatum Linné,; Gafroriuns perarnatum N, H. Woods with

G. dispar Dillwyn; Veremolpa protemarica (Cotton) with F. marica (Linne).

The scaphopod species Dentalium (Dentalium) howchini (Cotton and Ludbrook)

is related to D, (D.) elephantinum Linné, Affinities in the gastropoda are to be

found between Calliostoma (Lactifautor) spp, and C. (L,) deceptum Simith;

Astele (Pulchrastele) planiconicum (Ludbrook) and A. (P.) seplenartum Melvill

and Standen; Thalotia (Calthalotia) nitidissima (Ludbrook) and T. (C.)

arruersi¢ Watson; Clanculus (Euriclanculus) quadricingulatus Ludbrook and

C. (E.) cevlonicus G. and H. Nevill; /sanda (Minolia) perglobosa (Ludbrook)

and [, (M.) pulcherrima Angas; Speclamen planicarinatum sp. nov. and

S. hiangulatum Adams; Spectamen preecursor sp, nov, and S. sayademalha Mel-

vill; Trbiola (Partwbiola) depressispira (Ludbrook) and T. (P.) _carinata,

T. (P.) quinguecarinata and T. (P.) novemcdrinata all of Melvill; Therictun

adelaidense (Howchin and Cotton) and 7. opporlumen Bayle; Amaca

(Amaea) triplicata (Tate) and A, (A) kieneri (Canefri); Tranculariopsis pera-

mangus (Ludbrook) and T, érunculits (Linné) ; Hemolocantha antecedetis

sp, nov, and H. secunda (Lamarck) and H. varicose Sowerby ; Latiaxis dissitus

Cotton and L. mawae (Gray); Austromitra angusticostata Ludbrook and

A. capensis (Dunker), 4. turtiger (Reeve), A. kowtensis (Sowerby), 4. capri-

cormia Hedley; Tudicla sinotecta Ludbrook and T, spirillus (Linné) ; Cymbtola

tabulota (Tate) and C. pulchra (Sowerby), Volvaring (7) incommoda sp. nov.

and F’, (2?) sercodes Tomlin, V. (?) serra Bavay-

BR, Tue Tetuvan Eocewe ELEMENT

One of the most interesting faets to emerge {rom the attempt to correct the

generic and subgeneric locations of the mollusca is that several subgenera well

represented in the European Eocene have closely allied representatives in the

Dry Creek Sands. This is perhaps not altogether unexpected in view of the

dominance of the Indo-Pacific element to which the Tethyan Eocene is ancestral

{Martin 1914; Umbgrove, 1930; Davies, 1934, p. 104). It seems somewhat

improbable that the ‘Tethyan element in the South Australian Pliocene was intro-

duced by late migration by way of the East Indies. Molluscan faunas of the

East Indieg and those of the Australian Tertiaries seem to have less in common

than might be expected. The most convincing conclusion to he drawn is that the

Tethyan molluscan elements had already reached Australia during the Eocene

or Qligovene, This is supported by the writer's recent discovery of the subgenus

Bellucina in clays of prohable Eocene age from the South-last of South Aus-

tralia. Tethyan foraminifera Nwmmulites, Discocyclina, and Pellatispira have

been recorded from the Eocene of the North West Cape—Cape Cuvier area in

Western Australia (Chapman ard Crespin, 1945), and additions to the knowledge

of ihe Tertiaries in the North-West of Western Australia may establish the

presence of an allied molluscan fauna,

Present knowledge of the affinities of pre-Pliocene Tertiary mollusca from

southern Australia is too limited to petmit confirmation in more than the one

instance cited af the preservation of the Eocene element within the Australian

faunas, but that this is the case is more than probable. It is supported by the

strong Indo-Pacific affinity of the foraminiferal and molluscan faunas of the

Tertiary marine sedimentary rocks exposed at intervals over a wide geographical

range trom Notth West Cape in, Western Australia to north-western Victoria.

The geological record over this area is very imperfect and no gid conclusions

may be drawn, but information is available to suggest that thermal conditions

were very uniform over this and the whole of the Indo-Pacific region during

most of the Tertiary, and no sudden change of temperature ur ecological condi-

tions led to the extinction of faunas between the end of the Eocene and the Middle

Pliocene.

Evidence of the preservation of a Tethyan element in the fauna is

based on the presence of species of the following subgenera, cach having close

relatives int the European or English Eocene and also in the Recent or late-

Tertiary Indo-Pacific fauna: Chlamys s. str. with the C. varia series in the

Parisian Eocene, and also it the Miocene and Pliocene of ‘the Red Sea region

and Zanzibar Protectorate (this series is fairly widely spread and would not

in itself indicate a Tethyan clement, but is regarded as worthy of note in view

of the presence of the other undoubted Tethyan subgenera); Lentipectest, repre-

sented by L. cornens (Sowerby) in the English Eocene and L. borneajus (Cox)

in the Pliocene of the North Borneo. Arcturellina, closely allied to the Parisian

Eocene species aspernla, aigensis, prevosti, pulchra, ambigua, and serricata, all

of Deshayes; Sportellu with S. dubia Defrance in the European Eocene atid

5. jubota living in North Queensland ; Monitilara s, str. represenved in the Parisian

Eocene by M, clegans Detrance and the Australian Recent Peronian by M. ram-

sayi Smith; Gibbolucina with G. ellipsoidalis Cozsmann and Peyrot in the Parisian

Eocene, G. ca/losa (Lamarck) in the Indo-Pacific; Seliveina with B. ligata

(Cossinann and Pissarro) in the Parisian Eocene, B. evcosma Dall in the Indo-

Pacific; Semivertagus with S. unisuleatum Lamarck in the Parisian Eocene;

Coxellaria (created below) related to C. cieve (Lamarck) and C. multispira

(Deshayes); Globularia, very like Globularia sigaretina Lamarck from the Cal-

eaite Grossier. There ate in addition the following subgenera common to the

European Eocene, Adelaide Pliocene, and Recent Indo-Pacific which have not

been studied in detail by the writer who accepts the authority of Wenz (Handb,

der Palaozool, Gastropoda) that they occur in both the Tethyan Eocene and

Recent Inde-Pacific taunas: Semibitiivm, Margineulima, Fusinus, Twdicla,

Auticing and Gibberult.

It is emphasised that, despite resemblances between certain elements in

the fauna and elements in the Recent Indo-Pacific and the Tethyan Eocene

moliuscan faunas, the total composition of the faunas in each case is very distinct

and local ecological conditions tio doubt very rapidly produced divergent

branches from a common stock. One of the most striking features is the general

lack of specific resemblance between the Tertiary mollusea of the East Indies

and Australia, although both appear to be influenced by a Tethyan Eocene

element. As an example, of the mollusea described from the Pliocene of North

Borneo (Cox, 1948) only two species may be regarded as showing any relation-

ship to Australian Pliocene species; Lentipecten. horneanys (Cox), related to

Lentipecten adelaidensis sp.nov., and Timoclea bataviana which from external

features appears to belong to Verenrolpa and to be rejazed ta PY’. protomarica of

the Dry Creek Sands and to . marica of the Recent Indo-Pacific, It is therefore

surprising to: find so close an affinity between the Dry Creek Sands Pliocene and

the Indo-Pacific Recent Furnas.

C. THe AUSTRALASIAN ELEMENT

Distinct from the tropical element which, as shown above, in some species

represents a preservation of Tethyan features, is a large autochthonous element

which has developed since early Yertiary times in Australia and which is not

represented elsewhere other than to a limited extent in New Zealand, No work

has been done in Australia to establish the lineages of the subgenera comprising:

this element, and it may at present be assumed to have arisen from a native stock.

At this stage it is not possible to give the vertical stratigraphical ranges of the

subgenera so that the horizons at which they separately first appear may be

indicated, |

The Australasian element, corifined fo Australia with the exception of those

subgenera marked with an asterisk which occur also in New Zealand, is com-

posed mainly of the subgenera Ennucula, Neotrigonia, *Cuna, Condylocardia,

*Myllitd, Pseudarcopagia, *Tawera, Anapella, Horpetopoma, *Phasianotrochus,

Euriclanclus, Starkeyna, Partubiola, *Munditia, Bellastraca, *Linewmera, Cteno-

colpus, *Colpospira, *Zeacumantys, Ddnnevigena, *Evelynella, *Zeacrypta, Tylo-

spira, *Ellatrivia, Notocypraed, : Umbilia, Conuber, Sigaretatrema, *Taniella,

*Tasmatica, Hypocassis Antephalium, *Cymatiella (also in Pacific), *Muresxstel

(also in the Pacific), Litosamia, Enattmene, Bedeva, +Pleia, Cupidoliva, *Austro-

mitra, Tumitra, Axstroharpa, Amorid, Ericusa, Sydaphera, Inquisitor, *Filo

drillia, Pervicucta.

‘The lineages of subgenera commor to Australia and New Zealand are not

definitely established in Australia, although some are known in New Zealand

at least from the Eocene and are not late Tertiary introductions with the Notonec-

tian Immigration during the New Zealand Castlechfhan ( Marwick, 1929). There

was some addition of Indo-Pacific units to the New Zealand fauna during the

early Tertiary (Marwick, 1925), although the Indo-Pacific element is ve much

weaker in the New Zealand than it is in Australian faunas, Australian elements

may have been introduced during the early Tertiary also,

D. CosMorouitaN ELEMENT ;

The rest of the fauna is composed of cosmopolitan subgenera or those which

have not as yet been sufficiently studied for any precise pronouncement upon their

affinitics to be made,

VII. AGE OF THE FAUNA

The problem of dating the faunas of the Australian region and of correlating

therm with the European time-scale has never been an easy one, and although much

has heen added to the knowledge of Australian Tertiary stratigraphy during

recent years by study of the mictofaunas, an accurate or reliable determination

of the Sequence and comparable time relationship has still to be made

In the absence of restricted zone fossils the most reliable method appears

to be to correlate the total faunal assemblages with faunas of established age

elsewhere in the Australian and neighbouring regions,

There is no doubt that the Dry Creek Sands are post-Miocene. They rest with

angular unconformity on beds not younger than Butdigalian and contain 110

restricted Miocene zone fossils, The mollusca, however, are almost totally unlike

the Recent mollusca inhabiting the adjacent coastal waters, and atiy attempt to

apply the method initiated hy Lyell of assessing the percentage of living species’

would give an entirely etroneotis result-

The table (fig. 3) has been constructed to show the composition of the

fauna from the best information available at present. The “stage” names hitherto

employed for Victorian and South Australian pre-Phiocene Tertiaries are here

us¢d only to give some indication of the length of range of the unrestricted

species. They will be abandoned when acturate zoning of the strata is achieved.

- Salient features of the analysis are:

1, The very low percentage (11) of Jemmy's Point (“Kalimnan") species.

2. ‘The very high percentage (57) of restricted spectes.

3. The 10% of Recent species not occurring at Jemmy’s Point,

This purely statistical evidence would suggest that the Dry Creek Sands

are younger than the Jemmy’s Point Formation (“Kalimnan”). The latter being

accepted as Lower Pliocene in age, the Dry Creek Sands could then be regarded

as late Lower Pliocene or early Middle Pliocene,

From the non-statistical viewpoint the exact correlation of the Jemmy's

Point Formation and the Dry Creek Sands is limited by factors of distance and

facies. The type section at Jemmy’s Point, Kalimna, Gippsland, is 650 miles

east of Adelaide. The strata in that locality were laid down without stratigraphical

break (Crespin, 1943) in a sedimentary sequence embracing stages frotn at least

Oligocene to Pliocene. The Dry Creek Sands were deposited after a period of

denudation with a break in the Miocene-Pliocene seqiience, There was during

Pliocene times no connection by way of Bass Strait between the two areas. For

this reason the term “Bass Strait Province” introduced by Crespin (1950, p. 423)

is somewhat misleading,‘"’ since it implies the existence of Bass Strait prior to its

foundering. The Jemmy's Point area was separated from the Pliocene seas to the

west by the long peninsula of which Tasmania formed the southerly part, and

diverse influences indubitably prevailed im the two areas.

“Kalimnan” species recorded from the Dry Creek Sands are frequently not

typical. Whether this is due to stratigraphical er environmental facies variation

is 2 question which can only be answered by close study of all Pliocene faunules

over the geographical range between Adelaide and East Gippsland. Were the

personal factor permitted to operate to the extent of separating some of the South

Australian examples from the typical species, the number of restricted moliusca

in the Dry Creck Sands would be even higher and the number of “Kalimaan"”

further reduced. On the other hand, as yet no detailed study similar to the

present one has been made of the Jemmy’s Point mollusca or of mollusca from

Pliocene localities elsewhere in Victoria to enable one to express a confident

opinion that some of the restricted Dry Creek Sands mollusca do not occur in

the Victorian Pliocene. Furthermore, the fauna of the Dry Creek Sands differs

markedly from that of the estuarine Pliocene strata of the Murray River. One

can only emphasise that much detailed work remains to be done before the

Pliocene sequence in Southern Australia is definitely established,

From the microfauna! aspect the only beds which have been correlated

with the Dry Creek Sands ate limestones in north-western Australia and on the

Nullabor Plains from which the foraminiferal assemblage of the Dry Creek Sands

has been reported (Crespmn, 1950, p. 425).,‘?)

The New Zealand Waitotaran is more closely related to the Dry Creek

Sands than is the Nukumaruan, and if any significance may be attached to

trans-Tasman correlation of climatic conditions, the similar conditions prevailing

during the South Australian Pliocene and the Wattotaran, with sudden extitiction

of tropical forms at the end of the period of deposition of the Dry Creek Sands

may be worthy of note. The Nukumartian was marked hy a cold-water faunal

immigration brought about by the advance and later retreat of subantarctic

waters m the Middle Pliocene (Fleming, 1944, p. 209), It is certain that somewhat

similat conditions existed in southern Australia where the Dry Creek Sands and

their equivalents represent the last link with the tropical waters of the Indo-

Pacife. The only suggestion of a gradual infiltration of colder water forms

is provided by the presence in the Dry Creek Sands of the Flindersian fora-

minifera Flintina triguetra (Brady), Crébrobulimina polystoma (Parker and

Jones) and Nubecularia lucifuga var. lapidea Wiesner, and Flindersian

1 Tt is also liable to confusion with the term Basan Province in use for the land

fauna of Tasmania.

) As Miss Crespin has identified the foraminifer Austrotrillina howchini frony what

Fd be the same formation on the Nullarbor Plains, the second correlation requires con-

Fmattan.

mollusca not related to tropical forms, including Nucula (Ennucula) beach-

portensis Verco, Nuculana (Scaeoleda) verconis (Tate), Limopsis vixornata

Verco, Lissarca rubricata (Tate) and Lissarca rhomboidalis Verco, Bornia

irigonale (Tate), Mysella ovalis Tate, Hiatella angasi (Angas) Batilloria (Zeacu-

mantus) diemenensis Quoy and Gaimard, B. (Batillariella) estuarina (Tate)

Trophon (Litozamia) goldsteini Tenison-Woods, Mitrella (Dentimitrella) lin-

colnensis Reeve, Retusa (Semiretusa) apiculata (Tate), and Volvulella rostrata

(Adams). These are all species of autochthonous genera which have probably

evolved from endemic Australian elements.

DISTRIBUTION. TABLE

SPECIES , \ ; BORE

a < . SSSLRSexae ew Es

' ‘ m= a “ ™ -

a a A a a

Nucula (Ennucula) kalinnae Singleton Hie tee geile ORE rm et Be et ee

Nucula (Ennucula) beachportensis Verco .. seid cet > aati eS pan ae ate at. a

Nucula. (Ennuciula) venusta N. H. Woods ni, wha Le es ber ee ee

Pronucula morundiana (Tate) me ae jase weit Haji hb ee t= Ser.

Nuculana (Scaedleda) woodsi (Tate) an) aes) Se ee ee SS

Nuculana (Scaeoleda) crebrecostata (T. W.) ene. wre ae Roe SX Se ier 5 eo

Nuculana (Scaeoleda) verconis (Tate) toe fae We Sahoo SS ee xl

Arca negata (Cotton) .... Ae sng we tee) foe ae HE SB ea ee fee epee yo =

Barbatia (Barbatia) epitheca Cotton a a i > es ee ee ee

Barbatta (Acar) coma (Cotton) sg chen a Da SN ee dee get eet Se et Se

Cucullaea cortoensis McCoy np ey! Oe tee Coes ee aa eo

Cucullaea praelonga Singleton wi? cine fair bad ole Spe ee xx

Limopsis beaumariensis Chapman wae eas Cs XK KH EH NEE HLH

Limopsts macéoyi Chapman... ease aa OK XK KO

Limopsis eucosmus Verco im O52. Fie las dee beet! oe A te mie

Limapsis vixornata Verco aod wae ‘ste a x SS —

Lissarca- rubricata (Tate) ates ste seve dap a eh ES ee Hh Ke

Lissarca rhomboidalis Verco .... fang ass a we SX a eee eel att

Glycymeris (Tucetona) convera (Tate) ae CXR KH UK XH K_X

Glycmeris (Tucetilla) tenuicostata (Reeve Tn Paes ee Mee eee HE tye

Glycymeris (Veletuceta) subradians Basedow wh gir do SRM Re Sa ee peep

Pinctada crassicardia (Tate) sone tate ath ow O-XXxX--~_-x--—x__

Loapha hyotidoidea Tate a, Te a Se ne St. ee eel Pe a xox

Ostreg urenicolaTate t.. icd aed tute te ae ee Ee SCO ee

Neotrigonia trua Cotton np i | aS shh anh ome bo Le See coh te og LeuSe

Chlamys (Chlamys) polyaktinos sp. nav... ee, we = EOL ee Be

_Chlamys (Chlamys) antiaustralis (Tate)... nue KO KEK AK XK XEKE

Chlamys (Equichlamys) consobrina (Tate) bite wah We = 2 ee Se en Ss Hs

Chlamys (Mesopeplum) incerta (T. W.) ew ao & RE scecteaa lier x--

Lentipecten adelaidensis sp. noy. ti0 is jas <Seistetet: ee SS oe A, Se

Propeamusstum atkinsoni (Johnston)* pn a oe On ROS RS eae Fre TL Rss Sy

Hinwites corioensis McCoy eee KE

Spondylus spondyloides (Tate) wee OC XX KKK KHOR LK

Lima bassi T, W. ee ce ee OY Do eS

Anomia tatet Chap. and Sing. cp «ae tn wet, Mee OOK ae ee lee ee ol

Brachidontes hirsttus Lamarck ead weet Se ate eS = ee ee Se

Myadora ulea Cotton —,.., an ble ny save ee Sods hae eee

Myadora tenuilirata Tate anes Sioa ats ess e56e- ah ae te Sm” ela lees ee

Myadora corrugata Tate vate ttt Least sates 1 Rl Re ee pee

Cleidothaerus adelaidensis Cotton — .... fxs te Selamat te! eo ba ew ee _

Humphreyia strangei Adams nee im ost a Pad 1 ee Pee SBP, Shi

Humphreyia incerta (Chenu) Miike hp he, Biep ten So eee ee Op

Cuspidaria subrosirata Tate 4, 0 sus ieee tats me a ror me ol whe

Eucrassatella camura (Pritchard)... Hagen fests we CX XEX--~3XX-_ KK

Fucrassatella kingicoloides (Pritchard) gy x EX

Cuna polita (Tate) toes oon savy aece otee beh oe Me % Si

Cuna aporema Cottan .,.. se Aen bist ale a ee, ee eee Woe te Sela eS Sod oe

Cardita compia (Tate) wile uty Wp -sea pet SE Shae

Cardsta subdeceptiva sp, nov. 00 eee ee XL LLL

Gluns spinulosa (Tate) oS See Tey ant ope eh Set See Ge mt sal copan! et

Glans dennantt (Chap, and Cres.) __.... ass ite at oe See eee = Se

Pleurameris pecten (Tate)... asad cae cher ak} ee ES eS Bias ce x Ss

Pleuromeris subpecten sp. nov. sap bees ant ie ot Se a ees ae a

Pleurameris trigonalis (Tate) iis Se ae oe eee ee 2 be

Cyelocardia (Scalaricardita) subcompacta (Chapman and

Crespin} «, — x —- = --~2 +H a

SPECIES - BORE

ASSESESB eS ARES

mam tT - -_ _

Cyclocardia (Arcturellina) hindmarshensis sp. nov. we = Kobe xX -- KB

Cyclocardia (Arcturellina) peridonea sp. nov. as en or Ke Se xos-+

Condylocardia tenicostae Chap.and Gab. .... sab Wiis, Sy =o ee

Sportetla jubata Hedley hee pees why sp we oO XX - 7 -- +x

Chama lamellifera T. W. ae bis aA St ate eH eee he ee

Myrtea fabuloides (‘Tate) tos ats aonb ede SE Boe ae eS ee ee

Monitilora (Monitilora) idonew sp. nov: r a coe Xo ew ow

Monitilora (Prophetilora) chavani sp_nov. ie by Do @ lee ee eee ee fash -=

Eomiltha (Gibbolitcina) salebrosa (Nr H. Woods) te ea tithe: bh oe 2 — a

Eomiltha confirmans sp. nov. WA Yat pee Se Sel a

Linga (Bellucina) nucifarmis (Tate) dite ay we SX EKEXX-- He XH

Callucina balcombica (Cossmann) 1 eee HERR OR Xe

Gonimyrtea salishuryensts Sp. NOV. a oo sas ah na — He ae a

Ganimyrted. crasstOr SP. TOV. sens senses io sCasvppiiaw “estesate ee de ee SSS a

Gonimyrtea validtor sp. nov... gore inst ies cae : ee a Kno +

Goninvyriea notabilior sp. nov. Aco Sipe ee eS eS HS ee SE ee

Miltha hora (Cotton) bie sais se ae wa Se eee x—-xX xx

Divatucina cumings (Ad. and Ang.) wae ae EE HE SE OR aE RES

Diplodonta solitaria N. H. Woods w+ Sa ee witty Pam ae eee cr ey ots ee

Numellasuborbicularis (Tate) wow =e KS ee

Thyasira sinuata (N.H. Woods) un ee eae SK RR TH ee

Borma.trigonale (Tate) et ee a ae | Kae se

Litigiella adeluidensis sp. nov. peed wa shee ee i ane ee x2 —

Mylkta hindmarshensis sp.nov. as wie Se iy ee x= -e

Pyaperyeina micans (Tate) ae eee EO RRR OOO

Properycina torrensensts syi. nov. ie ty esi ee

Platomysia sp, i. SS cw teh we athe marta ocglet we ee x--

Montocuta sevicea Tate ee, X---

Mysella anomala Angas seh ape aja’ Hess we TOT kKR-- RS KK x--—- +

Mysella ovalis Tate —.... ule as i ewe SKS HE Re Oe

Mysella macer N. 31. Woods 2.00 eee KOO OO =<

Mysella tellinoides NTT, W. wooo we SE KH HR x--+-

Vasticardinm (Regezara) praccygnorum #03 TOV: an ne EE He See ee

Fasticardium (Vasticardium) submaculosum ep. oy. «a. —S eee eee “<<

Fulvia tenticostata (Lamarck) " beg we Fee EOS Hee Hee

Nemocardium (Prattlum) proterothetidis sp. nGv. i a

Dostnia (Kereta) johnstoni Tate... anes a

Notocallista (Striacallista) mollesta Wewk “. So 2exeoloones ~---

Notocallista (Striacallista) pestis Marwick ne EER ee oe SS Se ee

Antigona connata (Pritchard) we wae Se x—--—-xX-—

Antigona (Hina) cainogioca (T. Woods) ae wk EK eH eRe ee

Gafrarium perornatum N, H, Woods sein) pees we TO XS eee eer eee

Tawera pernitida (N, HH. Wonds) ee x—---=

Tawere gallinula Lam. s aren lies ts we - - XN -- HH Hee Kee

Tamera tacurvilamellata sp, noy. — ass nit oe ee es SS ae ee St ep Se SS

Chioneryx dennanit Chan. and Cres. ant ist we SPX RENOR SL HLS x —

Placamen subrobarata (Tate) nde pave het we + -EXKXX-—--—--—--~—~—-— x

Rassitnaallportt (T.Wds.) .. Ni eee SE ee ee Set

Timaclea (Veremolpa) protomarica (Cotton)/ me won eS aee eo Sees

Venerupis baupertina Tate... ass ehins sate wy — 2S eet voscien—

Gari hamiltonensts (Tate) ae a, a, a

Gari aequalis (Tate)... ast me fave peep emt BE RSE eee a ee

Macomaralbhi. (Finlay) ave Pr tsi saab abe tee el XS ss 55 SH SH a S

Tellina masoni Tate... wo se wee) woe SE He Gee aS

Tellina albinelloides Tate. sie wre ete ose sian fem 8 RE eee ec x-——

Psendarcopuata detrita N. A. Woods. abe Hes wih ae a oS ei eid a=

Semele westculosa Tate ack a fave set win toon Eten es po elt 2 — N=

Solecurtus dennanli Tate rt uit stu ots i @eMS ee eee Osos fee

SPECIES

BORE

Solecurtus. subrectangularis N. H. W. peor gees

Mactvra (Electromactra) howchiniona Tate aii

Anapella variabilis (Tate) eats

Zenatiopsis angustata Tate au. abo aed nad

Corbula ephanulla Tate sy) “pase anon fasta

Corbula adelaidensts nom. nov. bite chin, ated

Hiatella austraks (Lam.) sear tae

Hiaiella angasi (Angas) oe

Dentalium (Dentolium) howchini Cott. and Lud. mais

Dentatium (Fissidentalium) bifrons Tate sees

Dentalium (Fissidentalium) mawsont sp. nov. ata

Dentalium (Antalis) denotatum sp.nov. ay san

Siphonodentalium (Pulsellum) adelatdense sp. nov,

Cadulus (Dischides) yatalensts sp, nov. sis

Cadulus (Gadila) acuminatus Tate...

Acanthochiton (Eoplax) adelaidae Ash. and Cott. .

Chiton (Anthochiton) relatus Ash. and Cott. Site

Cryptoplax ludbrookae Ashby Pe ont ahd

Hahotts (Notohaliotis) naevosoides MeCoy_ aie

Ewmarginula didactica sp. noy ese.

Emarginula delicatissima Ch. and Gab...

Emarginuladennanti Ch. and Gaby ye seeneee

Emargimula dilatorta sp.nov. 4.0 see utes nee

Tuogali cicatricosa Adams ah Goats a

Tugali inforitunata Lud. rs

Tugali nota Cotton wont wer wage

Amblychilepas acra (Cotton) |

Fiuchelus (Herpetopoma) plocenicus (Lud. >

Calliostoma (Laetifautor) oblsquicancellatum (Lud. )

Calliostoma (Laetfantor) stinicarinatum (Lud,)

Calltastoma (Laetifautor) crebrinodulosum (Lud.)

Calliostoma (Laetifautor) bicarinatun (hn, ) oh

Astele (Astele) fanuticem Lud. a ete

Astele ( Pulchrastele) planiconicum (Lud. > pate

Astele (Pulchrastele) tuberculatum (Lud.) i.

Cantharidus (Phasianotrochus) laxegemmatus (Lud) sabe

Cantharidus (Phasianotrochus) subsimplex (Lud. )

Thalatia (Calthalotia) nitidissima (Lud.) f

Thalotia (Calthalotia) fictitis (Lud, ) ae

Clanculus (Euriclanculus) quadricingulatus Lud.

Clanculus ( Euriclanculus) eucorinatus Lud. ante

Isanda (Minolia) perglobosa (Lud.) ie abt

Npectamen plantcarinatii Sp, NOV, ewer sued

Spectamen praecursor sp. nov, east vo sees

Gena incalia Cotton ss ase epee

Tetnostoma depressultun ( Ch. and Gab. } aioe sore

Starkeyna. pulcherrima (Ch. and Gab.) vis vue

Tubiola (Pariubiola) depressispira (Lud.) 7

Tubiola (Partubiola) varihrata (Lud.) Ty!

Crossea (Dokicrossea) cf. labiata T. Wi or,

Collonia omissa sp, tov. ws ina wats

Astraza (Bellastraea) hesperus Sp: nov. wie tee

Liotina (Mundifia) tarmanica T. Woods... tone

Phasianelladennanti Crespin 0.0 se tee seen

Pellax jeyuma sp.nov... ve

Phenacoletas tela Lud. sage mi Sos

Cocculinella salisburyensis sp, nov... ans

Tectarius (Nina) adelaidensis (Cott.)*

BR FRE

Pbrprdeutrerd sd

nwa

ttiti

Plt riwt tr tripe tet

Pibeali ltt

Awl aka | wat li Re lL a

AMA | LAR

mame ee Se ee He ee

SPECIES BORE

SSBERRSSAaSTS* SS

—- oF - - -

Amphithalamas (Pisinna) chrysahdus (Ch. pal Geb) ww ee eee ee

Merelina (Linemera) varisculpta sp. nov. ... phe eM ae ee age ee eh cvs

Turbvella praenovarensis sp.nov. eee KR ee

Turboella elimatiag sp.noy, in, 0 wee sete Sannin ne Meee Paes HE eR ee rhe

Kaurnella denotata Lud. Ted beet tape nif} ey ay SES ee HS SS Xs ee

Pseudohiotia angost Crosse... en eee Soa” eee ee, enone wr ee

Cingula (Pelecydium) eylindracea T: ‘Woods wh wos EOE BO Se oe SH xa--—-

Rissomanivea Adams ... 0 om “i 2p bade ase a A ag a ene ee ed Swe em pces

Rissoina élegantula Angas .... eos wile, dalle Se ee ee hae st

Rissoina tinelo sp. nov. Ha sgt, cele Hue tee ey ee > er

Diastoma provist Tate —XxXXXXxX-XX—XEX

Turrifella (Haustator) acricula adelaidensis Cott. & Wds. — XxX--xXXKxX-xX¥---—-—

Turritella (Haustator) subacricula Cott. and Wds. aii ee et ee ee i So

Turritella (Ctenocolpus) triliz Cott.and Wds. _.... ve SOM oS ee oy OE Pe

Turritella (Colpospira) platyspiroides sp. nov. abe Peg t oe OM ay eth

Turriiella (Peyrotsa) murrayana subrudis ig & Was. ee NS en ee ee

Glyptozaria spectabilss sp. nov. Pe we amet Se

Archilectonica (Discotectomca} qoounonensis UT. Woods) WX Boo See oe tee

Tenagodws australis (Q.& G.) wid dae ha mm oc x foe to eS xx

Obtertio liratus Lud... ~~ te ae eRe Sea eee ew

Batillaria (Zeacumantus) diemenensis., (Q. &G) divde tae na a eS Se tae as ee

Batillaria (Zeacumantus) multilirata (Lud.) ee be SH He SS KEo---

Batillania (Zeacumoanius) bsvaricata (Lud,) wet cre ORK oe US xo-=-

Batillaria (Batillariella) estuarina (Tate) .-. a. fa fins Ee me ep ee ee

Manulona orrugosa Lud. at, <isee ees ie (EK oe Se

Manulona hrasuturalis Lud, .... % sere ath ea Se oe Oe

Ataxocerithtum cf, concatenotum Tate ’ = 2 4S eee x 43

Alaxecerithium bideniiculatum sp.nov. oy. an a eee Ewe >

Adelacerithium meruitun Lud. fot WT petp jee Ghent tae 2g SS es a

Diala (Mereldia) incommoda (Lud.) fee —egh oe thoi ea oe Loo Ha te

Rittium (Semibittium) subgranarium sp. nov. ee ag Se ge Se Be ge os oe Ee

Thenciwm (subg. n. ov.) adelaidense How. and Crit e sauas PSE aban popended ee x-.x-+

Thericium (subg. n. nov.) pritchard: (Harris) oo. 0 wa Ke

Thericiume (subg. n. nov.) fallax (Lud. ) ths weg ee IE Se le ae ee Se

Sentvertagus capillaius Tate .... a Rie eal pee) en IG RE ee ,

Tlypotrochus semiplicaius sp.nov. ,,, we ee Oe ee ee Ke

Cerithiella (subger. nov.) trigemmata Chap. ‘and Cres, im =e oS Se ee

Cervithiella (subgen.noy.) perelongata (Lud.) wed | ee ES Kile ee ee

Cerithiella (subgen. nov.) supérspiralis sp, nov. wu wm eH ee

Triphora (Isotriphora) salishuryensis sp. nov. wm ee KIS eH ee

Amaea (Amaea) triplicata (Tate)... eee ee KE ee

Cirsatrema (Dannevigena) sp. By aed) eds > ote, eg BUR Se ea oe

Scala (Hirtoscala) sp. .... vere ga See eee eee ee eae

Melanella ( Margineulisna) longiconica (Lud. ,) veee eich. Qty Soe ce ee i ee

Melanella (Margineulima} minuticonia (Lud.} we KH He ee

Letosivaca (Leiosfraca) acutissima Sowerby |... wee ae ee ae Se x—-=+-

Niso psilaT. Woods — ... syne Abate ASR ie” 6 PK ES Che lee —

Syrnola (Syrnola) tincta ‘Angas. an leh OO, ER Se eet S ee he ely

Symola (Agatha) praefasciate sp, nov. wi othe ee KH He

Svrnola (Agatha) jonesiana (Tate) sb bet oe HE A ee ee ee -

Syrnola (Agatha) infrasuleata (Tate) nn ant Cte gee es ep te ee x—-—-—a

Syrnola (Pupasynnala) tasmanica T, Woods sk wah tee Sh RE ee, Sy ee en es =

Syrnola (Puposynnola) acrisecta- Lud. nbs vo we ee Ko So eg oS

Symnola (Euelynella) adelaidensis Lud. Mite aati ee I ee eh ee ee Kon -—

Turbonilla ( Turbonslla) mariage T. Woods 0 un ae KH ey

Turbenilla (Chemnttzia) mappingae sp. nov. mm me = X¥X---H------—--

Turbonilla (Chemnitsa) wurongae sp, nov, ap at ee Ee x-+-+--

Turbontile (Chemnitsia) subfuscaLud, — ....

SPECIES

BORE

Turbonilla (Chemnitzia) adelaidensis sp. nov. 3

Turbonilia (Chevsnitsia) ourrongae sp. nov.

Turbonilla (Chemnttzia) widningae sp. nov.

Turbonilla (Chemnitzia) sp. ....

Turbonilla (Pyrgalampros) vixcosiata Lud.

Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) “liraecostata” T, Woods...

Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) radtcans Chap. and Cres. ....

Cheilea adelaidensis Lud. PUM ane

Hipponys (Sabta) conica (Schum.)

Cerithioderma cf. accrescens (Tate)

Capulus circinatus Tate 7 ae ost

Calyptraea (Sigapatella) crassa Tate’ ote ley

Crepidula (Zeacrypta) immersa Angas odd ones

Crepidula (Zeacrypta) dubitabilis Tate site ken

Crepidula (Zeacrypta) hainswortht Jakins, _—

Tylospira coronata marwicki (Fin.) fics thee

Proterato (Cypraeerato) subaustralis sp. nov. Aes

Ellatrivia wirrata Lud, tispe isi <aitg siaa

Notocypraeaeryma-Cotton eee

Umlilia cera Cotto anne ates cts) take

Globularia sp.

Polinices (Pottnices) subjugum (Cotton) ans

Polinices (Conuber) sulbwarians (Tate) en

Poknices (Conuber) cunninghamensts Harr.* ant

Polinices (Conuber) balteatelia (Tate) pais isn

Sigaretotrena subinfundibulum (Tate) mee sisi.

Tanew hamiltonensts (T. Woods) — «., we SE

Tanieglla weymouthensts sp, nov. hon’ Pee mee

Prosiuber microsculptum sp.nov. an vive ape

Austrocochlis sabstolida (Tate) os ati,

Tasmatica modestina sp, hoy, ... “ass ent

Cassis (Hypocassis) salisburyensis sp. nov.

Semicassis (Antephalium) muelleri Tate ....

Semicassis (Antepholinm) suffiata (T. Woods)

Semicassis (? Casmaria) radiata Tate de, Ba, She

Argobuccinum basss Angas aa ee auc 1 ops

Cymatiella adeloidensis Lud, .... sons

Charonia (Austrotriton) armata (Tate) tee aHES

Charonia (Austrotrtton) radialts (Tate)... pry

Trunculariopsis peramangns (Lird.) bee a

Hexaples (Murexsul) suboctogonts sp. nov. neck

Hexoplex (Murexsul) bicanicus (Tate)

Pterynotus (Pterorhelas) trinodosus (2) (Tate) |

Homolacontha antecedens sp.nov. .. aac

Trophon (Litosamia) galdsteini T, Woods

Trophon (Enatimene) metungensis eb and Cres.

Bedeva crassiplicata (Lid.) geet ten

Typhis lacintatus Tate ,... ont a: aie aves

Latiaxis dissitus Cotton* ets wang

Mitrella (subgen. nov.) lincolnensis ( Reeve) haa

Mitreila (subgen. nov.) musscula (Lud.) =

Mitrélla (subgen. nov.) sp. dea oes

Mitrella (Adeemtrella) insolentior (Lud. Serer Oo

Phos gregsont Tate “3

Hinia (Reticunossa) spiraliscabra Chap. and Cres.

Hinia (Reticunassa) subcontca sp, fiov. sans ens

Fasciolaria {Pleta) sp. Se ae iter

Fusinus dictyotis(?) Tate)... <a

vies errr) eves

Lop Ra

fir: i

baste

Ye Pop y

mos +t

{

tal

prt tav

— ee ae es ee eS

ee |

{

“

SPECIES

BORE

Olivella (Cuptdoliva) nymphalis (Tate)

Ancilla (Baryspira) tatei Marwick 10.0 sus

Ancilla (Turrancilla) adelaidensis sp. nov,

Austromitra angusticostata Lud.

lustromitra mawsont sp. nov, <a <p

dustromitra payciplicata sp. nov. goal astg eae

Austromitra multiplicata-sp. nov. save ate wie

Mitraria (Eumitra) coxi sp. tov sy neti

Mitraria (Eumitra) glabra (?) PavaTianee ‘te hie

anny peers

Mitraria (Eumitra) sp, 5 ne sie

Miirarta (Eumitra). fodinalis (Tate) athe ier

Tudicla sinolecta Lud. .... ons awe ssp

Harpa (Austroharpa) tater Finlay vee eke) att

Cymbiola (Cymbiola) tabulata (Tate) git ase

Cymbiola (Aulicina) uncifera c ESE). asp aun

Amoria grayt Lud. a. a) ee

Ericusa elltpsoidea (Tate) aa 1

Abhera (Sydaphera) wannanensis (Tate) *

Cancellaphera confirmans sp. NOV...

Margmella (Eratoidea) glaessnert sp. nov. sass

Marginella (Firatoidea) wentwarthi T. Woods .:.

hee anes

Marginella (Fratoidea) meta Cotton* .... iy

Marginella (Eratoidea) crista eatin er

Gibberula clima (Cotton) * ,... fo seus

Gibberula talla (Cotton) * ase ate sae

Gibberula cassida (Catton) * a. ue a

Closta moana (Lud.) te hai HY,

Closia arena (Cotton) * at caprsh othe

Closia doma (Cotton)

Closia planilabrum sp. nov.

Serrata charma (Cotton)

Serrata metula (Cotton) * , ike

Serrata bicrassiplicata sp. nov. we aig

Serrala weymouthensts sp. nov.

Polvarima (°) incommoda sp. tov. ....

Xenuroturris (Veruturris) tomopleurotides Powell

Xenuroturris (Veraturris) bisculpta Powell wt

FE pidirona-adelaidensis (Lud.) &

[pidirona powelli sp, nov. sates gts

Jiratomina adelaidensts Powell seve

Inquisttor detritus Lud, Sick

Inquisitor sp. ss bh Font Seve aves

Splendrillia trucidata (Lud. ae ae site sees

Splendrillia adelaidae Powell .... — end

Syntomodrillia decemcostata (Lud.) “5 .

Syntomodrillia ludbrookae Powell — .... ae, ee

Tomopleura ludbrookae Powell veal asi inte

Maorttomella nutans Powell. .... Pe hezs le

Guraleus (Guraleus) chapplet Powell _ wat faite

Guraleus (Guraleus) ludbrookae Powell asa ase

erers

Gurulens (Euguraleus) subnitidus Lud, ae sav

Guraleus (Euguraleus) uadeluidensis Powell iF

Guraleus (Euguralens) powellt sp.nov. oy at

Guraleus (81) sp. asi

Guraleus CF vchapusilliady abbreviatus Powell

Guraleus (Paraguraleus) incisus Powell 4.

. Mappingta acukspira Lud. fiteaiem Heit — eile

Mappingia matronalis sp. nov. ats bz nt

—-—- — = —

106

~ eee ie ee ee ee ee ee

a eae eae a a i ee

— eee ae ae i ae i ee =

ae ee Ke ee ee

— eee ee ee ee ee

itd

bret

AA laAAL IL RR OM

Prrutr rd

~— ee we eae ae i ae i ee

ae ee Se eer See Ee ee

SPECIES

Filodrillia peramoena (Lud.) cas

Filodriliia ludbrookae Powell

Etremopsis contigua Powell

Asperdaphne (Aspertilia) bas ade Powell

Nepotilla powellt sp. nov.

Penestrodaphne pulchra Powell.

Pseudexomilus caelatus Powell

Conus (Floraconus) hamiltonensis Tate

Strioterebrum (Pervicacia) crassum (Tate)

Strioterebrum (Pervicacia) subspectabilis (Tate)

Hastula (Nototerebra) tenisoni (Finlay)

Terebra (s.l.) spp. se

Acteon scrobiculatus T, WwW.

Acteon sp.

anaes

onan aces

Semiactaeon tardior Sp. TOV, ... or

Semiactaeon stratosculpium sp. nov.

Retusa (Semtretusa) canaligradata sp nov,

Retusa (Semiretusa) apiculata (Tate)

Retusa (Semiretusa) coxi sp. nov.

Volvulella rostrata (Adams) ....

Cylichna angustata (Tate and Coss.)

Cylichna anticingulata sp. nov.

Scaphander tenuis Harris *

Damoniella bullaeformis (Coss.)

Damoniella partisculpta sp. nov.

one “

Veprecula (7?) adelatdensis Powell...

wear

oon

sas

BORE

SSSetznasaxXxunvrevses

= 4 “ - ~

Eirema weymouthensis sp, nov. x6 wi 2 SP eee ee oA ae A

deve eee nese we — X X—_—-—-—— = Ke ee ee ee

a oo ew — XS ee —- — — = ee Se ee

wre — — X— —H— meee ee SS

Peery oe —XX—---—---—--|--—-=-—s =

wnee seer eee acer wae ee ee eee ee le ~—e

veer we > ee ee

veee Peery a

= aes . a ee

sae etse wes ome MO mes we ee aia i es

ae wee a, _

os: —_—- Be — ee Ke Ke ee ee =

rte otee we |= XS —-— —- — — NM a SS) as ie

Perry peas anes eens — —- F-—-— ee — —- ee ee a

a. nese suse wan = X X —- —- —- —- — — xx

nee see esos = K— — | ee eS ei Se

. ae asee i a rn

eee i

wees oe —~ Xe ee RH Ke —_ Ke ee —

vase euee i x—_-—— =

ny asee woos eaes oe — Xe — i i re ie ee ie Ee

< wees ance oe = XXX -—- -—-— - — = xX—_w_=— =

seep 24 owe =—- Xe — —-— —- — — x—--—--—-

oy sane fore owe — X X —- — —- — — — Xe — = =

a soe oven we — XS — ee eee +

sen tore = =X see ese Se eee ew = =

than those tabulated.

*From borings other

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS ©

The writer is very greatly indebted to Dr. L, R. Cox of the British Museurn

(Natural History) for most generous help and advice throughout the work; to

the Director and Trustees and to Mr. W. N. Edwards, Keeper of Geology of

the Museum, for permitting most of the work to be undertaken there; to Dr.

W. J. Rees and Mr. G. L. Wilkins of the mollusca section and te the librarians

in the general, geology, and zoology libraries of the Museum for assistance in

the search for material and literature; to Drs. Thorson and Lemche of the Uni-

versitetets Museum, Copenhagen, for the generous loan of type specimens; to

Monsieur A. Chavan and Dr, Myra Keen for help with the classification of diffi-

cult groups; to the Director of Mines, South Australia, for the loan of the

typescript of portion of a bulletin im the press on the Hydrology of the Adelaide

Basin; and to Dr. M. F-. Glaessner for the loan of additional material from the

Tate Collection.

REFERENCES

Benson, W. N. 1911 Note descriptive of a Stercogram of the Mount Lofty Ranges, South

Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 34, 108-111, pls. 20, 21

Cuapman, F, 1916 Cainjozoic Geology of the Mallee and other Victorian Bores: Rec,

Genl, Surv. Viet, 3, (4), 327-430

Crapman, F., and Cresprm, IT, 1935 Foraminiferal Limestones of Eocene Age from North-

West Division, Western Australia, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict, 48, (1.s.), (1), 55-62

Cravan, A. 1949 Remarques sur la signification climatique des Mollusques marins fossiles.

Bull. Soc. Geol. France, ser. 5, 19, (7-9), 507-512

Cortow, Th, C. 1947 Some Tertiary Molluscs from the Adelaidean Stage (PHocene) of

South Australia. Rec. .S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), 653-670

Cox, L, R. 1948 Neogene Mollusca from the Dent Peninsula, British North Bornes,

Schweiz. Pal. Abhandl., 66, 1-70, pls, 1-9

Cresvin, J, 1943 Stratigraphy of the Tertiary Marine Rocks in Gippsland, Victoria, Comm.

Aust, Dept. Supply and Shipping, Min, Res. Surv. Bull, 9 ¢ Pal. ser. 4). (Processed)

Crespin, I, 1950 Australian Tertiary Microfaunas and their Relutionships 10 Assemblages

elsewhere in the Pacific region. Journ. Pal., 24, 421-429

Cresprn, I and Corron, B, C. 1952 The Stratigraphy and Palaeontology of the Sub-

surface Deposits of the Adelaide Plains, $, Aust. Dept, Mines Geol. Surv. Bull, 27,

Appendix III, 227-238

Davies, A, M. 1934 Tertiary Faunas, 2

Fenner, C. 1930 The Major Structural and Physiographic Features of South Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 54, 1-36

Freminc, C. A. 1944 Molluscan Evidence of Pliocene Change in New Zealand. Trans, Roy.

Soc. N,Z,, 74, (3), 207-220. Two text figs.

Guagssner, M. F, 1951 Three Foraminiferal Zones in the Tertiary of Australia. Geol,

Mar. 88, (4), 273-283

Han, T. S, and Prircwarn, G B. 1902 A suggested Nomenclature for the Marine Ter-

tiary Deposits of Southern Australia, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict, 14, (2), 75-81

Howcurn, W. 1914 The Evolution of the Physiographical Features of South Australia.

Rep. 14th Meeting Aust. Assoc. Ady. Sci,, Melb., 1913, 148-178, pl. 3

Howeurn, W. 1923 A Geological Sketch Section of the Sea-Cliffs on the castern side of

Gulf St. Vineet, from Brighton to Sellick’s. Hill, with Descriptions. Trans. Roy,

Soc, S, Aust., 47, 283-315

Howenrm, W. 1928 The Building of Australia and the Succession of Life, pt. ii, Handb.

Brit, Sci. Guitd

Howcurn, W. 1929 Geology of South Australia, Ed. 2

HowcHin, W. 1935 Notes on the Geological Sections obtained by several Borins sitiated

on the plain between Adelaide and Gulf St. Vincent.,, pt. i. Trans. Roy. Sec, §, Aust.,

59, 68-102

Howcarn, W, 1936 Lt. i, Cowandilla (Government) Bore, Trans. Roy. Soc, 5. Aust, 60,

1-34

Howcuis, W., and Parr, W. J. 1938 Notes on the Geological Features and Foraminsferal

Fauns of the Metropolitan Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide. Trans, Roy. Soc, 5. Agist., 62,

(2}, 28?-317

Kremer, W. C, and Stoss, L. b, 1951 Stratigraphy and Sedimentation. Freeman & Co.

San Francisco

Lupsroox, N. H. 1938 The Stratigraphical Position of the “Adelaidean” Beds of PHocene

Age, beneath Adelaide, South Australia. Aust. N.Z. Assoc. Ady. Sci., 23, Auckland

Meeting, 442-446

Luvsroox, N, H. 1941 Gastropoda from the Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide, South Australia,

together with a list of some miscellaneous Fossils from the Bore. Trans, Roy. Soc.

S. Aust., 65, (1), 79-102, pls. 4, 5

Martin, K. 1914 “Wann ldsste sich das Gebiet des Indischen Archipels von der Tethys?”

Samml. Geol. Reichs. - Mus. Leiden, ser, 1 9, 337-355

Marwick, J. 1925 The Indo-Pacific Element in the Marine Tertiary of New Zealand

Verh. Geol. Mijnb. Genvolsch (Geol. Ser.), 8, 369-377

Marwick, J. 1929 Geological Evidence of Past Land Connections of New Zealand. N.Z.

Journ. Sci. and Technol, 11, (3), 202-206

Mawson, Ye Se R. C. 1950 Subdivision of the Adelaide System. Aust. Journ. Sci.,

13, (3), 69-72

Mires, K. R. 1952 Geology and Underground Water Resources of the Adelaide Plains Area.

S. Aust. Dept. Mines. Geol. Surv. S. Aust. Bull. 27

Parr, W. J. 1939 Foraminifera of the Pliocene of South-Eastern Australia. Min, and Geol.

Journ. Vict, 1, (4), 65-71

Secnit, R. 1940 Geology of Hallett Cove and District with special reference to the Dis-

tribution and Age of the Younger Glacial Till. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 64, (1),

3-44, pls, 1-3, 1 map

Srvcieton, F. A. 1941 The Tertiary Geology of Australia. Proc, Roy. Soc. Vict, 53, (1),

(ns.), 1-125, pls. 1-3

Spricc, R. C. 1945 Some Aspects of the Geomorphology of Portion of the Mount Lofty

Ranges. Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 69, (2), 277-302

Tarte, R, ewe Notes on the Tertiary Strata beneath Adelaide, Trans. Roy, Soc. §. Aust,

5, 40-4.

Tate, R. figs On the Discovery of Marine Deposits of Pliocene Age in Australia, Trans.

Soc. S. Aust., 13, (2), 172-180

‘Tate, R. i800 The Stratigraphical Relations of the Tertiary-formations about Adelaide,

Fite fxeal reference to the Croydon Bore. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust, 13, (2),

Tarr, R. 1889 On Deep-seated Eocene Strata in the Croydon and other Bores, Trans.

Roy. Soc. §. Aust., 22, (2), 194-199

TATE, R,, and DenNANT, J. 1896 Correlation of the Marine Tertiaries of Australia. Pt. iii.

South Australia and Tasmania. Trans. Roy, Sec, S. Aust,, 20, (1), 118-148

Unacrove,, J. 1], F. 1930 Tertiary Sea-Connections between Europe and the Indo-Pacific

Area. Fourth Pacific Science Congress (Ratavia-Bandoeng),

Wenz, W, 1938-1944 Gastropoda, Pts. i-vii, Handb, der Palaozool., 6

ANOTHER NEW SPECIES OF BOYDAIA (SPELEOGNATHIDAE;

ACARINA) FROM AUSTRALIA

BY H. WOMERSLEY

Summary

A second species of Boydaia (Speleognathidae) from Australia is described. It was found freeliving

with cetoparasitic mites on a rat from Mount Glorious, Queensland.

ANOTHER NEW SPECIES OF BOYDAIA (SPELEOGNATHIDAE; ACARINA)

FROM AUSTRALIA

By H, Woscersiey *

[Read 9 July 1953]

SUMMARY

A second species of Boyduiw (Speleognathidae) from Australia is described. It was

found Sreeliving with cetoparasitic mites on a rat from Mount Glorious, Queensland.

While my previous paper (A new gets and species of Speleognathidae

(Acarina), from South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 1953, 76, 82), was in

the press, another new species of Boyduia was discovered amongst a lot of Trom-

biculid and Laelaptid mites collected from a rat, Rettas asstmilis, from Mount

Glorious, Queensland, on 6 August 1951 by Dr. F_ H, Derrick.

Unfortunately it was represented only by a single specimen, but while being

closely related to Boydaia striatus (Crossley), it is abundantly distinct in many

characters. While all previously known species of Speleognathidae, except

Speleognathus australis Wom, are parasitic in the nasal secretions of birds and

frogs (S. australis will probably be found to affect birds also), the occurrence

of this new species externally on a tat is probably accidental and not natural.

Boydaia derricki sp. n,

Descriplion—Female. Shape elongate ovoid, widest between coxae II and

I1I. Length of idiosoma 780«, width 520z. Gnathosoma visible from above 104

long. Dorsum with longitudinal and transverse punctate striations as figured,

with 20 short stout ciliated or bush-like setae, arranged one small one 5p tong in

front of each sensilla, then two rows of 4 ta Su long, two rows of 2 and a row of

4 to 8n long. and then 2, 11p long. Sensillae filamentous, but ciliated, appearing

slightly thicker distally, 282 long, On the anterior margin m front of each

sensilla is a small but distinct lens. Palpi 3-segnrented, all segments free from

gnathosoma; the basal segment dorsally on the inside carries a long slender

apparently shortly ciliated seta, on the second and third segment a short bushy

seta; ventrally the third segment carries three short bushy setae, The basal seg-

ment of the chelicerae basally bears two short bushy setae and the apical segment

appears as a lobe-like structure without teeth. Venter: sttiate punctate; coxae

in two groups widely separated; with strong subcuticular reticulations; coxae I

with two short, 5» bushy setae, I[-1V with one such seta, Between coxae II a

pair of short 5, bushy setae and a similar pair between coxae III and between

coxae IV, Genital slit 48» long, forked posteriorly and flanked on each side by

three setae 5u long; on each side of anus a seta 8 long, and posteriorly a pair of

setae 124 long. Legs stout, length including coxae but excluding claws, 1 520,

IT 480n, ITT 430u, LV 455y, furnished with short bushy setae, which on tarsi

reach 14 in length; claws strong and curved to 52 long, with a bushy hair-like

pulvillus in between; segments of legs longitudinally finely striate punctate.

Lecality and Host—One specimen collected on Rattus assimilis, Mount

Glorious, Queensland, 6 Atigust 1951 by Dr. E. H. Derrick.

Remarks—In the presence of distinct eyes and striated cuticle, this species

is tlose to B, striatus (Crossley), It differs, however, in its more elongate shape,

in having only three setae on each side of the genital opening, in lacking the fine

simple setae on the legs as figured by Crossley for striatus and in relatiyely

stonter legs.

“South Australian Musetn

pane Roy Soc, S. Aust,, 77, July, 10354

ry f

CRON oe

TAK ys ae,

IS) _«

Boydaia derricki n. sp.

A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, left eye and sensilla; D, dorsal view of

gnathosoma and palps; E, ventral view of gnathosoma and palps; F, dorsal

view of tibia and tarsus of leg I; G, ventral view of tibia and tarsus of Jeg I.

REFERENCES

Boyp, Evizaneto M. 1948 <A new Mite from the respiratory tract of the Starl-

ing. Proc. Ent. Soc., Washington, 50, 9-14

Crosstey, D. A,, Jnr. 1952 Two new Nasal Mites from Columbiform Birds.

J. Parasitol, 38, (5), 385

Porter, J. C., and StRanptMann, R. N. 1952 Nasal Mites of the English

Sparrow

Womerstey, H. 1936 On a new Family of Acarina with a description of a

new Genus and Species. A.M.N.H.,, (10), 18, 312-315

Womerstey, H. 1952 (1953) A new Genus and Species of Speleognathidae

(Acarina) from South Australia, Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 76, 82-84

EIGHT NEW SPECIES OF TROMBICULIDAE (ACARINA) FROM

QUEENSLAND

BY H. WOMERSLEY

Summary

Eight new larval species of Trombiculid Mites (Trombiculidae, Acarina) are described from

Mackay and Brisbane areas of Queensland.

EIGHT NEW SPECIES OF TROMBICULIDAE (ACARINA)

FROM QUEENSLAND

By H. Womers-ey *

[Read 9 July 1953}

SUMMARY

Eight new larval species of Trombiculid Mites (Trombiculidae, Acarina) are

described from the Mackay and Brisbane areas of Queensland.

The eight species of Trombiculidae described in the present paper were all

collected in the Mackay and Brisbane areas of Queensland by Dr. E, H, Derrick

and his colleagues during a survey of those areas.

Mast of them were collected by the card method, the others being from

animal hosts.

The types and some paratypes are in the South Australian Museum. Other

paratypes in the Queensland Institute for Medical Research, Brisbane.

Trombicula derricki sp. n.

Fig. 1 A-G

Description of Larvae—Length (unengorged) 2084, width 169%. Scutum as

figured, almost as deep as wide with deep evenly rounded posterior margin;

anterior margin only lightly sinuous; SB a little im front of line of PL; scutal

setae fairly long, tapering and ciliated, AM the shortest, PL the longest; sensillae

filamentous with ciliations on distal half; surface with only moderately numerous

punctae. Eyes 2-} 2, on ocular shields, posterior the smaller. Palpi moderately

stout, setae on femur, genu and tibia all ciliated or branched, tibial claw trifurcate.

Chelicerae simple with only the apical tricuspid cap. Dorsal setae 34 arranged

2,.6.8,8.6.4, to 454 long, except the humerals which are 50, long. Ventrally, a

pair of branched setae on maxillae, one on each coxa, a pair between coxae I and

between coxae III, and thereafter 84/6.64 to 34n long. Legs 7-segmented, I 260

long, II 234», III 273p; specialised setae on leg 1, 2 genualae, 1 microgenuala,

2 tibialae, 1 microtibiala, on tarsi 1 sensory rod, 1 microspur, 1 terminala; on

leg II 1 genuala, 2 tibialae, on tarsi 1 sensory rod, 1 microspur; and on leg IIL

1 mastitibiala; 2 mastitarsalae.

The Standard Data derived from 17 species collected on cards are:—

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff, of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variationx

AW - 62-4+0-45 1°86 + 0°32 56-8 —68-0 58*5— 64-4 2-9

PW - 78-140-49 2-01 + 0-34 72-1 —B4-L 72+8-— 81-2 2-6

SB ~ 24554021 0-87 + 0-15 21-9 — 27-1 22-4 —25-2 36

ASB - 26:8+0-35 1-42 + 0-24 22*5—31'1 25-2 — 28-0 5*3

PSB - 27-62 0°23 0-93 + 0-16 24-8 —30-4 25-2 —28-0 2:3

sD ~ 545-049 2:00 + 0-34 48°5 —60°5 50-4— 56:0 3:7

A-P - 28-0 No variation recorded :

AM - 33-4+0-30 1-20 + 0-21 29°8— 37-0 30-8 — 56+4 33.

AL - 39+5+ (32 1-32 + 0°22 35-6 — 43-4 36°4— 42-0 3-3

PL - 45-34 0°35 1-43 + 0-25 41-0— 49-6 42-0 —47-6 3:2

Sens - 62:5 +032 1-24 40-23 58:6— 66-0 61-6— 64-4 Z-0

Loc. and Host—Seventeen specimens collected on cards. Mt. Jukes, Queens-

land, 6 September 1951 (E. H. Derrick),

* South Australian Museum.

Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 77, July, 1954

Remarks—This species is closely related to novae-hollandiae Hitst and its

allies, in having a long nude outstanding mastitibiala and two such mastitarsalae

on leg III. In the shape of the scutum it is similar to novae-hollandiae, but the

posterior margin is evenly round whereas in novae-hollandiae it is slightly but

perceptibly flattened medially.

From all the novae-hollandiae group, however, derricki has a long outstanding

but ciliated seta on telofemur III.

Fig. 1 Trombicula derricki sp. n.

A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, scutum (x 500); D, tip of chelicera;

E, palp; F, tibia and tarsus of Jeg IIL; G, maxillary seta.

The species is named in honour of the finder, and the holotype and para-

types are in the South Australian Museum.

This and the following two species will come into caption 23 of Womersley

1952 on p. 36 forming a group with novue-hollandiae, this portion of the key

being emended as follows :—

23. Leg III with 2 mastitibialae and 1 mastitarsala = - - - - - «@

a. With ‘a long outstanding ciliated seta on telofemur III. Setae-on palpal

femur, genu and tibia all ciliated. Posterior scutal margin evenly rounded.

scutal punctae moderate in number, Sensillac ciliated distally with SB

slightly in front of PL_ DS 34, arranged 2,6.8.8.6.4. to 45y long.

AW 62-4+5:6, PW 78:1+6:0, SB 24-542-6, ASH 20-5442,

PSB 27-642°8, SD 54-5+6-0, A-P 28:0, AM 33-4+ 5-6,

AL 39543-9, PL 45-344-3, Sens. 62-34 3-7.

Trombicula. desricki sp. n.

Without any such long outstandifg seta on telofemur III, - - - $

-b. Posterior sewtal margin not so deep behind PL and medially very lightly

concave. Setae on palpal femur, genu and tibia sparsely branche. Scutal

punctae fairly numerous. Sensillae nude or with very indistinct barbs basally.

SE ahout in line with PL. DS 30, arranged 2.6:6.6.4.4.2, to 45y,

AW 63-84 5°3, PW. 86-45 47°65, SB 29-7+4-2, ASB 52-2451,

PSB 17:5 +3:6, SD 49-144-0, A-P 31-142-7, AM 45:7+ 6:3,

AL 42-35 + 3-95, PL 49-5+3:9, Sens. tu 89-6,

Trombicula antechinus sp. 1.

Posterior scutal margin decper hehind PL and not shaped as aboye - c

c. Scutal posterior margin evenly rounded and with sparser punctae. Seta on

palpal femur 2-branched and on genu 1-branched, on tibia dorsal 2-branched,

lateral 1-branched, and ventral 3-4 branched. Sensillae nude or with indistinct

barbs basally, SB slightly behind PL. DS 30, arranged 2.6,.6.6.4.4.2. to 45.

AW 63°34+5°2, PW 80:4+6-3, SB 27-2+3-6, ASB 32+-4274-2,

PSB 21-24+4-2, SD 53-55+5-05; A-P 24-843-5, AM 36:0+4:3,

AL 38-446°7, PL 45:0+6°3, Sens. to 89-6,

Trombicula thylogale sp. n-

Scutal posterior margin deep behind PL and rather flattened medially.

Scttal punctae numerous. Setae on palpal femur, geny and tibia all ciliated.

Sensillac barbed or shortly ciliated distally and SB slightly behind PL.

DS 32, arranged 2.6.6.6.6.4.2 to 80),

‘Trombicula novue-hollandiae Hirst

(Standard Data as in 1952 key.}

Trombicula antechinus sp. #.-

Fig. 2 A-F

Description of Larvae—Length of idiosoma (engorged) 377», width 2806p.

Scutum as figured, ASB about twice the length of PSB, posterior margin rather

shallow and lightly concave medially; anterior margin only lightly sinuous; SB

a little in front of PT.; scutal sctae fairly long, tapering and ciliated; AL slightly

shorter than AM, Pl. the longest; sensillae nude or indistinctly barbed basally;

punctae fairly numerous. Eyes 2+ 2, on ocular shields, posterior the smaller.

Palpi moderately stout, setae on femur, genau and tibia all btanched or ciliated,

tibial claw trifurcate. Chelicerae simple with only the tricuspid cap, Dorsal

setae 30, arranged 2.6.6.6.4.4.2., to 45y long, except the humerals which are 50

long. Ventrally, a pair of branched setae on maxillae, one on each coxa, a pair

between coxae I and between coxae TIE, and therafter 4.4.4/2.4.64, to 42~ long.

Legs 7-segmented, I 234 long, IT 208 long, III 247. long; specialised setae on

leg 1, 1 genuala, 1 microgentiala, 2 tibialae, 1 microtibiala, on tarsi 1 sensory rod,

1 microspur, 1 terminala; on Jeg IT, 1 genuala, 2 tibialae, on tarsi 1 sensory rod,

1 microspur; and on leg III, 1 genuala, 1 tibiala, 1 mastitibiala, 2 mastitarsalae,

Fig. 2 Trombicula antechinus sp. n.

A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, scutum (x 500); D, tip of chelicera;

E, palp; F, tibia and tarsus of leg III.

The Standard Data derived from 16 of 23 specimens collected on Antechinus

flavipes are:—

Standard Theoretical Obsetved Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - 63-8 +0-44 1-78 + 0-32 58:5 — 69-1 61-6— 67-2 2:3

PW - 86-45+ 0-64 2°55 + 0-45 78-8 — 94-1 84-0 — 92-4 29

SB - 29-7 +0-35 1-42 + 0-25 25-5 — 33-9 28-0 — 32:2 4-8

ASB - 32:2 +0-43 1-71 +0-25 2741 — 37-3 28-6 — 33-6 5°46

PSB - 17-5 «0-30 1:21 + 0-21 13-9— 211 16-8 — 19-6 7-6

sD ~ 49-1 +0-34 1-35 + 0-24 45-1— 53-1 47*6—50°4 27

A-P - 31:1 40°22 0-89 + 0-16 28:4— 33-8 29-4 — 35-6 2:8

AM - 45°7 +0660 2°09 + 0-3 39-4 — 52-0 42-0 — 47-6 4:5

AL - 43-35 + 0°33 1°32 + 0-23 38-4 — 46-3 39-2 — 44-8 31

PL - 49-5 +0-32 1+30 + 0-23 45-6— 53-4 47-6 -— 50-4 2-6

Sens. - to 89-6

Loc. and Host—Twenty-three specimens from a marsupial mouse, Antechinus

fievipes from Mt. Glorious, Queensland, 6 August 1951 (coll. E. H. Derrick).

Remarks—In the mastitibiala and mastitarsalae on leg III, this species comes

near to novae-hollondiae, as in the amended key.

Trombicula thylogale sp. n.

Fig, 3 A-G

Description of Larvae—Length of idiosoma (slightly engorged) 312y, width

231. Scutum as figured, ASB nearly twice the length of PSB, posterior margin

evenly rounded, and anterior margin lightly convex; SB slightly behind line of

PL, scutal setae fairly long, tapering and ciliated; AM slightly shorter than AL,

PL the longest; sensillae nude or with indistinct barbs basally; surface with

sparse punctae, Eyes 2-4-2, on ocular shields, posterior the smaller, Palpi

moderately stout, setae on femur 2-branched, genu 1-branched, on tibia, dorsal

2-branched, lateral 1-branched, and ventral 3-4 branched; tibial claw trifurcate.

Chelicerae simple with only the apical tricuspid cap. Dorsal setae 30, arranged

2.6.6.6.4.4.2, to 45p long, except the humerals which are 48p long. Ventrally, a

pair of branched setae on maxillae, one on each coxa, a pair between coxae I and

between coxae III, and thereafter 6.2.4,6.6, to 34 long. Legs 7-segmented, I 2735p

long, II 234 long, Lil 273. long; specialised setae on leg I, 1 genuala, 1 micto-

genuala, 2 tibialae, 1 microtibiala, on tarsi 1 sensory rod, 1 microspur, 1 terminala;

on leg II, 1 genuala, 2 tibialae, on tarsi 1 sensory rod, 1 microspur ; and on leg IIT,

1 genuala, } tibiala, 1 microtibiala, 2 mastitarsalae.

The Standard Data derived from 16 of 29 specimens collected on Thylagale

auilcaxt are —

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff, of

Mean Davistion Range Range Variation

AW - 63-39 +0°43 1°73 + 0-31 58+1— 68+5 61-6 — 67-2 2:7

PW - 80-4 +052 2-09 + 0°37 74+1— 86+7 75-6 — 84-0 2°6

SB = 27-2 +0-30 1-21 + 0-21 23°6— 30-8 25-2— 29-4 4x4

ASB - 32-4 +0-35 1°39 + 0-25 28-2 — 36-6 30-8 —33°6 433

PSB - 21:2 +0355 1-39 + 0-25 17-0 — 25-4 19-6 — 22-4 6:5

SD — 53°55+0-42 1-68 + 0:30 48-5 — 58-6 50-4 — 56-0 31

A-P += 243 +0-30 1-18 + 0-21 21-3— 28-3 22-4— 26°6 4B

AM - 36°0 +0-38 1-44 + 0:27 31-7 —4053 33-6 — 39-2 4-0

AL - 384 +059 2-23 + 0:42 31-7 —45*1 33-6 — 42-0 5°83

PL. - 45-0 +052 2:09 © 0°37 38-7 —51+3 42-0 —Al-6 4-6

Sens. = to 89-6

Loc, and Host—Twenty-nine speciméns, frotn a wallaby, Thylogale. wilcoxt

from Mt. Tamborine, 28 June 1951 (coll. E. H. Derrick), me

Remarks—Belongs to the novae-hollandiae group and separated from the

other allied species as in the emended key.

Fig. 3 Trombicula thylogale sp. n,

A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, scttum (x 500); D, tip of chelicera;

E, palp, F, tibia and tarsus of leg III; G, maxillary seta.

Trombicula mackayensis sp. n.

Fig. 4 A-G

Description of Larvae—Length of idiosoma (unengorged) 208, width 182.

Scutum as figured; pentagonal, posterior margin with straight sides and rounded

apex; anterior margin only lightly sinuous and highest in front of AM; SB

slightly in front of line of PL; scutal setae fairly long, tapering and ciliated,

AM the shortest, PL the longest; sensillae filamentous with ciliations on distal

half; ‘punctae fairly numerous. Eyes 2-+ 2, on ocular shields, posterior the

smallet, Palpi moderately stout, setae on femur and genu branched or ciliated,

Fig. 4 Trombicula mackayensis sp n.

A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, scutum (x 500); D, tip of chelicera;

E, palp; F, tibia and tarsus of leg III; G, maxillary seta.

long, except the humerals which are 50p long. Ventrally, a pair of branched setae

on maxillae, one on each coxa, a pair between coxae I and between coxae III and

thereafter 8.2/6.4.6, to 34y long. Legs, 7-segmented, I 247» long, II 234 long,

I]i 260p long; specialised setae on leg I, 1 genuala, 1 microgenuala, 2 tibiala,

1 microtibiala, on tarsi i sensory rod, 1 microspur, and 1 terminala; on leg II,

1 genuala, 2 tibialae, on tarsi 1 sensory rod and 1 microspur; and on leg III,

i genuala and 1 tibiala.

The Standard Data derived from 4 specimens, the type population, collected

on card are:—

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff, of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - 72:45+0:35 +70 + 0°25 70°35 — 74-55 7174—72+8 0-9

PW - 89:9 +0-88 1°76 + 0-62 84-6 +- 95-2 88-2—92+4 2-0

SB - 29-7 + 0°35 0:70 + O25 27°6 —31°8 29+4— 308 2-4

ASB - 30:1 +0°70 1-4 + 0-50 25°9 —34-3 28-0— Ws 4-7

PSB - 30-8 No variation

sD - 60°59 +0°70 1-4 +050 5657 — 65-1 58-8 — 61°6 2.3

A-P - 25-2 No variation recorded

AM - 37-1 +0-70 1-4 + 0-50 32-9 —41-3 36+4— 39-2 $3

AL - 40-6 +0-81 1°62 + 0:57 35:8 — 45-2 39-2— 42-0 4-0

PL - 49-0 +0-81 1-62 + 0-57 44-2 —53-8 47-6 — 50-4 3d

Sens. - 61-6 No variation recorded

Loc. and Host—Four specimens from card at Mt. Jukes, Queensland, 6 Sep-

tember 1951, and a second population of approximately 50 specimens from

Mt. Glorious, Queensland, 5 September 1952 (coll, E, H, Derrick).

Remarks—In the pentagonal scutum and differential characters, this species

is very closely related to kashmirensis Wom. 1952 from India; and from which it

differs in the smaller scutum and in the nature of the palpal setae,

The Standard Data derived from 16 of the specimens from Mt. Glorious

only differ in the slightly but insignificantly lower values of AW and PW, SB,

and a longer PL and are as follows:—

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - 66:6 +0-46 1-85 +0°33 61-1— 72-1 63-0 — 70-0 2-8

PW 84:3 +0-41 1-66 + 0°30 79°3—89°3 81-2— 86-8 1-96

SE 27-8 +0-19 0°68 + 12 25-B— 29-8 26:6—29-4 2-5

ASB 27°85 + 0-24 6-95 + 0:17 25-0 — 30°7 25-2 — 28-0 34

PSB 31°3 40°37 1-47. + 0-27 26:9 — 35+7 28-0— 33-4 1-7

sD 59-0 + 0:52 2-09 + (37 52-7 — 65*3 53+2— 61-6 355

A-P 25-6 +£0-32 1-28 + 0-23 21+8 -—29+2 22-4 — 280 5-0

AM 34-0 + 6-23 0-93 + 0-16 3142 36-8 33°6-—— 36-4 27

AL 38-0 +0-35 1-39 + 0-24 33-8 — 42-2 36-4 — 39-2 3-6

PL 45-0 +0-30 1-20 + 0°21 41°4— 48-6 42-0 — 47-6 2-6

Sens. 62-3 +0-30 1-21 +0-21 58-7 — 65-9 61-6 — 64-4 1-9

Euschongastia parva sp. n.

Fig. 5 A-D

Description of Larvae—Shape oval. Length of idiosoma (unengorged) 234,

width 169, Scutum as figured, almost twice as broad as deep; posterior margin

not very deep behind PL and distinctly concave medially ; SB behind line of PL;

A-P almost twice the length of PSB; AM shortest, AL the longest; sensillae

globose with setules, Eyes 24-2, on ocular shields, posterior the smaller, Palpi

moderately stout, seta on femur and genu ciliated or branched; on tibia, dorsal

and lateral nude, ventral branched; tibial claw trifurcate, Chelicerae simple with

only the apical trictispid cap. Galeal setae nude. Dorsal setae 34 arranged

2.6.6.6.8.4.2, to 354 long, except humerals which are 40g long. Ventrally; a pair

of branched setae on maxillae, one on each coxa, and a pair between coxae I

and between coxae If] and thereafter 6.4.6/4.6.4.2, to 30n long. Legs 7-seg-

Fig. 5

A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, scutum (x 500); D, palp.

Euschongastia parva sp. n.

mented, 1 260, long, II 234» long, III 260y long; specialised setae on leg I,

2 genualae, 1 microgenuala, 2 tibialae, 1 microtibiala, and on tarsi 1 sensory rod,

1 microspur ; on leg II, 2 tibialae, and on tarsi, 1 sensory rod, 1 microspur; and

on leg IIT, 1 genuala and 1 tibiala.

The Standard Data derived from the type and 3 paratypes are:—

Mean

AW - 61:6 +1-14

PW - 78:4

S.B, - 22°75 + 0-67

ASB - 22-4

PSB - 91 +0-70

SD - 31°5 40-70

A-P - 22-4

AM - 30:8

AL - 60:2 40°81

PL - 56°0

Sens.

- 30-8 with head 19+6x 19-6.

Standard Theoretical

Deviation Range

2-29 + 0°80 54°38. — 68-4

No variation recorded

1:34 + 0:47 18*75— 26°75

No variation recorded

1-40 + 0-47 4-9 —13-3

1-4 + 0-47 27-3 — 35-7

No variation recorded

1:62 + 0-57 55-4 —65-0

No variation recorded

Observed Coeff. of

ange Variation

58-8 — 64-4 3-7

21:0— 23-8 5:9

8-4— 11-2 15-5

30-8— 33-6 4-4

58-8— 61-6 27

No variation recorded

Loc. and Host—Four specimens collected on card at Mt. Jukes, Queensland,

6 September 1951 (coll. E. H. Derrick).

Remarks—In Womersley’s 1952 key to t

he species of Euschongastia (sic

Ascoschongastia) this species runs down to couplet 40, but differs from both

echymipera Wom. and Kohls, and innisfailensis Wom, and Heasp. in the shape of

the scutum and the Standard Data,

Fig. 6

Euschongastia popei sp. n.

A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, scutum (x 500); D, tip of chelicera;

E, palp; F, maxillary seta.

Euschongastia popei sp. n.

Fig. 6 A-F

Description of Larvae—Length of idiosoma (engorged) 390p, width 338p.

Scutum as figured, posterior margin fairly deep behind line of PL and distinctly

concave medially; in two of the specimens the margin of the scutum runs just

inside of the base of the PL, setae, which thus lie out from the scutum proper.

Anterior margin sinuous; SB in front of line of PL; scutal setae ciliated and

tapering; AL the shortest, PL the longest; sensillae globose with setules. Eyes ?,

not observable. Palpi moderately stout; setae all nude except the one on femur;

tibial claw trifurcate. Chelicerae simple with only the apical tricuspid cap, Galeal

setae nude, Dorsal setae 32 arranged 2.6.6.6.6.4,2, to 34m long, except the humerals

which are 39, long. Ventrally; a pair of ciliated setae on maxillae, one on each

coxa, a pair between coxae I and between coxae ITI and thereafter 6.84/10.84,

to 25p long. Legs, 7-segmented, I 195 long, I 169, long, I11 208, long; specia-

lised setae on leg I, 2 genualae, 1 microgenuala, 2 tibialae, 1 microtibiala, and on

tarsi 1 sensory rod, 1 microspur, 1 terminala; on Icg II, 1 genuala, 2 tibialae,

and on tarsi 1 sensory rod, 1 microspur; and on leg III, 1 genuala, 1 tibiala.

The Standard Data derived from the type and 4 paratypes are:—

Standard Theoretical Observed 4

Mean Deviation Ra Range Variation

AW - 48721+12 2-50 + 0-80 41-2 — 56-2 47-6 — 53-2 5-1

PW - 70:0+1-25 2°80 + 0-89 61-6 —78-4 67-2 —72-9 4-0

SB - 28:0+0-77 1-7) +& 0°54 22°9 —J331 26°6— 30-8 61

ASB 23-45> 0-68 1-53 + 0-49 18-2 —28-1 22-4 — 25°2 65

PSB » 20-70-48 1*53- 0-49 16-1 —25-2 19-6 22-4 7+4

SD - 44-241-37 3+D7 + 0:97 35° —53-2 42-0 — 47-6 69

A-P - 28-0 No variation recorded

AM - 27:4+0-56 1-25+ 0-40 23°65 — 31-15 28-0 —25-2 4-6

AL -~ 21°820-56 1-25 0-40 18-05 — 25-55 19-6— 22-4 5+8

PL - 40-34 0-68 1-53= 0-49 35:7 —449 39-2— 42-0 3-8

Sens. - 430-8 with head 16-8x 19-6, Only 1 determination

Loc. and Host—Five specimens collected on Rattus assimilis at Mt. Glorious,

Queensland, 6 August 1951 (coll. E. H. Derriclr).

Remarks—Like precana sp.n., the above new species will also run down (0

couplet 39 containing cocrongense Hirst from which it differs in the differently

shaped and very much smaller scutum, as well as having the seta on the palpal

genu nude. From procana sp.n. it differs in the smaller number and different

structute of the dorsal setae as well as having only the femoral seta of the palpi

branched.

In two of the four specimens the scutal margin runs inside of the PL seta

base, which can ‘thus be said to be “off” the scutum. This incipient development

again stresses the view that the off-scutal position of PL within the genus

Euschéngastia should not be used to create other genera as has been done by some

workers,

Euschongastia procana sp. n.

Fig. 7 A-E

Description of Larvae—Shape oval. Length of idiosoma (unengorged) 273u,

width 195y. Scutum as figured; posterior margin deep behind line of PL, and

slightly concave medially; anterior margin sinuous; scutal setac long, tapering

with slender denticles; AL the shortest, PL the longest; sensillae globose with

setules. Eyes 2+ 2, on ocular shields, posterior the smaller, Palpi moderately

stout; setae on femur and genu ciliated or branched; on tibia, dorsal and lateral

nude, ventral branched; tibial claw trifurcate, Chelicerae simple with only the

apical tricuspid cap. Galeal setae nude. Dorsal setae with slender denticules, 68. in

nunber and arranged 2.10.14.18.12.6.4.2, to 53u long, except humerals which are

Fig. 7 Euschongastia procana sp. n.

A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, scutum (x 500); D, palp; E, dorsal seta

62p long. Ventrally, a pair of ciliated setae on maxillae, one on each coxa, a pair

between coxae I and between coxae III, and thereafter 12.8.6/8.6.4.2, to 28p long.

Legs 7-segmented, I 299p, Il 247m, III 286 long; specialised setae on leg I,

2 genualae, 1 microgenuala, 2 tibialae, 1 microtibiala and on tarsi, 1 sensory tod,

1 microspur, 1 subterminala, 1 terminala; on leg IT, 1 genuala, 2 tibialae, and on

tarsi 1 sensory rod, 1 microspur; and on leg III, 1 genuala, 1 tibiala.

Fig. 8 Euschongastia andromeda sp.n,

A, dorsal view; B, ventral yiew; C, scutum (x 500) of type of specimen;

D, scutum (x 500) of paratype specimen; E, tip of chelicera; F, palp;

G, tibia and tarsus of leg IIL.

The Standard Data for the type and 1 paratype collected on card are :—

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff, of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - 56:0 No variation recorded

PW - 81-2 No variation recorded

SB - - BO+0-99 1+4+0-7 23+8 — 322 26-6 — 29-4 5D

ASB ~ 26:620-99 1-407 2274 —~30°8 25:52 — 28-0 53

PSB - 22-4 No variation recorded

SD - - 46-0+0-99 1-4+0°7 44-8— §3-2 47-6 — 50-4 2-9

AP- - 280 No variation recorded

AM - - 47-6 No variation recorded

Al, - - 39-2 No variation recorded

PI. - - 61-6 No variation recorded

Sens. - 37-8+0-99 1-4+0-7 33*6 —A2+1) 4G+4 — 39-2 3-7

with head 22-4 5 19-6

Loc. and Host—Two specimens collected on card at Mt. Jukes, Queenstand,

6 September 1951 (coll, E. H. Derrick).

Femarks—In Womersley’s key (1952, p. 236) this species runs down to

couplet 39, along with coorongense Lrst, from which it differs markedly in the

more denticulate scutal and dorsal setae, the much greater number of dorsal setae,

and in having the ventral seta of the palpal tibia branched, as well as in the smaller

scutum.

Euschongastia andromeda sp.n.

Pig. 8 A-G

Descripiton of Larvae—Shape oval. Length of idiosoma (unengotged) 274p,

width 182», Scutum as figured; nearly twice as wide as deep; posterior margin

very shallow behind line of PL, and slightly concave medially; anterior margin

sinuous; SB in front of PL; scutal setae long, tapering and ciliated; AL the

shortest, PL the longest; sensillae globose with setules, Eyes 2+ 2, on ocular

shields; posterior the smaller. Palpi moderately stout; setae on femur and genu

branched or ciliated; on tarsi dorsal and lateral nude, ventral branched; tibial

¢law trifurcate. Cheliccrae simple with apical tricuspid cap, Galeal setae nude.

Dorsal setae 44 arranged 2.8.8.8.10.4.2.2, to 36 long, except humerals which are

42, long, Ventrally, a pair of ciliated setae on maxillae, one on each of coxae I

and JI, two on coxae [1I, a pair between coxae I and between coxae III, and

thereafter 6.64/2.6.6.2.2, to 31 long. Legs 7-segmented; specialised setae on

leg 1, 2 genualae, 1 microgenuala, 2 tibialae, 1 microtibiala, and on tarsi, 1 sensory

rod, 1 microspur, 1 terminala; on leg II, 1 genuala, 2 tibialae, and on tarst

i sensory rod, 1 micruspur; and on leg III, 1 genuala, 1 tibiala, also on tibia 2

very long but basally ciliated setae and two similar ones on tarsi.

The Standard Data derived from the type and 1 paratype are:-— AW 74-2,

67:2; PW &86°8, 81:2; SB 29-4, 28:0; ASB 28-0, 28:0; PSB 11-2, 14-0; SD

39°2, 42-0; A-P 36°4, 36°4; AM 42-0, 42:0; AL 33:6, 33°6, PL 56-0, 56-0} Sens.

39-2, 39-2 with head 22-4 x 19-6.

Loc. and Host—Two specimens collected on card at Mt. Tamborine, Queens-

land, 14 May 1952 (coll. E, H. Derrick).

Remarks—tIn having 2 setae on coxae [II this species is closely related to

petrogae Wom., in couplet 29 of Womersley’s key 1952 on p. 234. It differs,

however, in the fewer and different dorsal setae as well as the Standard Data,

and the shape of the scutum. The setae on the palpal femur, genu and tibia ventral

are only sparsely branched. However, more characteristic are the long but basally

ciliated setae on tibia and tarsi of lee IEL The Standard Data of the paratype

are somewhat higher in AW and PW than in the type, probably due to undue

compression.

THE ECOLOGICAL SURROUNDINGS OF THE NGALIA NATIVES IN

CENTRAL AUSTRALIA AND NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS

BY J. B. CLELAND AND N. B. TINDALE

Summary

This paper describes the physical features and the vegetation of the region occupied by the Ngalia

aboriginal people, some 200 miles north-west of Alice Springs. The native names and uses of

various plants are recorded.

THE ECOLOGICAL SURROUNDINGS OF THE NGALIA NATIVES IN

CENTRAL AUSTRALIA AND NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS

By J, B. Creranp and N, B. Tinpace

{Read 9 July 1953]

SUMMARY

Tats paper describes the physical features and the vegetation of the region occupied

by the Ngatia aboriginal people, some 200 miles north-west of Alice Springs. The native

hames and uses of various plants are recorded.

The Sixteenth Anthropological Expedition, organised by the University of

Adelaide to study the natives, left Adelaide for Alice Springs on 10 August 1952.

The Expedition was financed by a liberal grant from the Wenner-Gren Corpora-

tion for Anthropological Research Incorporated (previously the Viking Fund)

of New York, supplemented by substantial assistarice from the University of

Adelaide and its Board for Anthropological Research and from the South Aus-

tralian Museum, and by transport facilities granted by the Commonwealth and

State Governments.

On arrival at Alice Springs the Expedition proceeded by motor yehicle to

Yuendumu, on the track to the Granites and situated 192 miles to the north-west

of Alice Springs. During its stay at this Government Station for Natives, inten-

sive work was carried out on many aspects of native life, including a study of

theit sutroundings and the uses made of plant substances. This paper contains

a general account of the country and is followed by a record of the native names

for various plants and the uses made of ther.

DESCRIPTLON OF THE COUNTRY NOW OCCUPIED BY THE

NGALIA PEOPLE CENTRED ON YUENDUMU

These people are still within their tribal limits and occupy the area where

their mythical ancestors lived and were transformed into natural features.

The country consists of extensive plains, traversed at intetvals by occasional

water courses, now dry, which after heavy rain in Jantiary and February must

be torrents almost deserving of the name of rivers. Such a one is Cockatoo Creek.

These are fed by smaller subsidiary channels taking an irregular cotirse from

the rocky hills and even rugged mountains which form irregular ranges breaking

up the plains, sometimes into narrow stretches but often into areas of many

miles in extent. The soil is a sandy loam, very boggy in places alter rains, some-

times more sandy so that trucks dig in deeply, and covered with small pebbles

as one approaches the hills. At the base of these hills the stones become larger

and on their lower slopes become small or large boulders strewn irregularly up

the sides and making climbing laborious.

The flat countty known as. Ngalia plain, forming the southern portion of

the tribal area, is a shallow synclinal basin filled with sand and loam, underlying

which are quartzite beds containing rounded waterworn pebbles and other evi-

dences of a shallow water origin. They outcrop along the northern edge of Butt

Plain and at Central Mount Wedge with a northerly dip and appear again at

Ngama near Mount Eclipse and at Cockatoo Creek with a southerly dip. These

littoral beds are underlain by granites and metamorphosed old rocks. The granites

form great domes at Mount Doreen and Mount Hardy, and associated igneous

rocks form the many jagged hills around that area.

The grain of the country is east and west but the streams tend to run across

it. They are thus consequential, some passing through the grapite areas from

ers Rey Soc. S, Aust,, 77, July, 1954

south to north, including the Lander and Cockatoo Creeks, while others, includ-

ing Gidgea Creek, which liey near the eastern boundary of the tribal area, cut

across from north to seuth to fill a long series of salt Jagoons and salt marshes,

which together form att ancient river valley on the Burt Plait: and trending away

west towards Lake Eaton. These salt marshes form the southern boundary of

the Ngalia tribe between Tilmouth Well and Mount Cockburn,

On the plains occur the red kangaroo {Macropus rufus) whose young “fying

does” are blue, the emu, and the bustard (“native turkey”); on the hills the

euro (M. rebustus) and a wallaby.

The yegetation on the plains consists essentially of mulga (Acacia ancura

and A. spp.) in dense thickets in places, making progress between these small

trees in a car a difficult matter, but usually in a more open arrangement inter-

spersed with shrubs and small trees, and sometimes quite scattered, diversified hy

grassy patches a few acres or a mile or so im extent, with or almost without

scattered shrubs. The grassy patches often constst of Triodia, so-called “spinifex,”

probahly m the poorer sol, or of various other species such as colonies of kan-

garoo grass (Themeda eustralis) and the taller and more robust tussocky

Th. evenacea (often in boggy places), and elsewhere smaller grasses such as

species of Enneapogon, Aristida, Triraphis mollis and Eragrostis.

The rocky hills show a wealth of species, commencing as the ground begins

to mse near their bases and is covered with the tessellated smaller fragments of

disruption, Native pines (Callifris) present a picturesque appeatance amongsi

the rocks, native figs (Ficus platypoda) may scramble over many boulders, a hill

type of mulga occurs, there are several Eremophilas, species of Aracia peculiar

to the slopes or the rising ground at the base, one of which has phyllodes like

a Lycopodium, a few small, often strongly scented and sticky composites, some

with yellow flowers, and several species of Goodeniaceae, some quite handsome

with blue or mauve or yellow flowers. Prickly Yriodia tussocks sparsely

oveupy the intervals and may reach formidable proportions in the better soil

round the base of the hill. The picturesque white boles of the ghost gum (Ewe.

papwana) and the tessellated trunks of bloodwoods( Ettc, ternrinalis?) are scattered

on the slopes or adjacent plains.

The waters in this country consist of rockholes in the bills, or oecasional

soaks on the plains, or waterholes left in the creeks and rivers after floods, Their

presence is often indicated by flocks of chestnut-eared finches (a sure indication

of their proximity) and by the relative abundance of other small birds. As rain

may not fall for many months, as for instance between May and November, the

smaller rockholes, and those unshaded and shallow, and the soaks tend to dry

up and the natives become dependent on the larger more permanent supplies.

This, of course, means that much of the larger game is also restricted to the neigh-

hourhood of these remaining waters and so may be decimated, and that any

vegetable and insect foods still available (such as roots and “witchetty’ grubs)

tend to be eaten ont,

The vegetable food supplies consist of fruits, of grains and seeds which are

winnowed, pounded, and made into dampers, of roots and tubers, of occastomal

leaves and pods (such as those of Marsdenia australis), of honey-bearing flowers

as, for example, those af the corkwoods (Hakee spp.) of which there are four

species, and of galls on Acacias. ;

Of the fruits the most important are the native peach (Eucarya ceumeinala)

which occurs in the area, the native plum (the pltim-coloured smaller fruit of

Santalum lonceolatum), the currant-like Emits of Carissa Brownit {Apocytia-

ceac) growing in little colonies near the banks of water courses, the currants of

the broad-leafed Plectronta latifolia which occurs as scattered tall shrubs amongst

the wulga, of the fruits of several species of Solatwm, native figs (Ficus ploty-

foda) growing amongst rocky hills and having fruits like small Moreton Bay

figs, the fruits ef Capparis Mitchellii (native pomegranate} which species is

widely distributed but not abundant, and the little cucumbers of Cicumis Melo

var. agrestis (which we did not see), The little “tomatoes” of the various

Solanums are much relished, We met with several species af which one,

S. petrophitim, with Jarge blue flowers and upright detsely prickly stems which

bear small yellowish to whitish tather dry fruits, is not eaten, Another spectes,

S. ellipticum, rather like this in upright habit but with fewer prickles and with

fruits becoming greyish-green is eaten, Near Mount Eclipse another very prickly

species (S. phlomoides) with large fruits whose stalks become recurved has

edible fruits and on rocky hills still another has its pale green tomatoes on the

underside of the spreading almost prostrate stems, A common edible species on

the plains with very few prickles may be a new species and another prickly species

with prostrate stems and quite small flowers has sweet-tasting somewhat yellowish

fruits. There are thus in this region five species at least of Solantin whose fruits

are sought after as feod. Summed up, as regards the fruits available to these

people, it may be said that some such us the native peach may yield a con-

siderable amount of fruit capriciously and for a short time; that the two

currants in season may supply a certain amount of food that requires time for

gathering; that the fruits of Samtelwm are not numerous and the shrubs not in

great quantity; and that the Solanums yield in their season a moderate amount

of fresh fruit, The fruits in fact do not constitute an important source of food

but are valuable adjuncts.

The grains and sceds available are mostly small but in such abundance that

enough can he collected to form a valuable addition to the diet. The grains seem

to be derived from panic grasses, and as with other small seeds are winnowed

by rocking to and fro in a wooden or bark dish. The common purslane (Portulaca

oleracea) is a prolific yielder of minute seeds and so are some of the “mouse-tail”

Chenopodiums of which we found one species. Various Acacia seeds are gathered

and even the small seeds of the Coolabah (Eucalyptus microtheca) and of

E, gamophylla may be utilized where these trees are available.

The seedling shoots of the coral tree (Erythrina vespertilio), winch occurs

in the district, are also eaten.

Nearly 250 species of plants were collected and the following notes deal with

about 60 of these of anthropological interest.

GRAMINEAE

Grasses Stich as Andropogon exaltatus (a lemon-scented grass) and Aristida sp.,

both tall species of similar habit, also Panicum decompasitum, native name

‘kalbal’bi. Seeds of the latter are termed wan:a wan:a-tatba = dish-gathered

grain and are gathered, husked and ground between stone mills to make a

damper bread. Nzgalia.

Aristida, browniana (= stipoides), a small tussocky grass, ’jepere. No use.

Enneapogon nigricans, "jepere. No use.

Triodia pungens (porcupine grass, often called “spinifex”). from which “gun”

was obtained, mana. 7. pungens is also catled ’mananknara, Ngalia.

CYPERACEAE

Bulb of Cyperits bulbosus, ‘jalka. Is eaten, Ngalia,

CASUARINACEAE

Casuarina decaisneana (desert oak). ’kurukara, jirkali (see Eucalyptus termina-

lis), Grows in the desert sandhill country; yields a “honey,” wama jurukara

(in hot weather), probably a species of lerp. Ngalia.

PROTEACRKAR

Hakea lewcaptera (neediebush), maro-okullba. Not used.

Grevillea striata. (beefwood), ‘ildi:lba. Not of use to the aborigines,

Santalum lanceolatum (native plum), ‘marukiri, mokaki, me:kari, ‘merkari, The

fruit is considered to be good food, Negalia,

LORANTHACEAE

Loranthus Exocarpi on Eremophila sp. and on Grevillea striata (beefwood),

flowers red or yellow, the fruits which ate eaten red or black are called

jamilbiri,

L. maidenii probably, a hoary grey mistletoe on Acacia spp,, narankiri. The grape-

like fruits are eaten. This is the food plant of the butterfly Ogyris hewitsoni

parsonst, Angel,

CHENOPODIACEAE

Kochia sp., ’kaiparu. No use is made of it. Ngalia.

AMARANTHACEAE

Philotus (Trichinium) obovatum, wanaparnaba. Used to line a wooden dish when

carrying a child. Ngalia,

Pt. alopecuroides (or Pt, nobile), ’walpa’ralpuri. No use. Ngalia.

Gomphrena brownn. The petianth segments, which are densely woolly outside,

are used as “down” for ceremonial purposes. This downy material was identi-

fied for us by Mr. R. V. Smith of the National Herbarium, Melbourne,

PorTULACACEAE

Portulaca oleracea, wakadi, also ’manjaru. The women gather the fine seed,

’wakadi ‘nula, for food and grind it between stones. Negalia,

NycTAGINACEAE

Boerhavia diffusa, ’waibi. The natives eat the root which may be large; it is a good

food.

LEGUMINOSAE

Acacia notabilis, "mandala. A lerp scale on the leaves and stems is eaten. Ngalia.

A, ligulata, ‘wardaruka. Not used. Ngalia.

A. aneura, s. lat. (mulga), ‘mandja. Negalia.

A, anewra, (mulga), ‘mandja, The seed ‘nuluparu. Ngalia; ‘wanari. The seed,

‘kaijura, Pintubi.

A. kempeana (witchetty bush), ‘erepili, also ‘nalkiri, ‘nalkidi, ‘yalkiti. The seeds

are eater and also grubs in the roots.

A, cambagei (gidya), ’sidji.

Al, cuthbertsoni, pi:li, pirlt. The seeds are sometimes eaten.

A, sp., with long linear phyllodes, ’paykuna, also called jirkili and wakalberi.

The ash from the burnt branchlets is mixed with the leaves of the native

tobacco in forming the quid. Ngalia. The alkaline ash probably helps in liberat-

ing the alkaloid,

Cassia pleurocarpa, ‘ya:na. Children eat a small borer grub in the roots called

"nalkiti ‘na:na. Ngalia.

C. eremophila, ‘pundi, ’pundi ‘wari. No use. Negalia.

A yam, the taproot probably of the pea Vigna lanceolata, is eaten. "Wapiti a

rant species of yam, ?Vigna or an Jpomoea; galatji is also a yam and “jala.

Negalia.

Erythrina australis (bean tree), jinindi. The young shoot is steamed and eaten,

Negalia.

HKUPISORBIACEAE

Euphorbia eremophila and Phyllanthus sp. have no native names,

ManvackaE

yam:uramjuri is a species of mallow with stellate hairs, No use made of it.

Negalia. .

Sida sp., ‘maykur’maykurupa. Not used by the natives. Ngalia.

Sida inclusa, java ‘man ja ‘man ja. Not used by the natives, Ngalia.

MyrTACEAE

Eucalyptus papuana (ghost gum), ‘wapinunga. The thick bark, yapiri, is stripped

off and tsed in the process of making “spinifex” gum, as a yapiri pindi

(bark dish).

E. terminalis ? (bloodwood), tjambali, jirkala. Bark used for dishes. Negalia.

E. pachyphylla, tjitilbara. The honey in the flowers is eaten. Ngalia.

E. gamophylla, ’waralju, ’warilji ‘warilji. The flowers yield sweet honey, ‘qul:u

‘waralju. Ngalia.

APOCYNACEAE

Carissa browmii, mayari.'A prickly shrub up to six feet high, with a currant-like

fruit which is eaten. Nealia, "Maninidji (manigidji) has also been noted for

Carissa brownii but the description of its “plum-like brown fruits’ being

good food suggests some mistake. Ngalia.

ASCLEPIADACEAE

Sarcostemma australis, kitjikitji. Not used. Ngalia,

Pentatropis kempeana? ‘manilba, The long bean-like follicles are eaten.

Marsdenia australis, 'jupali. The leaves and pods (follicles) are eaten and con-

sidered good. Ngalia.

CONVOLVULACEAE

Evolvulus alsinoides, ‘marna. Not used, Ngalia.

SOLANACEAE

Solanum sp? nova (5 petals, few prickles), kararupa (Walpiri tribe), jakadjeri

(Ngalia tribe). The tomatoes are good food.

S. quadriloculatum (very prickly), warukalukalu. Kangaroo food, not tised by

natives, Ngalia.

S. sp. identified as S. ellipticum but probably a new species, eight miles west of

Yuendumu, japindiri, has a pale sweet edible fruit.

S. ellipticum, prostrate, with large fruits, grows amongst frocks, near Mt. Eclipse,

naliljiriki, nalijiriki. Cooked, ripe or green, and eaten, also eaten by euros and

wallabies.

The Solanums and tobaccos were identified for us by Mr. R. T. Smith, of the

National Herbarium, Melbourne. It will be seen that two Solanums which differed

in habit and were given different native names were both referred to S. ellipticum.,

Later research will doubtless be able to separate these.

S. phlomoides A, Cunn., fruits reflexed, near Mt. Eclipse, wanakitji. Tomatoes

eaten. Negalia.

S. phlomoides (referred to), upright about 2 feet tall, at foot of Wolfram Hill

near Mt. Doreen, with big edible fruit, yandjawali. Ngalia.

. Nicotiena ingulba (native tobacco), in sandy loam under Erythrina trees south

of Mt. Eclipse. Used by the natives for chewing after wiltmg over a fire

and mixing with the ash of paykima (Acacia sp-).

N. occidentalis, near Mt. Doreen, ? yungarai. Not used.

Duboisia myoporoides, a poison bush, growing on the sandhills, warkalba, Negalia,

BIGNONIACEAE

Tecoma doratoxylon, wenbiri or wanbiri. Wood used for spears.

MyYororRAcEAE

Eremophila longifolia (emu bush), galurupu. Not eaten by the matives but good

emu food. Ngalia,

RvUBIACEAE

Plectronia latifolia, tawaljurv. Fruits eaten,

CAM PANULACEAE

Tsotoma petraee, ’muldu. The plant may be used for chewing with ashes in the

imatiner of native tobacco; is a substitute for tobacto; is a “strotig chew.”

Negalia. This Jsotoma evidently contains some strong alkaloid(?), as it is

spoken of by the hatives in the Musgrave Ranges about 500 miles south as

“cheeky b--r". The Department of Chemistry, University of Adelaide, has

been trying to obtain sufficient quantities for analysis, Tt is widely distributed

in the dry interior,

GooDENTACKAE

Seaevold sp. and Goodenia ? sp., pala. Not used by the natives. Negalia,

Geodenit ? sp., wadia, Not used. Negalia.

LU nipentiFiep

"Maruko. The fluffy pods (?) are used for decoration, Ngalia. Perhaps the hairy

perianth segments of Gompirene brownii (see Amaranthaceae}.

Kende, a large type of tree, one seen by an ancestral being iti a desert place.

"Wadia, a tree. Ngalia (see Goodente sp, above, which has the same name but is

a smalf undershrub).

Though the localities mentioned in the following notes are widely separated

from Ytiendumu and each other, this opportunity is taken of recording informa-

tion about three other plants used by Australian natives,

Pterocaulon (Compositae) as a substitute for native tobacco

In 1940 the late Rev. J. R. BR. Love fotwatded ftom Kunmunya Mission,

north of Derby, Western Australia, to the late Professor T, Harvey Johnston the

leavés of a plant “used by the Worora tribe of aborigines as a substitute for

chewing tobacco.” The plant has been identified as Pierocaulon glandulosum var.

velutinum. (Compositae). Mr. Love goes on to say: “It is not a tobaced at all, nor

is it regarded very highly by the people. It has a pungent smell, something like

‘penny royal,’ and is chewed, they tell me, when tobacco is not available.

“The name of it is ‘njuni-uni. The wild tobacco, which the men tell me

is to be procured in the sandstone ranges, I have never secured. It tiust be

scarce there, not like the mingulba, which is so plentiful in the Musgrave Ranges.

“My attention was drawn fo this yuni-yjuni by the unwillingness of ‘the

women to root out a plant of it that appeared in a bed of pumpkins—seed cartied

by the wind, J suppose.”

“Tubers’ on the Roots of the Grass Poa drummondii

In September 1952 Pastor Hoff, who was then looking after the natives

recently transferred from Ooldea to Yalata, 50 miles west of Colona near the

Great Australian Bight, forwarded us specitnens of grass, identified ‘as Poa

Drummondi by Mrs. E. Robertson of the Waite Institute. The grass was grow-

ing in a flat between sandhills and the native children dig out the “tibers”

attached to the roots and eat them. These “tubers” are whitish swellings, 5 to

20 mm. long and about 3 mm. in diameter, along the course of the roots or

attached to them (probably on rootlets), single or two or three separated by

constrictions. The swellings are friable in textiite and have little taste but perhaps

a slightly mealy one.

Seeds of Stenapetalum lineare (Cruciferae) eaten

Pastor Hoff also fotwarded from Yalata for (detitification specimens of

Stenopetalum lneare, the seeds of which were eaten by the natives.

A CARVED HUMAN FIGURE FROM THE DURACK RANGES, NORTH-

WESTERN AUSTRALIA

BY CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD

Summary

This paper records a carved human figure from an aboriginal ceremonial cave in the Durack Ranges

of north-western Australia.

A CARVED HUMAN FIGURE FROM THE DURACK RANGES,

NORTH-WESTERN AUSTRALIA

By Cuartes P, Mounrrorp *

[Read 9 July 1953]

SUMMARY

This paper records a carved human figure from an aboriginal ceremonial cave in

the Durack Ranges of north-western Australia.

The fact that the Australian aborigines carve human figures in wood has been

known for many years. Warner (1929) saw mortuary posts erected over the

graves of the dead at Milingimbi on which “a series of incisions . . . . give it the

appearance of a carved head with one or more necks.” Worms (1942) recorded

carved human figures used in the Goranada ceremony of the Kimberley region

of north-western Australia, Berndt (1948 and 1949) described wooden figures

from Yitrkalla, north-eastern Arnhem Land, and Mountford (1953) a number

of similar figures from the same locality,

In 1938 the Rev. F. W. Chaseling presented a mortuary post, made by the

aborigines of Yirrkalla, to the Australian Museum, Sydney. Mountford (1953)

and three years later Mr. Roy Vyse presented another carved figure, from the

Durack Ranges of north-western Australia (the subject of this paper), to the

South Australian Museum.

THE Carved FIcure

Early in 1941 a drover gave Mr. Roy Vyse a carved wooden human figure

which he had taken from an aboriginal ceremonial cave in the Durack Ranges,

south-west of Wyndham, north-western Australia. He stated that the aborigines

were rriost angry over the theft. In the same year Mr. Vyse presented this figure

(A.31105) to the South Australian Museum.

Plate I, B, C, and D, show the wooden figure of a woman. Her arms are

part of the body, and her head turned sideways. There is a belt round her waist,

and engraved body decorations across her chest, abdomen and back. These body

decorations, although crudely executed and somewhat ott of position, are similar

to those seen by the author on performers in the Central Australian ceremonies

and those on a dancing aboriginal engraved on a baobab nut from Derby, north-

western Australia (pl. i, fig. A),

As there is little direct evidence associated with this specimen, the sole object

of this paper is to record its existence, in the hope that it will stimulate inquiries

for other examples of the carved human figure.

REFERENCES

Bernpt, Ronatp and CaTHertne 1948 Oceania, 18, No. 4, pl. 1, 2

Bernot, 1949 American Anthropologist, 51, No. 2, pl. 1-3

Mounrrorn 1953 “Myth, Art and Symbolism of Arnhem Land” (in press)

Warner, Litoyp 1937 “A Black Civilisation,” 504

Worms, Ernest 1942 Annali Lateranensi. Vatican City. Pl. 4, 7

*Plonorary Associate in Ethnology, South Australian Museum.

‘Trans, Roy Soc. S. Aust., 77, July, 1954

rage Does

I carvings. from north-western Australia.

‘

Aborigina

Plate [,

THE GENUS NEOTROMBIDIUM (ACARINA : LEEUWENHOEKIIDAE) I.

DESCRIPTION OF THE OVUM AND LARVA OF NEOTROMBIDIUM

BARRINGUNENSE HIRST 1928, WITH AN ACCOUNT OF THE BIOLOGY

OF THE GENUS

BY R. V. SOUTHCOTT

Summary

The genus Neotrombidium Leonardi 1901 has been known hitherto from only the adult and

nymphal forms. This paper records the experimental rearing of the larva of the Australian

Neotrombidium barringunense Hirst 1928 from eggs laid by adults. The ovum and larva of this

species are described. From this larval description it is shown that the monotypic larval genus

Monunguis Wharton 1938, with M. streblida Wharton 1938 as type, found parasitic on a Streblid

(Diptera) ectoparasite on a bat in a cave in Yucatan, Mexico, belongs to Leonard’s genus, which has

taxonomic priority. This correlation shows that the range of Neotrombidium includes Central

America as well as the previously recorded South America and Australia.

THE GENUS NEOTROMBIDIUM (ACARINA ;: LEEUWENHOEKIIDAE)

I. DESCRIPTION OF THE OVUM AND LARVA OF NEOTROMBIDIUM

BARRINGUNENSE HIRST 1928, WITH AN ACCOUNT OF THE BIOLOGY

OF THE GENUS

By R, V. Sowtneorr

[Read 9 July 1953]

SUMMARY

The genus Neatrombidiuin Leonardi 1901 has been known hitherto from only the adult

and nymphal forms. This paper records the experimental rearing of the larva of the Aus-

tralian. Neotrombidium barringunense First 1928 from eggs laid by adults. The ovum and

larva of this species are deseribed. From this larval description it 1s shown that the mano-

typic larval genus Monungeis Wharton 1938, with M. streblida Wharton 1938. as type, found

patasitic on a Streblid (Diptera) ectoparasite on a bat ina cave in Yucatan, Mexico, helongs

to Leonardi's genus, which has taxonomic priority, This correlation shows that the range

of Neatrombidinn includes Central America as. well as the previously recorded South America

and Australia,

Further Australian records of the distribution of N, barringunense are given, the species

being known from the eastern half of Australia. In the Adelaide region the adults and nymphs

are found most commonly under the fresh bark of the bluegum, Eucalyplur leucorylon. Adult

females lay 30-'50 eggs, average 40, at a time, and there appears to be orily one oviposition,

Adult temales survive oviposition by 7-30 days. About three to four weeks is passed in the

egg stage. Other aspects of the biology of the species are discussed.

In 1901 Leonardi erected the genus Neotrombidium for N. furcigerum from

Argentina. In 1912 Berlese added a second species to the genus, NV. ophtalmicum

(sic), originally described as Trombidium ophtalmicum Berlese 1888 from Para-

puay, Hirst added NV, barringunense in 1928, giving as locality iniormation, “Bar-

rmgun, New South Wales, on the Queensland border, a single specimen

Found by the author under the bark of a living Eucalypt.” In 1929 Hirst

recorded the specics again, noting that “this species is very abundant under

the bark of gum-trees on the banks of the River Darling at Menindie,

New South Wales, July 1928.” In 1936 Womersley recorded this species

from Long Gully, Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia, 12 May

1934, and from Bathurst, N.S.W., 31 May 1934. In 1945 Womersley erected

the family Leenwenhoekiidae for Leeuwenhoekia Oudemans 1911 and related

genera, separating these trom the Trombiculidae Ewing 1944, and also from the

old family Trombidiidae Leach 1815. G, M. Kohls and C. B. Philip, of the United

States Typhus Commission, had succeeded in rearing three species of the genus

Acomatacarus Ewing 1942 from New Guinea from larvae to nymphs, and this

reared material was serit to Mr. Womersley for description. This showed that

the genus Neotrombidiwm, whose larval form was unknown, had malare Fonns

similar to those of Leeuwenhockia, Acomatacayus, cte., and should he placed in

this family.

For some years the present writer has attempted to correlate larval and

adult Trombidiids (s,1,) as well as other mites, by rearing experiments, In the

family Trombidiidae (s.1.) a number of genera have heen so correlated. In 1939

Womersley was permitted to describe the larvae of Chyseria and Caenothrombinm

which the writer had thus reared during 1938. In 1946 the writer recorded

that the ege of Microtrombidinm hirsulum Wom. 1945 hatches direct to the

nymph, the larval stage being suppressed. Several other genera have been reared,

these correlations at present awaiting description. From 1938 onwards the writer

attempted to rear the larva of Nedtrombidium barringunense, which species is not

Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust, 77, July, 1954

uncommon in the Adelaide region, Technical difficulties however prevented success,

and the studies were interrupted by the war. In 1948 these experiments were

resumed with N. borningunense, and the larva was reared from eggs laid by

adults in captivity (see later).

Description of Egg. Fig. 1 A-C. Colour reddish-orange. Length 240,, width

145u. The eggs are in the deutovum stage when first laid, in fact in mounted

gravid females the eggs show considerable development. When first laid the eggs

are smooth and ovoid, but within a few days become very irregular from a

number of protuberances, and it is this stage that is figured. This stage is more

irregular than for most of the Trombidiidse (s.J.). Some of the protuberances can

be identified as containing various parts of the larva. On the under-surface the

projecting legs can he seen; protuberances I, II and II in fig. 1C correspond

to legs I, Il and IIL.

Fig. 1, A-C Neotrombidium barringunense Hirst, ovum. A,B: dorsal views;

C; Sateral view. 1, I and III indicate developing legs I, If and TfL.

Anteriorly the protuberances for the palpi and chelicerae are identifiable

(see fig. 1. A,B), Further back on the dorsum is a large nasus, which appears to

correspond to the tiastts of the dorsal scutum of the larva. Ranged around the

Jateral sides and postetior pole are several blunt or pointed protuberances, of

anknown function,

Description of Larva, Fig. 2, 3 A-C. Colour orange. Body ovoid, as figured;

length from tip of nasits of dorsal scutum to posterior end of abdomen 150,

width 140, Dorsal scutum 92, long by 784 wide, roughly triangular, the apex of

the triangle forwards, where the shield narrows to a blunt nasus which partly

overlies the gnathosoma (capitulam), The anterolateral borders of the shield

ate concave, the other borders are convex except that the posterior border is

considerably flattened, Scutum with a pair of sensillary setae, long, fine, very

faintly ciliated, 46. long, arising from large sensillary areolae in the posterior

half of the shield; with three pairs of non-sensillary setae, the anterior (antero-

median) arising on the nasus as shown, fine, pointed, ciliated, 224 long; the

antero-lateral arising very close to the edge of the antero-lateral shoulders of

the shield, comparatively slender, but thicker than the antero-median, with

adpressed ciliations, and slightly tapering, blunted at the tip, 224 long; the postero-

lateral setae similar to the aritero-lateral, arising at the postero-lateral angle of

the shicld, 18y Jong. The scutum is porose over its posterior half, Eyes two an

each side, sessile, situated alongside the lateral borders of the shield, the anterior

eye the larger. Dorsum of abdomen with about 20 setae, similar to scutal non-

sensillary setae, only longer, 24-26« long, arranged in rows of 6,4,4,2,4, Ventral

surface: attached to the posteromedial angle of coxa I is a long pointed sparsely

ciliated seta 35a long; between coxae III is a pair of similar setae, 30p long;

behind coxae II are three rows of setae, long, pointed, sparsely ciliated, 40+

\ ee ae SOUTHCOTT

Fig. 2 Neéotrombidium barringunense Hirst, larva. Dorsal view, entire.

long, artanged in rows of 2, 4, 2; in addition there is a shorter poitited seta,

with a few similar pointed ciliations, 164 long on each side of the anus. Coxae I

and II are contiguous on each side, with the usual stigmal opening (utstigma)

betweén them. Goxaé I and III show a recticular porose patterning in their lateral

halves, net present on coxa II. Toward the anterolateral angle of coxa I arises

a long pointed strongly ciliated seta 40» long; on coxa II is @ similar seta 5a

long; on coxa III similar, 424 long. Legs of norinal length, leg I 245p long,

TI 245,, III 265, (all lengths include coxa and claw). Each tarstis of the legs

with a single strong falciform claw. Setae and spines of legs as figured. Tarsus I

and II are provided on their dorsal surface with a solenoidal spine. Tarsi with-

out Haller’s type organ. Tarsus I stout, 54p long by 23n high. Metatarsus I stout,

sinuotis, 38. long. Gnathosoma (capitulum) compact. Basal segment of chelicera

loop

SOUTHCOTT

Fig. 3, A-C Neotrombidium barringunense Hirst, larva. A: ventral view,

entire; B: tarsus and tibia of palp, ventral; C: tips of cheliceral digits.

elongated, ovoid, 40» long by 14 wide, cheliceral digit curved, with a minute

external tooth. Galeal seta short, curved, pointed, ciliated, 14» long. No hypo-

stomal lip present. Setae on basis capituli long, tapering, ciliated, pointed, 404 long.

Palpi as figured. Palpal femur, genu, tibia, tarsus with 1,1,3,8 setae respectively.

Claw of palpal tibia strongly bifurcate, as shown.

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF N. BARRINGUNENSE

The follawing additional localities are recorded: —(Queensland: Dead Man's

Gully, north of Cairns, 29 November 1943, 4 specimens under bark of Lucalyp-

tus sp.; 31 December 1943, 1 specimen from similar habitat; 2 January 1944,

1 specimen {no further field notes). Irvinebank, 28 September 1944, | specimen

from under hark Eucalyptus sp. South Australia: Adelaide region (see next

section). {All specimens collected by writer.)

BIOLOGY IN THE ADELAIDE REGION

Around Adelaide, Sotith Australia (Glen Osmond and Heywood Park),

adults or nymphs have been taken by the writer from May onwards to February,

over 1938-1941 and 1948-1951. An occasional specimen has heen found in soil,

or under the bark of Encalyptus camaldylensis, but practically all the specimens

from the Adelaide region have been taken under the bark of the trunks of

Excalyptus leucoxylon, in the splits between fresh layers of damp bark, and I

have no doubt that in the Adelaide region at least there is a very strong associa-

tion between this mite and Eucalyptus leucoxylon, By August or September the

adult females ate seen to he, in mounted specimens, gravid with eggs which show

a good deal of development, About 30-50. (average 40) eggs can be counted filling

(he body in these mounts, Oviposition has occurred on six occasions with captive

females, Only one oviposition has been observed with each female, up to 40 or

perhaps more eggs being iaid. After oviposition mounted femules contain no eggs,

On three cecasions I have succeeded in rearing larvae from eggs laid in captivity.

Details of Successful Rearings

{1} Experiment ACB 398, Two adults were taken from under bark of

Eucalyptus lencoxylon at Heywood Park, South Australia 26 September 1948,

and these were placed in a glass tube with some bark from the tree. On 14 No-

vember 1948 the mites were healthy and no eggs were present in the tube. On

7 Decetnber the tube was re-examined. One adult mite was rather shrunken.

Nine active larvae were running around the tube. No attempt at feeding these was

made, and by 28 December all the larvae were dead. The adult was shrunken,

hut otherwise appeared healthy,

It appears from this experiment that the period from oviposition ta hatching

of the larvae is less than 23 days. The eggs were fiot seen, except as egg skins

present along with the larvae.

(2) Experiment ACB 399, Two specimens of N. barringwrense, one adult,

one nymphal, were captured in the same situation us ACB 398 on 26 September

1948, and confined in a damp atmosphere in a glass tube. Water was added

periodically as droplets to maintain humidity. Eggs, of the same colour as the

adult, were laid between 10-17 October 1948, a total of 19 being laid. On 17 Gcto-

tober the eggs were recorded as “almost smonth," having heen laid in a little

pit formed between the cork and the glass wall of the tube, ur else scatlered

around over the surface of the cork or the glass. By J9 October the eggs were

irregular, with the typical deutovum outline. The eggs hatched out initially on

12 November 1948, and continued to hatch ot:t on subsequent days.

Hence the period between oviposition and hatching ranged from

29-5 + 3-5 days upwards.

(3) Experiment ACB 400. Eight specimens of N. barringunense were cap-

tured in the same situation as the preceding on 26 September 1948. These were

Placed in a damp tube with some bark from the tree. The tube was kept humid

hy the periodical addition of droplets of water, Some of the specimens were

damaged in capture, and by 14 Noverher it was recorded that five adults were

alive but some were a little shrunken and that ten living healthy larvae were

running around in the tube. The tube was then allowed to dry aut, but one adult

survived until 2 February 1949 when it was extremely shrunken, ity ghdomen

scaphoid across the dorsum.

Hence the period from oviposition to hatching wag tess than 43 days,

From these and other experiments one may conclude that in the Adelaide

region eggs are laid in November or early December, and that three to four weeks

is passed in the egg stage. Some of the larvae were placed on human skin to see

if any attempt at parasitization would be made, but none was observed, I recorded

with one batch of larvae that they appeared to be positively, though weakly,

phototropic. Adults of this species can withstand extreme desiccation for weeks,

and it is sometimes a cause for wonder how they can survive when so extremely

shrunken. Usually Trombidiids (s1.) do not withstand desiccation well, The

habitat of N. basringunense—under damp bark of Eucalyptus—is a yery unusual

one, the majority of Trombidiids (sJ.} dwelling in damp soil, and presimably

the power of this species to withstand dry conditions is necessary for survival

with their choice of habitat.

DISCUSSION ON THE AFFINITIES OF THE LARVA

Wharton (1938) described as new Monunguis streblida, a remarkable larval

Trombidiid mite parasitic on the batfies Plereliipsis araneae Coquillett and

Trichobius dugesii Townsend (Diptera:Streblidae) from the Cinquo de Mayas

Cave, Tekax, Yucatan, Mexico, This larval mite has a strong resemblance to the

larva of Neotrombidium barringunense. Tt has one large claw to each tarsus, and

the dorsal secutym is similar, except for a bizarre appearance or structure between

the scutal genailla, sketched by Wharton, which has na comparable structure in

N. barringunenss, and may be an artefact. In the two forms the dorsal scutum

shows a strong resemblance in shape and chaetotaxy, Wharton states that the

coxa J and coxa II of Monunguis ave separated, but unfortunately he does not

figure this feature. In this latter feature Wharton compares Monunguis with the

European larval mite Rohaxltia biungulem Oudemans 1911. Oudemans (1912)

says of this latter species “coxae Il und II getrennt,” and comments on its

“Hydrachnid,” especially Limnocharid, affinities. Vitzthum (1913) appears to

have been responsible for considering Rohaultia biunguium as the larva of the

previously described adult species Johnstonianu errans (Johnston 1852), although

I can find no grounds stated by him anywhere for this correlation. It would

appear from Willmann (1947) that the only grounds used by Vitxthum were

that the adults and farvac were associated im the field. Similar considerations

have led other students of the Acarina into error. Thus Womersley (1934)

accepted the species now known as Sphaerotarsus womersteys Southcott 1946 as

the nymph of Cagculisoma ripicola Womersley 1934 on what appeared to be a

stroug association in the field. Oudemans (1912) classified the larvae now

grouped under Trombicula and related genera under the genus Microtrombsdium,

quite erroneously.

Unfortunately Wharton does not, in his very brief description, comment or

the presence or otherwise of the “urstigma.” but as he places the larval

Monunguis in the Trombidiidae as against the Erythraeidae one may assume that

it is present. The only serious point of difference in the descriptions of Monunguts

and larval Neotrombidianm lies in the contiguity or otherwise of coxae I and H,

in which possibly Wharton was mistaken. There are so many resemblances

between these larvae that there appears little doubt that Monunguts and Neo-

trombidium are congeneric, and as the latter genus has priority it must take

precedence over Monunguis. NeStrombidinm streblidwa {Wharton 1938) is

undoubtedly specifically distinct from the only other known Jarval species of this

genus, Neotrombidiwm barringunense Hirst 1928. These species differ in the

stricture of the non-sensillary setae of the dorsal scutum, the number and arrange

ment of the dorsal setae of the abdomen, and in various other characters.

DISCUSSION ON THE BIOLOGY OF NEOTROMBIDIUM

Previously the genus Neotrombidivm has been known as the adult forms

from Australia and South America. The correlation recorded in this paper extends

the known range to Central America.

Wharton states that the farvae (NV. streblidum) “were found to be parasitic

on the streblid flies which imfest the bats” in the Yucatan caves. The species

ef hats concerned are not mentioned by Wharton, but from other articles in the

accourit of the fatina of the Yucatan caves (Pearse 1938 a and b, Pearse and

Kellogg 1938) it appears these flies were obtained from two specimens (male

and female) of the fruit-eating bat Artbeus jamaicensis yucetamcys (Allen) on

29 July 1936,

It is reasonable to assume that the larvae of the Australian A’, barringunense

have the same type of host as does the American species, aud we may expect to

find the larvae in Australia parasitic on the Streblid flies parasitic on Australian

bats. The genus Artibexs is not represented in Australia (Troughton 1943),

hence any further stiggestions as to what bais may be concerned must remain

conjectural. In fact, only a few fruit hats have been recorded from South Aus-

tralia, and these appear to have heeti stragglers (Wood Jones. 1925). Of the

dipterous family Streblidae no species appears to have been described from

Australia, and they certainly appear to be far from common. Tillyard (1926)

states that one undescribed Streblid has “been taken by Dr. Illingworth in north

Queensland.” A few other dipterous bat parasites (Nycteribiidae) appear to occur

in Australia, and one species has been described (Tillyard 1926, Rainbow 1904,

Speiser 1905),

The larvae of the Trombiculidae and Leeuwenhoekiidae are parasitic on

vertebrates, only a few exceptions to this rule having been recorded. On one

occasion the writer captured a larva of Tragardhula pentagoxa Womersley 1952

running freely over the black fur on the thorax of a female Troides priemus

(butterfly) in rain forest eight miles east of Wondecla, north Queensland, on

20 October 1943 (not August, as recorded by Womersley). Audy (reported in

Womersley 1952 and tm fit.) has found the larval Trombicula rara Walch 1923

parasitic on the pill-millipede Sphaegropacus globus-magicus Jeekel 1951, as well

as Trombicula frittst Wharton 1945 parasitic on the scorpion Heterometrus longi-

manus in Malaya. André (1943) recorded Leenwenhoekia paradoxa André 1943

parasitic on the scorpion Ruthus gibbosus Brulé on the island of Gavdos (south

oi Crete). These findings arc exceptional, hut demonstrate that such larvae may

utilize an arthropod host.

It is difficult to imagine how in the open forest situations in which Nea-

irombidium borringunense is found in Australia the numbers of adults of this

species are maintained if only the apparently rare Streblid flies may be used as

hosts by the larvae. In the cases observed in captivity the adult female lays a

number of eggs, either in a Ivose cluster, or scattered singly, the batches observed

in the tubes numbering between 20-40 eggs, Only one oviposition has been

observed in each female, Gravid females contain 30-50 eggs (average 40), which

frequently show considerable differentiation of the contained embryo, although

the egg is inittally smooth on being laid, After oviposition the females are devoid

of eggs in mounted specimens, which is confirmatory of the suggestion that there

is only one ayiposition. Oviposition ig not immediately lethal to the female; in

Neotrombidium barringunmense 1 have observed the female ta survive 7 - 30 days

after oviposition, which usually leaves it very shrunken, (With other Trombidiid

mites I have.on occasions. obseryed the female to survive months after oviposition,

under suitable conditions, which aré easier to maintain than those required for

Neotrombidium). The slight disparity between the numbers of eggs observed

after oviposition and the number within the ovaries of the gravid female may be

due to experimental errors—e.g., the mites tend to lay their eggs in any minute

crack in the bark provided, or in the corks sealing the tubes, etc.

Presumably the larva of Neotrombidium barringunense hatches out under

the bark of Eucalyptus leucovylon or some similar habitat, runs up the tree to

find a suitable host, either free in the tree or parasitic on a bat, and after feeding

pupates, presumably after falling to the forest floor, and finally reaches its

Eucalypt habitat asa nymph, and remains there to complete the remainder of its

life cycle, It is worthy of investigation whether the flies of the related Dipterotis

family Hippoboscidae, which occur on birds in small numbers, might serve as 2

host for the larval mites.

Although such 2 life history as outlined may appear fantastic, it is not more

so than for example Fabre has recorded in his classic researches on the life of

the anthrax fly.

REFERENCES

Anprt, M. 1943 Une Espéce Nouvelle de Lecuwenhoekia (Acarien), Parasite

de Scorpions. Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. (Paris), 2e Série, 15, (5), 294

Beeresz, A. 1888. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., 20, 179

Bertese, A 1912 Redia, 8, 50

Hirst, §. 1928 On some new Australian Mites of the Families Trombidiidae

and Erythraeidae. Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 10, 1, 563

IDest, S. 1929 Additional Notes on Australian Mites of the Family Trom-

bidiidae, with Descriptions of New Forms, Proc, Zool, Soc., London,

2, 165

Jones, F. Woon 1925 Mammals of South Australia, Pt. 111. The Monodelphia,

Adelaide

Leonarpr, G. 1901 Zool. Anz., 25, 17

Ovpemans, A.C. 1912 Die bis jetzt bekannten Larven von Thrombidiidae und

Erythraeidae. Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. 14, 1-230

Pearss, A. S. 19383 Fauna of the Caves of Yucatan, Carnegie Inst., Wash.,

Publn. 491

Pearse, A, S. 1938b Insects from Yucatan Caves, Article XVIII, page 237,

in Fauna of the Caves of Yucatan. Edited by A, S. Pearse (see Pearse

19382}

Pearse, A. S., and Kentoce, R. 1938 Mammalia from Yucatan Caves, Article

XXIV, page 301, in Fauna of the Caves of Yucatan, Edited by A, Ss.

Pearse (see Pearse 19382)

Rainnow, W. J. 1904 A New “Bat Tick.” Rec. Aust. Mus., 5, (2), 78

Sourxeorr, R- V. 1946 Studies on Trombidiidae (Acarina). Some Observa-

tions on the Biology of the Microtrombidiinae. Proc, Linn. Soc, N.S.W.,

70, (5-6), 312

Seemser, P. 1905 Literatur-Referate. Z. f. Wiss, Ins.-biol., I, 349

Trtyarn, R. J. 1926 The Insects of Australia and New Zealand, Sydney,

page 378

TsovgHton, E, 1943 Furred Animals of Australia, Sydney

Wauarton, G, W. 1938 Acarina of Yucatan Caves, Article X in Fatina of the

Caves of Yucatan, Edited by A. S. Pearse (see Pearse 19384), p. 137

Wittmann, C. 1947 Trombidiidae. Lfg. 71 b. Das Tierreich, Berlin

WomersLey, H: 1934 A Revision of the Trombid (sic) and Erythraeid Mites

of Australia with Descriptions of New Genera and Species. Rec. S. Aust.

Mus., 5, (2), 179

Wowmerstey, H. 1936 Additions to the Trombidiid and Erythraeid Acaritie

Fauna of Australia and New Zealand. J. Linn. Soc. London (Zool.),

40, (269), 107

Womerstey, H. 1939 Further Notes on the Australian Trombidiidae with

Description of New Species. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2), 149

Womersitey, H. 1945 Acarina of Australia and New Guinea. The Family

Lecuwenhoekiidae. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 69, (1), 96

Womersiey, H.. 1952 The Scrub-Typhus and Scrub-Itch Mites (Trombicul-

idae, Acarina) of the Asiatic-Pacific Region. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 10,

pts. i and ii, 1-673

DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF LARVAL

TROMBICULID MITE FROM NEW GUINEA

BY R. V. SOUTHCOTT

Summary

A new genus and species of Trombiculid mite, Babiangia bulbifera n. gen., n. sp., is described from

New Guinea. One specimen was captured free on the forest floor, but 11 specimens were taken

froma single small skink, Lygosoma (Homolepida) forbessii? The engorged specimens parasitic on

the lizard were parasitic beneath the body scales, an unusual form of parasitization for a

Trombiculid mite on a lizard. The engorged larvae showed a general convergence in body shape

towards that of the Pterygosomid mites, which are obligatory parasites of lizards. The

morphological affinities and biology of Babiangia bulbifera are discussed.

DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF

LARVAL TROMBICULID MITE FROM NEW GUINEA

By R. V. Soorrcorr

[Read 9 July 1953]

SUMMARY

A new genus and species of Trombiculid mite, Babiangia bulbtfera un. gen, nm sp. is

described from New Guinea. One specimen was captured free on the forest floor, but I1

specimens were taken from a2 single small skink, Lygosoma (Homolepida) forkesuf The

engorged specimens parasitic on the lizard were parasitic beneath the body scales, an unusual

form of parasitization for a Trombiculid mite on a lizard. The engorged larvae showed a

general convergence in body shape towards that of the Pterygosomid mites, which are

obligatory peraiies of lizards. The morphological affinities and biology of Babsangta bulbifera

are discussed.

In this paper a new genus and species of larval Trombiculid mite from

New Guinea is described,

Babiangia n. gen.

Definition—Dorsal scutum quadrangular, broader than long with two sen-

sillary setae placed anteriorly; with five non-sensillary setae, an anterior median

seta, two anterolateral and two posterolateral setae. Dorsal scutum extends

posteriorly beyond the posterolateral setae. Palpal claw bifurcate. Cheliceral fang

(digit) simple, without accessory teeth, Galeal seta simple. Eyes two on cach

side, the posterior eye the larger. Posterior ventral setae of abdomen with

expanded bulbous bases, All legs with seven segments (including coxa, basi- and

telo-femur. Empodium of tarsi thickened, equal to the tarsal claws. No whip-like

setae on legs. When engorged the larva is of Pterygosomid facies.

Babiangia bulbifera n. sp.

Fig. 1-3

Description of Larva—Colour light pink. Length (including mouthparts) of

unengorged type specimen 255,, width 175» (engorged specimens measure 300),

Jong by 350% wide). Shape roughly globular when unengorged. Engorged speci-

mens are flattened dorsoventrally, and then of Pterygosomid facies, with a distinct

posterior notch (fig. 3 shows a specimen in which the posterior notch is not a

marked feature). Dorsal scutum quadrangular, wider than long, 72« long by

97 wide, widest anteriorly, with sides almost straight. Anterior edge slightly

concave, anterolatera! corners flattened, lateral sides straight except for a slight

conyexity in the region of the posterolateral non-sensillary seta. Shield with two

sensillary setae, ciliated in their distal halves, 69 long, arising toward the antero-

lateral corners of the shield. Inter-sensillary distance 72». Scutal non-sensillary

setae slender, pointed, faintly ciliated distally, the anterolateral arising as shown

at the junction of the short anterolateral border with the lateral border of the

shield, 37 long. Anterior median seta similar, 54» long, arising a short distance

(9x) behind the middle of the anterior border. Posterolateral non-sensillary setae

similar but very slightly swollen at proximal end, 2% long, arising a little behind

the middle of the lateral border of the shield, close to the edge, which is there

a little convex. The shield shows the normal slight porosity.

Standard seutal data for the type specimen are {in micra) :

AW PW SB ASB PSB SD A-P AM AL PL Sens.

95 72 72 18 60 78 34 54 37 29 69

Eyes two on each side, mounted on a distinct shield. In unengorged specimens

the eye-shield is close to the lateral border of the scutum. The posterior eye is

considerably larger than the anterior.

Aik

we"\ N=.

\ vi \ ’, a | f

" \ Be

SOUTHCOTT

Fig. 1 Babiangia bulltfera n.gen., n. Sp. Dorsal view, entire, unengorged,

Dorsum of abdomen with 20 setae, long, pointed, slightly thickened in their

proximal halves, ciliated, 33 - 63» long, arranged as figured.

Ventral abdominal surface: a pair of pointed ciliated setae, 26m long, between

the fused coxae 1 and IJ; a similar pair 21h long between coxae III. Behind

coxae IIT and anterior to the anus is a group of pointed ciliated setae with bulbous

bases, 25-27 long. Lateral to the anus are four long strong ciliated setae,

thickened proximally, medial pair 47 long, lateral pair 60 long.

Legs of normal length, leg I 295 long, IT 245, III 295p (all lengths includ-

ing coxae and claws). Coxae normal, as figured. Each coxa with a single long

curved pointed ciliated seta; that on I arises towards the posterolateral angle, is

46p long; on LI arises close to the posterolateral angle, 35, long; on IH arises

160

near the anterolateral angle, 63» long. Chaetotaxy of legs as figured. Setaé of legs

mostly strong and heavily ciliated, No long whip-like setae on legs. Metatarsus

I 48u long, On metatarsus III, neat its distal end, is a long strong tapering pointed

ciliated seta, 53 long, with a bulbous proximal part. Tarsus I and I] with the

normal solenoidal spine, not present on IJI. On tarsus III the claws are reinforced

by a strong curved ciliated seta arising distally on its posterior aspect. On all

tarsi the empodium is thickened and is as strong as the claws, Tarsus I 76p

long by 24y high,.

SOUTHCOTT

200; ff

Fig. 2 Babiangia bulbifera n, gen, n.sp. Ventral view, entire, unengorged.

Chelicerae and palpi stout and compact, Cheliceral digit strong, curved,

simple, without apical cap. Galeal seta short simple curved pointed, 15y long,

Seta on basis capituli long, strongly and unilaterally ciliated, 40 long. Palpi as

figured. Palpal femur, genu, tibia, tarsus, with 1,1,3,8 setae respectively. Femoral

seta ciliated, genual seta simple, tibial setae simple. Claw of palpal tibia bifurcate,

the axial prong being internal.

Locality—Babiang, Aitape region of New Guinea. (1) a single specimen,

Type, free, unengorged, from the rain forest floor, 22 December 1944 (R.V.S.)

(ACB 582). (2) 11 specimens parasitic under the body scales of a lizard (Lygo-

101

soma (Homolepida) forbesii?) (identified by J. R. Kinghorn, Australian

Museum), same situation, 24 December 1944 (R.V.S.) (ACB 258 A-K). (All

specimens in author’s collection.)

Fig. 3 Babiangia bulbifera, n. gen., n.sp. Dorsal view of an engorged specimen,

DISCUSSION ON GENERIC CLASSIFICATION

In keys offered in standard classifications of the family Trombiculidae, ¢.g.,

those of Wharton e¢ al, (1951) and Womersley (1952) this form would be

classified as Trombicula. Structurally Babiangia differs from Trombicula in the

shape and chaetotaxy of the dorsal scutum, and in having the posterior eye larger

than the anterior, Babiangia has a resemblance to the genus Novotrombicula

Womersley and Kohls 1947, having the dorsal scutum similarly produced

posteriorly, but in the latter genus the shield so extended takes in two of the

dorsal abdominal setae. Babiangia differs also in having the empodium thickened

and similar to the claws; in Novotrombicula and normally in Trombicula the

empodium is long and slender.

DISCUSSION ON BIOLOGY

The specimens of Babiangia bulbifera taken parasitic on the lizard appeared

to show a good deal of adaptation to their host, The specimens were completely

hidden under the scales, and were only found because it was noticed that some

of the scales of the trunk and tail showed a little tenting, and that there was a

slight gap under their free edge. The flattening of the body of the mite, and

102

general resemblance to the shape of the Pterygosomid mites, in the engorged

specimens is remarkable, showing a strong convergence. Parasitization of lizards

and other reptiles by Trombiculid mites is well known, but mostly the reptile is

merely one of a number of possible hosts, no particular adaptation being shown,

and the Trombiculids are not found under scales but clustered as is normal in

mammals and birds on some suitable soft patch of skin, e.g., in the axillae, groins

and external auditory meati, with the bodies of the mites projecting free above the

surface (Michener 19464 and b, Southcott 1947, Hyland 1951),

REFERENCES

Hyianp, K, E. 1951 Observations on the Chigger Mite Trombicula (Eutrom-

bicula) splendens Ewing (Acarina:Trombiculidae). Ann. Ent. Soc.

America, 44, (3), 297

MicHeEner, C. D. 19462 Observations on the Habits and Life History of a

Chigger Mite, Eutrombicula batatas (Acarina:Trombiculinae), ibid.,

39, (1), 101

MicHener, C. D. 1946b Taxonomic and Bionomic Notes on Some Panamanian

Chiggers (Acarina, Trombiculinae), ibid., 44, 411

SoutHcotr, R. V. 1947 Observations on the Epidemiology of Tsutsugamushi

Disease in North Queensland, Med. J. Aust., 2, 441

Wuanzton, G, W., Jenkins, D. W., BRENNAN, J. M., Fuuver, H. S., Kouts,

G. M., and Pup, C. B. 1951 The Terminology and Classification of

Trombiculid Mites (Acarina:Trombiculidae). J. Parasit., 37, (1), 13

Womerstry, H. 1952 The Scrub-Typhus and Scrub-Itch Mites (Trombiculi-

dae, Acarina) of the Asiatic-Pacific Region. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 10,

Pts. 1 and 2, 1-673

Womerstey, H., and Kouts, G. M. 1947 New Genera and Species of Trom-

biculidae from the Pacific Islands. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 71, (1), 3

STRATIGRAPHY AND STRUCTURE OF THE NORTHERN TERRITORY

OF AUSTRALIA

BY PAUL S. HOSSFELD

Summary

The Northern Territory of Australia covers an area exceeding 520,000 square miles. Very large

areas have not been examined geologically. The existence of formations of most of the major

geological divisions has been recognised. Those not recorded, or doubtfully so, are formations of

the Silurian, Triassic and marine phases of the Tertiary Period.

103

STRATIGRAPHY AND STRUCTURE OF THE NORTHERN TERRITORY

OF AUSTRALIA

By Paut 5. Hossretp *

[Read 10 September 1953]

CONTENTS

Page

Sum MARY - - - - - 3 - “

TL. Inprropucrion - - - - - “ - = - 104

II. Georocy - - - - - - - = « - 104

A. GENERAL - - - = - “i = ~ - 105

B. ArcHAgOzOIC - - - - - - - - - 105

The Musgrave Block - - - * e £ -~ 106

The Arunta Block - - - - - - - ~ 107

C. Prorerozoic - - - - . - : " - 110

Lower Proterozoic - - - - - = é - 112

Middle Proterozoic - - - - m > 7 - 115

(a) The Hatches Creek Group - = . - - - 115

(b) The Carpentaria Group - - - - - - We

The Newer Granites and Metallogenesis - - - - - 120

Upper Proterozoic - “ ~ “ 7 - 3 - 124

Ages and Correlation of the Lower to Middle Precambrian Rocks ~ 126

Correlation with Queensland and Western Australia - - - 127

Structures and Trend Lines of the Precambrian Rocks - - 128

D. Late Prorerozoic AND CAMDRIAN - - - - * - 131

The Buldivan Series ~ - - - - 4 - - 431

(a) The Buldiva Quartzite - - : 2 E ~ 433

(b) The Daly River Group or Upper Buldivan Series - - 134

The Amadeus Geosyncline - - - - - - - 137

Age and Correlation - - - - = - - - 140

E. Orvovictan - - - - a - = - - 142

F, Sicuaian ~ - - - - - - - - 144

G. Devonran - - - - ~ = is ri ~ 145

The Collia Series - - - - - - - - 145

H. Carsonrrerous - - - & « « = - 146

I. Permian - - - - - - - - - 147

The Port Keats District - - e - “ + - 147

The Burt Range Basin - . - = = - 147

Other Areas in North Australia - - - - ~ - 147

The Finke Series - - - - 4 = - 148

The Elliott Creek Formation - - - = = - 148

J. Trtassic ~ = - “ - = = 4 - 149

K. Jurassic - - - - - - - - - 149

L. Creracrous - - - - re = = s ~ 149

The Great Australian Artesian Basin - - - - - 152

The Burt Trough = - - - - - - - - 152

M, Carnozorc - - - - - - we « - 155

TI. ReFerences AND Braviocrarny - - - - - - - 156

IV. IeLustrations - rs =

SUMMARY

The Notthern Territory of Australia covers an area exceeding 520,000 square

aniles. Very large areas have not been examined geologically. The existence of formations

of most of the major geological divisions has been recognised. Those not recorded, or

eoubthiily so, are formations of the Silurian, Triassic and marine phases of the Tertiary

eriod.

The rocks, structures and succession of events are discussed from the oldest,

the Archaeozoic, ta the close of the Mesozoic Era. The incompleteness of geological

mapping and great extent of recent surface accumulations, have necessitated the use

of inferred occurrences and boundaries to a large extent in the compilation of the

* School of Geology, University of Adelaide.

‘Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 77, July, 1954

geological map and discussion of the history of the region. The use of all published

works, together with the extensive observations made by the author, have made it

possible to arrive at a number of conclusions, even though some be tentative, regarding

the structure and geological evolution of the Northern Territory,

Where practicable, correlations have been attempted with formations in Oteens-

land, Western and South Australia.

I. INTRODUCTION

The Northern Territory of Australia has an area in excess of 520,000

square miles and occupies therefore more than one-sixth of the total area of the

continent. Reference will be made to its two divisions, Central and North

Australia, which had short-lived separate administrations from 1927-31 (Sec

General Map). ;

It is a frontier province to this day. Except for mining camps, mission

centres and pastoral holdings, the few settlements are confined to the Over-

land Telegraph Line and to the two unconnected lines of railway. There

are ¢normous areas tin which roads and eyen tracks do not exist, and water

supply is temporary and precarious. Wide expanses of sand-plain, the large

areas of closely spaced sand dunes as well as the rugged topography af

many sectors make access difficult and hazardous. It is not surprising there-

fore that much of the Territory is not mapped and considerable areas have

nat been explored.

Geological examinations have been made of numerous areas, but the

greater portion of the region has Leen traversed by very widely spaced

reconnaissance suryeys and many areas have not been examined at all by

gtologists.

From 1935-41, the Aerial, Geological and Geophysical Survey of North-

ern Australia (A.G.G.S.N.A.). sponsored jointly hy the Governments of the

Commonwealth, Queensland and Western Australia, conducted investigations

in the above two States and the Territory. The writer was the Senior Geolo-

gist in charge of the Northern Territory Geological Party of that Survey,

which will be referred to generally in the text by its abbreviated title of

Northern Australia Survey or as N.A.S., but bibliographic references will

be given as A-G.G.5.N.A, During the course of this survey, the writer con-

ducted extensive ground and air reconnaissance surveys over large parts of

the Territory, and selected areas for aerial photography. Of the numerous

Jarge areas selected and photographed, many were examined and mapped

subsequently with the aid of the aerial photographs. A number of reports

were written by the present writer and his assistant geologists; the majority

have been printed and are listed in the attached Bibliography. The titles of

others, not printed, will be found in the A.G,G,S.N.A. reports. Where ‘possible

the rocks and minerals characteristic of each area examined were collected int

triplicate; the chief collection was forwarded to the Bureau of Mineral

Resources at Canberra, the others were sent to the Mines Branch at Alice

Springs and to the Department of Geolugy at the University of Adelaide.

The termination of field activities by the N.A.S. in 1941 ended systematic

geological examimation in the Territory during the remaining war years

Since then geological work has been carried out chiefly by officers: of the

Commonwealth Bureau of Mineral Resources, Canberra, and the contribution

of aerial photography of large sectors of the Territory is rapidly advancing

our knowledge of largely unknown areas.

The writer gratefully acknowledges the assistance by the Council of

the University of Adelaide in making research grants during 1949 and 1950,

and to the Professor of Geology, Sir Dauglas Mawsou, for the use of facilities

in the investigation and compilation of the material presented herein.

105

Through the courtesy and co-operation of the Commonwealth Survey

Tiirectorate. the writer was able to examine Jarge numbers of aerial photo-

graphs of areas not covered by the N.A,S. photography.

Reference must be made also to the great value of the pioneering work

of early explorers and geologists, especially H. Y. L. Brown, Davidson,

Maurice, Streich, Tate, Tictkens and Winnecke, and to numerous more

recent contributors.

. The writer desires to place on record his appreciation of the work done

in the Territory by the Assistant Geologists of the N.A.S., notably that of

A. H, Voisey, A. W. Kleeman, C. J. Sullivan, V. M, Cottle and T. V. Lewis.

Il. GEOLOGY

A. GENERAL

The geological record includes formations of nearly all the maio:

divisions, the Silurian and Triassic being the only ones whose presence has

not been proved. (See General Map.) Some formations have received no

definite age determinations as yet, but a tentative classification has been made

where this appeared reasonable. Such formations include the Collia Series

and Elliott Creek Formation of North Australia, the Post-Ordovician Can-

glomerate and the Finke Series of Central Australia,

Despite the large amount of detailed mapping that has been carried out

in the last thirty years, little except highly generalized information is avyail-

able of the greater part of the Territory. Large areas are unexploréd

geologically and many of those traversed at very wide intetvals by carly

explorers have not been visited since,

Enormous areas are deyoid of solid outcrops and the subjacent rocks

have been classifed on indirect evidence stich as vegetation and soils.

topography, scattered wells and bores and isolated outcrops. The absence of

solid outcrops over large areas is the result of various factors such as:

1. Extensive duricrust with or without sand-cover.

2. Large areas of parallel sand-dunes.

3. Large planed areas produced, some by marine, some by aeolian action,

4, Large areas of alluvium and lacustrine deposits.

5. Horizontal or sub-horizontal sediments, many in areas of graded

internal drainage.

A very large proportion of the otiteropping rocks are Precambrian in

age and their correlation depends on structural and lithological features,

lt is possible therefore, except in limited sectors, to deal only with the

broader features of geological structure and succession, All available publi-

cations and observations were examined and considered, but specific refer-

ence in the text to cach one was impracticable. The interpretation, and tn

a number of instances, modification of widely divergent views were facilitated

by the writer’s extensive knowledge of the Territory obtained during the

N.A. Survey and on other occasions. As a result, the writer found it possible

to extend considerably, boundaries of formations from areas examined on

the ground te others examined from the air or on aerial photographs.

B. ARCHAEOZOIC

The oldest formations known in the Territory occur within the areas

accupied by the Arunta Complex (Mawson and Madigan, 1930, p. 417).

Descriptions of the rock types, their location and mineralization are to be

found in many reports of the early explorers, but predominantly in those

of H, Y. L. Brown, to whose pioneering investigations we vwe much of our

106

earlier knowledge of the geology. Of the more recent investigators, the

more important contributions are those of Chewings, Hodge-Smith, Hossfeld,

Mawson and Madigan, Voisey, Wilson, and Ward.

The investigations of the N.A. Survey showed that determination of

the stratigraphical sequence and chronological succession, while laborious

and difficult, is possible; but as is to be expected, will require much detailed

field and laboratory work,

The formations of the Arunta Complex outcrop in two distinct areas

separated by a great thickness of younger sediments. The two areas are

known as the Musgrave and Arunta Blocks (Pitjentara and Arunta Shields,

respectively, of Chewings, 1935). The intervening area occupied by younger

sediments was named the Amadeus Geosyneline. (Amadeus Sunkiand of

Chewings, 1935.)

Although formations of the Artinta Complex outcrop over Jarge continu-

ous areas in some sectors such as for example in the Harts Ranges, the

Arltunga District and other areas east, north-east and west of Alice Springs,

there exist on these blocks numerous outcrops of younger sediments of

several periods. Many of these indicate by their attitudes and location that

they represent the eroded remnants of deposits which formerly covered

large portions of the old blocks.

Over very large areas also, no solid outcrops exist and the surface

consists of recent aeolian deposits as a veneer over the older rocks. In many

instances information obtained from bores and wells has proved the existence

at shallow depths of Archaeozoic rocks. There are a number of areas,

however, in which the presence of the basement rocks at shallow depths is

inferred. For the purpose of the general map deposits of alluvial or aeolian

origin where they serve merely to obscure the ancient rocks, have been

ignored. Some areas such as the Burt, Hale, and Plenty Plains, are down-

faulted blocks on which sediments ranging from Mesozoic (?) upwards, have

been deposited. It is possible teat other downfaulted basins exist within the

Arunta and Musgrave Blocks,

THE Muscrave Bleck

This black occupies the extreme south-western part of the Territory.

It extends westwards into Western Australia to the Warburton Ranges,

and southwards into South Australia where it forms a large area in the

north-western corner of that State and outcrops as a number of Inselberge

such as the Musgrave, Everard, Mann, Tomkinson and other Ranges.

The greater part of the Musgrave Block in the Northern Territory,

Western and South Australia, is included in a native reservation in which

non-aboriginal settlement is prohibited and access illegal, except by an

official permit. Ft can be understood, therefore, that tracks and water supplies

are scarce and access in general is possible only for well-equipped and

organized parties. The importance of the search for radio-active minerals

is expected to stimulate exploration of these areas of ancient rocks.

A considerable amount of information its available of the Western

Australian sector (Streich, Talbot, Clarke, et. a!.), and of the South Austra-

lian portion (Streich, Brown, Basedow. Jack and Wilson). The Territory

sector has been explored geographicalty but ihe rocks and structures of the

Archaeoseic formations are not well known. More attention has been given

in the past to the more prominent topographical features most of which

are residuats of rocks considered to be of Proterozoic age. Such information

as ts available both from the literature and the writer's limited observations,

indicates that the Territory sector contains a continuation of the rock types

107

and structures noted in the South Australian portion, The extensive develop-

jient of metamorphosed basic igneous rocks—greenstones—recorded in the

western part of the Western Australian sector of the Musgrave Block (Tal-

bot and Clarke, 1917), is not repeated either in South Australia or the

Northerm Territory. Similar altered basic rocks (dolerites and gabbros

chiefly) do occur but are of less importance.

The adjacent parts of Western Australia (Talbot and Clarke, 1917) and

of South Australia (Wilson, 1947) contain large areas of acid rocks, many

of which appear to be of rgneous origin. The oldest rocks recognised in these

areas and of the Northern Territory sector of the Musgrave Block are in-

tensely altered sediments now consisting chiefly of gneisses in which garnet,

cordierite, spinel, biotite and sillimanite are developed. Some outcrops of

schists, conglomerates and guartzites, mylonitized in part, are recorded, but

are scarce. It is probable that the vast aeclian deposits which obscure the

outcrops over so much of the area, cover to a large extent the more easily

eroded rocks. The known tock types as recorded, probably do not give a

true picture of the types and relative amounts of the Archaeozoic rocks of

the region.

In the ancient metasediments there are numerous, predominantly con~

cordant, masses of granite gneisses; many of them of great size. The

recognition, both in Western and South Australia, that these acid “ortho-

gneisses” include many hypersthene-bearing rocks similar to the Charnockite

Series of India, suggests that such may exist also in the Northern Territory,

both in the Musgrave and Arunta Blocks, Subsequently to the intrusion of

these acid rocks or their formation by granitization, there appears to have

occurred a period of igneous activity marked by intermediate to basic in-

trusions, (Wilson, 1947), As these are non-gneissic except in localities of

marked dynamic metamorphism, they appear to be separated by a consid-

erable time interval from the gneissic rocks, and are correlated tentatively

herein with the basic intrusives of later Precambrian age—Lower to Middle

Praterozoic—of Central and North Australia.

Subsequently, acid intrusions took place on a grand scale, producing

very large bathyliths of granitic rocks of which the Everard Ranges Granite

may be regarded as typical. These granites are predominantly non-gneissic,

but exhibit gneissic structure in parts near their margins. These “Newer

Granites,” too, include Charnockitic types. (Wilson, 1947), The gneissic

structure exhibited by these granites near their margins in some localities

and the apparent transition from granite to invaded rock noted in some out-

crops, suggests that some granitizaltion accompanied or was produced by

the intrusion of the acid magma. Finally, there appears ta have come the

introduction of basic rocks, dolerites, gabbros, norites, etc., which exhihit

little alteration and which have been assigned to various ages by different

observers.

To the Archaeozoic Era are referred those igneous rocks which exhibit

predominantly concordant gneissic structure on a regional scale and those

metasediments and igneous rocks into which they are intrusive. Subsequent

sediments and igneous intrusions, though they may have been subjected to

severe deformation, do not show the degree of stress and metamorphism so

characteristic of the older rocks, and are referred to the Proterozoic Era.

Tur AsuntTa Biockn

This block extends from the vicinity of Alice Springs (lat. 23° 45’ 5.

approximately), northwards to a short distance beyond Barrow Creek (lat.

21° 15’ S. approximately). Its greatest east-west extent is approxmmately

108

450 tiles, and it approaches both the Queensland and Western Australian

borders, Further explorations may extend the known outcrops to the east

and west, hut are not expected to result in material changes of the outline

as presented herein.

As in the Musgrave Block, the Precambrian formations of the Arunta

Block consist predominantly of rocks assigned to the Archaeszoic Era, but

include also a considerable proportion of younger rocks of sedimentary and

igneous origin, An enormous time-interval appears to separate the two age-

divisions, and the younger is therefore assigned to the Proterozotc Era.

The oldest known rocks of the Arunta Complex consist of intensely

metamorphosed sediments and igneous rocks. No evidence is available of

the basement on which they rest or of the terrain from which the sediments

were derived. These very ancient rocks have been affected by regional,

dynamic, thermal and contact metamorphism, injection of igneaus materials.

metasomatism and granitization, with regional metamorphism the dominant

feature. Some formations have experienced more than one type of meta-

morphism and in numerous instances variations in type or intensity can lie

observed in a formation or in a bed along its strike.

In many instances it is impossible either to determine the nature of

the material from which the present rock is derived or even to decide whether

its origin was sedimentary or igneous, Detailed observations show, however,

that included in the criginal rocks were conglomerates, arkoses, grits, sand-

stones, mudstones, limestones and volcanics (tuffs and flows), as well as

transgressive igneous rocks such as aplites, pegmatites, basic dykes and

probably sills. The rocks consist of gneisses and schists in great vanety and

include large formations of augen-gneisses and schists. Gneisses range from

acid to basic in composition, including a lustre-motiled hornblende-gneiss,

and represent both ortho- and para-gneisses. Schists have been produced by

the metamorphism and recrystailization of all types of sediments and vol-

canics and have developed a great variety of minerals, including sillimanite.

cyanite, micas, chlorite, talc, garnets, sphene, spinel, hornblende, diopside,

scapolite, epidote and many others. (

Garnets occur in gneisses and schists over very large areas and in

immense numbers, Most of them are small, but their numbers so great that

for miles the sand and soil are red. and consist predominantly of that mineral.

However, crystals over an inch in diameter are plentiful. The largest seen

by the writer had a diameter exceeding 3 inches. Hadge-Smith (1932) records

one of nearly 11 inches diameter. The garnetiferous rocks and some gurnet

reck occur in many parts of the Arunta Block but mainly in the area to

the cast and north of the River Hale, where gem quality stones occur in

large numbers.

Mylonitization was intense in some areas. Conglomerates were trans-

formed ta gneisses and in some instances the original pebbles stretched to

thin. Alms. Calc- and quartz-schists, sheared basic rocks and other recards of

dynamic metamorphism occur plentifully, but tn restricted areas. Injection

of igneous materials, both acid and basic and the granitization and contact

metamorphism of these ancient rocks add to the immense variety of rock

types, developed as stated earlier, in some instances at intervals along the

strike of a bed or a formation.

In addition, subsequent silicification, either selective or general, has

increased the difficulties of determining the original material.

The recognition of originally igneous material depended in many fn-

stances on observations in the field rather than on microscopic determination.

There were instances, however, where the latter confirmed the field evidence-

109

Acid igneous material invaded or was formed in the ancient sediments

and igneous recks which form the basement rocks of the Arunta Complex,

Geth in the Arunta and Musegraye Blocks, enormows areas shaw outcrops

of granite gneisses and related rocks (Pl, IJ, 1). In most instances the gneissic

structure 1s parallel to er concordant with thal of the invaded gneisses and

schists. These “older granites” occur on a vast scale not only in the Northern

‘Territory, but also in South and Western Australia. They were invaded

by basic rucks, priginally dolerites or gabbros and probably some ultra-

hasic types. which rocks haye been metamorphosed and recrystallized to

umphibalite gnetsses and schists.

These anciet( acid and basic igneous rocks have been subjected gener-

illy to the regional and specific types of metamorphism which were experj-

enced by the invaded rocks, The concordance uf many of the granite

gneisses and approach to concordance of others, suggesis that the

original rocks had been subjected to diastrophism, some of a severe character

and therefare, chat some metamorphic activivy, chichy of a regional type.

had occurred before the formation of the granite-gneisses. It is probable

that the acid igneous activity follawed closely upon and was partly synchron-

ous with w period of seyere orogeny and that the final phases were marked

by the introduction of basic igneous material. The severe folding and Taulting

which are such marked features of the Archaeozoic formations of the

Arunta Complex have affected the ancient formations, the “older granites”

and “older basie intrusions” and it is impossible at this stage ta determine

the amount of deformation prior to the period of igneous activily.

Modge-Smith (1932, pp. 423-431) proposed a tentative age classification

wf the formations of the Arunta Complex. The present writer agrees with

the reference to the Froterozoic Era of the Everard Range Granite and the

Molgarna Acid Intrusives. Hodge-Smith, however, went Further and sug

gested a division of those rocks which are predominantly of sedimentary

origin into the Huckitta and Ambalindum Series, the farmer being the

older. In view of the marked lithological differences between his “Huckitta

Series” and racks cuteropping in the Arltunga District, a division af these

-\rehaenzoic rocks is tempting. It 1s difficult, however, to decide whether

Hodge-Smith regarded the rocks of the Arltimga District as members of

his “Ambalindum Series.” Voisey (1938) appears ta take this view but

includes with them the White Range heds, which Hodge-Smith, following

Chewings (1928), defimitely though mistakenly, correlates with the Perta-

knusra or Upper Proterozoic beds. The present writer disagrees with both

the above views, and considers the White Range Quartzite and associated

beds as Post-Archaeozuic and pre-Pertaknurra, and probably of Middle

Proterozoic age. It is possible that detailed structural mapping will «lemon-

strate the existence in the Arltunga District of unconformuble groups of

metasediments within the Archaeozoic rocks, but sit present this must be

merely an interesting speculation and they will he referred te collectively

us the Aruntan Series. Examination of the Harts Ranges shows that these

ranges consist chiefly of a group of highly metamorphosed rocks apparently

of sedimentary origin, which are folded against and dip away from the

gneisses, schists and granite gneisses of the Aritunga Distecit, and appear

ta be ancomformable to them. Some fault boundaries were observed, but the

greater portion of the contacts appear to be unconformable. The northern

continuations of these rocks are cut aff sharply by the fault boundaries wf

the Plenty Trough which contains sediments probably of Mesozoiw and

Cainozoic ages (Fig. 2).

The Harts Range rocks consist of schists and gneisses intruded by very

110

rumerous, muscavite-hearing pegmatites of probably Middle Proterozoic

age. The metamorphism of the original sediments was intense, but in those

sectors examined by the writer, the range of original material appears 10

have been much less than that of the adjacent and presumably older racks

of the Arunta Block, and they do not appear to comtain the granite gneisses

so plentiful elsewhere. It is suggested that the Harts Range metamorphics

may represent a younger division of the Archaeozaic Era. They are classifiee!

tentatively as Upper Archavozoic and will be referred tu as the Riddock

Series.

The Archacozoic rocks ag defined in this paper are those referred to as

the Lower Precambrian by David and Browne (1950).

The metasediments of the Arunta Complex with their sheared ton

glomerates, sheared and reerystallized busic tutis, flows and possibly sills,

as well as the great thickness of other associated rocks. of clastic origin, are

referred to the Warrawoona Series of Western Australia and the Argylla

Series of Queensland,

‘There appears to be little doubt of the correlation of the granite-gneisses

with those of other parts of Australia at or near the top of the older Arch-

aeozoic. (Kalkadoon Series of North-Western Queensland.)

The effect of Archacozoic igneous activity on the introduction of metallic

minerals in the Musgrave or Arunta Blocks has not been determined, The

intense metamorphism and deformation of the rocks as well as the wide

spreaul mineralization during the Proterozoic Era, but especially the enor-

mous depth of material removed by erosion, make such a determination

dificult, There are a few octeurrences including gold, copper and tungsten

which have no apparent connection wilh Proterozoic mineralization, and are

regarded tentatively as of Archacozaie age. All these occurrences, however,

are sinall and of little economic value.

As 15 to be expected in a region of intense deformation, the Archacoavic

rocks exhibit structures which may vary widely in direction within very

short distances, Despite these expected irregularities, however, there 15 a

remarkable tendency, as noted by previous observers, for westerly to north-

westerly strikes ta persist or recur over long distances in the central portians

of the Arunta Block. Towards the western extremity, however, as for

example at Mount Doreen, the strikes change to a north-north-westerly

trend (Hossfeld in A.G.G.S.N_A., 1940b), (Hills, 1946), In the eastern half

of the block, westerly to north-westerly strikes persist, except for loc!

variations, as far as the Jervois Ranges Mineral Field. The writer, while

surveying this field (Hossfeld, 1931), noted a marked change of strike at the

southern end of the field; the swing from east-west to north-north-west

exceeds nitiety degrees, This northerly strike may represent merely a local

departure from the general trend or it may coilinue, as suggested by Hills

(1946), lo the Cloncurry Region in North-Western Queensland. The exten-

sive jitervening cover by the Trldivan Series of Cambrian age. made +)

determination impossible,

Cc. PROTEROZOIC

Trom Darwin in the north to the vienity of Alice Springs in the south,

and froma the Western Australian to the Queensland border there outerop

at intervals, groups of sediments which have been metamorphosed, inteudesd!

by acid and basic igneous rocks, and in most areas contain metallic anineral

deposits. Their metamorphism varies considerably in severity, but except

in a few restricted localives, does not approach in intensity or completeness

the metamorphism exhibited by the Archaeozoie formations, Farther, where-

111

as the Archaeozic rocks include acid and basie igneous rocks which are

regionally gneissic, as well as predominantly non-gneissic intrusions, it is

the latter only which invade the younger, and less metamorphosed rocks.

With the exception of stich areas as the White Range, Jervois Ranges,

McArthur River District, etc, to which some observers have assigned mare

recent ages, these newer metamorphic rocks and their associated igneous

intrusions. have been and are regarded generally as being comparable in

age with the Mosquito Creek Series of Western Australia (David, 1932),

(Hossfeld, 1936-40), ((Matheson and Teichert, 1945), (Noakes, 1949). This

series is regarded by some as Upper Archaeoznic, hy others as lower

Proterozoic. For reasons which will be given below, the latter is adopted

by the present writer. The detailed mapping of the Brock’s Creek District

carried aut by the N_A-S. during 1939 and preceded during 1935-38 by

detailed surveys of many smaller areas in North Australia, indicates that

all the mineral-bearing rocks of the Darwin-Katherine region and beyond

(which includes the Brock’s Creek District), belong tao one confarmalile

Series and represent continuous deposition to a thickness of at least 17,000

to 18,000 feet. These sediments exhibit marked variations in intensity wf

metamorphism in different Jocalities but cannot be separated into age-groups

on that score. The views expressed by some observers, and hased apparently

on the variable degrees of metamorphism exhibited by the sediments, that

unconformable age-groups exist in the mineral-bearing sediments of the

Darwin-Katherine region, have not been confirmed.

Further to the south-west, south and sotith-east, however, there is

evidence of the existence of at Jeast two unconformable divisions af miner-

alized sediments of Precambrian but Post-Archaeozoic age (Fig. 1).

LOWER PROTEROZOIC MIDDLE PROTEROZOIC

(ACICOND) SERIES) (BAVEN PORT SERIES)

Lx =e ~ . 2

RN (A

RP 1 QUARTZITES VDLCANICS AMPHIBOUITES ACID

TuTES © SUATES € SANDSTONES ESHWALES INTRUSIVES

Woe 2 %& ‘ the & WILE

H~2

Piz. 1

Sketch Section at Hatcbes Creek.

As far as is known, the only recorded straligraphical break in the con-

tinuity of these formations is that revealed by the detailed mapping during

the examination hy the N.A. Survey of the latches Creek area, in the

eastern portion of the Davenport Ranges of Central Australia. Near the

southern limits of the mapped area, schistose and sheared porphyries, tuffs,

and related rocks with some slates, are overlain unconformably by the

group of sediments of the Hatches Creek Wolfram Field, In the report,

(A.G.G.S.N.A., 1941), the lower group was referred to by the present writer

as the “Bottom Series.” It is not proposed here to give these rocks a formal

name, as they are being correlated tentatively with similar rocks at Tennant

Creek, The Granites, Tanami, ete., which are being correlated with the meta-

forphosed sediments of the Darwin-Katherine Region. As the survey which

112

located these rocks in the Davenport Ratiges was primarily an economic one

it was impossible tu carry the stratigraphical investigations further at that

lime.

The group which lies unconformahly alve the "Bottom Series” was

Wamed the “Llatehes Creek Series.” Together with the former “Top

Series” it will be referred to as the Hatches Creek Group which is being

included in a division being named the Davenport Series.

Still higher in the sequence, lying unconfarmably an ali of the Pre-

cambrian formations so far discussed, there occurs at intervals oyer a large

part of North Australia a formation of massive arenaceous sediments pre-

dominantly quartzites, but including sandstones, grits and couglumerates.

The age of this formation, which was named the Buldiva Quartzite, has

heen given variously as Upper or Late Proterozoic or Lower Cambrian. Most

observers, including the present writer, correlated it with similar furmations

of the Nullagine of Western Australia. However, the writer cansidered it

to he the basal formation of the Buldiva(n) Series (Hossleld 1937 ¢ et al),

a series which it was stated continues without interruption into the Cambrian

Period and includes the Cambrian sediments of the Daly River area, Barkly

Tableland, etc, To this opinion the present writer adheres, but now regards

the Buldiva Quartzite as considerably younger than the Nullagifie Series

with which it was correlated previously (Fig. 3)-

While it is possible that deposition of the basal members of the Buldiva

Quartzite tay have begun at the close of the Proterozvic Era, the whole

ef the remainder of the Buldivya(n) Series is of Cambrian age. That Series

will be discussed therefore, in the section dealing with the Cambrian Period.

In the Atnadeus Geosyncline, situated between the Arunta and Mus-

grave Blocks, deposition appears to have begun in the Upper Proterozoic

and to have continued throughout the Cambrian and Ordavician Periods

and probably inte the Silurian, These divisions will be referred la in the

sections dealing with the respective Periods.

The area between Borroloola and Wollogorang af which little ts known,

appears to be covered largely by quartzite outcrops which in the western

sector exhibit enormous, long sub-parallel gashes resulting possibly from

the erosion of dyke formations. On the evidence of limrted investigations

along the margins and apparent relationships ta the Cambrian formations

above, and to the Carpentaria Group of adjacent areas, these rocks are being

regarded provisionally as of Upper I’roterozoic age.

Lower Proterozoic

The formations assigned to this age division were correlated with the

Mos¢jtiita Creek Series of Western Australia (David, 1932), (TLossfeld,

1936h), (Voisey, 19392), (Noakes, 1949). As will be shawn later, it is

suggested herein that the formations which have been mapped as Mosquito

Creek Series in Western Australia, may belong to twe uncantormable Fre-

cambrian divisions. It is probable that those formations of North Australia

previously correlated with the Mosquito Creek Series, will be found to be

the equivalent of the older formations of that Series in Western Australia.

A definite correlation is impossible at present. They will be referred to here-

under as the Agiconili Series, after the native tribal name of the district

(Cummanwealth of Australia Bulletin No. 191, in which the Pine Creek and

Union Groups outerop (Hossfeld. 1936 and c),

The Agicondi Series outernjis over a large part af North Australia. It

includes the greater partion uf the rocks outcropping in the triangle formed

bby Darwin, Oenpelli and Maranbuy, and extends southwards to Callia (Wty,

143

3), In this region the sediments have been given the formal name Brack’s

Creck Group (Noakes, 1949), Members of the Series outcrop at intervals

in the valleys and along the dissected edges of the western part of the

Arnhem Jand Plateau.

Same at least of the formations traced into the western part of North

Australia [ram the Ord River in Western Australia (Mattheson and Teichert

1945), appear to belong to the Agicondi Series.

In Central Austrahia similar formations have been recorded at widely

separated Iwealities and are being correlated with it. These include the head-

wuters area of the Winnecke Creek, Tanami and adjacent area, The Granites

Goldfield and vicinity, the Tennant Creek Goldfield and surrounding areas.

the “Boltom Series” of the Hatches Creek Woliram Field and a number of

other areas indicated on the General Map. All of these are regarded as

members of the one series and because of the above correlation, will be

referred to herein as the Agicondi Series.

aRTG

aes

BYAREL SAVEN POAT

PEESPNEL EL No

; Sas +5

SS S

CROOVICLAN TEATIARY

am G te MESOZOIC e

[a]

a * 45 Se MILES

@ACHAEDZOIC PROTEROZOIC

tae Uppar lower’ Midulte

Fig. 2

Siretch Section across the Hart’s and Davenpart Ranges,

As stilted aliaye, outerops correlated with this Series are well distribwied

in the Territory. Many are relatively small inliers and do not provide good

outcrops. The lirgest and most ¢emtinuons area and exhibiting the best

outcrops as well as being exposed in many mine workings, is that occurring

within the Darwin-Oenpelli-Maranboy triangle. In the Rrock’s Creeley Dis-

trict, and supplemented by detailed mapping of numerous additional areas,

the N.A. Survey was able to determine the existence of a thickness of 17,000

to 18,000 feet of sediments. This figure is a minimum as neither the top nor

hase af the Series was determined. The present writer believes, however,

thal the Galden Dyke Group as described in the official report (Hossfeld,

19364) contains the oldest known sediments of the Agicondi Series (Voigey,

1939a, per contra vide). The shallow water facies af some of the lower mem-

liers of the Golden Dyke Group, chiefly conglomerates and sandstones,

suggests that the hase of the Series may be at a shallow depth in this area.

As a result of surveys during 1935, the present writer divided the sedi-

ments In the vicmity of Pine Creek, into the Pine Creek and Union Groups

with somewhat ill-defined transition beds. (Hossfeld, 1936b and c)}. The

former consists predominantly of greywackes and other sandstones with

some grit and slates. Many of the beds are tufts or partly tuffaceous.

The Union Group consists chiefly of slates with subordinate sreywackes

and grits. The slates weather to a distinctive red colour, which has Leen

used in 4 tentative correlation of slates of other areas as for example those

north of the Daly River (Ilossfeld, 1937c¢),

Voisey (1939a) divided the Mosquita Creek sediments of that region

inta three series, tle Golden Dyke, Pine Creck and Muldiva Series, While

there was some justification for the initial division of the sediments by the

present writer in 14933 and 1936 into the Pine Creel, Union, Golden Dyke

Groups and the Daly River and Muldiva stages, at a time when little was

known vf the suceessign, their division at a later date by Voisey inte three

series appedirs to have been quite Uinevessary.

114

The original field terms Pine Creek, Union and Golden Dyke Groups

ete,, have last their importance and are being retained here merely for

convenience of reference and description.

The Agicondi Series of the Northern Territory consisted originally of

arcnaceous and argillaceous sediments with a considerable amount of tufface-

ous mitterial and very few calcareous deposits, Subsequent metamorphism

has transformed the shales to slates, phyllites and schists. the greywackes aril

other sandstones to schists and quartzites, and the few limestones to marbles.

Tatts and prophyriecs have become schistose, grits and conglomerates have

heen sheared and their components fattened in some localities, and a

auceole of hornfels surrounds wholly or in purt many of the granite intri-

sions. The degree of metamurphism varies in ditferemt localities and this

induced some of the earlier observers to suggest the existence of different

age-groups, and the possible occurrence of rocks of Archaeozuic age in North

Australia.

No break in cantinuity has been diseevered there, and the metamorphisin

dues not approach in severity in any of the «reas examined, that which 1s

sa vhuracteristic of the Archaeozoic formations of the Arunta Complex.

The writer regards his “Bottom Series” of the Hatches Creek Wolfram

Field as belonging te the Agicondi Series (Fig. 1). Tt 1s possible, of course,

that these rocks which exhibit marked metamorphism, and consist as fur

us examined of sheared amphibolites, porphyries and tufts, chloritic and quartz

mic sthists, slates and amygdaloidal rocks, probably tufts, represent a group

intermediate in age between the Archaeozoic rocks of the Arunta Complex

and the Agicondi Series. However, similar formations outerop at intervals

to the north-west in the cores of eroded anticlines until the Tennant Creek

Goldheld is reached, Here they outcrop over a large area, forming the country

rock of that poldfiell, and have been correlated by other workers with the

Mosquite Creek Series. There is a close resemblance between the rock types

of the scattered Central Australian areas such as Tennant Creek, The Gran-

ites, Tanami and adjacent areas, Winnecke Creek and many other smaller

outcrops, and those occurring in the Darwin-OQenpelli-Maranboy triangle of

North Australia. This resemblance includes not only their dominant

arenaccous-argillaceous character, but also the large proportion of tuffaceous

materials, the paucity of limestones and the degree of metamurphism. The

predominantly shallow-water facies sugyests that they were laid dewn in

slowly subsiding basins, These appew ta have formed in a large mobile

region extending aver most of, and beyond the Territory, Offshore and

marginal volcanocs appear to have been numeruus, The composition of those

tuffs in the Pine Creek District whith were examined microscopically stg-

gests original lavas of intermediate composition, dacites or andesites, but

probably the latter,

Subsequently to the deposition of the sediments, a period of igneous

activity resulted in the introduction wf basic material. This appears to have

been chiefly doleritic or gabbroie and was introduced largely in the form of

sill. Dykes and bosses have been mapped but are rare. In some areas such

as the Golden Dyke, some thermal metamorphism resulted, particularly

where relatively thin sediments were lacated hetween two sills.

Asa result of subsequent uralitization and similar processes, these racks

have been altered to amphibolites, The occurrence of similar amphibolites

is not confined to rucks assigned to the Agicondé Series. Phey uccur im racks

of Archaeozoie age in many parts cf the Arunta Block but are of DPost-

Archaegavic age, They occur also in the Hatches Creek Group in the Daven-

port Ranges, and are reported from similar formations in the adjacent Mar

115

chison Ranges. These amphibolites therefore, aceur at intervals throughout

the Northern Territory, intruding formations considered as ranging from

Archaeozoic to Middle Proterozoic (Figs. 1, 2 and 3), and prabably helong

la two distinct periods.

Subsequently to the basic intrusions but possibly contemporaneous in

part, the regian experienced severe deformation. Folding af the sediments

ant basic sills, resulted eventually in the development of structures of great

variety. In many areas as, for example, in the Brock’s Creek District, but

by no means confined to that area, dome and basin folds were developed.

Tightly folded and overfolded structures occur in many localities and shear-

ing, some of it of severe character. is recorded from numerous areas,

Dynamic metamorphism of the sediments resulted in the formation af

schists, cherts, quartzites and sheared rock types and the development of

metamorphic minerals.

This was followed by the introduction on a grand scale of acid igneaus

racks chiefly granitic in composition but including some more calcic types

The writer considers that the available evidence indieates that this 1tneous

activity took place during the closing stages of orogeny of a later, anil

uncunlormable series, the Davenport Series, and chranologically therefure

helongs to a later section of this paper.

Mippie Prorerozuic

All formations believed to be of this age are being included in a division

which is being named the Davenport Series. The name is derived from the

Davenport Ranges which consist predominantly of these formations. Further,

they were studied in detail in this area at Hatches and Wauchope Creek,

and in the former locality were shown to lie unconformably on rocks

correlated with the Agicondi Series which is regarded as of Lower Protero-

zole age.

The formations included in the Davenport Series are referred to two

groups:

(a) The Hatches Creck Group,

(b) The Carpentaria Group.

(a) Tue Tlarcues CREEK Grover

Representatives of this group were mapped and examined in detail in

the Hatches Creek Wolfram Field near the eastern extremity of the Daven-

port Ranges of Central Australia. As a result the writer divided the forma-

tions Into two and possibly three proups which were named the ‘“Rottom,"

“Watches Creek" and “Top Series,” with some doubts of the validity of

separation of the last two. The “Bottom Series'’ has been correlated with

the Agicondi Series, The “Tlatches Creek’’ and "Top Series” are now con-

sidered to belong to one conformable sequence and are now named the

Hatches Creek Group. In the area where they were first examined, these

two divisions are lithologically dissimilar and separated by a major fauli.

Extension of the examination to other areas of the Davenport Ranyes has

shawn that they belong to one conmformalile sequence. The decision that the

beds previously designated the “Hatches Creek Series” and the “Top Series”

farm a small part only of the total conformable succession, as well as the

occurrence of other groups regarded as of similar age, necessitates the

restriction of “Hatches Creck’’ to a group, and the use of the wider geographi-

cal term “Dayenport Series” for the whole successiuti.

The basal members of the Hatches Creek Group consist of massive

qtiartzites with some coarser beds, lying unconformably on the schistase

formations. of the “Bottom Series.” At and near the unconfermable junction

116

they are sub-horizontal, but dips steepen markedly within a short distance

to the northward and exhibit steep felding and overfolding to the north

(Fig. 1). The repetitian by folding of the lowest formation, the quartzites,

unt their resistance to eresion, have produced the characteristic landscape

of the area which is dominated by sub-parallel ridges of quurtzites with less

resistant! rocks outcropping tn the valleys. As a result access parallel to

the strike ig easy, but difficult across tt. As one proceeds northwards across

the strike, the repetition of hard and soft formations continues until an

outerop of armphibolite 1s reached, This term ts used in a general sense to

include tacks originally of various basic types bul predominantly doleritic,

which have been altered to amphibolites. Once the amphibolites are reached

the aspect of the country changes suddenly and becomes one of “islands"

of sediments, sandstones and seméquartzites, outcropping as inliers in a

“sea"’ of arnphibolite. The seilimenis ate folded, but do not exhibit the same

intensity mor the same degree of metamorphism as do the arenacceus rocks

to the south which have been transformed to dense quartzites, many of them

glassy in appearance.

The sequence appears te consist of a thick arenaccous formation af

the base. originally mainly sandstones with some grits and conglomerate,

succeeded by shales, tuffs and lava flaws, some of which may be sills, and

containing thin beds of sandstone in their upper portions. The explanation

submitted is that, since both are folded, the inlers of the north portion

must have undergone this deformation befare the amphibolite bathohth was

inuiwiled, The partial conformity of the margins of the amphibolite, and

the somewhat less severe folding of the sediments now embedded in it,

suggests that the intrusion occurred during the folding and probably during

the later stages. The existence of this mass of basic material protected the

inliers of sediments from further diastrophic effects and fram the dynamic

metamarphism the results of which are evident in the southern half of the

field and elsewhere in the region,

(ligher mernbers of the Watches Creele Growp are exposed in a synclinal

structure separated from the formations just described, by a major fault,

The ares is in the north-western part of the Hateles Creel Wolfram Viele

and the formations were previously referred to as the “Top Series.” The

rocks <onsist of conglomerates, grits, sanilstanes, quartzite and shales, inter-

calated with quarlz-felspar porphyries, which may have been intrusive or

extrusive but probably the latter. The small outcrop of microsyenite mapped,

appears ta be intrusive into the sandstones.

The mineral deposits of Hatches Creel include walfram, the chici

mineral, some scheelilte, copper-wolfram ore, some bisrauth. a lille molybden

ite and gold. Probably due to stractural control the known deposits are

confitied to the Hatches Creek Group.

The wolfram deposits of the Wauchope Creel Field at the western end of

the Davenport Ranges are contained likewise in sediments of the Hatches

Creeic Group. This group torms the main outerops of the Davenpurt Ranges

as it does of the adjacent Murchison Ranges.

The granite mass known as the “Devils Marbles” near the Wauchope

Creek Wield 1s intrusive inta the Matches Creel Group and believed to have

been responsible for the introduction of the wolfram deposits, No granitic

intrusions were discovered in the vicinity of the IJlutches Creek Field, the

otly acid tocks observed being quartz-porphyries and microsyenite. (Quartz-

porpheries and amphibolite were observed in the vicinity of the Wauchope

Field, and granite outcrops, some of them extensive, oceyr in several localities

band adjacent to the Murchison Raves.

The extension of the Hatches Creek Group from the type area and

through the Davenport and Murchison Ranges raises the question of 3s

exisience elsewhere in the Northern Territory. In the absence of fossils and

definite geological horizons, the general lithology, low degree of meta-

merphism and relations to the rocks uf other periods, must be the chief

means of correlation. There are many isolated outcrops in Central Austraha

of predominantly arenaceous formations, quarlzites, sandstones, grits and

canglomeraies with some slaty members, which in the writer’s tpitiean,

occupy a stratigraphical position intermediate between the Lower Protero-

zoic, Agicendi Series and sediments of Jate Proterozoic-Cambrian age. Thev

have been correlated variously in the past by diferent obseryers, Included

are the rocks of the White Range, Winnecke Range, Jervois Ranges, Giles-

Reynoids Ranges. St. Johns Range, Osborne Range and others. It is

proposed to correlate some of these with the Hatches Creek Group of the

Davenport Series, others must remain indeterminate at present. An aren

of gently folded, lightly metamorphosed sediments along the Lower Victoria

and Fitzmaurice Rivers of North Australia will be referred tentatively to

the Hatches Creek Group.

The White Kuxge. The low elevation bearing this name is siliated

about sixty miles in an easterly direction from Alice Springs. Tt contains

a qumber of small gold deposits in the dense, hard, light-coloured quartzite

which forms the low range (Hossfeld, 1937j), Published opinions of the

age of the quartzite differ widely. Madigan (1932b, 1933) definitely correlated

the White Range and similar quactzites of the district with his Pertaknurra

Series, the age of which he considered to be Lower Hraterozaic.

The present writer was in charge of the party which surveyed in detail

net only the White Range bul much of the surrounding areas and carried

out personally aerial and ground reconnaissince aver a large part of the

Eastern Macdonnell Ranges. In the repert on the White Range Goldfield

(Ttossfeld, 19377), the opinion was expressed and reasons were given that

Madigan's correlation should be rejected. Voisey (t939b) agrees with this,

but appears to accept its inclusion in the Ambalindum Series (llodge-Smith.

1932) which, however, by inference he regards as of Archaeozoic age.

The only obvious reason for correlating the White Range Quartzite with

the quartzite of the Pertaknurra Series, is that both are quartzites, Litho-

fogically atl Structurally they are completely different. The former is

mineralized, whereas the latter, which outereps in the vicimty, ig nut. The

former, tow, is silicified to an extent not even approached by the latter,

Outerops of the former can be seen tv strike at sharp angles to ihe direction

maintained by the latter where the two formations meet, south-east of the

White Range. The mistaken correlation of the White Range Quartzite with

the Pertaknurra Quartzite has led ty serious misconceptions not only ain

the identification of other euartzites such as, for example, the Bald J1ill-

Winnecke Quartzites which ure regarded generally as the equivalents uf

the White Range Quartzite, but also with regard to the age of mineralization

of the region, and its stratigraphy and tectonic history. Jensen (1944), in

particular draws far reaching but unfortunately erroneous conclusions fram

this mistaken correlation. It is possible that the White Range Quartzite

can be correlated with the Agicondi Series, The present writer, however,

is of the opinion that its correlation with the Hatehes Creek Group (Daven-

port Series) is more reasanable. The known formations of the Agicondi

Series maintain their chracteristics over such a wide region from the Darwin

area to Central Australia, that it is logical to expect similar characteristics

from beds of that age, if they oceur, on the Arunta Block, No sediments

118

of which this can be said have been recognized on that block as yet, The

maliy similar features, however, of the White Range, Bald Hill-Winnecke

Quartzites ta the rocks of the Davenport and Murchison Ranges and of

seattered outcrops elsewhere, makes (heir correlation, even though it be

tentative at present, a reasonable deduction.

The previous references of the writer (Hossfeld, 1937), and 1940b), of

the quartzites to the Arunta Complex, were made at 2 time when all those

formations of the Arunta Block, older than the Pertaknurra Series, were

referred to the Arunta Complex without age differentiation.

The Jervois Ranges which consist of quartzites, slates and sandstones, are

a synelinal outlier of moderately metamorphosed sediments, lie tncontorm-

ably om Archaeozoic rocks, and according to Madigan (1933) were invaded

by granite. The Jervois Range Mineral Field (Hossfeld, 1931), lies just te

the east of the Jervois Ranges, owing its exposure ta the removal of the

averlying, unconformable formations. The Jervois Ranges were regarded as

Pertaknurra by Madigan (1933), as was the Mopunja (Mopunga) Range

tlearby,

The Pertaknurra Quuartzite (Pl. 1, 1), wherever it has been identified

with certainty, either by following it along the strike or by the fussilifercus

beds above it, preserves its special characteristics with remarkable persist-

evice, Tt is only the isolated outcrops of arenaceous sediments and their

argillaceaus associates outcropping on various parts of the Arunta Block,

which differ so markedly both litholegically and stricturally from the typical

Pertalnurra beds. It is difficult ta understand why these remnants shyuld

ever have been correlated with the Pertaknurra. It ts true that they contain

predominantly arenaceous sediments and lie uncanformably on the Archaeo-

zoi¢ rocks, but there the resemblance ends. Some of them may be correlated

eventually with the Agieondi Series of Central and North Australia. One

such group is the “Amunurunga Series” of Tindale (1933), However, any

definite classtfication of the various outliers is impracticable at present. They

are wlilee than the Pertalenurra and younger than the Archaeozoic formations.

‘The present writer classifies them tentatively as equivalents of the Latches

Creek Group because of their similar lithology, slight mineralization absent

in tnany localities, small numbers of igneous intrusious, moderate diastra-

phism and relatively Jow degree of metamorphism.

In the extreme north-west of the Territory, in the coastal region of the

Victoria and Fitemaurice Rivers, a group of rocks outcrops which appears ta

le older than the Buldivan Series (Cambrian) and is, therefore, regarded

as of Precambrian age, Tt exhibits many similarities to the Hatches Creck

Grou), consisting predaminantly of quartzites and sandstones with inter-

hedded slates and shales. These exhibit litthe metamorphism, and although

cross folding is evident, their structures are predominantly gentle and low

dips are general, a5 compared with the highly folded and strangly meta-

murphosed sediments to the cast and north of Collia, Buldiva and beyond,

which are regarded as members of the Agicondi Series, These Victoria River-

Fitzmaurice beds strike south-westerly towards the Ord River area in which

Mattheson and Teichert (1945) mapped Precambnan formations of similar

types. It is suggested that these beds and a number of scattered inliers with

northsyesterly trends in the Victoria River Downs district, are members

of the Davenport Series atid probably of the Hatches Creek Group. and that

they are the equivalents, in part at least, of the Nullagine Series of Western

Australia. Further reference lo this suggested correlation will be made later,

(b) Tie Carrentasra Grove

Between the dissected margios of the Barkly Tableland {spelt Barkley

119

and Barclay by some authors) and the coast of the Gulf of Carpentaria, a

group of rocks outerops which has been regarded hitherto as probably of

Cambrian age. They were observed and reported by Brown (19082), who

regarded them tentatively as Cambrian. Woolnough (Cwlth. Aust. 1912c)

considered them to be Cambrian, Jensen (Cwlth. Aust. 1914a) regarded them

as Cambrian, but as the result of subsequent work as Senior Geologist of

the Queensland party of the N.A.S., appears to feel less certain of their age

and has referred them tentatively to the Cambrian Period (Jensen, 1940),

Practically all the observations made of this group have been due to and

in the vicinity of mineral deposits, and are therefore somewhat disconnected.

No attempt appears to have been made to carry out a systematic examination

of the group in order to determine its position in the gevlogical record, its

overall structures and constituent members. The work done by Jensen and

his assistant peologists in the N.A.5., supplies the most detailed knowledge

of the group, According to Jensen (1940, the topmost formation is a white

quartzite forming caps cf mesas and tablelands, This appears to be the domin-

ant outcrop in the area between Borrvloola and Wollogorang and is con-

sidered by the present wriler provisionally as Upper Proterozoic,

Below this quartzite there follows a succession consisting chiefly of

4juartzites and volcanics.

These are underlain to the south-east of Redbank by flagey quartzites

and tassive white quartzites,

In the Barney's Creek area, where Brown (1908a) first examined this

group, he found it to consist mainly of quartzite and quartzose sandstene

and a dense blue limestone. All these racks exhibit alteration by silicification,

and contain chert, finty and jasperoid masses. Only a small areca of the total

outcrops of the group has been examined,

Folding and faulting vary considerably, ranging from dips of 45°-65°

in the McArthur River area (Jensen in Cwlth. of Aust, 1912c) and severe

faulting in that sector, to areas where the beds are honzontal or dip at very

low angles and no faulting was observed. A considerable amount of cross-

folding is evident in the more disturbed areas, but directional trends are

very vanable, Ground and aerial reconnaissance as well as examination of

the resulting photographs by the present writer, show very clearly the severe

folding and faulting in the McArthur River area with a gradual decrease to

the Jess disturbed adjacent sectors.

As no formal name appears to have been applied to this sequerice, these

Pre-Buldivan rocks are being named the Carpentaria Group.

The Barkly Tableland formations, which as will be shown later, are

included by the writer in his Buldivan Series, are folded into minor undula-

tions only, As a result, one travels over a monotonous almost level landscape,

eastwards from the Overland Telegraph \.ine in Central Australia, until

one reaches the vicinity of Vop Spring, situated between Anthony's Lagoon

and McArthur River Station. Here a relatively sharp descent down the

dissected margin of the Barkly Tableland brings une below the basal beds

of the Buldivan Series. -

The rocks below that basal formation consist of a group of partly

silicified limestones, quartzites and sandstones referred to earlier, and include

also some argillaceous members. Here and elsewhere along the eastern

margins of the Barkly Tableland, the sudden transition from the gently

dipping Cambrian formations to highly folded and faulted formations is

very striking. Further, fram a region in which metalliferous deposits are

unknown, cne arrives in an area where deposits of copper and silyer-lead

have been mined, Even though must of the deposits were of little economic

120

importance their presence indicates the difference in the history of the Barkly

Yableland formations (The Buldivan Series) and Lhe Carpentaria Gravy ty

which the folded mineralized rocks belong,

It is quite clear that the Buldivam Series are the cover rocks upon the

removal of which the folded, metamorphosed, mineralized members of the

Carpentaria Group were exposed.

The writer considers, therefore, that the Carpentaria Group is of Pre-

cambrian age. It is being included in the Davenport Series, but regarded as

possibly higher in the sequence than the Hatches Creek Group. It is being

correlated with the Luwn Hill and Mt, Isa Series of North-Western Queens-

fand, and assigned to the Middle Proterozoic,

Tur Newer GRANITES AND METALLOGENESIS

The predominantly non-stressed acid igneous rocks which outcrop in

numerous localities in the Archaeozoic, Lower and Midule Proterozoic rocks,

have been growped as the Newer Granites. They consist chiefly of granilés

arul related types, but include also syenites, diorites, etc.. greisen, pegmatities,

aplites and porphyries, They have been recorded from many areas in the

Darwin-Oenpelli-Maranboy triangle, from the eastern and western borders

of Arnhem Land, from Tennant Creek, The Granites (Pl. IIIb), the Daven-

port and Murchison Ranges and from many areas on the Arunta and Mus-

grave Blocks. The “Newer Granites,” although exhibiting some evidence

of stress, possess oriented textures in certain localitics only, and in most

instances these are marginal or confined to restricted areas, All of them are

intrusive into the highly metamorphosed Aruntan and Riddock Series and

therefore by present definition, are Post-Archaeozaic. None have been proved

to invade sediments of undoubted Cambrian age (Madigan. 1933, per contra

vide). They are regarded therefore as of Proterozoic age. The two Protero-

zoic series invaded were the Agicondi and the Davenport Series. These

igneaus intrusions may belong to several epochs or may ‘be co-epochal or

nearly So. The latter view is being put forward by the writer,

Attempts have been made to divide the granitic outcrops of the Brock’s

Creek Disrict into synchronous and subsequent bathyliths (Sullivan, 1948)

and inte granitized and mobile material (Noakes, 1949). Too little detailed

nmuipping and petrological work has been done to establish such distinctions,

It was recognized by the present writer, as the publications of the

A.G.G.5.N.A. listed in the Bibliography show, that a number of granite

outcrops conform reasonably elosely, although never perfectly, to the strikes

of the invaded sediments. However, all stages can be observed in the region.

from the closely conformable outcrops of the Brock’s Creek intrusion, to

the transgressive margins of the adjacent Gulden Dyke outcrops. The writer

considers that too much importance has been assigned by some observers to

such differences in this. region, and the deductions made from the occurrence

of relatively concordant and of discordant granite outcrops, which as obser-

vations show, represent the extremes merely of the types of boundaries of

the intrusions. Similar comments apply to the question of the origin of. any

une of these granite masses by granitization or the invasion of a mobile

magma. It is possible that such will be determined by future investigations,

but the task will be difficult as all gradations appear to exist, and the features

supposedly characteristic of the two types are exhibited by adjacent granite

areas, and in some instances by the one mass.

The granite masses haye produced variable metamorphic effects in the

bnvaded rocks, As the writer has studied these effects in more detail in the

Darwin-Oenpelli-Maranboy triangle than elsewhere, the following observa-

121

tions on the metamorphism due to the granitic invasions will deal chiefly

with that region. .

Metamorphism resulting in the development of andalusite (chiastolite)

schists is a feature obseryed in numerous areas, The andalusite-graphite

schists of the Golden Dyke area (Hossleld, 1936a), are goad examples of

this type. Here as elsewhere 1t appears that certain beds or parts of beds

were more favourable to the development of andalusite and one finds the

crystals developed in larger or smaller numbers or even completely absent

from certain parts of the graphite schists, the boundaries between zones

of varying numbers being formed by the bedding planes. In the Golden

Dyke area and elsewhere in this region, this type of metamorphism does not

appear to have any relation to the visible and determinable vicinity of the

acid igneous rocks (chiefly the Pine Creek Granite) but to be controlled,

as stated above, by the nature of the sediments, and related directly 'to the

structtires, It is Suggested therefore that the dolerite sills (now altered to

amphibolites) which were folded with the sediments and are in close proxim-

ity above and below the andalusite schists, were responsible for the thermal]

metamorphism. In the areas examined by the writer, Lhe dominant metamor-

phic effect of the granitic intrusions has been the formation of aureales af

hornfels surrounding the igneous outcrops. The Pine Creek Granite (Hoss-

GRANITE AMPHIBOLITE

y CRETACEOUS

= SS — ++

AGICON DS SERIES SULDIVAN SERIES COLLIA SERIES AEGELAMAN GROYP SOLDIERS EREER

4-22 ° 4 6 s {0 MILES

LOWER CAMBAIAN DEVONIAN LOWE

PAGTEROZOIC

! es

Fig, 3 -

Section across the Buldiva Area (Adapted from A.G.G.S.N.A. Report N, Terr. No. 18)

feld, 1937 and A.G.G.S.N.A., 1936), (Cullen Granite of Noakes, 1949), which

includes practically all the granitic rocks of the Darwin-Oenpelli-Maranhboy

triangle, possesses partial or complete hornfels aureoles at many of tts aut-

crops. Such were observed also adjacent to the Mt, Litchfield Granite, the

Soldiers Creek Granite, near The Granites Goldfield in Central Australia,

and numerous other areas. The probable effect of the formation of hornfels

on the existence of, and extensions from, known mineral deposits made it

necessary to investigate the hornfcls aureole in detail in several localities.

(Ilossfeld, 1936b, ct. al.). [t was noted that even where the development of

hornfels was a characteristic of some granite mass, such development

depended to a Jarge extent on the type of sediment adjacent to the granite

and therefore, hornfels was not developed everywhere along the contact

zone, It may well be that the absence of bornfels from the margins of some

granite masses in North and Central Australia or even its rarity may be due

not so much to differences in composition, temperature. emplacement, or

genesis of the granite, as to differences in the invaded rocks, and hence the

far-reaching conclusions arrived at by some observers may be based on false

premises, (Sullivan, 1948).

At the Enterprise and associated mines near Pine Creek, (Hossfeld,

1936b) it was possible to study the occurrence of the hornfels and its relation

122

tu the granite, both by surface and sub-surface examination. The Pine Creek

Grauite outcrops near the line of mining leases which lie in the hornfels

zone, It was noted that the harnfels is continuous for some distance from

the granite margin, but as distances increase, a transition zone exists in

which belts of hornfels alternate with belts of rock which macroscopically

at least appear to be unaltered sediments. Both the width and number of

unaltered belts increase, though irregularly, as distance from the granite

contact increase. until the wholly unaltered sediments are reached. The

Enterprise and adjacent mines were situated favourably for a study of the

hornfels zone since the sediments which are almost all tuffaceous grits and

sandstones of the Pine Creek Group, are in this locality tightly folded and

faulted, with predominantly vertical or sub-vertical dips. It is obvious from

the foregoing that, as distance from the granite contact increases, only the

heds most favourable to the formation of harnfels were affected, and with

the increasing distance such effects became more and more difficult to pro-

duce until the limit of such granitic influence was reached (Hossfeld, 1936b}.

The chief controls probably were variations in composition and texture

of the rocks adjacent to the granite margins. The tuffaceous greywackes,

plentiful in some parts of the Agicondi sequence, appear to haye been

particularly favourable to such metamorphisnt. It is not surprising therefore

to find that both the Pine Creek and the Mt. Litchfield Granites and others

possess hornfels aureoles in some localities but lack this feature in others.

In every instance examined, the hornfels was formed alter the granite

emplacement and after the folding of the invaded sediments had heen com-

pleted. An examination of the geological map and a study of the literature

shows that bathyliths of granitic rocks are plentiful in the Agicondi Series

and scarce in the Davenport Series. Mineralization toa is much more

developed in the former. [t could be argued, therefore, that there were two

epochs of igneous activity, which introduced similar acid racks and the same

minerals, the Davenport igneous epoch being merely a minor and final phase

of the main igneous activity of the Agicondi Epoch.

The evidence supplied by many of the granitic outcrops in the Agicondi

Series suggests that the present surfaces are not far below their former crests

or summits. This would indicate that the majority of the cupolas were

emplaced at levels too low to reach the overlying Davenport Series if it ever

existed in those places. There is, however, no evidence available which would

decide whether the Davenport Series existed over a large part of the Arnhem

Block which contains the greater number and larger exposures of granitic

rocks. lt is true that the deposition of the Agicondi Scries was followed

by an orogenic epoch of great severity with penecontemporaneous basic sills

and dykes, and resulting metamorphism. That the granitic intrusions were

synchronous is not accepted, It is known that there are many approximate

concordances in the strikes of the sediments and the invaded granite, but

transverse contacts are plentiful. In a number of instances concordant and

transverse contacts occur im the same intrusion. The strongest evidence

against synchronous intrusions is to be found in a study of the hornfels

iureoles.

It was demonstrated in several areas where outcrops are adequate, that

the metamorphosed sediments can be traced inta the hornfels aureoles

adjacent to granite intrusions, and that the formation of the hornfels and

therefore the emplacement of the granite occurred after the orogeny and

dynamic metamorphism had ceased, For example, chiastolite slates and

achists were traced into the hernfels zone in several localities along the

stcikes of the beds. In the hornfels zone the beds were traced by the

123

recognition of chiastolite crystals delineated on weathered surfaces of the

hornfels, Evidence that mineralization was effected after folding and meta-

morphism had been completed, will be given below.

All of the above features suggest as a possibility that a long time inter-

val scparates the orogeny and regional metamorphism of the Agicondi

Series from the succeeding igneous epoch, The similarity of rock types and

minerals introduced suggests a common ofigin. There seems to be no valid

reason for suggesting the occutrence of a major igneous epoch during the

period of quiescence after the Agicondi orogeny. It is held, therefore, that

the succeeding diastrophic epoch, during which the Davenport Series was

folded, saw the commencement of this major igneous epoch, which was also

the principal metallogenetic epoch of the Northern Territory, Its age is

considered to be Post-Davenport and Late Middle Proterszoic. It is being

correlated with the Cloncurry Epoch (Jones, 1947) which has been referred

to a Late Precambrian age.

These “Middle Proterozoic” granitic intrusions were responsible for the

intraduction of almost all of the known metalliferous and other commercial

mineral deposits of the Northern Territory. The metals introduced include

gold, silver-lead, copper, tungsten, tin, tantalum, a little modybdenum and

bismuth, as well as arsenic, lithium, zirconium and the radio-active metals

thonum, uranium, etc, Muscovite, biotite, beryl and apatite occur in some

localities, introduced largely by the Oolgarna acid pegmatites which probably

were co-epochal with the “Newer Granites,” or nearly so. The tin-bearing

greisen dykes and greisenized pranites of North and Central Australia are

probably of the same age. Many of the above minerals occur within the

Arunta Block, but the great majority are of Post-Archacozoic age and are

correlated with similar deposits in the Proterozeic rocks of other parts of

the Territory.

Jasper-haematite reefs occur at two such widely separated localities as

Tanami near the Western Australian border and Yeuralba near the western

margin of the Arnhem Land Native Reserve. In both localities these reefs

appear to be connected with the mineralization of the locality, and probably

represent alteration products, aboye water level, of pyritic lodes.

Various statements have been made and conclusions drawn from the

proximity in the Brock’s Creek District of granite intrusions, graphite schists

and amphibolites to deposits of gold and copper. In discussing gold-

arsenopyrite-pyrite replacement deposits of that district, Sullivan (1948,

p. 491) writes: “The deposits, however, are associated with graphitic schists,

haematite-rich rocks and amphibolites, and it seems a valid inference that they

lie in the metasomatic aureole of granite cupolas occurring at depth.”

As the detailed examinations of the N.A. Survey demonstrated (Hoss-

feld, 1936a), and subsequent microscopic determinations confirmed, the

amphibolite sills of the district are altered dolerite sills which were intruded

before or at an early stage of the folding of the sediments. These amphibolites

are similar io and apparently contemporaneous with the dykes and bosses,

a few of which have been mapped. The Golden Dyke Area was studied in

detail, and as it is regarded as a type area, the following remarks will be

concerned chiefly with that locality. Metamorphism which produced the

andalusite (chiastolite)-graphite schists preceded the emplacemeiit of the

granite and may owe its formation to the intrusions of basic sills. The grantte

cut across the folded sediments and truncated alike the sediments and am-

phibolite sills, and the hornfels aureole obviously is transgressive also, The

variously metamorphosed sediments and basic rocks can be traced into the

harnfels zone and specimens were collected which show the outlines of formee

124

andalnsite crystals on weathered surfaces of the hornfels. Further, the

mineralization produced by the granite at the Golden Dyke was in the form

af auriferots pyrite. Microscopic examination of the andalusite schist near

the mineral lodes, but beyond the horntcis aurcole shows that pyrite was

deposited in cracks in shattered andalusite crystals, Pyrite was observed alse

in minute quartz veins in the amphibolite, lt is obvious therefore, that neither

the graphite schists nor the amphibolites can have had any genetic connection

with the formation of the gold deposils, nor belong to the metasomattc

aureole of the cranite, It is not surprising, however, to find that positive tests

for gold have been recorded from an amphibolite in the vicinity.

Tn this area, ore depositions due to the granite intrusions affected favour-

able sediments latgely by replacement. The porous sediments affected,

consisted of grits and similar types. The known lenticularity of some of these

beds, a not unusual feature in beds of shallow water facies, accounts for the

Jenticularly of many of the “lodes” and their occurrence in recognizable zanes.

It is not surprising ta find such mineralized zones continuing along the flanks

of an anticline or around a dome shaped fold. because of the continuation

of the Favourable horizons. To postulate on that evidence the existence below,

of a conformable granite cupola, appears to the present writer, unwartranteil

The statement that copper is associated with the occurrence of amphibo-

lite, appears to be just as questionable but as the present writer has hot

investigated the matter adequately, it is sufficicnt here to register a doubl

of the validity of Sullivan’s conclusions.

Upper PRorerozoic

The Amadeus Geosyncline contains an apparently unbroken succession

which includes fossiliferous beds of Cambrian and of Ordovician ages. On

the evidence available (Mawson and Madigan, 1930; Madigan, 1932a) it

appears reasonable to assign the oldest series, the Pertaknurra, and the

succeeding series, the Pertatataka, to the Upper Proterozoic. Aggregates of

oxidized copper minerals oceur in the vicinity of some major faults in the

western part of the area. These are regarded as probably due to direct or

indirect accummulalion of copper from the sediments af the geosycline, and

not as an epoch of mineralization, Nowhere in this region have igneous

activity or metallogenesis been recorded in these beds. Such activity was

postulated (Madigan, 1933, 1937) for outliers on the Arunta Block, and on

the Musgrave Block (Ellis, 1936). Except for the debatable copper minerals

referred to above no such activity has been recognized in any strata which

have been proved definitely to be of Pertaknurra or later age. Tt is only in the

outliers, the ages of which cannot be determined stratigraphically but which

were correlated by various observers with the Pertalknurra Series, that igneous

activity and resulting mineralization have occurred, As stated earlier, the

present writer considers that unless or until it is demonstrated that such

activities did affect the Amadeus Geosyncline deposits, all rocks showing

definite igneous activity or metallogenesis in that region, mist be regarded

as older and therefore, Middle Proterozoic or earlier.

The localities in which quartzites outcrop in the Northern Territory are

large and numerous. In the past, too little account has been taken of the

possibility of quartzites occurring in several unconformable series. The

labelling of quartzites of various ages as equivalents in time, and also the

separation of contemporaneous beds, have resulted in erroneous conceptions

of the stratigraphy, In many areas it has been possible by examination of

lithology and structure of the quartzites and associated beds to arrive at

definite conclusions. In some areas tentative conclusions only could be

reached,

125

Saag uBjuniy

“‘xaldwo-’) eluniy

go suoQeWwioy JaMoT

S913¢

eyAasy (2)

$9109g

Loopryseyy

53}4aS

4ypoppry ‘x9

“wo EJunIY jo

Buoneuoy Jadd¢ (2)

(332 ‘nuEUE

‘SUITeID ayy,

*y2915 JUeUUD.L)

Saag pu y

Salas dey

S42IP[OS (2)

SYIO[ sAvsssnyy

pus euniy 343 uO

s1a]aina snosatunyy ()

(dnoay

4yoaa79 Sayoje pH)

Sailag jloduaceg

S3129¢ BST

yunoyy, pure

SdL19S

TWH UAeTy

ysodq

Aainauoy)

auypudsoary

snapewy jo

Saliag eyeyeqeylag

pus elnuyeyzag

uolgdy

359M-YVION

RYeYSNY [es}UID,

(pury

UWlayusy JO 30}9a5

yso.aa DANY ATE

JAaMo'T ‘Aoquese yy

~Jaduag-uiMeg )

Saag ipuoay

pury wayquy

JO J0D3S seq (7)

FaArY BHOWTA (i)

(dnoss tuequadaey

(2) (sassraug——————_aqiviy)

sasury

uosupmey (2)] 42949 OMmbsoyy

So1295

asuey

Sais Jaoduaaeg| puasumoy (2)

sa119g

EUCOMEIIE A,

«SAMURIE) JEPlO,,

(qaed ur) saniag

‘YyIWwID oynhsoyy | ombsoyy

(jaed ur) sapag (jaed

ur to

(wed urszo | AyouM)

Aypoya) sauag Saag

aude | aurserpayy

ysody saysuesoyeyW yay ,‘seyuersy JaMaN,,

BIEIISNY YON

OJ Fa T -UsJeyII0 N

. eieq

Byessny W19}sa

D102 SmOy BAR, puke syny

soanyssy | Agaiyo yoy ‘AyaeA

Jead 11 S}WaUIIpastye jy

1aMoT

yoody j1uas01g

ceemnaeeen,

a10z Ajawea yeaa

-OaRyDIy] ul SIs pue smog

'syny « 'SJUDTAIpasedjy

addy

ody awoFo1D

DIQEIEA A194

mos | wsiydsowejaur i 5[[15

-O19101g | d1seq 'soNsepoitd H

SMO BAR] ‘syuatuIpag

JMO}

yoody s1usde1g

ay0z

~0I3}03F SMOY BAT,

pue syn} ‘siuounpos

pasoydiowejau sy sry

FIPPHAL

ysody samadaig

owe

SUOBTIUL

dyuels = =uMOUy ON

3192013} = | sipezods uonezyesaurpy

~01g S}UsuIpas

DIET | pasoydsowejau - uoN

su0}2eT, Y ASopoynwy]

_purjsusanG) pur Asoyssay, vrayyON ayy ‘wyEssMy Wza3saqq JO SYDOY wersquiedsaig ayy JO UOIT[aIIO} sanEWaL

I xiv

126

Acts AND CORRELATION oF THE Lower To Mippce PRECAMBRIAN Rocks

In the absence of fossil evidence, the division of these rocks is based

pn Jithology, structures, types and intensity mf metamorphism, relaliuns to

later fossiliferous formations, to igneous activity and mineralization,

The formations of the Arunta Complex, with their intense and varied

metamorphism, wide-spread and repeated igneous and diastrophic epochs,

differ so markedly from other Precambrian formations of the Northern

Territory, that they must be separated from them by a very long time

interval. The differences between subsequent formations, while considered

sufficient for their separation from each other in most instances, are pro-

gressive and do not present the sharp and sudden contrasts that exist between

the Arunta Complex and oldest known subsequent formations.

Published opinions in Australia have referred the oldest Post-Arunta Complex

formations variously to the Upper Archaeozoic and Lower Proterozoic. For

the reasons given above, the Arunta Complex (the Aruntan and Riddovck

Series) ‘are being referred herein to the Archaeuzoic, and all recorded sub-

sequent Precambrian formations to the Proterozoic Era, In North and Cen-

tral Australia the existence of predominantly concordant granite gneisses

on a regional scale, is considered as evidence of Archaeozoic age. Whether

the Riddock Series which is being referred tentatively to the Upper Archaeo-

zoic, contains such concordant granite gneisses is not certain. It 1s maintained

however, that although absence of such granitic gneisses does mot imply

necessarily that the rocks are of Post-Archaeozoic age, their presence on a

tegional scale does imply that the containing rocks belong to the Archaeozoic

Fra, Correlation with the adjacent States of Western Australia and Queens-

land is based on the metamorphism, the presence of the ahave concordant

granite gneisses, and on the recorded existence higher in the sequence, af

other, uncomformable Precambrian formations,

The Lower Archaeozoic of Central Australia ts being correlated there-

fore, with the Warrawoona Series of Western Australia and the Kalkadoon-

Argylla Series of North-Western Queensland.

The oldest Past-Ariinta Complex formations recorded in the Northern

Territory are those which have been grouped in this paper as the Agicondi

Series. Tt will be difficult ta identify any formations intermediate in age

hetween the Arunta Complex and the Agicondi Series, Further, if such

existed, they may have been removed completely during the enormous time

interval, or their remnants covered by more recent deposits. For reasons

stated earlier, the Agicondi Series is regarded as Proterozoic rather than

Archaeozoic age, It is characterized’ hy a large proportion of sediments of

volcanic urigin and in parts of the sequence by a marked greywacke facies,

Its metamorphism varies considerably but is severe in restricted areas only.

Regionally considered, however, this metamorphism is much more developed

than that of the inconformable Precambrian deposits which overlie it. The

latter exhibit little metamorphism in most instances. Similarly, deformation

of the Agicondi Series was generally of a severe character, whereas the

succeeding deposits exhibit on the whole, gentler structures,

The occurrence, untunformably above the Agicondi Series, of other

Precambrian deposics, indicate that the series should be referred to the

Lower Proterozoic. Mattheson and Teichert (1945) and Noakes (1949)

appear to share this view, The succession in North Australia, now named

the Agicondi Series, was correlated with the Mosquita Creek Series uf

Western Australia (David, 1932, Hossfeld, 1935, etc,), and thiy appears to

be the opinion of tore recent authors. However, in view of the uncertainty

expressed by Matthesom and Teichert (1945) of the possible divisian of

127

rocks mapped as Mosquito Creek Series in the East Kimberley Region of

Western Australia and on the border of North Australia, and in view alsa,

of the doubts of the present author of the correctness of determination of

some of the formations in that region, it is proposed to correlate the Agicondi

Series in part unly with the Mosquito Creek Series as mapped in the East

Kimberley Region.

Lying unconformably on the Agicondi Series, a sequence of sedimentary

rocks of Precambrian age, which have been natned the Davenport Series,

outcrop over large areas of Central and North Australia, The lawer members

have been described as the Hatches Creek Group with which the Victoria

River quartzites and associated beds are included tentatively, The Carpen-

taria Group may be equivalent in time, bul is being regarded as possibly

higher in the sequence.

Both the Agicondi and Davenport Series contain large proportions of

sediments of tuffaceous origin, both have been intruded by basic and acid

igneous rocks, both series have been folded and metamorphosed and contain

economic mineral deposits. A general review. however, shows that all of

these activities, and apparently also the contemporaneous volcanism, were

very much less severe in the Davenport Series. In the latter, greywackes are

notably scarce, metamorphism slight in most areas, and practically non-

existent in others. Folding was severe in some Incalities, but has not affected

large areas in which the sediments are horizontal or inclined at low angles.

Known igneous intrusions are relatively few in number, but this may have

been more apparent than real. Mineralization is well developed in a few

areas only. In many localities it is restricted to guartz veins and even these

are absent from many areas. The inference is reasonable that the Davenport

Series was deposited on the folded, metamorphosed, and eroded Agicondi

Series during the succeeding period of sedimentation, It is placed therefore,

tn the Middle Proterozoic.

As stated earlier, in the Eastern MacDonnell! Ranges, quartzites anu

associated beds correlated with the Davenport Series outcrop adjacent to

the lowest sediments of the Amadeus Geosyncline. The latter are regarded

as of Upper Proterozoic age and thus strengthen the reference to the Middle

Proterozoic of the older sediments.

CORRELATION WITH QUEENSLAND AND WESTERN AUSTRALIA

The continuation of the Carpentaria Group into Queensland, and the

similarity both lithologically and structurally of this group to the Lawn

Hill Series indicate their correlation. Both are Precambrian in age. A further

correlation, suggested by several authors, of the Lawn Hill and the Mount

Isa Series is accepted by the present writer. Both of these are placed tenta-

tively, therefore, in the Middle Proterozoic.

In Western Australia the Nullagine Series which, in the type area, lies

uncomformably on the Mosquito Creek Series, has been regarded generally

as of Upper Proterozoic age. In its lithology, structure, slight degree or

absence of metamorphism, scarcity or absence of acid igneous intrusions or

mineralization, it bears a strong resemblance to the Davenport Series and

its correlation is suggested here. Absence of folding, metamorphism and

mineralization over large areas is characteristic. but this applies also to some

areas of the Northern Territory.

It is interesting to note the existence at Braeside in the Pilbara District

of silver-lead deposits in rocks which are regarded as members of the Nulla-

gine Series (Finucane, 1938a), and considered to be of Upper Proterozoic

age, The rocks of that area consist of basic lava flows “overlain conformably

128

by a considerable thickness of sedimentary rocks comprising shales, sand-

stones, grits and fine conglomerates,”

It is considered probable that in some areas such as East Kimberley

remote from the type area, the distinctions between the Mosquito Creek

and Nullagine Series have not always been recognized and some areas which

have been mapped as the former, may prove to belong to the Nullagine

Series. Such a possbiility appears to be considered by Mattheson and Teich-

ert (1945, pp. 31 and 32). The present writer believes that much, if not all.

wf the Nullagine Series of Western Australia may be equivalent tm the

Davenport Series, and that some of the areas mapped as_ Mosquito Creek

Series in East Kimberley, may be of the above later age. Should the above

correlation be confirmed, the Nullagine Series would be of Middle Protero-

zoe Age,

STRUCTURES AND TREND Lines or tire LowEr To MIDDLE PRECAMBRIAN Rocks

Tue ARUNTA COMPLEX

Strikes of metasediments, foliation planes and gpneissic structures

exhibit extreme variations of direction even within short distances in many

localities. There is a general tendency, however, as noted by previous

workers, for a cecurrence of westerly strikes which include increasing

amounts of a northerly component as these rocks are traced westwards, The

marked change in strike from a westerly to a nearly meridional direction. in

the Jervois Range area (Hossfeld, 1931), may indicate as suggested by Hills

(1946), a permanent change to that direction which may continue tu the

Cloncurry region, On the other hand, the area examined is too small to

decide whether this is merely one of the numerous erratic changes of strike

recorded in so many parts of the Arunta Block. This block is separated from

other areas of Archaeozoic rocks by such wide expanses, that nothing can

be added to the picture drawn by Hills (op. cit.).

Tar Aciconpr SERIES

Tn the past all Precambrian trends of Post-Archaeozoic age, were com-

bined in attempts to reconstruct the trend lines of the Proterozoic rocles ai

the Territory. The evidence submitted herewith for the occurrence of at

least two orogenic epochs during that era, has resulted in markedly different

interpretation and reconstruction. The large amount of cross-folding in the

Agicondi and Davenport Series has made it necessary to reject the greate.

part of the recorded strikes, and only those which represent the average

trends of the folded structures have been used in such localities. There are

a few areas in which information is insufficient to decide whether the obser-

vations made represent the general direction.

Unfortunately the known outcrops of the Agicondi Series are separated

by very large areas in which they are obscured by later deposits. Extrapola-

(ious were made by examining the formations of other ages but the total

information available is so scattered, that any interpretations must he re-

garded as tentative only. If the reconstruction approaches the true picture,

it would appear that the Agicondi Series was deposited not in a geosyncline,

but rather in a large mobile area, probably subsiding irregularly, and later

folded as a region, and forming a large stable area, the Arnhem Block or

Craton (Fig. 4),

Tue Davenport Series

The reconstructed trends suggest the existence in the Territory of at

least two geosynclines, the Kimberley and Carpentaria Basins. Litercom-

129

munication probably existed and their former extent may have been much

greater than depicted. There is a strong suggestion, however, that a relatively

large craton named the Arnhem Block, a result of the Agicondi orogeny,

existed as a landmass during the Davenport sedimentation. (Fig. 5).

Mean Observed Trends

Suggested Trend Lines _-___

tele) BOG MILES

S352

Fig. 4

Observed and inferred trends of the Agicondi Series (Lower

Proterozoic) of the Northern Territory.

130

In dealing with the tectonics of Australia, Hills (1946) was handicapped

by the paucity of reliable information available from the Northern Territory.

In view of this the following remarks should not be regarded as criticism

of his work, for such is not intended. Because of the references that have

been and will be made by other workers to the paper by Hills (ap. cit.),

Sars 3

1 TA aoe ;

= PN) Reocee oa

h, Sp pa a

ee rode

Boo. 3-5 Do a Caan,

£05900 8 ag 47 o neo

gk eMasosPesonyocoss

- Q

Inferred Trends pas mats;

CS >, Lower Proterqzaic Outcraps

_Archaeozoie

Osos

Sod ge aso

olan 3 20% d

bo Boose So

° loo 200 300 MILES

SS EE nae

Fig. 5

Observed and inferred trends of the Davenport Series (Middle

Proterozoic) of the Northern Territory,

131

it is essential to refer to differences of opinion held by the present writer as

a result of additional evidence collected by himself.

No evidence was obtained which would indicate the existence of a

¥ pattern in the Pine Creek-Darwin area. Although there are very numerous

divergences due to deme and basin folding, the general trends range frotn

west-northwest to north-northwest as far ta the south-east as Maranboy and

the Yeuralba District in the western part of Arnhem Land, but exhibit a

ponerse change ta the north and north-north-east towards and beyond

enpelli,

The generally concordant structure lines around the Brock’s Creek

granite intrusion are due to a dome-shaped fold, of which there are a number,

the Golden Dyke (Hossfeld, 1936a). being a good example. It can be stated

definitely that the Brock’s Creek intrusion does not mark the location of a

permanent change in strike of the sediments.

It was demonstrated in the preceding section that the present writer

disagrees with Jensen in the latter's reference of the McArthur River lime-

stones and the Redbank deposits (Jensen, 1940) to the Cambrian and Post-

Nullagine mineralization respectively as quoted by Hills (op. cit.), Madigan’s

reference (1937) to post-Cambrian unstressed granites also is contrary to

the observations ta date of the present writer and consequently so are the

conclusions derived from that correlation by Hills (op. cit.}.

The present writer's observations and all other available evidence indi-

cates that the Agicondi Series continues throughout the western part of

the Arnheim Land region and that the Davenport Series constitutes the

eastern sector. The Buldivan Series, capped by residues of the Lower

Cretaceous Mullaman Group, forms a relatively thin cover, but of sufficient

thickness to give the Arnhem Land Plateau its comparatively high elevation.

This interpretation supports the previously supposed existence of festoons of

ancient rocks which Wade (1924) found difficult to explain.

D. LATE PROTEROZOIC AND CAMBRIAN

Deposits previously referred to this age-grouping are widespread in

the Northern Territory. Differences of opinion have been expressed regard-

ing the ages of the oldest deposits of the sequence, but there is general agree-

ment that the formations occur in two distinct geographical divisions. One,

outcrops to the north of the Arunta Block, the other occurs in the Amadeus

Geosyncline to the south of the above block,

THE BULDIVAN SERIES

Although the deposits of this series had been recorded previously by'

several observers, they had received no formal name until 1946 when they

were named the Buldiva Series by the N.A. Survey (Hossfeld, 1937g). The

term was derived from the Buldiva Area, the first locality where they were

mapped and examined by the above organization. The name is being changed

herein to Buldivan, as suggested by the Australian Code of Stratigraphic

Nomenclature (Raggatt, 1950).

Attention was directed to the deposits of this series during the economic.

survey of the Buldiva Area, because they and younger rocks were found

to act as blankets, obscuring in many areas the mineral-bearing Proterozoic

formations.

The deposits to which the term Buldivan Series was applied, rest with

4 violent unconformity on the métamorphosed, highly folded sediments of

the Agicondi Series and on the intrusive granites and basic igngous rocks.

(Fig. 3.) In most instances where the contacts were examined in the type

132

area, they were found to be faulted against the older rocks. However, good

contacts showing the unconformable junction, were observed subsequently

outside the type locality. The existence of the unconformity was confirmed

by the regional mapping and the consistent differences in lithology, structure

and degree of metamorphism between the Buldivan Series and the underlying

SY a

190 200 309 MILES

Es a |

__p-—n__ Approximate N's S™ Limits of Ordovican Transgression N'™

of Avunta Block

Fig. 4

Approximate limits of Cambrian, Ordovician and Lower Cretaceous

Submergences of the Northern Territory.

143

rocks. In general, the members of the Buldivan Series exhibit gentle dips and

minor folding only, except near fault contacts where dips of up to 30° and

several local crumplings were abserved. The region occupied by this series

is divided partly hy a narrow, elevated area of older rocks, many of them

quartzites, which belong to the Davenport Series, This feature extends from

the vicinity of Newcastle Waters in a southerly direction to a short distance

north of Tennant Creek. The resulting geographical divisions of the Buldivan

Series are being named the Buldiva-Wiso and the Barkly Basins, (Fig. 6),

and the dividing area the Asburton Peninsula. The Buldiva-Wiso Basin

extends from the Douglas River in a southerly direction probably as far as

the sector west of Tennant Creek. The Barkly Basin extends in a south-

easterly direction into Queensland,

The occurrence of inliers of older rocks in the Victoria River region

suggests the existence of other smaller basins such as were mapped in the

Western Austrlian border areas, (Mattheson and ‘Teichert, 1945),

As the map will show, the boundaries, many of them necessarily inferred.

are irregular and there are some outlying areas. Some of these irregularities

are believed to be due to differential uplift by folding or faulting, and the

subsequent removal of the less resistant deposits.

The vast continuous region over which these sediments exist, the out-

liers as well as sttuctural considerations, suggest the former continuation

of these sediments over almost the whole of the Northern Territory, north

of the Arunta Block (Fig. 6).

(a) Tue Burpiva QuartziTR

In the northern sector of the Buldiva Basin, the Buldiva Quartzite is

the basal formation of the series, (Hossfeld, 1937g), (Voisey, 1939a),

(Noakes, 194%), It consists predominantly of massive arenaceous sediments

which have been altered in most localities to a dense, hard quartzite, but

consists chiefly of quartzose sandstones in others. The sequence includes

some grits, thin conglomerate bands and some shale. The original report of

the type area of Buldiva (Hossfeld, 1937p) states: “The quartzites exhibit

well developed ripple marks, worm-iracks, rain prints, sun cracks and bands

of weathered inclusions which may have been either fossils or mud galls.

These features are evidence of the shallow water deposition of the quartzite,

These features are not restricted to any one sectian of the sequence, but

have been found through a thickness of several hundred fect of quartzite,

and over a length of forty miles northwards from Buldiva,"

The Buldiva Quartzile Formation is strongly jointed and the dominant

trends are north-westerly and north-easterly. Actual averages of numbers

of joint directions measured gave bearings of 320° and 57° for the Buldiva

area, and 315° and 63° respectively for the Arnhem Land area. A third trend

in the Buldiva area is approximately east-west; in the Arnhem Land area.

the third joint direction is variable, the observed bearings being between

27° and 42°.

The jomting is predominantly vertical and together with the prevalent

low dips, is responsible for the rugged topography, much of it inaccessible.

No accurate measurements of the thickness of the Buldiva Quartzite in the

Ruldiva area or the possible variations in that thickness elsewhere, as for

instance, in the Arnhem Land Region, are available. In the type area it

appears to be of the order of several hundred feet, and the present writer has

seen no evidence to suggest any marked departure from that estimate in

other parts of the Territory. The estimate of more than a thousand feet

(Noakes, 1949) in folded areas (apparently the Arnhem Lind area) appears

lo the present writer excessive.

134

Outcrops of massive quartzite are well distributed in the north-western

sector of North Australia. They are responsible for the formation of trémen-

dous cliff faces along the dissected western edges of the Arnhem Land Plateau

and along the western sector of the southerly margin. Though some may be

older, they are correlated provisionally with the Buldiva Quartzite. The

quartzite outcraps which occur at intervals along the north aad east coast of

Arnhem land and on Groote Eylandt may represent beds of the Davenport

Series. Where observed, the Buldiva Quartzite and other formations of the

Buldivan Series together with members of the “Lower Cretaceous” Plateau

sandstones, form the cover rocks on the Agicondi and Davenport Series over

a large part of the Arnhem Land Plateau, The former are continuous with

the Agiconili Series of the Darwin-Oenpelli triangle and the latter continue

across the Roper River to the Carpentaria Group of the McArthur River

Area. It is largely due to the presence of the later cover rocks that the

plateau owes its relatively high elevation, There is no evidence to suggest

that the easterly dips of the Buldiva Quartzite at the western margin indicate

the existence of a synclinal structure over the plateau. All of the observations

made, indicate rather a number of gentle flexures and suggest the existence

of some cross-folding with resultant dome and basin folds. Wherever the

valleys and dissected margins of the plateau have been examined, members

of the Buldivan Series or of the Mullaman Group, or both, occupy the upper

sections and form cliff-faces, exposing in the lower sections and on the Aoors

of the valleys rocks of the Agicondi or Davenport Series or igneous rocks

intrusive into them, The Buldiva Quartzite outcrops extensively between the

Finniss River and Collia, and extends southwards. Outcrops at Tanami, in

the Gardiner Range and at intervals to Winnecke Creek may be its equiva-

lents. The absence over large areas of metamorphism, mineralization and

imarked deformation from same quartzites belonging to an older series, makes

correlation of widely separated outcrops difficult and in many instances

impossible. It may well be that some outcrops labelled Buldiva Quartzite

belong in fact to the older, the Davenport Series.

As the Buldiva Quartzite is the basal sedimentary formation of the

Buldivan Series in the type area, the northern sector of the Buldiva-Wiso

Rasin, its age and correlation will be discussed with the rest of the Series.

At intervals between 16 and 18 degrees South Latitude, along the border

area of Western and North Australia, Mattheson and Teichert (1945) have

mapped a great thickness of basic fows with agglomerates. They consider

that these volcanics form the basal portion of the Cambrian sequence in that

region, The volcanics are succeeded by calcareous and argillaceous sediments

the oldest of which is regarded as Late Lower Cambrian, and is probably

the equivalent of the base of the Daly River Group.

The volcanics extend eastwards ito North Australia into the Wave

Hill District, Their extent and positions in the sequence have not been

determined in that region. The existence of volcanics at the base of the

Buldivan Series has been suggested byt not proved so far in other parts of

the Territory.

Ta the southern portion of the Buldiva-Wiso Basin, and in the Barkly

Basin, the lowest members in most localities are relatively thin arenaceous

beds or limestones of variable types,

(b) Tue Daty River Grove ox Upper Bucpivan Series

The deposits aboye the Buldiva Quartzite were described in the NLA.

Survey Report (Hossfeld, 1937g) as follows: “overlying the quartzites .. .

are limestones, argillaceous limestones, slates and fine-grained sandstones.

135

On a hill to the north-west of Collia, and near the western edge of the area,

well preserved stromatoliths and cryptozoa were found in limestones ittter-

bedded with purple slates. The rocks are considered tm be near the base of

the beds overlying the quartzites. Similar structures were found near North-

ern Creek alongside the new road to Daly River, On what is probably a

higher horizon Girvanella was located between the Fish River and Collia

on the Buldiva-Collia track.”

No formal name was given fo these sediments as all of them were

included in the Buldiva(n) Series. They were divided merely into the Lower

Buldiva Series (Buldiva Quartzites) and the Upper Buldiva Series. Votsey

(19392) used the term “Daly River Limestones,” which Noakes (1949)

suggests be named the Daly River Group, The adoption of the latter tert

by the present writer does not imply agreement with Noakes (op. cit.) that

the name “Buldiva Series” should be eliminated. .

Lying conformably above the Buldiva Quartzite in the type area, and

forming a continuous series without an erosional break (Noakes, 1949, per

contra vide), there follows a transition zone of irregularly alternating,

relatively thin beds of limestones (some of them cherty) and quartzites.

These pass upwards into fossiliferous limestones of the Daly River area,

and are succeeded by the other members of the group,

Some fossil localities have been referred ta above. Others are given in

the description of various areas by several authors. The additional localities

examined by the present writer are on the Douglas River where pteropod

limestones (Biconulites “Salterella" hardmani) and Girvanella limestones

outcrop, and near Chinaman Creek south-west of Katherine, where Girvan-

ella-like remains weather from the sediments in immense numbers. There is

general agreement in regarding the lower members of the Daly River Group

as Upper Lower Cambrian.

Sediments of Cambrian age outcrop, or are obscured by a thin veneer

only of younger rocks, over very large areas in the Northern Territory. They

extend from Western Australia into the Territory on the Ord River Region

and continue apparently without a break, but ohscured in many places by

younger rocks, ta the Daly River Region. They continue eastwards across

the Overland Telegraph Line, forming the Barkly Tableland, and thence into

Queensland. The large, unmapped area bounded approximately by Newcastle

Waters, Wave Hill, The Granites and Barrow Creek, is believed to be urnder-

lain at shallow depths by Cambrian sediments. The eastern portion, west of

Tennant Creek was named by the writer the “Wiso Area” in 1937.

(A.G.G.S.N.A. 1938a) and the natie Wiso Tableland is proposed herein for

the whole region.

The Buldivan Series was defined in the publication referred to earlier

{Hossfeld, 1937g). The writer, in this and subsequent references, included in

that term not only the basal formation, the Puldiva Quartzite, but also the

remaining beds of the sequence, the limestones, shales and associated sedi-

ments of recognized Cambrian age. (Hig. 3). Since then, Noakes (1949) has

eliminated the term, and “Buldivan Series” has been used for the Buldiva

Quartzite alone (David and Browne, 1950). The present writer is convinced

from his field observations in the area to the east of Collia-Buldiva where

good sections exist, that in this area at least, the sequence represents can-

tinuous deposition from the base of the Buldiva Quartzite into the Daly

River Group. Statements to the contrary by Noakes (1949) notwithstanding,

the present writer adheres to his previously published opinion that the

Bulvida(tt) Series includes the whole of the above sediments.

Noakes (1949) cites as his main argument the observation that in many

parts of the Brock’s Creek District the Cambrian limestones rest directly

on the Agicondi Series. In this connection Noakes did not refer to the known

existence of fault boundaries in this region, an area in which dislocation by

faulting is recognized as severe and extensive. The prevalence of such fault

junctions and the apparent stratigraphical anomalies which they have pro-

duced along the western and eastern margins of the Cambrian basin, make

it highly probable that they are responsible wholly as they are known in

part to be, for the apparent anomalies quoted by Noakes.

The discovery by the présent writer of a continuous section above the

Ruldiva Quartzite into the Daly River Group, and the juxtaposition and

upparent conformity of the two units over such a large portion of the

Northern Territory, make it improbable that the erosion interval, postulated

by Noakes, exists except perhaps as a local feature, which may have occurred

as a fesult of transgressive deposition in such a large area as the Buldiva

Basin, The twa units then, constitute the Buldivan Series. As stated earlier.

it is generally agreed that deposition of the Daly River Group commenced in

the upper portion of the Lower Cambrian and it follows that the formatian

which is now the Buldiva Quartzite. was deposited during the earlier part uf

that epoch. Deposition may be wholly Cambrian or it may have commenced

during the last stage of the Upper Proterozoic and continued into the Lower

Cambrian,

{c} Votcanics

Numerous exposures of extrusive rocks of great variety are known to

occur in North Australia.

Jensen (Cwlth. Aust. 1915c) records dolerites, diabases, basalts, ande-

sites, rhyolites, phonolites, trachytes and calci-trachytes as weil as tuffs of

the above, and porphyries. In view of the wide tange of composition it is

suggested that they may belong to more than one epoch. However, Noakes

(1949) while acknowledging the incompleteness of field evidence, Suggests

that the volcanics are of Lower Cambrian age, overlie the Buldiva Quartzites

and underlie the Daly River Group, and correlates them apparently with

the Lower Cambrian voleanics of the Kimberley Tegion of Western Aus-

trlaia,

Opinions expressed by previous observers show wide divergences. There

are several areas to which special reference is required at this stage. These

are the Edith River, Maude Creek, Collia, Tipperary-Daly River Road, and

Victoria River.

THE EDITH RIVER VOLCANICS

The observations (Noakes, 194%) of fault boundaries and the resultingr

juxtaposition of the volcanics to the Agicondi Series, to the Buldiva Quariz.-

ite, and the Daly River Group, make a defininte determination impossible

at this stage, The present writer considers, however, that in view of the

recorded occurrence of numerous tuffs and tuffaceous sandstones. in the

Agicondi Series in that locality, the recorded folding of the deposits, and

metamorphism of some of the racks, their reference to the Agicondi Series

appears logical. They ate regarded therefore, by the writer as tentatively

of Lower Proterozoic age,

THE MAUDE CREEK VOLCANICS

The examination of the goldfield of that name (Cattle, 1937b) showed

that the tuffs and porphyries of this area can he correlated with reasonable

certainty with other deposits of the Agicondi Series. A section by Gray

(Cwlth. Aust., 19154) and the accompanying text indicates, hawever, nov

only his recognition of the existence of Precambrian tuffs, but also the

137

occurrence of small deposits of volcanics in the Cambrian sequence. If sub-

sequent work confirms the existence of volcanics of two ages in this locality,

it will explain to sotme extent the differences of opinion expressed in the

past, and will indicate the extension eastward even though perhaps inter-

mittent, of the volcanic accumulations at or mear the base of the Buldivan

Series near the Western Australian border.

Other volcanics such as the Collia and East Victoria River areas and

possilly the Tipperary-Daly River road occurrence are regarded by the

writer as Post-Cambrian and, as will be shown later, tentatively as Devonian,

The work of Mattheson and Tetchert in the border areas resulted in a

threefold division of the Cambrian succession, at the base a great thickness

of basaltic rocks including agglomerates, followed by the Negri and Mt, Elder

Series of Cambrian sediments. Their extension fnto North Australia was

demonstrated but until detailed mapping is done in the extensive Victoria

Riyer drainage basin, these divisians cannot he carried through. The whole

area in which these three groups are believed to outcrop, is shown on the

geological map herein, as Cambrian without any attempt at differentiation.

An exception is made of the volcanics mapped by earlier workers in the

eastern marginal areas of the Victoria River drainage basin. On the evidence

of other observers together with the writer's own obseryations, it is

sugpested that these could be Post-Cambrian and correlated provisionally

with the Collia Series, which is being regarded tentatively as Devonian,

Tue AmMaDEUS GEOSYNCLINE

The Archaeozoic rocks of the Musgrave and Arunta blacks are separated

by the geosynclinal sediments of the Amadeus Geosynicline.

The maximum width of this feature how ranges from 100 to 160 miles.

(Fig. 6), 1t is known to extend for more than 300 miles in a general east-west

direction, but is stated to continue for at least another 150 miles towards and

into Western Australia, (Ellis, 1936). Its northern margin probably lies

near the southern end of Lake Mackay. Hf the postulated continuity of the

Amadeus with the Flinders-Mt. Lofty Geosynecline is accepted, there exists

a known length of at least 1,000 miles with unknown extensions to the west.

The sédiments which rest with violent unconformity on the Arunta Complex

(PL. 11, 1) have been investigated by a number of workers, especially Brown,

Tate and Watt, Chewings, Ward, Mawson and Madigan,

Reference must be made here to the remarkable opinion expressed by

Ellis (1936), that there is no unconformity at the base of the Pertaknurra

Quarttzite and that this formation is part of the Arunta Complex, The exist-

ence of the nonconformity has been established by regional mapping, in-

dividual sections, as well as by the discovery of exposed contacts, One of

these 1s visible in a small quarry south of Alice Springs in Heavitree Gap.

Here, soft argillaeeous beds rest unconformably on massive porphyritic

pranite and are overlain by the Heavitree Quartzite dipping to the south

away from the contact.

In a paper by Mawson and Madigan (1930), the Pre-Ordovician racks

above the Arunta complex were divided in ascending order into the Pata-

knurra and Pataoorrta Series. Madigan (1932a) subsequently changed the

prefix Pata to Terta as being the cotrect spelling of the native word used,

In the above paper Madigan subdivided the former Pertalknurra into Perta-

knurra A and B and an unconformable series above, which he named the

Pertatataka Series. Above this follow the Pertaoorcta (Cambrian), the Lara-

pintine (Ordovician), and finally the Pertnjara {Post-Ordovician) Series, a

total thickness of sediments as measured along Ellery's Creek in the West-

138

ern MacDonnell Ranges of nearly 25,000 feet, In the detailed description

and measurements of the Post-Archaeozoic and Pre-Ordovician sediments

of Ellery’s Creek, Madigan gives the total thicknesses of the series from

above downwards as follows:

Pertaoorrta Series - - - 3,151 feet

Pertatataka Series - - - 3,24 feet

Pertaknurra Series B - - 1,909 feet

{Heavitree Quartzite) A - 1,440 feet

However, in the area fram Alice Springs westwards to the vicinity of

Finniss Gap, tt can be seen that Madigan's Pertaknurra A or Heavitree

Quartzite does not rest directly on the Arunta Complex but is underlain

hy soft argillaceous beds ranging in thickness probably from 12 to 20 feet.

During his examination of these sediments in the Eastern Macdonnell

Ranges, Madigan (1932b). discovered a bed of limestane three feet thick,

vontaining numerous well-preserved Archaeocyathinae, Biconulites (Salter-

ella) were found in this formation, and thus the tentative determination of

the Pertaoorrta Series in the western Macdonnell Ranges as Cambrian, was

confirmed. The division by Madigan (1932a) of the Pre-Ordovician rocks into

three series, the Pertaknurra, Pertatataka and Pertavorrta, ts based chielly

ett lithological and palaeontological evidence. No stratigraphical nor struc-

tural break has been discovered from the base of the sequence to the highest

members of the Larapintine Series, The sole evidence of any break in deposi-

tion appears to be supplied by the conglomerates near the buse of the Perta-

tataka Series. “The boulders included granite and granite-gneiss, bioctite-

gneiss, biotite schist, quartzite and many stromatolith fragments, chiefly

silicified nodules from the limestones, all recognizable at once as from the

immediately underlying Arunta Complex and Pertaknurra Series.” (Madigan,

19322}, The possibility that the assuciated breccia bands were of the nature

of crush lines connected with overthrusting was suggested but discounted

by the long continuation (at least thirty miles) of the quartzite formation

of which they form a part (Mawson and Madigan, 1930), The severe deforma-

tion of the sediments in this and other areas marginal to the southern borders

of the Arunta Block, and especially in the type areas of the Jay and Ellery’s

Creeks, indicates the necessity for a re-examination of the evidence for

Madigan’s sequence and thicknesses.

The sediments of the Amadeus Geosynctine have been folded and faulted

extensively. Many closed structures have been recognized. Some appear in

the various published papers referred to, but the majority were delineated by

the present writer. A generalized representation of the structura! features

appears on the attached gevlogical map.

It is to be noted that the average trend of the folding axes approximates

to a sigmoidal curve bearing in a north-westerly south-easterly direction at

the two observed limits of the geosyncline, Severe deformation is exhibited by

the sediments marginal tu the southern borders of the Arunta Block over a

distance from east to west of approximately 250 miles. In the southern

portion, marginal to the northern borders of the Musgrave Black, outcrops

are widely separated and little is known of the structure. Sufficient outcrops

are available to indicate the existence of a highly disturbed area to the east

and south-east of Lake Amadeus, in which area the faulted Kernot Range,

the basin fold of Mt, Connor, and the subvertical sediments of the Ayers

Rock Horst, form prominent outcrops. The most disturbed area, however,

is that to the east and south-east of Alice Springs. Intense folding and

fracturing exists in this sector, where the trends appear to change their

direction to the north-west south-east in a relatively sharp curve (Fig, 6).

Here overfolding, overthrusts and faulting generally are so severe that, even

with the aid of aerial photographs, the structures are difficult of imterpreta-

tion, ‘The greatest horizontal displacements cbseryed, and measured approxi-

mately, appear to have been produced by a relative lateral movement along

a shear plane, of about 7,000 feet.

This highly disturbed sector of the basin is in the area where the

generally east-west trends swing to the south-east. Such a change of direction

ig. ta be expected if the Amadeus Geosyncline is a virtual continuation of the

Fiinders-Mount Lofty Geosynciine and forms a part of the former deposi-

tional basin marginal to the ancient landmass of Yilgarnia, (Andrews, 1937;

Mawson, 1947}, Towards the border of Western Australia the folding appears

to decrease pradually in severity. The geosynclinal structures may continue

to the north-west into Western Australia, but to the north the beds occur

as large residuals over a wide zone and appear to pass gradually into the

less disturbed sediments of the southern continuation of the Buldiva trans-

gression,

In the northern marginal areas ol the geosyncline, the Pertaknurra

(Quartzites have suffered severe deformation and dislocation, Reversed dips

are common along the unconformable junction with the Arunta Complex,

overriding of the older racks on a large scale, fault displacements and block

faulting have produced very complex structures. An anticlinal structure was

formed on part of the southern segment of the Arunta Block. The northern

limb can be recognized by the existence of beds identified with the hasal

formation, the Fertaknurra Quartzite, in elevations such as Simpsan’s Gap

(Hossfeld, 1937¢), Chewings Range, etc., to the west of Alice Springs, Block

faulting has broken the continuity and resulted in the occurrence of numerous

isolated outcrops of this quartzite. In the mest distorted sector, the area

east of Alice Springs, the resulting structures are exceedingly complex. Out-

liers of the Pertnaknurra Quattzite occur in close proximity to much older

(juartzites, and such contiguity has misled some observers inte correlation of

beds, of different ages. The conclusions drawn from such erroneous correla-

tions have been far-reaching, and, quoted by subsequent workers, have pro-

duced considerable confusion, It will be necessary, therefore, to discuss at

length the correlation of the Pertaknurra Series and deductions drawn from

such correlations. The incompetent beds, chiefly limestones und shales

immediately above the Pertaknurta Quartzite, have been distorted so

thoroughly in many areas including Ellery's Creek, that measurement of this

part of Madigan’s type section (1932a) appears impracticable. Nevertheless,

sections were observed in the region where the local thicknesses and sequence

can be determined,

The quartzite (Mt. Blatherskite}, Madigan’s No. 2 Quartzite and re-

garded by him as the base of his Pertatataka Series, which outcrops to the

suuth of Heavitree Gap, is considered by the present writer, on the basis of

its outcrops, overlying sequence and lithology, to be a repetition of the

Tertaknurra Quartzite of Heavitree Gap, Madigan’s No. 2 Quartzite in the

Ellery’s Creek Area which contains the conglomerate and breccia bands

referred to earlier and which was regarded by Madigan {1932a) as the basal

member of his Pertatataka Series, appears toa be very localized in its occur-

tence in the Western Macdonnell Ranges, and has not been recognized in

the Eastern Macdonnell Ranges, (Madigan. 1932b). It is true that the con-

wzlomerate bands could indicate discontinuity of deposition, but this could

have resulted from local uplift by folding or faulting and not of the sequence

as a whole, Deposition except for positive ar negative movements of the

land, resulting in non-deposition or in overlap in some localities, is con-

shiered unbroken from the base int the Ordovician and Post-Ordovician

eds.

140

Madigan himself admits that no unconformity or break in deposition has

been discovered, Nevertheless, he states (Madigan, 1932b, p. 106) “The

Pertaknurra has definitely been intruded by granite, and is aunferous, None

of the later series have been so intruded and no remains of them have been

found inside the berders of the ranges. The orogenic movements which dis-

rupted the Pertaknurra and engulfed part of it in ihe Arunta Complex.

preceded the deposition of all younger formations . . ." “the Pertaknurra

is placed amongst the oldest of Australian sediments and assigned to the

Older Proterozoic, and correlated with the Mosquito Series of Western

Australia . . .” “Pertaknurra time closed with the greatest revolution which

has ever affected the Macdonnells . . .” “This was a time of great granite

intrusion in Central and Western Australia, and a most important metallo-

genetic epoch,”

The above premises and conclusions are not in accordance with Madigan's

statement that na unconformity had been discovered, and is completely

at variance with the opinions held and expressed by the present writer

(Hossfeld, 1937), and subsequently by Voisey (1939b). Reference tu

granitic intrusions and metallogenesis earlier in the present paper indicate

the writer's views on those aspects.

Madigan's conclusions appear to have been based on several features.

1. The observed overthrust faulting of the Pertaknurra Quartzite and

the severe crumpling and folding of the overlying sediments, which as Voisey

(1939b) has shown is of Post-Ordovician age.

2. The assumption following Chewings (1928) that the White Range

and the Bald Hill-Winhecke Quartzites are down-faulted metamorphosed

remnants of Pertaknurra Quartzite, and the conclusion therefrom of a

tremendous orogenic upheaval, with subsequent granitic intrusions ant

mineralization.

3. ‘lhe existence of limestones in close proximity ta some of the older

quartzite outcrops, thus affording a correlation with the lower portion of

the Pertaknurra sequence.

As pointed aut by Voisey (op. cit.) once these errors of correlation by

Matigan are realized, there is no need to postulate a marked time break

above the Pertaknurra Series. It is no longer necessary to ignore the over-

whelming evidence not only of regional continuity of deposition, but alse

of Post Ordovician orogeny. The present writer agrees with Voisey that the

term Pertatataka Series is superfuous, and the original division pf the

sequence by Mawson and Madigan into two series, the Pertaknurra and

Pertaoorrta should be retained.

AGE AND CORRELATION

The Pertaoorrta Series has been determined on palaeontological evidence

as of Cambrian age. Browne (David and Browne. 1950) regards the upper-

most members of Madigan’s Pertatataka Series and consisting of 930 feet

of purple fissile slate with green bands, calcareous slates and reddish sand-

stones, as equivalent to the Purple Slate Stage (Adelaide System) and placed

in the Lower Cambrian, This sequence has been named the Marinoan Series

by Mawson and Sprigg (1950), who regard it as the uppermost division of

the Proterozoic. In view of this published opinion, the age-grouping by

Mawson and Madigan of the Amadeus Geosyncline sediments is being

retained at present. This implies that the Pertaoorrta Series is of Cambrian

age, and that the earlier deposits (Pertaknurra and Pertatataka Series) are

Proterozoic,

141

The main divisions of the Adelaide System are the Para, Narcnota

(Hossfeld, 1935a, pp. 46, 61-63) and the Marinoan Series (Mawson and

Sprigg, 1950), The Para and Narcoota Series were subsequently called the

Torrensian and Sturlian respectively by Mawson and Sprigg in 1950 (op.

cit.)-

Attempts have been made by some authors to correlate the Precambrian

sequence of the Amadeus Geosyncline with the Adelaide System. Such

correlations are tentative at present, partly because the Sturt Tillite which

is such a marked feature of the Narcoota Series of the Adelaide System, has

not been recognized so far, in the Amadeus Geosyncline.

At what stage during the Proterozoic Era deposition commenced cannot

be decided at present. The writer can see no grounds except the mistaken

correlations of Madigan discussed abaye, for regarding the Pertaknurra

Series as Older Proterozoic and equivalent in age to the Mosquito Creek

Series (Agicondi Series), or even to the Middle Proterozoic {Davenport

Series), The Pertaknurra A and B and the former Pertatataka Series will

be referred to collectively as the Pertaknurra Series and are regarded as of

late Middle to Upper Proterezoic age.

No contemporary volcanic activity has heen recorded from the sediments

oj the Amadeus Geosyneline which is classified as a miogeosyncline.

The available evidence indicates that the orogeny of the Amadeus Geo-

syncline took place after the deposition of the TPertnjara Series (Post-

Ordovician). No igneous intrusions nor mineralization due to igneous activity

have been observed by the writer. The only references to igneous intrusions

are those of Madigan, most of whith deal with beds older than the Perta-

knurra and mistakingly correlated with it. In the Jervois Range area Madi-

gan refers to granite intrusive into Cambrian beds, but does not show this

in his sections. Wherever in that sector the present writer observed outcrops

of Cambrian age in close proximity to granite, they were separated by major

faults. Until some definite evidence of Cambrian intrusions in that area is

produced, the present writer maintains that the sediments of the Amadens

Geosyncline and adjacent areas were, in that district as elsewhere, completely

free of igneous activity.

The earliest known deposits of the Buldivan Series, the transgressive

deposition of which probably began from the north-west, are believed to

belong to the base of the Cambrian. Deposition in parts of the basin apparently

conlinued into the Upper Cambrian and with a possible time-hbreak, into

the Ordovician. Since depositian apparently began carlier and continued

longer in the Amadeus Geosyncline, and communication probably was

established with the Cambrian basins to the north, transitional areas should

exist to the north-east and north-west of the Geosyncline. Those to the east

are buried beneath the Mesozoic sediments of the Great Artesian Basin. In

the west where such transitional deposits may exist. gealogical outcrops

are scarce in the large region covered almos{ completely hy recent sand dunes

(Hossfeld, 19404), Such outcrops as do exist are covered to a large extent by

durterust, which in those peneplaned areas has not been removed by denuda-

tion and hence renders identification difficult. However, the dissected regians

of the Kimberley District af the north-west of Western Australia, and the

Victoria River Downs and Wave Hill Districts offer considerable prospects

of adding io our knowledge of the Late Proterozoic—Lower Palaevzvic

succession.

The classification, as Pertaknurra remnants, of numereus gutliers of

arenaceous. sediments on the Arunta Block by previous. observers, has not

been established beyond reasonable doubt, That such do occur is shown

by the recognition of such a remnant at Simpsen’s Gap (Hossfeld, 1937)

142

and by the correlation of part at least of the Chewings Ranges and others,

However, the quartzites of those areas are lithologically and in other respects

so similar to those of definite Pertaknurra age in the vicinity, that there is

littie doubt of their correlation, Although some of these quartzites have been

faulted into the Archaeozoic rocks of the Arunta Complex, they exhibit

none of the metamorphism nor mineralization observed in the White Range

or other similar quartzites. They have not “been absorbed into the Complex,”

but retain their original characteristics.

The Amunurunga Series (Tindale, 1933} and numerous other outliers

on the Arunta Block Have been discussed earlier. These beds which are

lightly metamorphosed are violently unconformable on the Archa¢ozoic rocks

and are overlain unconformably by beds (predominantly quartzite) corre-

lated with the Pertaknurra Series,

At the eastern extremity of the Arunta Block, notably in the Jervois

Ranges, the arenaceous and argillaceous sediments lying unconformably on

the Arunta Complex have been correlated by Madigan (1932b, 1933, 1937)

with the Pertaknurra Series. As stated earlier, the present writer regards

this as improbable, and has correlated them provisionally with the Daven-

port Series,

E. ORDOVICIAN

Rocks of Ordovician age outcrop at intervals over large areas tn Central

Australia, They have not heen recognized so far, from North Australia,

but such sediments may exist in the largely un-mapped region of the narth-

west, between Barrow Creek and the Lower Victoria River.

Ordovician sediments form a portion of the deposits of the Amadeus

Geosyncline between the Musgrave and Arunta Blocks, Extension of these

beds into Western Australia in the Robert Range, Walter James Range

and others is suggested by Ellis (1936).

Eastwards, their outcrops have been recognized as far as the Todd

River, and again, in the vicinity of the Queensland border, where they out-

crap in the Toko Ranges which are practically unexplored, [t is believed that

the Archeaozoic rocks of the Aranta Complex and sediments of the Amadeus

Geosyncline outcrop in that region and ta the suuth-east, until they are

obscured by the Mesozoic sediments of the Great Artesian Basin, and ly

recent atolian deposits.

From the Toku Range, deposits of Ordovician age have been recordril

westwards at intervals, on and near the northern margin of the Arunta

Riock probably to a short distance west of Barrow Creek (Pl. III, 1). Definite

fossil evidence has been obtained from the Toko, Tarlton and Dulcie Ranges

and their continuity further to the west is based on lithological and strati-

graphical features, In the region on the northern flank of the Arunta Block

they do not form part of the thick range of sediments developed in the

Amadeus Basin. They appear to form part of the Barkly Basin succession,

but may be separated by an unconformity from the Cambrian sediments.

In the Barrow Creek District and adjacent areas they overlap the Cambrian

beds and rest unconformably on the Arunta Complex. Such an overlap

is suggested also for a part at least of the Tarlton Ranges.

Deposits of Ordovician age in the western part of the Amadeus Geo-

syncline were inyestigated in 1894 by Tate and Watt during the Horn

expedition and the results published in 1896. Fossils collected at that time

and those collected earlier hy H. Y. L. Brown, were identified as of Ordovi-

cian age, and the series received the name Larapintine ,

It was demonstrated later (Mawson and Madigan, 1930), that the stratr

graphy of the region as described by Tate and Watt (1896) and Ward (1925)

143

required correction, but this did not alter the recognition of the Larapintine

Series as Ordovician.

Subsequent investigations by Madigan (1932a) added considerably to

our knowledge of the stratigraphy, lithology and fossil contents of the

series, The Larapintine portion of the Ellery’s Creek type section (Madigan

op. cit.) shows a total thickness of 5,986 feet, chiefly arenaceous beds with

thin bands of highly fossiliferous limestones and some shales, nearly midway

in the sequence.

Variations in thickness of some of the recognized beds have been

recorded in other areas of the Amadeus Geosyncline. Thus the thickness

of the lower quartzites was found by Tate and Watt to be approximately

6,000 feet in the Levi Range with a decrease of and absence of some beds,

making the total thickness in that area approximately 7,000 feet,

South of the Eastern Macdonnell Ranges the Larapintine deposits,

where examined, appear to be relatively thin. Too little is known of this

region, however, for definite statements of the original thickness of the

series.

North of the Eastern Macdonnell Ranges, the existence of sediments

of Ordovician age was reported first from the Dulcie Range (ITossfeld, 1931;

Tindale, 1931; Madigan, 1932h). Extensions to the eastward towards thé

Queensland border were investigated by Madigan in the Tarlton and Toko

Ranges (Madigan, 1937).

Sub-horizontal sandstones, grits and conglomerates ta the east of

Barrow Creek were correlated tentatively with the Ordovician (Hossfeld,

1937i).

The limited vertical exposures of the sub-horizontal sediments to the

north and east of the Arunta Block make an estimate of their total thickness

impossible at present. The maximum observed appears to be about 800 feet,

recorded from Mt. Ultim in the Dulcie Ranges by Tindale (1931), They will

be referred to as the Dulcie Series.

In the Amadeus Geosyncline the Larapintine Series exhibits predominantly

a littoral or shallow water facies, indicating that throughout the deposition

of about 7,000 feet of sediments, sinking of the floor of the basin kept pace

approximately with the rate of deposition. Calcareous beds are few and thin

in the greater part of the region, but become increasingly numerous to the

east and towards the Queensland border (Madigan, 1937} indicating greater

depths in that direction. The recorded occurrence in the central part of the

area of pscudomorphs after sodium chloride crystals, suggests the existence

of temporarily land-locked arms of the sea and their evaporation.

Within the great thickness examined, recognizable fossils exist in a zone

of less than one hundred feet thick, in the western part of the region. Further

to the east, however, indications are that fossil remains are distributed through

a wider zone of deposition.

The sediments of the Larapintine Series to the south of the Macdonnell

Ranges form many large, continuous oulcreps, but occur also as numerous,

scattered residuals, or as long, continuous beds along the strike. Such dis-

continuity of outcrop is due, not only to folding and faulting, but also tea

removal by erosion and to their burial by later deposits.

The Dulcte Series sediments to the east and north, which are sub-

horizontal or gently flexured, form mesas, some of very large extent, resull-

ing from the dissection of a former continuous elevated region. Whereas

in the Amadeus Basin the Larapintine sediments represent portion of an

apparently uninterrupted sequence from Late Proterazoic or Early Cambrian

times, the corresponding Ordovician deposits on the east and north of the

Arunta Block are of the transgressive type,

144

The geosynclinal deposits of the Amadeus Basin have undergone com-

pression and now exhibit many closed folds, and numerous faults with

resulting repetition of beds, whereas the transgressive beds exhibit little

deformation (Fig, 2). The gentle folding north of the Amadeus Geosyneline

is exhibited both by the Cambrian and Ordovician sediments. The two

periols may be separated by an unconformity, but none has been proved as

yet. Even if such were established, it probably would disclose discontinuity

of deposition without deformation. On present evidence, the folding of the

Buldivan Series appears to have taken place in Late- or Post-Ordovician

times, both in the Barkly and the Buldiva-Wiso Basins, increasing probably

ii severity to the north-east, in the Arnhem Land Region. The general sub-

horizontal attitude could result, as the writer believes it did resuli, in the

removal by erosion of the Ordovician, and much of the Cambrian sediments

It is suggested therefore, that remnants of Ordovician age may exist in

the largely unknown terrain to the north-west of Barrow Creek, which the

writer named the Wiso Region or Tableland. There may be remnants also

of such deposits in the Victoria River Region and even further to the north-

west. The great extent of the Buldivan transgression and the transgressive

nature of the Ordovician sediments, suggests a former much greater extent

of the fatter than that of the scattered dissected remnants of today.

F. SILURIAN

No formations of this pertod have been identified in the Northern

Territory, The possibility exists that such may be found among the sedi-

ments of the unmapped Wiso Region, or im the terrain still further to the

north-west towards the East Kimberley Region.

In the Western Macdunnell Ranges a remarkable conglomerate overlaps

the Ordovician Larapintine Series without an angular unconformity, Macli-

gan (1932a) named this conglomerate the Pertnjara Series, and estimated

a minimum thickness of 9,000 feet. As far as is known at present, this forma-

tian referred to elsewhere as the Post-Ordavician conglomerate, ts restricted

to the western segment of the Amadeus Geosyncline where much of it is

obscured by Cainozoic sands and gravels.

Near the base, the boulders include fossiliferous Larapintine rocks,

Pertaknurra limestones and Archaeozoic rocks up to three feet in diameter,

Higher up in the sequence the percentage of boulders derived from Archaev-

zoic rocks increases. Although examined [for such features, no evidence of

facetting or glacial striation was discovered, and it appears that the con-

glomerate was formed of water-worn material.

No contemporaneous fossils were observed in the conglomerate, the

only fossils recorded being those derived from older sediments. No definite

évidence is available of the age of the Pertnjara conglomerate. Madigan

(19324) suggests its correlation with the Finke River Series, good exposures

of which exist between Horseshoe Bend and Yellow Cliff along the Finke

River, and regards the conglomerate as of Permo-Carboniferous (Permian)

age. This tentative correlation by Madigan must be rejected since the Finke

Series are not folded and rest tinconformably on the eroded surfaces of the

folded Amadeus geosyncline sediments.

The absence of an angular unconformity suggests continuity of deposi-

tiun in the Amadeus Basin after the Ordovician Larapintine Series. Wherever

examined by the writer, the Pertnjara Series participated in the oregeny of

the Amadeus Geosyncline and exhibits severe ditatrophistn, closed folds

und reversed dips in some areas. There appears to be no reason at present

to postulate a long time interval such as the currelation by Madigan would

145

require between the deposition of the Larapintine and the Pertnjara Series.

Local uplift of part of the western portion of the Arunta Block and a part.

of the geosynclinal basin, could have produced the features described by

Madigan. The present writer agrees therefore with the tentative correlation

by Andrews (1937) of the Pertnjara Conglomerate with the Silurian.

G DEVONIAN

The only area in which rocks of definite Devonian age have been

recognized in the Northern Territory is the continuation eastwards from

the Wesiern Australian border of the Burt Range Basin in the Ord River

District, where they have been mapped and described. (Mattheson and

Teichert, 1945; Teichert, 1947). The deposits uf this synclinal basin were

found to contain Upper Devonian, Carboniferous and Permian (?} sediments.

The Devonian succession as determined by Teichcrt is a follows:

Upper Sandstones - - ~ - - - ~ 14,000 feet

Limestones with interbedded shales and

Caleareous Sandstunes - - - - - 4000 _,,

Cockatoo Sandstones and Conglumerates - 4,800 _,,

Total 9,800 ,,

The Cockatoo Sandstones and Conglomerates rest on basalt which has

a thickness ef at least 100 feet, and lies unconformably on Precambrian

quartzites, The age of the basalt has nat been determined, but Teichert

suggests that despite its similarity to the Lower Cambrian basalt of the

Argyle Basin, etc., it may well be of Devonian age.

The lower sandstones are strongly current-bedded.

From fossiliferous horizons in the middle group, Camarotocchia-

Productella assemblages were found identical with those of the Productella .

limestone (Stage IV) of the West Kimberley District.

Teichert considers that deposition commenced early in the Upper

Devonian and continued to the close of that epoch.

Tue CoLiia SERIES

Asa result of the examination by the N.A. Survey in 1936 of the Buldiva-

Collia Area, south of the Lower Daly River, a group of lavas and tuffs with

some sediments was described and named the Collia Series. A description

and map of the area was published (A.G.G.S.N.A., 1937a, and Hossfeld,

19372). (Fig, 3).

The basal beds in some places, notably just west of Collia, are quartzites

containing beds of arleose. Grits are present also, The arkose appears io have

heen derived from the Soldier's Creek Granite which forms large outcrops

in this area. The Collia Series consists mainly of lavas and tufs. Gencrally

these rest unconformably directly on the sediments and intrusives of the

Agicondi Series or on the tilted sediments of the Buldivan Series. The lavas

and tufls range from basic to intermediate types, and some of them contain

appreciable amounts of copper minerals.

Despite the sceplicism expressed by Noakes (1949) and the difference

of opinion indicated by Browne (David and Browne, 1950, p. 23) in amend-

ing the section in the published report (Hossfeld, 1937g) the opinion ex-

pressed in that report by the present writer is being adhered to. This is

supported by Voisey (1939a) who as Assistant Geologist of the N.A. Survey

was responsible for a large proportion of the geological mapping of the

Buldiya-Collia Area. There is no douwht that the Colfia Series which is

horizontal or nearly so, rests unconformably on the eroded, upturned edges

of the sediments of the Buldivan Series. It is, therefore, of Post-Cambrian

146

age, It is overlain by sediments which Were named the Plateau Sandstune

Series (Hossfeld, 1937g) and on the evidence of the discovery of Otozamites

bengalensis, were regarded as of Jurassic age. Later, the age determination

was allered ta Lower Cretaceous, and the formal name changed to Mullaman

Group by Noakes (1949). The Cullia Series, therefore, is Post-Cambrian and

TPre-Cretuceous, No other evidence of its age was discovered. The report,

however, by Teichert (op. cit.) of the existence at the base of the

Cockatoo Sandstones of basalt with an observed thickness of 100 feet, which

is being regarded as possibly of Devonian age, and perhaps at the base of

the Upper Devonian, suggests a possible currelation between the Burt Range

drea of Teichert and the Buldiva-Collia area about 150 miles to the

north-east.

Voleanics have been recorded from many localities in North Australia.

Some of these were listed by H. Y. L. Brown, Woolnough and Jensen.

As was to be expected in a region of which so little was known, interpreta-

‘tions of the ages and correlation of these deposits varied very widely. A

region in which the ancient sediments of the Agicondi Series contain Jarge

amounts of tuffs and tuffaceous material and probably lava flows, a region

jn which volcanics occur in some localities in the Cambrian sequence, and

which experienced Post-Cambrian vulcanism, regional reconnaissance did

nut supply in many instances the information necessary for the age deter-

inination and correlation of widely scattered outcrops:

The evidence accumulated over many decades has shown, however, that

there are a very large number of discontinuous outcrops, some widely

scattered, occupying both large and small areas, which are volcanics that

appear to occupy a stratigraphical position above the knowa Cambrian

sediments, Their mode of occurrence varies widely. In many instances they

form: the higher sectors of the landscape as in the Willeroo-Victoria River

Downs-Wave Hill region, in the Nutwood Downs area and others. Accord-

ing to Brown and Jensen in sotrie areas they appear to occupy “erasion

hollows” in the Cambrian limestones. There are large ureas where they

outcrop along the escarpments only of mesas and tablelands, the scarps

being due to the younger “Lower Cretaceous sediments.” Even today when

they have been denuded from very large areas, they outcrop and probably

occur beneath younger sediments over a large part of North Australia. I

is improbable that they were ever continuous over the major part of North

Australia, but they covered apparently a very large terrain. Some of the

occurrences may be identified eventually with the Cambrian deposits, but

many are regarded tentatively as of Post-Cambrian age.

The intense volcanic activity in Eastern Australia during the

Devonian Period may well have extended to a less degree into North

Australia. The classification of the Collia Series and its equivalents in North

Australia as Middle to Upper Devonian is a tentative onc, but at present

no evidence ts available for an earlier or later time.

H. CARBONIFEROUS

Recks of this period are known only from the Burt Range Basin

where they cross from Western Australia into the Northern Territory.

Nothing is known of their further extension eastward, but the total area

within which they outcrop is likely to be small, unless other basins are

discovered. The Carboniferous sediments of the Burt Range Basin in West-

ern Australia have not been examined in detail and at present only 350 feet

of Bryozoan limestone is known. As this limestané eaverlics the sandstones

believed to be the highest members of the Devonian, and by inference, the

Carboniferous sediments are conformable, the latter probably are of Lower

Carboniferous age.

147

I. PERMIAN

Permian rocks are known from the north-western part of ihe Northern

Territory and in other areas some sediments are assigned tentatively to

that period.

Tue Porr Keats Districr

Fossils were found first at Fossil Head, on the northern shore of a

creek estuary north of the mouth of the Fitzmaurice River, by Commander

Stokes in 1839. The outcrops of this and adjacent areas were examined and

described later by H. Y. L. Brown (1906), According to Brown, the Fossil

Head outcrop ‘exhibits the most typical section of Permo-Carboniferous

beds to be seen along the north-western coast of the Northern Territory.”

The beds consist of sandstone, shale and sandrock. Current bedding and

ripplemarks were observed in some of the heds, and the fossiliferous portions

are lenticular, The lower beds are richly fFossiliferous and the fossils

are pseudomorphs of limonite. The beds are practically horizontal with a

very low dip to the westward. The area was tested for coal by several bores.

One bore penetrated 1,500 feet of sediments, and was presumed to be in

Permo-Carboniferous (Permian) beds at that depth. The obesrvation by

Brown that some of the beds in the lower part of the sequence were cal-

careous or limestones, suggests the possibility of the bore having entered

pembtisg beds of the Buldivan Series or the still older beds of the Davenport

eries.

The fossil assemblage indicates affinity with Permian heds in the Desert

and North-west Basins of Western Australia.

The Permian beds of the Port Keats District were given the formal

name of Port Keats Group by Noakes (1949).

The bores did not succeed in proving the existence of workable coal

seams, but in view of the penetration in one bore of a little coal, such a

discovery is not impossible.

The recent work of Mattheson and Teichert (1945) along the Western

Australian border towards the Keep River in the vicinity of latitude 16° S.,

strongly suggests the extension of beds of this age towards. the mouth of

the Victoria River. The areas where they may occur have been indicated bv

the present writer on the geological map, Much of this region consists of

swampy alluvium beneath which the Permian sediments probably continue.

The presence in the Victoria River region of rocks believed to belong

ta the Collia Series, and also of sediments of the Lower Cretaceous Epoch,

and the absence of marked deformation in any Post-Cambrian rocks, will

necessitate detailed field and palaeontological work to separate and map

the different groups.

Tur Burt RANGE BaAsIn

Mattheson and Teichert (1945) discovered in this area a sequence

separated from the Carboniferous Bryozoan limestone by a very slight un-

conformity. The beds consist of conglomerate at the base, succeeded by

coarse-grained sandstone and several hundred feet of higher beds which

could not be examined on that occasion, They are being regarded tentatively

as of Permian age.

OrHer Areas tn Nortu AUSTRALIA

A. wide-spread group of sediments occurring in North Australia from

the virinity of the Western Australian to the Queensland border which hail

been named by the writer “The Plateau Sandstone Series,” have been given

the formal name of Mullaman Group (Noakes, 1949), They were regarded

hy H. ¥, L. Brown (1908) in part at least as Lower Cretaceous. Jensen and

148

others considered them.as probable Permo-Carboniicrous beds, but Brown’s

original age classification was confirmed by later palacontological evidence,

and they will be discussed therefore, in a later section.

The oceurrence in North Australia, within the Proterezvic Kimberley

Basin, of very gently inclined sediments of Permian age, the Port Keats

Group, suggests that possibility also in the similar Proterazoic basin, the

Carpentaria Basin, This suggestion receives some support from the existence

in the coastal region of the Gulf of Carpentaria, of horizontal or gently in-

clined sediments which differ from the “Lower Cretaceous beds” of the

adjacent tablelands. Brown (19084) reports the discovery in a shaft of black

carbonaceous shale similar to that obtained from a bore in Permian beds

at Port Keats. Jensen (Cwlth, Atst. 1914a, Bull, No, 10) reports fossil wood

resembling Calamites and some specimens resembling Lepidodendron. The

present writer Suggests therefore, the strong possibility that Permian

deposits exist in the coastal region of the Gulf of Carpentaria and continue

eastwards into Queensland beneath rocks of Lower Cretaceuus age,

THe FInKe SERIES

Near the central portion of the southern border of the Northern Territory

in approximately Lat. 254 S., terrestrial deposits containing glacial sediments

exist in the vicinity of and along the River Finke. They have been described

by yarious authors including Brown (1905), David and Howchin (1923),

Ward (1925) and Chewings (1935), They outcrop along the slopes of many

buttes and mesas, some of the Jattcr of very large dimensions. Their occur-

rence ig that of residuals of a former continuous formation, now reduced

by dissection and lying unconformably on the folded sediments of the

Amadeus Geesyncline, Their outcrops extend probably from the southern

flanks of the James Range south to the South Australian border and beyond,

They dip gently in a south-easterly direction beneath the Mesozoic sediments

of the Great Artesian Basin, and are generally believed to act as intake

beds of that basin, The area in which they may occur, has a length

from north-west to south-east of about 15 miles. Their knawn lateral

extent is very variable, but may be estimated at an average of 50 miles.

Continuation much further to the west than is indicated on the accom-

panying map is unlikely. The observation, however. of the gradual merging

eastwards of these mesas with the sands of the Simpson Desert, indicates

that the Finke Series may continue to the east much further than is generally

believed.

The lower members consist of glacial tills and sands with thin lenticular

beds of conglomerate and argillaceous sandstone, a total thickness of at least

100 feet. and are overlain by at least 2,000 feet of porous sandstones. The

terrestrial glacial origin of the lower beds is undoubted, but in the absence

of fossil evidence there exist differences of opinion as to their age. Browne

(David and Browne, 1950) considers them to be Carboniferous or Permian,

Talbot and Clarke (1917) considered a possible correlation with the Wilkin-

son Range Series of Western Australia and of the supposed Lower Cretace-

ous glaciation of Northern South Australia, However, it is generally believed

that they are of Palaeozoic age, and tu be carretated, even though tentatively,

with glacial depositis of Lower Permian age in Southern Australia.

THE Evuiotr Creek Formation

In the Elliott Creek area, north of the Daly River, Noakes (1949)

mapped sediments to which he gave the above formal name. The beds con-

sist of thin beds of sandstones, shale and limestone, which lie horizontally

149

in most of the few available outcrops examined, No fossils were found, and

a minimum thickness of 500 feet is suggested. On general grounds these

heds are regarded as of late Palaeozaic age,

J. TRIASSIC

No rocks of this period have been recognized in the Northern Territory:

Browne (David and Browne, 1950) suggests that the porous sandstones

which aggregate the total of at least 2,000 feet above the glacial beds of

the Finke Series may be Triassic (?) and Jurassic. In several localities to

the west of the railway line, especially in the area west of Charlotte Waters,

a number of buttes and small mesas consist of horizontal or nearly horizontal

sediments lying on the Finke Series. They are almost certainly Mesozoic

and may perhaps be regarded, in part at least, as of Triassic age, with

possibly Jurassic beds above.

K. JURASSIC

Outcrops of Jurassic Age have not been recognized definitely anywhere

within the Northern Territory. Their existence, however, is known in the

south-western sector, as aquifers of the Great Artesian Basin.

Outecrops of Jurassic rocks of the Great Artesian Basin are known lo

the south of the Territory border in South Australia, but haye not been

identified with certainty to the north of that border.

Sands‘ overlying the glacial beds of the Finke Series at Yellow Cliff

may be Jurassic in part, and some of the sandy beds to the west of Charlotte

Water may be of that age.

The existence of Jurassic sediments has been proved at depth by water-

bores deilled in the Artesian basin. j

The greatest thickness recorded from a water-bore which, however, did

fot penetrate the complete sequence, is 860 feet (Ward.1925). The sands

are of lacustrine origin and contain lignitic material. The total thickness

in the Territory sector of the basin is not known, but on the evidence of

the few bores, chiefly near the margin of the basin, appears to be somewhat

variable as would be expected of marginal deposits.

Although surface outcrops have not been recognized, the available

evidence suggests that the limits of the Jurassic sediments, at or near the

surface are marked approximately by the north-western margins of the

extensive aeolian sands and sand-dunes of the Simpson Desert (Madigan,

1938) which may, however, cover also large expanses of the Finke Series.

On Paddy’s Hole Plain, south of Arltunga in the Eastern Macdonnell

Ranges, the silicified stems of osmundaceous plants have been recorded as

weathered out from isolated flat-topped hills (Madigan, 1933, 1937). These

are regarded generally as belonging to the Mesozoic Era, and may belong to,

or he derived from Jurassic or Cretaceous outliers of the Artesian Basin.

IL, CRETACEOUS

The existence of marine sediments of Mesozoic age at Point Charles

near Darwin, was recorded as early as 1895 and further work was done in

that and adjacent paris of the coast in subsequent years. (Brown, 1895 and

1906). The occurrence of rocks of similar age was recorded also from the

southern parts of Bathurst and Melville Islands north of Darwin, To these

sediments, Noakes (1949) has given the name Darwin Formation,

At some distance inland, sediments forming mesas and bultes and very

extensive tablelands occur at intervals over a large portion of North Aus-

tralia, They have been recognized as far south at Lat, 18 5., and extend

150

almost from the Western Australian border across the Northern Territory

to the Queensland border. These sediments were referred to in the past by

various writers as the Plateau Sandstones and were assigned a Permo-

Carboniferous age (Jensen and Woolnough) and a Lower Cretaceous age

(Brown), They were given the formal name of Plateau Sandstone Series

(Hossfeld, 1937), This name has been changed to Mallaman Group by

Noakes (op, cit.) who included in it the Point Charles beds and related

sediments of the coastal region (Darwin Formation), The terms and correla-

tion adopted by Noakes are used in the present paper for the sake of con-

venience, but such use does not imply compicte acceptance of his conclusions.

Far too little work has been done on the group, and the few localities from

which fossiis have been collected are too widely spaced for the formation

of general conclusions of what is admittedly a difficult group.

The maxtmum recorded thickness of this group appears to be about

200 feet, but a total of 100 feet is probably nearer the average. The proun

appears to vary considerably in thickness, and within short distances in

some localities; in others it appears to be very uniform. Much of this varia-

tion in thickness appears ta have been due to deposition on a slightly

irregular landscape. That the land surface on which the group was deposited

was one of predominantly low relicf is unquestionable. However, that some

rejief existed in restricted areas at feast is shown by various features which

will be referred to in the discussion which follows. The sediments of the

group were examined in detail in the Buldiva-Collia area and extracts from

the report on that area (Hossfeld, 1937g) are quoted herewith:

“In the Buldiva-Collia area the Plateau Sandstone Series consists of

sedimentary rocks lying almost horizontally on an uneven surface af the

older rocks. Erosion has exposed the older rocks in many places, the Plateau

Sandstones standing above the getieral level as mesas and buttes in the

intérvening area. The characteristic topography of the mesas and buttes

is due ta the horizontal bedding and vertical jointing of the sandstones. The

level surfaces of the mesas and buttes may indicate a former continuous

peneplain,

The basal beds of the Plateau Sandstone Series vary considerably in

texture, composition and thickness according to the nature of the underlying

rock and the former surface relief heneath and adjacent to the area. of

deposition.”

“The plant remains referred to above, and on the evidence of which a

Jurassic age is assigned to the Plateau Sandstone Series, were collected in

a fine-grained white sandstone or siltstone immediately overlying the tin-

bearing conglomerate, These white sandstones and siltstones have been

transformed in places to porcelianites and ribbon stones. They form a per-

sistent horizon and supply good marker beds, The underlying beds cannot

be used for this purpose as they vary in thickness, owing to the irregular

surface on which they were deposited, and in composition which is dependent

on that of the underlying rocks.”

At Buldiva, plant remains were collected by the N.A. Survey and identi-

fied as Otozamites bengalensis by Dr. A. B. Walkom, who suggested a

Jurassic age for the sediments. The determination of radiolaria from the

Darwin Formation and the examination of the macro-fossils collected, has

resulted in the classification of that Formation as probably of Albian age,

Since, according tc Noakes (op. cit.) the Darwin Formation overlies con-

formably the other members of the Mullaman Group and in which the’plant

remains were found, the age of the latter suggested by him is Lower Cretace-

ous and not Jurassic, Duting 1938 and again in 1939, marine fossils were

181

collected by A. W. Kleeman and the writer in the Mullaman Group from

Yeuraiba, a locality within the Arnhem Land Region. The fossils were too

pnorly preserved for delermination.

It is possible that future investigations will support the division by

Noakes of the Mullaman Group into a lower, lacustrine facies and an upper

marine facies. Within the present writer's knowledge, hawever, plant remains

have been collected from only three pr four localities and from horizons

which cannot be correlated stratigraphically. Marine fossils have been

recognized at a few places only. Obviously no such generalizations as are

put forward by Noakes can be supported on a few isolated occurrences over

such a wide area. The examination of the sequence in the Buldiva-Collia

area, at Yeuralba, Pine Creek and south of Birdum by the present writer

suggests that the whole of the group may well be of marine origin, and that

sma!l estuarine and fluviatile deposits were responsible for the few remains

of Otezamites, the only plant identified from these beds.

Because of overlap, terrestrial deposits. and a few durable plant remains

would be preserved near the base of the group, but in successively younger

beds. Conditions at Buldiva where high level cassiterite-bearing gravels

occur near, but fot at the base of the sequence, indicate fluviatile deposits,

possibly resorted by wave action. The plant remains were discovered just

ahove this horizon,

It is suggested here that the group was deposited as a result of a

gradually transgressive epeiric sea which finally extended over the whole

of North Australia at least as far south at lat. 18. S. Deposition probably

commenced in late Jurassic times and continued inta the Lower Cretaceous.

It was continuous apparently with the Lower Cretaceous sea of Queensland

and the adjoining States, in the region which was to become the Great

Australian Artesian Basin. Emergence of North Australia from the Lower

Cretaceous sea probably by negative moverient of sea-level, left the sedi-

ments in a horizontal to sub-horizontal position, in which they are today

over very large areas. The region therewpon became a plain, old at birth

and without experiencing the very long continuous erosion which was

necessary ta produce the peneplanation of diverse rock types and structures

over the greater part of Australia during the Mesozoic Era. The region

formed then a part of the Great Australian Peneplain, The porosity of the

sediments ensured the absorption of the greater portion of the rainfall then

as it does today, and the gradua) loss by evaporation of the greater part

during the long dry seasons, The porosity of the sediments is shown by

the existence of the exceedingly numerous springs which issue from the

beds of the group wherever they and the basement rocks have been exposed

by dissection. .

One very marked feature observed concerns the vegetation developed

on the sedimeuts of the Plateau Sandstones, It js sbvious that the poor and

very porous soil and sediments would develop a flora specially adapted to

such an environment. It is rematkable, however, that over a very large

proportion of the region the only tree which will grow on these rocks is

Lancewood. This occurs as @ thick forest cover and in pure plant communi-

ties. There are many areas it is true, where the existence of the Mullaman

Group is regarded as certain beneath the surface soil, but where Lancewood

does not exist, These are areas where for various reasons soi] cover is ton

deep or unsuitable for the growth of Lancewood, No areas were observed,

however, where Lancewood does exist, which could not with reastnable

certainty be regarded as underlain by the Mullaman Group, The above

remarks apply to the region south of approximately the laticude of Maranboy.

132

Further north, the average rainfall apparently is too high for the ascetic

Lancewood, To the north of Maranboy and other areas of similar rainfall,

Lancewood is still associated with these beds but instead of growing on the

level summits of the mesas and tablelands as it does further south in the

drier region, it grows only on the scree slopes beneath the sandstone escarp-

ments.

The observation and confirmation of this predilection of Lancewood

for the sediments of the Plateau Sandstones facilitated greatly the ground

and aerial reconnaissance of the region. The dark foliage and general density

of the forest cover, made it easy to recognize the timber at great distances

and enabled the writer to map many areas of these sediments. It was possible

to confirm by actual inspection so many of these occurrences, that no doubt

remains of its general applicability.

Tse Great AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN

Lower Cretaceous sediments of marine origin underlie the extreme

south-eastern corner of the Territory, Outcrops have been examined and

described from the vicinity of Charlotte Waters and aa far north as Mount

Daniel. Owing to the prevalence of recent aeolian sands, little is known of

the greater part of the boundaries of the basin in this region. The sediments

consist predominantly of dense, blue shales with some thin calcareous bands,

and are fossiliferous in some localities. They have been studied, largely from

bore samples, in the adjacent areas of South Australia and Queensland, and

have been assigned to the Tambo Series, They are believed to underlic

the region known as the Simpson Desert.

Tt is possible that Paddy’s Hole Plain, south of Arltunga, may be under-

lain, in part at least, by Cretaceous sediments, forming a northern outlier

of the Great Basin.

Lying above the Lower Cretaceous sediments of the basin, there are

dissected remnants of sediments correlated with the Winton Series, of Upper

Cretaceous age. These form mesas and buttes and consist of horizontal beds,

capped by duricrust, and indicate the stage to which dissection has reduced

the level of the former peneplain.

Tue Burt Trouce

The continuity of the surface outcrops of the Archaeozoic rocks of the

Arunta Complex is interrupted by a number of plains, covered by recent

soils and sands, The largest of these is the Burt Plain (Birt Plain of Jensen,

1944). (Pls. IIT, 2 and TV, 1), The severe topography exhibited by the Archae-

ozoic rocks north of Alice Springs terminates. abruptly at about 12 miles at

the southern margin of the Burt Plain, which in this sector has a north-south

width of about 50 miles. It terminates a few miles tu the east, but extends

westwards for at least 200 miles. Its furthest western limits have not beetr

efined,

Ground teconnaissance, and observations from the air by the writer.

for a distance of about 100 miles along the northern and southern margins

of the plain, as well as the study of aerial photographs, indicate that the

Sh akees part and perhaps the whole of the Burt Plain is bordered by faults,

(PI. ITT, 2.)

The examination of samples from the 16 mile bore (Hossfeld, 1933},

showed that in this locality, which is close to the southern margin of the

plain there exists a considerable thickness of sediments, which are immensely

younger than the Archaeozojc rocks which form the northern, eastern and

southern boundaries of the plain,

E53

s0[q eAEIASNH IW saag Buy

Najduioy eWunsy jo suonEWLOY pio

(sae japlo) |

SassiaUy, jee Sa}UeIC) Japjo) Sassiaug, aiitescy

si Sa el aan aie a note = TR SI rc adioar

xajduioy eyuNIy jO SuoNeuLoy JoMaN

wom mee a = = Snag Ipuoosy

Salag Ipuollsy

so" " saduey uueusajeq > por SS TTT gauiag oduaarg

dUEIN) psielaag

stiles ELINIDEI |

$31499 BYeIEIg

Sa}lag e}1008}19q lenquiey S WEALD NG

Saplag ouuideiey URDIAOPIO £

Sofleg eielnjiog =F. | tWeldinyi

| na: |

Pjoojoa10g (i)

im d ura ‘useg a3ury jing ‘dios

By PA Omula (e) —— eS

Sr fal as tal liad Sali ar

JaMO7] ,S849G auojspueg near,

UISEG UeIsayIy 3eo1ry snoasezaiy ‘spag, Ssajizy julog pue dnoig uewriny

cc) wT

a pms ae ee

HO] eBunsy yorgq eyunsy jo sziwy

yO wos ‘eypessny jesuasy powag pue esa } WAIYIINOS OF BYeIYSNY [CAIWID ‘eyesjsHy YON

‘ |

f10WAIIT, UTeyjJoNY ayy Jo Adojouosyy [eosojoay

I] 31av

154

The total thickness of the sediments penctrated by the bore is 639 feet

with a small possible extension, The sediments consist predominantly of

shale with some beds of grit,

The shales vary from gritty types to very fine material, They include

black carbonaceous shales al several horizons but especially between 515

and 569 feet. Below GI7 feet the sediments contain large amounts of mica

and below 639 the samples consists of fragments of mica schist indicating

either thal Archaeozoic bedrock had been reached, or that this was not

far below.

No fossils were obtained from the bore samples, but the materials from

322 to 639 feet indicate a lacustrine origin and suggest affinities with the

Winton Series.

The thickness penetrated and the nature of the sediments suggest the

strong probability of considerable fateral extent of this formation. The

probability that there exists here a sub-artesian basin of considerable area,

is increased by the amount of water under pressure which has been shown

to exist in the more porous beds.

The existence of carbonaceous shales indicates the possibility of the

discovery of economically important coal deposits.

Little is known of the attitude of the beds, which on general evidence

appear to be sub-horizontal and inclined ta the westwards. Indications are

that some at least of the sediments will prove to be lentictilar in shape. The

discovery of, or failure to discover coal in any one locality must not be

regarded, therefore, as typical of the whole of the Burt Plain. Water supplies

also may be found to occur at various. depths in different bores, and at more

than one horizon in one bore. It is an area which in its water contents and

potential coal deposits, deserves systematic sub-surface exploration. ,

The potability of the water from the 16-mile Bore may be ascribed

possibly to the existence of a western outlet. Ata distance of about 70 miles

to the west of the eastern margin of the Burt Plain, there commences a

series of salt lakes and swamps which continue in a narrow belt for more

than q hundred miles further west. (Plate TV, 1.) Aerial examitation of these

shallow depressions indicates that many are fed by springs issuing from their

higher marginal areas. The writer believes that this zone of salt lakes

and swamps which occupy an area of considerably lower altitude than that

further east, is supplied to a large extent by water discharged from the

basin underlying the Burt Plain and that it is this discharge which has

permitted the existence of potable water in the basin, The gradual but con-

sistent decrease in altitude of the surface of the Burt Plain from east to

west, estimated at an ayerage fall of 35 inches per mile, is believed to

represent fairly closely the inclination of the underlying sediments, That

being so, it follows that there would be a slow, but constant movement of

subterrancan water in that direction. It is true that the run off from the

ridges of older rocks, which form the northern and seuthern margins of the

plain will supply some water to the belt of lakes and swamps, but this is

considered to be a minor contribution,

The most suitable name for the structural feature, the filling of which

has produced the Burt Plain, is the Burt Trough. The existence, on the

border of Western Australia, in the extreme north-west of North Australia,

of the Burt Range, resulted in the structural name of Burt Range Basin

given to the sediments of that area (Mattheson and Teichert, 1945). How-

ever, in view-of the occurrence of the Burt Trough in Central Australia,

the tame proposed should not be confusing. Should it be so regarded, the

135

alternative name “Stuart Trough” is being suggested for obvious historical

and geographical reasons.

Two similar basins, the Plenty atid the Hale Plains, appear to be

connected structurally with the Burt Plain. Both exhibit faulted boundaries,

in part at least, and appear to be continuations of the fracture system

responsible for the Burt Trough.

No evidence is available to the writer of the material underlying the

Vlenty Plain, which is believed, however, to be merely an extension of the

Burt Plain and to have had a similar histery. (Fig. 2).

The occurrence on the Hale and Plenty Plains, and elsewhere in Central

Australia, of lacustrine sediments of Tertiary age, the Arltunga Series (Madi-

gan, 1933), indicates that the underlying sediments were at least of older

Tertiary and probably of Mesozotc age. .

The penetration by a bore of a seam of lignite 12 fect thick in the Hale

Trough, suggests that the sediments of that basin are of Tertiary age and

depésits of Cretaceous age may occur. The osmundaceous plant remains

fram the nearby Paddy's Hale Plain recorded by Madigan (1932b) suggest

such a possibility. Other basins probably exist in Central Australia, and

the Bundey, Sandover and Hanson Rivers are suggested as possibilities. No

evidence is available and the writer does not contend, that the Burt, Plenty

and Hale Troughs referred to and others which may be discovered were

completely co-épochal in their formation. It is believed, however, that the

basins ate not older than Upper Mesozoic.

The subsidiary basins of the Plenty and Hale Plains are being drained,

though imperfectly, by the rivers of the same names. The Burt Plain itself,

however, despite its relatively high altitude, stated to approximate 2400 feet

near its eastern limits, is still a basin of internal drainage which has been

protected from dissection by the higher ridges of ancient rocks forming

its borders,

The reference by Jensen (1944), to this plain as the “Birt Plain pene-

plain” is cpposed to the geological and topographical evidence. King (1950)

has linked, the Burt Plain and the Missionary Plain with the “Australian”

pediplam. The Missionary Plain may be such a continuation, as may the

extensive peneplaned areas north and north-west of the Arunta Block, The

Burt Plain, however, represents the filling by sediments of a high-level lake

and its formation was considerably above the pediplain and had no con-

nection with its formation.

M. CAINOZOIC

Detailed studies of the Cainozoic deposits uf the Northern Territory

have been published for a few small areas only. The deposits are pre-

dominantly of terrestrial origin and age determinations will be difficult to

establish. Division into Tertiary and Quaternary Periods is impossible at

present in many instances.

No marine deposits of ‘Tertiary age +have been recorded from the

Territory, Such deposits, however, may underlie some of the extensive

coastal plains of the north and west, but if such exist, they would belong,

probably, to Upper Tertiary Times.

Pleistocene to Recent marine deposits have beer observed on the north

and west coast (Noakes, 1949). They appear to he connected chiefly with

world-wide eustatic strandline movements due to glaciations and de-

gilaciations.

Deposits of lacustrine and fluviatile origin exist in mary areas and

indicate extensive lake development during one or more pluvial periods,

156

Deeply eroded stream channels now filled with alluvitim and aeolian deposits

are another indication of former greater rainfall.

Other climatic changes are indicated by the extensive development

af evenly spaced sand dunes, enormous areas of sand plain and large tracts

covered with loessia] material. The present fixation by vegetation of these

aeolian deposits indicates subsequent changes as do the occurrences of

various plant communities, separated from each other by long distances,

The description, discussion, development of the terrestrial deposits of

the Northern Territory and the information which they supply of diastro-

phism and climatic changes are being reserved for a subsequent paper.

Ill, REFERENCES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

Published by arrangement with the Author —Ep.

The following list is not exhaustiye and is restricted to those publications to which

ireet refererice is made in the text and to those which were used for general reference.

.S.N.A, 1936a Aer. Geol, and Geophys. Sury. N. Aust, Report for Period ended

30 June 1935

1936b Idem, 31 December 1935

1936c Idem, 30 June 1936

1937a Idem, 31 December, 1936

1937b Idem, 30 june 1937

1938a Idem, 31 December 1937

1938b Idem, 30 June 1938

19392 Idem, 31 December 1938

193% Idem, 30 June 1939

1949a Idem, 31 December 1939

1940b Idem, 30 June 1940

.S.N.A. 1941 Idem, 31 December 1940

Anprews, E, C. 1937 The Structural History of Australia during the Palaeozoic. Journ.

and Proce: Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 71

Basenow, H. 1905 Geological Report on the Country traversed by the South Australian

Government North-West Prospecting Expedition, 1903. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 29

Basepow, H. 1917 Physical, Geographical and Geological Reports of the Western Rivers

District, Roy. Geogr. Soc. Aust., S. Aust. Branch, 18

Basrpow, H, 1920 Geological Reports an the Petermann Ranges, Central Australia. Geogr.

DAA A

ANAAMARANA

Nnnnnnnninunn

ZzZAzAzZzazaz

PPP PPP Pr p>

POPP >>> >>>> >

ARAAAHAD

Journ.

Busses, [E 1927 Geology af Portions of the Kimberley District. Geol. Surv. W. Aust.

ull. 93

Brown, H, ¥_L. 1889 Government Geologist’s Report on a Journey from Adelaide to

Hale River. S. Aust. Par}. Pap., No. 24

Brown, H, ¥. L. 1890a Report on Journey from Warrina to Musgrave Ranges. S. Aust:

Parl, Pap. No. 45

Brown, H. ¥. L. 1890b Report of Geological Examimation of Country in the Neighbour-

hood of Alice Springs. S. Aust, Parl, Pap,, No. 18

Brown, H, ¥. L. 1895 Government Geologist's Report on Explorations in the Nerthern

Territory. S, Aust. Parl, Pap., No. &

Brown, H. Y, L, 1896 Reports on Arliunga Goldfield, ete, S, Aust: Parl. Pap. No. 127

Brown, H. Y. L. 1902 Report on the White Range Goldmines, Arltunga Goldfield. S. Aust,

Parl, Pap., No. 76

Brown, H, Y. L. 1903a Northern Territory of South Australia; Report on Cotintry fe-

cently examined im the Davenport and Murchison Ranges, etc. S, Aust. Parl, Pan.,

‘ uw

Brown, H. Y. L. 1903b Northern Territory of South Australia: Report on the Gold Dis-

coveties near Winnecke’s Depot, etc. S. Aust. Parl. Pap., No, 59

Brown, H. ¥. L. 1905 Report on Geological Explorations in the West atid North-west of

South Australia, ete. S. Aust. Parl. Pap., No. 71

Baown, H. Y. L. Basenow, H., and Gee, L. C. E. 1906 Northern Territory of South

Australia, North-western District, etc. S. Aust, Parl, Pap., No. 55

Brown, H, Y. EL. 1907 Record of Boring Operations in the Northern Territory, ete.

S. Aust. Parl, Pap. No. 54

Brown, H. Y. L. 1908a Northern Territory of South Australia: North and Eastern Coasts.

S. Aust. Parl. Pap, No, 25

157

Brown, H, Y. L. 1908p Norther Territory o£ South Australia; Government Geologist's

Report on Recent Mineral Discoveries, etc. S. Aust. Parl, Pap., No, 85

Buown, H. ¥. L, 1909 Government Geologist's Report om the Tamatni Gold Country.

& Aust. Parl. Pap, No. 105

Bryan, W. H. and Jonus, 0. A. 1945 The Geological History of Queensland, Unty, Qld,

Dept. Geol. Papers, 2, (12)

Camegzon, W, E, 1900a Post-Tertiary Limestones of the Barkly Tableland, Ain, Prog.

Rept. Geol, Survy,, Qld, for 1900 ;

Cameron, W. E, 1900b Geological Observations in North-western Queensland. Jhtd

Uaewines, Goa The Sources of the Finke River. Reprinted from the Adel Observer,

elaide

Crewincs, C 1891 Geological Notes on the Upper Finke Basin, Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust,

Cuewines, C, 1894 Notes ot the Sedimentary Rocks in the Macdonnell and Jame: Ranges.

Trans, Roy, Soc, S, Aust. 18

air C, 1914 Notes on the Stratigraphy of Central Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc.

Anst, 38

Cuewrnes, C. 1928 Further Notes on the Stratigraphy of Central Australia. Trans. Roy.

Soc S. Aust, 52

Cuewinos, C.. 1931 A Delineation of the Precambrian Plateau in Central and North Aus-

tralia, ete. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 55

Caewinos, C. 1935 The Pertatataka Series in Central Australia, with Notes on the Amadeus

Sunkland. Trans. Roy Soc. S Aust, 59

CoMMONWEALTH OF AUSTRALIA: Bulletins of the Northern Territory 19124 Report of Pre-

liminary Scientific Expedition Dept. Ext, Affairs, Bull. No. 1

COMMONWEALTH OF AUSTRAIIA: Bulletins of the Northern Territory 1912b Report of the

raed Bay Prospecting Party (May-September 1911). Dept. Ext. Affairs, Bull,

0 3

CoMMONWEALTH OF AusIRALIA: Bulletins of the Northern Territory 1912c Report on the

Geology of the Northern Territory by W. G. Woolnough, Dept. Ext. Aff. Bull, No. 4

CoMMONWEALTH OF AUSTRALIA; Bulletins of the Northern Territory 19144 Geolowical Re-

port on the Darwin Mining District, McArthur River District and the Barkly Table-

land, by H. I. Jensen, Dept. Ext, Aff, Bull. No. 10

COMMONWEALTH OF AUSTRALIA: Bulletins of the Northern Territory 1914h Progress Re-

Report on the Geological Survey of the Pine Creek District, hy H. I. Jensen and

T. G. Oliver, Dept, of Ext. Aff. Bull, No. 104

COMMONWEALTH OF AUSTRALIA: Bulletins of the Northern Territory 1915a Report om the

Maranbpy Tinfield by G. J, Gray and H. I. Jensen, Dept. Ext. Aff. Bull. No. 11

ComMMONWEALTH OF AUSTRALIA: Bulletins of the Northern Territary 1915b Report on Dia-

mond Drilling in the Northern Territory, by H. T. Jensen, Dept. Ext, AM Bull

No. 12

COMMONWEALTH OF AUsrrALIA; Bulletins of the Northern Territory 1915¢ Report on

Country between Pine Creelc and Tanami. Reconnitissance of Arnhem Land, etc, by

H, 1. Jensen, G. J. Gray and R. J. Winters, Dept. Ext. Aff. Bull, No, 14

ComMONWEALTH OF AUSTRALIA! Bulletins of the Northern Territory 19162 Report on Yen-

berric Wolfram avd Molybdenite Field, by G. J. Gray and R. J. Winters, Dent.

Ext Aff, Bull. No. 154

Commonweattm or Austrarta: Bulletins of the Northern Territory 1916b "The Geology

of the Woggaman Province by II, 1. Jensen, G. J. Gray and R. J. Winters, Dept.

Ext. Aff. Bull. No. 16

ComMonweaLty or Austratta: Bulletins of the Northern Territory 1916c¢ Report and

Plans of Explorations in Central Australia, by T. E. Day, Dept. Home and Terr.

Bull. No. 20

COMMONWEALTH OF AUSTRALIA: Bulletins of the Northern Territory 1916d Report of In-

spertion on Hatches Creek Wolfram Mines, by T, G, Oliver, Dept. Home and Terr,

Bull. No. 21

Cow MONWEALTR OF AUSTRALIA: Bulletins of the Northern Territory 1919 Report on the

Agicondi Province by H. I. Tensen, Dept. Horne and Terr. Bull, No. 19

CoMMONWEALTH OF AustRaLIA-: Rulletins of the Northern) Tettitory 1936 Report on Tetr-

nant Creek Goldfield, by W. G. Woolnough, Dept. of Interior, Bull No. 22

Crarke, FE, or C, 1930 The Precambrian Succession in some parts of Western Australia.

Rept. Aust. Ass. Adv. Sc. 26 :

Corie, V. M. 1936 Geological Notes on the Britasinia and Zapopan Areas, A.G,G.S.N.A4,

Rept. N, Terr No. 15

Corre, V. M, 1937a Geological Report on the Yam Creek Area. A.G.G-S.N.A. Report

N. Terr No. 10

i158

Cortia, V, M, 1937b The Maude Creek Mining Centre, Pine Creek District AGGS.N.A,

Rept. N. ‘Terr, No. 27

Cortre, V. i. 193%e (seological Report on the Fountain Head Area AG,GS,N.A, Rept.

N. Tetr, No.

COrTLeE, Me M. 1937d The Mount Todd Auriferous Area. A.G.G.S,N.A. Rept. N. Terr,

Danes, J. V. (911 Physiography of some Limestone Areas in Queensland. Proc, Roy, Soc.

Qld, 23, pt. i

Dai, T. W, E, 1932 Explanatory Notes to accompany a new Geological Map of the

Commonwealth of Australia, (Arnold: London)

Davin, T. W. E., and Browne, W. R. 1950 The Geology of the Comtnonwealth of Aus-

tralia, 3 vols, (Arnold; London)

Dav, Sia E., and Howcnim, W. 1923 Reports of Glacial Research Committee: AAAS.

Wellington, 16

Davinsow, A. A. 1905 Journal of Explorations in Central Australia, etc., 1898-1900. 5, Aust.

Parl. Pap. No. 27

Duxstax. B, 1920 North-western Queensland. Qld. Geol. Surv, Publication No. 265

Enwanps, AG. 1938 Tertiary Tholeiite Magma in West Australia. Journ. Roy, Sor.

. Aust, 24

Enwaros, A. B. 1942 Some Basults from the North Kimberley, West Australia, Journ.

Roy. See. W, Aust., 27

Ens, H. A. 1927 Report on the Tanami Goldmine, Tanami Golilfield, N.T.

Euuis, H. A. 1936 Report on some Observations made on a Journey from Alice

Springs, N-T., to the Country North of the Rawlinson Ranges in West Australia,

: ete. Ann. Prog. Rept. Geol. Surv. W. Aust.

Ezzerwor, R., June. Numerous Papers on Palaeontology forming the whole or parts of the

following S. Aust. Parl. Papers: 1895, No. 82; 1896, No, 127; 1905, No. 71; 1906,

No. 55; 1907, Supplement to No. 55 of 1906

BROCAT Bi J. se The Nullagine Conglomerates, Pilbara Goldfield. A.G.G.S.N.A, Rept

. st. OL

Fiuease, K, J. 19382 The Braeside T.ead Field, Pilbara District, Idem. No. 24

Finucane, K, J. 1938b The Hall’s Creek-—Ruby Creek Arca, Mast Kimberley District.

Idem, No. 27

Frxucane, K. J. 1939 The Grant's Creck Gold Mining Centre, East Kimberley District.

Tdem. No, 40

Gee, L. c E. 1911 General Report on Tanami Goldfield and District. S. Aust. Parl, Pap.

o. 31

Grorcr, F, R.; and Murray, W. R.. 1907 Journal of the Government Prospecting Expedition

to the South-western Portions of the Northern Territory by F. R, George, and to the

Buxton and Davenport Ranges, by W, R. Murray. S Aust. Parl, Pap, No, 50

Gres, Ervesr 1876 E. Giles’s Explorations, 1875-6 S. Aust. Parl, Pap, No. 18

RSCARSEN M. FB. ef of 1948 Stratigraphical Nomenclature in Australia, Aust. Journ.

c. xi, 1

Gossz, W. C. 1874 Reports and Diary of Mr. W. C. Gosse’s Facpedition in 1873. 5, Aust,

Parl. Pap, No. 48

Harpman, E, T. 1885 Second Report on the Geology of the Kimberley District, W, Aust.

Parl. Pap. No, 34

Hints, E. S. 1946 Some Aspects of the Tectonics of Australia, Clarke Mem. Lect. Journ

and Prac, Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 79

Hnas, FE. S. 147 The Metalliferous Geochemical Zones of Australia. Econ, Geol, 42

Honce-Smiru, T. 1932 Geological and Mineralogical Observations in Central Australi:

Rec. Aust, Mus, 18

Hoxman, C. S. 1936a The Mt, Freda-Canteen Area, Soldiets Cap, Cloncurry District.

AG.G.S.N.A. Rept, Qld, No. 1

Honan, C. S. 1936b The Gilded Rose Area, Cloncurry District. Idem. No. 2

Hewmax, C. S. 1937 The Soldiers Cap Area, Cloncurry District. Idem, No, 18

Tionman, C. S$, 1938 The Mount Elliott-Harepden Area, Cloncurry District. Idem. No. 22

Hossrern, P. S. 1931 Report on the Jervois Range Mineral Field, Home Affairs Dept. On

official files, not published.

Hossrecp, P. S, 1933a Report on Samples fram 16 Mile Creek Bore, Northern Territory.

Home Affairs Dept.. On official files, not published

Tinssreco, P. S. 1933b Sutnmary Report of the Geology of the Northern Territory. Hame

Affairs Dept. On official files, not published j

Hossrexn, P, 5, 1934 Report on Samples from No. 1 Bore, Alexandria, Northern Terri-

tory. Home Affairs Dept, On official files, not published

Hossrecn, F, S$, 1935a The Geology of part of the Northern Mount Lofty Ranges, Trans,

Roy. Soc. S$. Aust., 59

159

Hossretp, P. 5. 1935b Report on Mica in Central Australia. Prime Minister's Dept, On

official files, not published

Hossrexp, P. S. 1937a Report of the Lake Mackay Relief Expedition. Prime Minister's

Dept. On official files, not published.

Hossrextp, P. §. 1942 Interim Report on the Cosmopolitin Hawley Gold Mine, Bracks

Creek

Hossein, P. S. 1936a The Golden Dyke Mine and adjacent Areas. A-G/G,S.NLA, Rept.

N. Terr. No. 3

Hossrevp, P. §. 1936b The Pine Creek Goldfield. Idem, No. I

HossFety, P. S. 1936¢ The Union Reefs Goldtield, Idem, No, 2

Hossrezo, P. me 1936d The Ciccone Mine, Winnecke Goldfield, Eastem Maedonnell Ranges,

lem, No, 22

Hossreip, P. §. 1937b The Fletcher’s Gully Area, Daly River District, Idem, No. 17

Hossretp, P. §, 1937¢ The Daly River Copper and Silyer-Lead Area, Daly River District,

Idem. No. 19

HossFexp, P. 1937d The Evelyn Silver-Lead Mine, Pine Creek District. Idem, No. 26

Hoss¢ep, P. 1937e Quartz Body at Simpson's Gap, Alice Springs. Idem. No. 21

Hoss¥exp, P. S, 1937 The Iron-Blow Area, Pine Creek District. Idem. No. 14

Hosssep, P. S. 19372 The Tin Deposits of the Bukdiva-Collia Area, Daly River District.

Idem. No. 18

Hossreto, P. S, 1937h The Glankroil Mine, Winnecke Goldfield, Eastern Macdonnell

Ranges District. Idem. No. 39

Hossrenp, P. §. 19371 The Home of Bullion Mine, Central Australia. dem. No. 29

yogis > P. ee 1937} The White Range Goldfield, Eastern Macdormell Ranges District.

Idem. No. 28

Hossreip, P. §. 1937k The he Portion of the Arltunga Arca, Eastern Macdonnell

Ranges District. Idem, No. 20

Hossretp, P, S. 19382 The Wallaby Silver-Lead Lode, Daly River District, Idem, No. 32

Hpsorniat F Bi ae Preliminary Report on The Granites Goldfield, Central Australia,

Idem. No

Hossretp, P, §. 1939 ‘The Mineral Deposits of the Yeuralla Area, near Katherine, Idem,

No. 44 (not published).

Hossrezp, P. S. ae Gold Deposits of the Granites-Tanami District, Central Australia.

demi

Hoare, P. S. 1940b The Winnecke Goldfield, Eastern Macdornell Ranges District. Idem.

o. 40

Hossrexvp, P. S. 1940c ‘The McKinley Gold Mine, Pine Creek District. Idem. No. 46

Hossrecp, P. S, 19414 The Drifheld Area, Pine Creek District. Idem, No. 38

Hoss¥ern, sat S, 1941b Limestone Deposits near Alice Springs, Central Australia. Idem.

Jacx, RB. Lickwaity 1915 The Geology and Prospects. of the Region to the South of the

Musgrave Ranges, etc. Geol, Surv. S. Aust. Bull, No, 5

jJacs, R. Lockuart 1923 The Composition of the Waters of the Great Australian Artesian

Basin in South Australia. and its Sigtificance. Trans: Roy. ‘Soc. S, Aust, 47,

Jensen, H. [. 1940 The Redhank (or Wollogorang) Copper Field, Northern Territory,

A.GGS.N.A. Rept. N. Terr. No. 50

Jensen, H. I 1941 The Lawn Hill Silver-Lead-Zine-Field, Lawn Hill- Wollogorang Dis-

trict. A.G.G.S.N.A, Rept Old. No. 46

Jensen, H. I. 1944 The Geology of Central Australia. Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld, $6

Jensen, H. I, 1945 The Origin, Distribution and Mode of Occurrence of Mica in Central

Australia. Proc. Roy. Sac. Qld, 57

Jones, O, A, 1947 Pres. Address: Ore Genesis in Queensland. Proc. Roy. Soe, Old, $9 pti

Jutson, J. T. 1934 The Physiography (Geomorphology} of Western Australia. Geol. Surv.

W. Aust., Bull. 95

Krex, 5. N. 1941 The Mount Hardy Copper Field, Central Australia. A.A.G.S.N.A. Regt.

N. Terr,, No, 55

Kine, a Pe Nil The Cyclic Land-Surfaees. of Australia, Proc, Roy. Soc. Vict, 62, pt

Kreeman, A. W. 1934 An jpieelte from “The Granites,” Northern Territory. Trans,

Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

Kirrman, A, W, 1937 The ‘Soathern Extension of the Pine Creek Goldfield. A.G.G.S.NLA,

Rept. N, Terr., No, 24

KLEeEeM ne AN 1938a The Wolfram Hill-Hidden Valley Area, Pine Creek District. [dem.

No,

Kicemayn, A, W, 1938) The Horseshoe Creek Tinfield, Pine Creek District. Idem. No. 37

Lewis, T. V. 1938 The Maranhoy Tinfeld, A.G,G.S.N.A, Rept. N. Fers., No, 35

160

Linvsay, D. 1883-84 Explorations through Ambemt Land. §. Aust, Parl Pap. No, 239

Lixngay, D. 1893 Journal of the Elder Scientific Exploring Expedition, Adelaide

Lixnsay, D., and Wiysecke, C. 1898-99 Reports on Northern Territory Tablelands. 5. Aust,

Parl Pap., No. 66

Hapmars De 1934 The Mackay Aetial Survey Expedition, Central Australia. Geogr. Journ,

o 4

Australia. Proc. Roy. Geogr. Soc. Aust. S, Aust Branch, 30

Manan, C. T, 1931 The Physiograpliy of the Western Macdonnell Ranges, Central Aus-

tralia. Geogr. Journ., 78, No. 5

Manican, C, T. 1932a The Geology of the Western Mactlonnell Ranges, Central Australia

J1.G.S. 88

Manica, 4 T. ay The Geology of the Eastern Macdonnell Ranges. Trans, Roy, Soc.

>. Aust,

Manan, C, T. \ 1933 The Geology of the Macdonnell Ranges, ete. Rept. A.N.ZA,A.S., 21

Manscaw, C. T. 1936 The Australian Sandridge Deserts, The Geogr. Review, 26, No. 2

Manioan, C. T. 1937 Addition to the Geology of Central Australia, Rept. ANZAAS.

MAAR oe 1938 “fhe Simpson Desert and its Borders.. Jotirn and Proc, Roy. Soc.

S.W,, 71

Martretson, R. S., and Trrcuert, C. 1945 Geological Reconnaissance in the Eastern Portion

of the Kimberley Division, Western Australia. Ann. Rept. Geol, Surv, W, Aust.

MarTEEryy, We H., 1905a Report on the Macdonnell Ranges Mining District. S. Aust. Part,

ap. No, 50

Matraews, W. H. 19056 Report on the Arltunga and Winsiecke's Goldfields, and Harts

Range Mica Fields. 5, Aust. Parl. Pap., No. 75

Mavrice, R. T. 1904 Extracts fromm Journal of Explorations. S, Aust, Parl, Pap. No 43

Mawson, D., and Manican, C. T. 1930 Pre-Ordovician Rocks of the Macdonnell Ranges,

Central Australia Q.).G.S,, 86, pt. 3

Mawson, D., and Spreicc, R. C. 1950 Aust, Journ. Sci., 13, 3

Mawson, D. 1930 The Occurrence of Potassium Nitrate near Goyder's Pass, Mae-

donnell Ranges, Central Australia, Min. Mag., 22

Mawson, D. 1925 Evidence and Indications of Algal Contributions in the Cambrian

and Precambrian Limestones of South Australia. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust, 49

Mawson, D, 1939 The Late Proterozoic Sediments of South Australia. Rept. A.N.Z.AA.S,

Mawson, D: 1947 The Adelaide Series as developed along the western margin of the

Flinders Ranges. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5, Aust, 71

Miter, W, J. 1923 Precambrian Folding in North America, Bull. Geol. Soc, Amer., #

Mounow-Campaett, J. 1917 Laterite—Its Origin, Structure and Minerals. Min Mag., 17

Noaxes, L. C. 1949 A Geological Reconnaissance of the Katherine-Darwin Region, North-

ern Territory. Cwlth. of Aust. Bur. Min. Res, Bull., No. 16

Oxrver, T. G. 1917) Report on Tananm Goldfield by the Direetor of Mines, Northern Terri-

tory

Parkes, J. V. 1892 Report on Northern ‘Tetritory Mines and Mineral Resources. S, Alst.

Parl. Pap, No. 32

Penoieton, R, L. 1941 Laterite or Sila Laeng, a peculiar Soil Formation. Thar Sc. Bull, 3

Patoer, R. T. 1945 IRyneous Activity, Metamorphism and Ore-Formation in Western AUis-

tralia. Journ Roy. Soc. W. Aust, 31

Rennie, E. H. 1889 On some so-called South Australian Rubies. Trans, Roy. Soc. 5. Aust,

Simpson, E. S. 1912 Notes on Laterite in Western Australia. Geol. Mag., 9

Srmtweu., F. L., and Enwarvs, A, B. 1942 The Mineral Association of Tennant Creek

Gold. Proc, Aust. Inst, Min. Met, N.S. No, 126

Stretcn, V. 1893 Scientific Results Elder Exploring Expedition; Geology. Trans, Roy, Soc

S. Aust. 16, pt. ii

PURER Cc 5. 1540 The Hercules Gold Mine, Pine Creek District, A.G.G.S,N.A. Rept.

. Terr., No.

Sutaran, C. J. 194Sa Mineral Resotitees of Australia. Summary Report No. 18. Beryllien

Sunrwan, C, J. 1945b Ider No, 19. ‘Tantalum and Columbium,

Suttvay, C. J. 1946 Idem, No, 24, Pigment Minerals

District, Northern Territory, Aust, Inst. Min. and Met

Taunor, H. W. B. 1910 Geological Observations in the Country between Wiluna, Hall's

Traus. Roy. Soc, S, Aust, 1954 Vol, 77, Plate I

Fig. 1

Looking south from Alice Springs. Archaeozoic Granite Gneisses in foreground,

Unconformable junction of base of Heavitree (Pertaknurra) Quartzite

marked in black,

Fig. 2

Native Gap, north of Alice Springs, showing faulted northerly dipping sand-

stones, probably part of an overfolded syneline of Pertaknurra age. Looking

east-north-east.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1954 ‘ Vol. 77, Plate If

ete

Fig. 1

Horizontal Ordovician sandstones lying uuconformably on the Arunta Complex

at Barrow Creek. Looking east.

Fig. 2

Faulted margin of the southern edge of the Burt Plain, showing massive outcrops

of the Arunta Complex in the background. Looking south,

Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 1954

Fig, 1

View of part of Burt Plain about 100 miles w

showing some of the numerous salinas of

Vol, 77, Plate

est of the Overland Telegraph Line,

that district. Looking easterly.

eet

goo

The Granites, showing the occurrence of an adamellite monadnock in the sandplain,

Vertical.

All photographs are reproduced by permission of Adastra Airways.

GEOLOGICAL MAP OF THE NORTHERN TERR

ITORY OF AUSTRALIA

ut 9 Ve

Marine , Estuarine,

Fluviatile, Lacustrine,

Aeolian and Duricrust

(MAPPED IN A FEW

AREAS DISREGARDED

WHERE SHALLOW!

BATHURST Id

MESOZOIC

F<. => UPPER CRETACEOUS

} TO JURASSIC of the

Great Artesian Basin

Darwin

PT CHARLES =

TERTIARY

TO CRETACEOUS ?

of Burt Trough, etc

LOWER CRETACEOUS

Mullaman Grcup,

Plateau Sandstones

TRIASSIC ?

PALAEOZOIC

PERMIAN q : : .

Port Keats Group, - 4 c ees ae.

Borroloola Area, ? r ‘ s . 4 4 ae

Finke River Series?

Port Keats

2 14°

DEVONIAN

Burt Range Basin

Collia Series?

ORDOVICIAN

North of Amadeus

Geosyncline.

GULF OF CARPENTARIA

CAMBRIAN | Aa = j a4 ee? q ies Z r = pers ? ‘ Z 4 a Pa)

Buldivan Series H ay . i :

SILURIAN ?-CAMBRIAN

Amadeus Geosyncline.

PROTEROZOIC

UPPER PROTEROZOIC

Pertatataka and

Pertaknurra Series.

Borroloola

Wollogorang Area?

MIDDLE PROTEROZOIC

Davenport Series

Hatches Creek Group

Carpentaria Group

Victoria River Beds ? etc.

LOWER PROTEROZOIC

Agicondi Series

ARCHAEOZOIC

UPPER ARCHAEOZOIC

Hart's Ranges etc?

Riddock Series

LOWER ARCHAEOZOIC

Arunta and Musgrave

| Blocks. Aruntan Series

Acid Igneous Intrusions

Strike Trends

“a Generalized

ARUNTA

? AUSTRALIA.

win

Alice Springs Ms i

SS hal P ™ “ss

ib ; avs

‘ =" *y

GREAT \,

ARTESIAN es

= oo

9°

“>

oo.

aw .

f BASIN

MUSGRAVE we f

40 60 ‘ foul £ Kosafeld. =

. ——=———$ —__—_-——— ns Ss (5p Gi ae

161

Tarnor, H. W. B. 1918 The Geological Results of an Expedition to South Australian

Border, ete. Journ. and Proc, Roy. Soc. W. Aust., 3

Tatnor, H. W. B. 1920 The Geology and Mineral Resources of the North-west, Central

and Eastern Divisions. Geol. Surv. W. Aust. Bull. 83

Taunor, H. W. B,, and Cuarke, E. pe C, 1917 A Geological Reconnaissance of the Country

between Laverton and the South Australian Border. Geol. Surv. W. Aust. Bull, 75

Tare, 1, and Watt, J. 1896 Report of the Horn Expedition to Central Australia. Pili

Geology and Botany

Tricuert, C. 1939 The Mesozoic Transgressions in Western Australia, Aust, Journ, Sci. 2.

No. 3

Tercuert, C, 1947 Stratigraphy of Western Australia. Journ, and Proc, Roy. Soc. N.S.W,,

85 .

Tercuert, C. 1949 Observations on Stratigraphy and Palaeontology of Deyonian, Western

Portion of Kimberley Division, Western Australia. Cwlil, Aust, Bur. Min, Res.

Report, No. 2

Terry, M, 1934 Explorations near the Border of Western Australia. Geog. Journ, 84,

No. 6

TIETKENS, phe 1889. Jourtal of Central Australian Exploring Expedition. 5. Aust, Parl

Pap. No. 115 ’

Trnpate, N. B. 1931 Geological Notes on the Illiaura Country north-east of the Mac-

donnell Range, Central Australia. Trams. Roy Soc. S. Aust, 55

Tinnare, N. B, 1933 Geological Notes on the Cockatoo Creek and Mount Liebig Country,

Central Australia. Trans. Roy, Soc. 5. Aust, 57

Vorsey, A. H. 1937 Geological Report on the Woolwonga Area, Pine Creek District.

A.G.G.5.N.A. Rept. N. Terr. No, 12

Vorsey, A. H. 19391 Notes on the Stratigraphy of the Northern Territory of Australia,

etc. Journ. and Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W,, 72

Vorsey, A. H, 1939b A Contribution to the Geology of the Eastern Macdonnell Ranges,

Central Australia). Ibid

Wane, A. 1924 Petroteum Prospects. Kimberley District of Western Australia and North-

ern Territory. Cwlth. Parl. Pap,, No, 142

Warp, L. K. 1925 Notes on the Geological Structure of Central Australia, Trans. Roy.

Soc. S. Aust.,. 49

Warn, L. K. 1926 Report on Water Supply Facilities on Stock Routes and elsewhere in

the Northern Territory of Australia, Govt. Printer, Melbourne

Weis, L. A. 1907 The Victoria River and the adjacent country. Govt, Printer, Adelaide

Wetts, L, A., and Grorcz, F. R. 1904 Reports on Prospecting Operations in the Musgrave,

Mann and Tomkinson Ranges. S. Aust. Parl. Pap., No, 54

Warrenouse, F. W.. 1928 The Correlation of the Marine Cretaceous Deposits of Aus-

tralia, A.A.A.S., 18 ;

Warrenousr, F. W. 1940 Studies in the Late Geological History of Queensland. Univ.

Qld. Papers, Geol. Dept., 2 (N-S.), 1 ;

Warrenouse, F. W. 1941 The Surface of Western Queensland, Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld, 53

Witson, A. F. 1947 The Musgrave Ranges—an Introductory Account. Trans. Roy. Sac,

S. Aust, 71, (2)

Winwecee, C. 1884 Mr, Wintecke’s Explorations during 1883, 5, Aust, Parl. Pap., No. 39

Woornoucs, W. G. 1927 Presidential Address. Jotirn. and Proc, Roy. Soc. N.S.W, 61

Woounouce, W. G. 1933 Report on Aerial Survey Operations in Australia during 1932.

Govt. Printer, Canberra

ICHTHYOSTRONGYLUS CLELANDI n.g., n.sp., FROM AN AUSTRALIAN

SHARK

BY PATRICIA M. MAWSON

Summary

Ichthyostrongylus clelandi n.g., n.sp., a Trichostrongyle worm, is described from the spiral valve of

Emissola antarctica from South Australia. This genus is distinguished from others by the shape of

the head.

162

ICHTHYOSTRONGYLUS CLELANDI ng. nap, FROM AN AUSTRALIAN

SHARK

By Patricia M. Mawson *

[Read 10 September 1953]

SUMMARY

Tehthyosirongylus clelandt wg, msp., a Trichostrongyle worm, is described from the

spiral valve of Emissola axtorctica from South Australia. The genus is distinguished from

others by the shape of the head.

A numberof Trichostrongyle worms were found in a tube labelled:

“(1) Flukes from liver of salmon, (2) Cestodes from spiral valve of Sweet

William Shark, Encounter Bay, 1/1922." There is an clement of doubt as to

whether the nematodes, which were very much smaller than the flukes or the

cestodes, came from the salmon, Arripis trutta, or the shark, mtssola antarctica.

Because of the way in which the nematodes were lying intertwined with the

cestodes in thick masses of intestinal material, while the flukes were separate

from these, it has been assumed that they were from the elasmobranch,

The males are up to 4-2 mm. in length, the females to 6-0 mm.; the maximum

body diameter is 0°l mm. in the male and 0-13 mm. in the female. The cuticle

is very markedly striated throughout the body, even on the bursa. The head end

is slightly enlarged, forming a distinctive bulb, not by cuticular inflation but by

thickening of hypodermal tissues and of the anterior oesophageal muscles, The

mouth is surrounded by three strongly cuticularised shallow lips, which give the

appearance of a cap at the anterior end. Each lip bears two rather elongate

papillae. A buccal capsule is absent. The oesophagus is straight and cylindrical

and measures about a tenth of the body length. The nerve ring is very small anc

hard to discern; in those specimens in which it is seen it lies at the midlength of

the oesophagus. The excretory pore, lying shortly behind the nerve ring, is very

distinct, as its duct is strongly cuticularised.

The ovaries are opposed, The vulva lies one-fifth to one-seventh of the body

from the posterior end, The ripest eggs, containing morulae, are 70 by 40 p.

The cuticle aroutid the vulva is slightly inflated, forming a folded belt in this

region.

The male bursa is tightly folded in all specimens; to examine the rays, shown

in fig. 2, it was necessary to tear part of the bursa. The exact form of the dorsal

ray varies slightly, the third bifurcation in some cases taking place nearer to the

second than shown in fig. 2. The spicules are relatively simple for a Tricho-

strongyle worm; the head is provided with a ventral knob; there is a slight swell-

ing at the midlength, and from this projects a dorsal spite. The main body of

the spicule ends in two small points. The overall length of the spicule is 0-13 -

0-14 mm., and that of the simple plate-like gubernaculum 40-48, There is a

pair of rather elongate subventral prebursal papillae.

This, as far as can be ascertained, is only the second record of a Tricho-

strongyle worm from a fish. The first is Agamonema scorpaenae cirrhosae Mac-

Callum 1921, renamed by Travassos (1937, 410) Trichostrongylus (s.1.) ses.

Of this species, Travassos (loc. cit.) states that it was possibly an accidental

occurrence. In the present case, this seems a most unlikely hypothesis. The worms

are present in considerable numbers, and in a perfect state of preservation, and

as they were taken from the spiral yalve of the host, it is not conceivable that

they were ingested with bait. The life history of this Trichostrongyle is, pre-

* University of Adelaide,

Traua. Roy Soc. 5. Alist., 77, July, 1954

163

sumably, similar to that of related genera in ruminants. The infective larvae might

be expected to inhabit the top layer of mud or sand on the sea floor, or to be on

sea weeds growing there. Emissola antarctica is largely a browsing shark.

_ I. clelandi differs from T. maci (s.1.) in the shape of the head, the position

of the vulva, and in the disposition of the lateral and ventral bursal rays; it is

not possible to compare the dorsal ray as this was not figured by MacCallum,

The shape of the head is different from that of any Trichostrongyle of which

the description is available to the author. In the form of the bursa and spicule

it is perhaps closest to Oswaldocruzia Trav., differing from this genus in the

shape of the head. A new genus is proposed, with the following diagnosis :

Ichthyostrongylus n-g.

Trichostrongylidae: head bulbous with three distinct and strongly cuticular-

ised lips; buccal capsule absent. Ovaries opposite; vulva posterior but not close

to anus. Spicule simple, with dorsal spine; gubernaculum present. Bursa symmetri-

cal, dorsal lobe developed; externodorsal rays arising separately from dorsal, and

lying in lateral lobes; dorsal ray dividing three times, forming six branches,

Type species. I. clelandi n.sp. from Emtissola antarctica, Encounter Bay, South

Australia.

The specific name is for the collector of the worms, Dr. J. B. Cleland, in

gratitude for his help.

OQ.) mm.

Fig. 1, head; Fig. 2, spicules and part of bursa; Fig. 3, ventral view of spicules;;

Fig. 4, tail of female; Fig. 5, region of vulva. Fig. 2 and 3 to same scale.

LITERATURE

MAGNE m4 A, 1921 Studies in Helminthology. Zoopathologica, 1, (6),

Travassos, L. 1937 Rivisao da familia Trichostrongylidae Leiper 1912, Monogr.

Inst. Oswaldo Cruz., No, 1, 1-512

—_

PARORCHIS ACANTHUS VAR. AUSTRALITS, N. VAR., WITH AN

ACCOUNT OF THE LIFE CYCLE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY L. MADELINE ANGEL

Summary

. A review of the history of Parorchis acanthus Nicoll and its synonymy is given.

Stage in the life cycle of P. acanthus var. australis n. var. are described.

. The variety differs from the type species mainly in the absence of an excretory tube in the

tail of the cercaria. Other relatively minor differences are noted.

. The cercaria has been found as a natural infection in South Australia in Bembicium auratum

(Quoy and Gaimard), B. melanostoma (Gmelin), B. nanum (Lamarck), and Emozamia

flindersi (Adams and Angas). It encysts on the surface of hard objects, including a number

of invertebrate animals, which are probably only accidental hosts.

. Cysts were fed to seagulls, Larus novae-hollandiae Stephens, and adult trematodes were

recovered. The adult was found as a natural infection in 1 of 25 seagulls examined by the

late Professor Harvey Johnston.

. The incidence of infection in the different snail hosts is given. This was highest in

Bembicium auratum (up to 66%). The percentage of infection as determined from those

snails which gave off cercariae when isolated, is much less than the true percentage,

determined by crushing the snails.

164

PARORCHIS ACANTHUS VAR, AUSTRALIS, N, VAR., WITH

AN ACCOUNT OF THE LIFE CYCLE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By L. Mavetine Ancet. *

[Read 10 September 1953]

SUMMARY

A review of the history of Parorchis acanthus Nicoll and its synonymy is given,

Stages in the life cycle of P. acanthus var, australis 1. var. are described,

The variety differs from the type species mainly in the absence of an excrétory tube in

the tail of the cercaria, Other relatively minor differences are noted,

The cercaria has been found as a natural infection in South Australia in Bembiciuim

auraitum (Quoy and Gaimard), B. melaonostoma (Gmelin), B. nanum (Lamarck), and

Emasomia findersi (Adams and Angas). It encysts on the surface of hard objects, incluid-

ing a number of invertebrate animals, which are probably only accidental hosts.

Cysts. were fed to seagulls, Larus novae-hollandiae Stephens, and adult trematodes were

recovered. The adult was found as a natural infection in 1 of 25 seagulls examined

by the fate Professor Harvey Johnston. ,

6, The incidence of infection in the different snail hosts is given, ‘This was highest in

Bembicium auratum (up to 669%). The percentage of infection as determined from those

snails which gaye off cercariae when isolated, is much less than the true percentage,

determined by crushing the snails. :

= NS

The type as well as other representatives of the adult and larval stages have

been deposited in the South Australian Museum,

This work was commenced with the late Professor Harvey Johnston, to

whom I am greatly indebted for his unfailing help. I wish to acknowledge with

gratitude the help given by Mrs. H. Anderson, who supplied the figures of the

infection of snails trom the Patawalonga Creek determined by crushing, as well

as other details. Acknowledgment is also made of help given by the staff of the

South Australian Musetim in identifying intermediate hosts, and by members of

this department in collecting material, as well as in other ways,

INTRODUCTION

In 1907 and 1912. Lebour described Cercaria purpura sp. ing. from Purpura

lopiius in Great Britain, Later (1914) she identified it, on the grounds of mor-

phological similarity, as FParorchis acanthus Nicoll 1907. P. acanthus was

originally described as Zeugorchts acanthus (Nicoll 1906) and later rehamned and

redescribed (Nicoll 1907 a, 1907 b), Zeugorchis heing pre-occupied.

Stunkard and Shaw (1931) described Cercaria sensifera from Urosalpinx

cinereus from Waood’s Hole, Massachusetts, stating that it might be identical

with Cercaria purpurae, They also suggested that C. sensifera might be the larval

stage of Parorchis avitus Linton 1914. (Linton’s type material, from the herring

gull, Larus argentatus, was from the same region.) Linton (1928) had discussed

the possibility of synonymy of Parorchis avitus with P. acanthus, but did not

change his classification. In 1932 Stunkard and Cable recorded Thais (Purpura)

lapillus as another host of Cercaria sensifera. They had fed cysts of this form

to guinea pigs, white rats, mice and two species of tern, and obtained immature

flukes, which they identified as Parorchis avitus, only from the terns, Sterna

hiryndo and S. dougalli, The diagnosis was confirmed by Linton-

Cable and Martin (1935), who obtained mature adults after feeding meta-

* Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, South Australia.

Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust. 77, July, 1954

165

cercariae of Cércaria sensifera to herring gulls, concluded that Parorchis avitus

was invalid, and was a synonym of P. acanthus. Cercaria sensifera was thus

synonymous with C, purpurae.

Rees (1937) from other evidence, independently suggested that C. sensifera

and C. purpurae were identical and that the names of the adults were synonymous.

This suggestion was supported by a later examination of the adult parasites

(Rees 1939). Dawes (1946) listed Parorchis avitus as a synonym of P. acanthus.

j UB

o-1mm

Fig. 1

Parorchis acanthus var. ausjralis. The cercaria.

Fig. 1, stained and mounted; excretory bladder and pore from living specimen.

Position of dorsal collar spies indicated. 2, anterior end of body to show narrow-

ing of cuticle. 3, 4, tail; 3, living, contracted; 4, fixed, elongated.

Fig, 1, 4 to same scale; 2, sketch; 3, sketch. ep, excretory pore,

Maxon and Pequegnat (1949) described a cercaria (Echinostome IT) from

Upper Newport Bay, California, which was probably identical with that described

by Hunter (1943) as the cercaria of P, avitus (Cercaria sensifera Stunkard and

Shaw 1931). Reish (1950) recorded Parorchis acanthus from Larus occidentalis

from Newport, Oregon. Rediae and cercariae which agreed with the descriptions

given by Stunkard and Cable (1932) for those of Parorchis avitus

(= P, acanthus) were found in Thais emarginata from this vicinity. Encysted

cercariae were fed to one golden hamster and one mallard duck, but did not

develop in either animal.

166

The present investigation was’ initiated when megalurous cercariae were found

in a marine tank containing Bembicium auratum (Quoy and Gaimard)} (Anderson,

personal communication). These cercariae, which were similar to Cercoria pur-

furne Lebour as described by Rees (1937), were later found to be a common

parasite of the snails, The cercariae encysted on any hard surface. Cysts, collected

from glass dishes in which the host snails were isolated, were fed to seagulls,

from which adults of a species of Parorchis were recovered later, In al] stages

of the life cycle the only significant difference between the Australian form and

P, aganthus Nicoll was in the absence of an excretory tube in the cercarial tail,

but it is thought that this difference is sufficient to warrant placing the Australian

specimens in a distinct sub-species, for which the name Parorchis acanthus var.

australis is proposed. A description of the life history of this form follows.

THE EGG AND MIRACIDIUM

Eggs were dissected from the adult, fixed in formalin and cleared in glycer-

ine; the range of the larger ones was from 94 by 56y to 98 hy 64, (Rees

(1940) found that ripe eggs were considerably larger than those in which the

tnitacidium was freely formed; her measurements were made in sea-water, the

ripe eggs being 130 by 68, and the young ones 90 by 35). The eggs did not

appear to hatch freely, but those examined had been obtained from a specimen

kept in the refrigerator for two or three days in normal saline, and ynder these

samewhat unnatural conditions the eggs may have been extruded before they

were fully mature. One miracidium hatched quickly when it was placed in sea-

water under a coverslip, and this was the only one which remained alive under

a coverslip for any length of time; it died immediately when neutral red was

added. In this one specimen all the main features described by Rees (1940)

could be seen, te, the rostrum, penetration glands and gland pores, the united

kidney-shaped eyes, the brain region, the apical gland, the lateral processes (which

help the miracidiumi in its escape from the shell}, and the contained redia lying

at the posterior end of the résting miracidium. The artangement of the epithelial

cells was not exantined, but the subepithelial layer of cells was apparent, and

the arrangement of the cilia also corresponded to Rees’ description, No flame cells

were seen, but parts of the excretory tubes were visible in the same positions as

figured by Rees.

THE REDIAE

The rediae were white and opaque. The small (first generation) rediae varied

from 0-34 by 0°052 mm, to 0-63 by 0-060 mm, in ten formalinised specimens,

the average being 0465 by 0-060 mm. They agreed with the description givert

by Stunkard and Shaw (1931) in having a muscular, lip-like snout in front of

the “oral sucker”; also the posterior tip of the body was protruded in a tail-like

or foot-like protuberance, used, like the foot processes, in locomotion. The birth-

pore, as in Rees’ material (1937, p, 66) was thick-lipped, conspicuous and pro-

trusible, Rees (1937, 1940) recorded that first generation rediae did not produce

cercariae, but gave rise to twenty or more daughter rediae. Stunkard and Shaw

(1931) stated that small rediae may contain one or more fully formed cereariae.

No cercariae were observed in the small rediae of the South Australian material.

The large (second generation) tediae varied from 1:39 by 0'255 mm. to

1:92 by 0:345 mm, in ten formaiinised specimens; the average size was 1°67 by

0295 mm. Stunkard and Shaw (1931) stated that rediae increased toa length of

2-1 mm. and a width of 0°4 mm. (presumably in living material), Rees (1937),

for living material, gave the measurement of a fully grown redia as 3°5 mm. by

147

0:46 mm. and of a young redia a§ 0-58 by 0-08 mm. It will be noticed that the

size Is great than that of the Australian form. (Fixation of the rediae in forma-

lin probably does not produce a very great change in size.)

THE CERCARIA

The cercaria was vety similar (anatomically, in habit, and in reaction to

intra-vitam stains) to that described by Stuttkard and Shaw (1931) and Rees

(1937), with the exception that an excretory system could not be demonstrated in

the tail. Lebour (1912) recorded that the excretory system was not continued

into the tail of Cercaria purpurae, but Stunkard and Shaw (1931) found this

feature in Cercaria sensifera, and this supposed difference was one of the

characters by which Stunkard and Cable (1932) separated Parorchis acanthus

and P. azitus. However, in 1937 Rees noted the excretory tube in the tail of

Cercaria purpurae. In 1953 (personal communication) Dr. Rees stated that the

excretory tube in the tail was difficult to find in Parerchis aconthus; that other

workers at Aberystwyth had experienced the same difficulty, but that its presence

had been confirmed on several occasions.

No sign of an excretory tube in the tail was seen in several hundred cer-

cariae examined over a period of eighteen months, Basic fuchsin did not make

the details uf the excretory system any clearer, as it does with most fresh-water

ecercariae; and horse serum, which is also very useful with most forms, caused

the cercariae to encyst immediately, even in very dilute solution, However, the

excretory system, with an excretory pore opening from the bladder to the ventral

body surface, was clearly seen, This latter feature has not been mentioned by

other authors, It would tot be surprising, perhaps, if an excretory pore in the

body should be present at the same time as the two pores in the tail, but failure

to demonstrate the latter over such a long period cannot be ignored.

The number of collar spines was difficult to deterntine. It was at least 60,

and in one specimen possibly 66; there were 10-11 on each side ventrally.

Stunkard and Shaw (1931) recorded 44-48 spines on the dorsal surface and 10

on each side ventrally. Rees (1937) gave the total number as 64.

The ratio of oral sucker to acetabulum varied from 2:3 to 3:4 in living

specimens.

Immediately anterior to the first row of body spines the cuticle was thinner

for a short distance, after which it widened again in the region of the anterior

papillae (fig: 1, 2). This thinning of the cuticle has not been described for

Pararchis acanthus, 1 was noticeable in greatly compressed specimens, as well

as in specimens stained with neutral red which were still elongating and contract-

ing. The region of thinner cuticle was very much paler than the rest of the cuticle.

The cuticular layer, which probably consists of cuticle plus cystogenous material,

is 8-9 wide in living, flattened specimens; it stains a uniform, carmine colour

with neutral red.

The primordia of the reproductive system are obvious in stained specimens,

The only feature in which the tail differed from the descriptions given by

Stunkard and Shaw (1931, p. 265) and Rees (1937, p, 67), apart from the

absence of an excretory tube, was that it was marked with very fine annuli on

which were arranged minute spots, which might have been granules or tiny spines

(fig. 3). These were variable in size, but even the largest were extremely small.

The annuli were seen well after treatment with orange G; there were about six

across the diameter of one of the large vacuolated cells of which the proximal

part of the tail is composed. Stunkard and Shaw ( 1931) and Rees (1937)

described the cuticle of the tail as being thin and smooth,

The following measurements were made on twenty specimens fixed by add-

168

ing an equal volume of boiling 10% formalin to the water containing the cer-

cariae ‘body length 370-670 2 (average 450 4); greatest width 130-225» (average

170 «); width at “waist” (constriction of body immediately postefior to acetabu-

Jum) 105-180 p (average 130») ; tail length 265-595 » (average 450 ») ; tail width

45-60 (average 52»).

Rees (1937) found the body length to be 1:00 mm, expanded and 0-36 mm.

cantracted ; breadth 0-09 mm, expanded, 0°35 mm. contracted, The number of

specimens measured was not mentioned, nor was the method of fixation, but

elsewhere in the paper it was stated that rediae and cercariae were examined

in the living state. Presumably the measurements represent the upper and lower

range for living cercariac examined under a coverslip, and are thus not to be

compared with measurements of specimens fixed in formalin.

Stunkard and Shaw (1931) stated that fixed and stained specimens measured

0°21-0°47 mm. in length and 0°14-0:26 mm. in width; the jails varied from

0:12 to 0°26 mm. in length. The average body size of seven stained and mounted

careabige of Perorciis acanthus yar, australis was 520 by 160», and for the tail,

615 by 504.

Too much importance should not be attached to differences in measurements

of cercariae, especially when the state of preservation of the matertal is variable-

THE CYST

Stunkard and Cable (1932) concluded that the cercariae would encyst on

almost anything with which they came in contact. P. acanthus var. australis

encysts readily on glassware, Animals which were placed in contact with cercariae

and on which cysts were formed were :—the cirripede Alminius modestus (mainly

on the appendages); the isopods H.xosphacroma gigas and Trichoniscus sp.

(mostly on the joints of the legs); insect larvae of the Acalyptrate group (the

body surface of these became so thickly encrusted with cysts that the insects,

though still alive, could barely move); the crab Helice haswellianus (the shell of

the body and legs was heavily encrusted); and the lamellibranch Amphidesma

angusta (on the shell, more concentrated on the free edges, and scattered on the

free edge of the mantle). The lamellibranch Anapella pinguis did not become

infected ; this was buried in the sand, but the siphons were, of course, protruding.

Rees (1948, p. 234) noted that cercariae of P. acanthus normally encyst round the

aperture of the shell and on exposed parts of the body of the host, Nucella

(Purpura) lapiilus. Cysts of the Australian form were sometimes found on the

operculum of Bembiciwn axratum (im one case thirty cysts were present on

the outer surface and the same number near the edge of the inner surface of the

operculum); and occasionally om the inner surface of the shell, but they were

never observed round the aperture, and rarely on the outer sarface of the shell,

Cyst formation follows the same course as that reported by Rees (1937).

Stunkard and Cable (1932) found that most of the cercariae encysted within

48 hours of leaving the snail. The Australian cercatiae encyst within a few hours.

The cercariae encyst immediately when exposed to unfavowtrable conditions

(such as too strong solutions of intra-vital stains), as was observed by Stunkard

and Shaw (1931).

The average measurement of 20 cysts from which the rough outer coat had

been removed was 200 by 1804. Rees gave the cyst diameter as 0-295 mm., of

which the outer layer was 0-045 mm. thick; the cyst enclosed only by the inner

coat would thus be 0-205 mm. in diameter. Lebour and Elmhirst ( 1922), how-

ever, described the cyst as “roundish oval,” which is consistent with the shape oi

the Australian forni.

169

THE METACERCARIA ,

Metacereariae were recovered by breaking the cyst wall with needles. This

often resulted in damage to the metacercaria, but some were recovered intact.

The following measurements apply to specimens mounted in canada balsam.

The length of four specimens averaged 405 (range 300-470). The average

diameter of oral sucker was 65 p, and of ventral sucker 82% (in three specimens),

The metacercaria most favourably mounted for measuring was 400 by 255», with

the oral sucker 68 w (long axis) by 75», and the ventral sucker 87 » in diameter-

Lebour and Elmhirst (1922) gave the measurements (apparently in living speci-

mens) of the oral sucker as 0-08 mm. and of the ventral sucker 0°10-0'14 mm,

The primordia of the genital system were slightly more obvious than in the

cercaria; they consisted of two, small, darkly-staining masses of tissue. One,

circular, or oval in the transverse plane, and situated immediately anterior to the

acetabulum and posterior to the intestinal bifurcation, marked the position of the

genital atrium and its associated structures. The other, slightly larger, circular

or elongated in the longitudinal axis, and situated midway between the acetabulum

and the posterior border of the body, was no doubt the primordium af the gonads

and thete docts.

The excretory formula was the same as for the cercaria, that is

2[(3-+3+3) + (3+3+ 3) I].

THE ADULT

An accurate assessment of the number of collar spines was not possible in

living specimens, and many of them disappeared in the preparation of permanent

mounts. Nicol! (1907 b, p. 346) recorded the number as “about 60.” He men-

tioned that immersion in a weak acid solution for even a short time caused the

spines to disappear wholly or in great part, and suggested this as the reason for

their absence in Distomuy pittactum Brawn, which he transferred to the genus

Parorchis, Stunkard and Cable (1932, p. 333) gave the number of collar spines

a “sbout 68."" Other authors have not recorded the number of spines for the

adult.

Table I gives measurements of adult and juvenile forms, with the measure-

ments given by Nicoli (1907 b) and Linton (1914) for comparison.

Ovaries and testes were measured in three specimens mounted in balsam,

in which all measurements were slightly less than when the flukes were meashred

in cedarwood oil.

The ovary was rotinded or oval in outline; measurements were:—(1) 2404,

(2) 290, in diameter, (3) 240 (long axis) by 255. (Rees (1939) described

the ovary as transversely oval, measuring 0-29 by 0°33 mm.) The margin of the

testes was lobed; they were sometimes elongated in the longitudinal axis, and

sometimes one was situated slightly in advance of the other. In a specimen

5-2 mm. long the right testis was 525 by 450 and the left 560 hy 490 In the

other specimens the testes were larger, but had the appearance of being more

compressed.

EXPERIMENTAL INFECTIONS

Four seagulls (Larus notae-hollandiac) and a white mouse were fed with

cysts. The mouse did not become infected, but adult Parorchis were obtained from

two of the seagulls.

Two seaguils caught at Tailem Bend“) on the River Murray were kept in

re WO SESE NSO ee ee ee ee ee ee ES eee

@ Altiough na work has been done in South Australia on the habits of the seagull, it

seems likely that the birds retutn each day to the same feeding grounds. This view ts sup-

ported by the fact that certain birds which can be identified by some deformity have been seen

im the same place for several weeks at a time. Thus birds caught at Tailem Bend, although

they probably return to a roosting ground near Lake Alexandrina (an inlet of the sea) each

hight, are, in all probability, frequenters of the river and its shores, and are eoisidered unhikely

to feed in places where Pembicitin spp, occur.

170

‘JIYINS yeIO Se IIIT se 91M} ULY} s1OUr JOYIEI,, UM[NGeIIV »

‘sUaUTIDedS PajUNOU INO} JO sjUsUIaINSeayT “A

'qy3ua] “Wu pf ynoge

JO [ENPtAipur we 0} pastsajar YZuay, uEY} Jayjo syusuTainsvaur {Buray Ayqissod jnq ‘payeys jou suammdeds jo uolIpuoy ‘AT

‘Bulrespd aojaq peinseour pue wulpeursoy ut paxy (s[[na 0} sjshd Surpsay jo ynsaz se paurejqo) sapuaanl gy “[]T

‘]10 poom Jepad Ul paimseattl (SUONDaJUT [eIN}eU se PUNO} OM} SHG ‘T Wory asoyj) si[Npe g “T]

‘BULIva]O JIOjaq Poinsvant puv ‘ainssaid JNoy}LM UlpeMIO; UI pexy ‘SJusTUIIadxe Surpeay Jo ynsar se paureyqo ‘s}y[npe g T

“UIAIS. «- SPUQUIBINSEDT BY} WOIF PsUlUa}ap IIOM SOI IDYOING ‘sjayoeIq UIyyM

USAID DIB SoNJeA ULI ‘SOIPIUIT[[IW Us S}uaWaInsvat JO asuel ay} oAls soinsy ayy

- - - Tunpnqe}soe

2zitl +Z:1 . ZZ2it t1ayONs [BIO JO O1VERY

(Z6-0) S€+1-12-0 * (r0-1) ¥+T- 6:0 7 s =. tiningepoy

(Tr+0) 6F-0-9E-0 S+0- (£b-0) S-0- #0 - > 7 qayINS [2IQ

(61-0) #2-0-41-0 £1-0 (61-0) 22-0-ST+0 - > Yypeasq

(02:0) Z-0-8T:0 bZ-0 (zZ-0) $Z-0-61-0 - - y}Sua,—xudreyg

28+0-Z8-0 (990) Z:0-9-0 (6-0) £+I- 8-0 (ZIT) £+1-O-1 + —- aBYOO Ssoise yIpesig

- (JeAd] TE[NGe}29"-prut)

(9-1) 89-I-Te-T (h2-1) #-1-0'1 (9-1) O+Z- ZT (€6-1) 1-Z-8-T SIEM, JE WLIpeag

(2-2) 99-2-01-Z “UnUE ¢— (9h-1) Z-I-2:T (S-Z) 0-€- 0-2 (S0-£) PE-2-2 - Julod ysopia ze yyprorg

(€9-%) 88-S-96-£ c-¢ (eS) S+p-€-Z (€-S) Z-9- BE (0:9) 6:2-€°4 he q3ue7]

(PI6I) uowurT A (42061) HOWIN AT sajtuaanf{ TIT simpy IT. synpy |

es ne 2h ee ee —— ee

St aw t= = on te i.

SHYIUDID SIYIL0AD I StDAISND “TWA SHYIMPID *T

] Tavy

captivity for several weeks before the experiment was commenced_ The first was

given two insect (Aecalyptrate) larvae which were heavily encrusted with cysts;

it was killed 32 days later. No Parorchis were found, though four heterophyids

and a blood fluke were recovered from the intestine. The second gull was fed

with a large number of cysts scraped from the sides of the tank in which the

snails were kept; they were given 46, 38, 31 and 17 days before the bird was

killed, when five mature and nineteen immature specimens of Parerchis were

recovered. Of these, four adults and twelve juveniles were in the cloaca, and

the remainder in the rectum. When the bird was killed, a period of 10-11 weeks

had elapsed since it could have acquired infection under natural conditions; it

therefore seems almost certain thar the juvenile, if mot the adult, trematodes

had developed from the cysts fed to the birds. Faeces from the birds obtained

1, 7, 22 and 29 days after commencement of the experiment were free of eggs.

Of four seagulls captured at St. Kilda beach (a few miles north of

Adelaide), two were killed immediately; no Parorchis were recovered, The other

two were given meat in which cysts had been packed; neither of the birds was

interested in food, and it is doubtful how many of the cysts were ingested, The

first gull died’ in two days; it was negative for Parorchis, The second died eight

days after exposure to infection, and one medium-sized, egg~bearing specimen of

Pororchis was found in the duodenum (length 4°7 mm.). If this specimen had

developed as a result of the experimental feeding (its Iocation in the duodenum

and the fact that the three other birds from the same locality had not harboured

the infection suggesting this) the trematode must have become egg-bearing in

eight days, whereas nineteen specimens from the other experimental host (from

Tailem Bend) were still immature at least seventeen days after they had been

ingested as cysts. Stunkard and Cable (1932) found that specimens recovered

fifteen days after infestation were not sexually mature.

Two attempts to infect Bembicium spp. with miracidia failed. Ta the first

about 25 Parerchis eggs were put in a small tank with three Bembictum nanwm ;

and in the second, seagull faeces collected from the Patawalonga mud-

flats were used, with eight B, auratum.

The experiments were not repeated, because of the shortage of adult trema-

todes from which to obtain eggs, |

INCIDENCE OF INFECTION IN SNAILS

The cercaria of Parorchis acanthus var. australis was first identified from

Bembicium auratim (Quoy and Gainmvard) collected from a tidal mud-flat at the

mouth of the Patawalonga Creek, Glenelg, South Australia; a high percentage of

the snails was found to be infected,‘?)? The number of infections detected by isolat-

ing each snail in a 3” x 1” tube over a twenty-four hour period was considerably

less than the true number as determined by crushing the snails, For instance, from

April to September 1951 (inclusive}, of 582 B. auratwm isolated, 64 (11%)

gave off cercariae, while in the same period, of 1,072 snails crushed, 633 (59% )

were infected. The true percentage of infections must have beer even higher,

since at least some of the snails crushed were from groups which had been

isolated, and from which those snails actually giving off cercariae had been

removed. In collections made in October-November 1951, and in May-September

1952, infections identified by crushing snails which had not been isolated pre-

viously were 1,159 of 1,758 (66%).

@) Several other types of cercarial infection were found in Rembicium spp. but

Parorchis infections were readily distinguished by the large, characteristic rediac.

172

The high percentage of infection of the snail host seems somewhat surprising,

in view of the fact that in 1939, only one of eight seagulls from this region was

infected with Parorchis acanthus. However, silting up of the stream, which has

occurred rapidly since 1937, has no daubt had a strong influence on the ecology

of the region, and it may well be that in 1939 Bembicium auratum was not

a common member of the fauna as it is today.

These cercariae have also been found in B, nanum (Lamarck) and

B. selanostoma (Gmelin), but the percentage of infection is much less in

both species than in B. awratum. It is, however, impossible to draw any conclusions

as to any host. preference shown by the parasite, because of the different habitats

favoured by the three species of host, In the Patawalonga mud flats B, anratun

is to be found at low tide in small pools where the chances of infection are

high; at low tide B. melunostoma occupies more exposed positions on small rocks,

mangroves, etc.; B. nanum lives on rocks which are exposed at low tide

and subjected to strong wave action at high tide.

Parorchis cercariae wete found by isolation in 1 of 360, and by crushing

in 10 of 431 Bembicivm nonum collected along the coast from Marino

Rocks to Encounter Bay, South Australia, and im two of three B. nemum

from the Patawalonga Creck (where infections were so common in B. auratum).

The infection was not found by isolating over a hundred 8. nonum

collected in February 1952 along the coast of Yorke Peninsula; nor by

crushing 50 of the snails collected south of Corny Point (Yorke Peninsula) and

15 from Salt Creek (Yorke Peninsula) in February 1953.

In October 1952, 11 of 434 B, melonestoma from Port River and Outer

Harbour were found to be infected by crushing, In February 1953, of 450

B. melanostoma collected on Yorke Peninsula, five were infected. These five

infected snails were from a collection of 50 taken at Port Wakefield, where con-

ditions for infection must have been favourable; the remaining 400 were collected

from Pine Point, Stansbury, Salt Creek, Edithburgh and Corny Point.

Infected snails will remain alive and continue to give off cetcariae for some

time under laboratory conditions. Eighteen B. auretum kept under observation

survived 14, 30, 39, 49 (seven snails), 55 (three snails), 61, 88, 91 and 95.days

respectively, Anderson (1953) kept 20 snails out of water for three months; of

the six which survived, five contained rediae.

Other gastropods which were examined during this investigation were:

98 Melaraphe unifasciata and 42 Austrocochlea concamerata from Hallett’s Cove;

22 A. torrt trom Marino Rocks, and a ntimber of Salinatar fragtlis and S. solida

from the Patawalonga. None of these gave off cercariae when isolated. Snails

from Yorke Peninsula were examined after crushing: 50 Neothats texttliose

Thaididae) from an ocean beach south of Corny Point were uninfected, but

two of 13 Emazamte flindersi (Murtcidae) from Port Vincent, and two of 7l

of a same host irom Pine Point were infected with Perorckis acanthus var.

australis,

DISTRIBUTION AND HOSTS OF PARORCHIS ACANTHUS

ADULT

P. acanthus has been recorded from the herring gull (Larus argentatus)

from Great Britain and from the east coast of North America; the common

gull (L. canus) from Scotland; the western guli (ZL, occtdentelis) from the west

coast of North America: the flamingo (Phoeniropterus ruber) from Cuba

(Vigueras, 1941}; and, as a restilt of experimental feeding, from terns (Sterna

hirundo and S, dowgalit) from Massachusetts.

Parorchis acanthus var, australis is now recorded from Soyth Australia.

The adult was found by the late Professor Harvey Johnston in only one of 25

173

seagulls (Larus novae-hollandiae) examined between 1937 and 1951. This positive

host was one of eight gulls caught at Glenelg in 1939; it contained two adults

and one immature specimen of the Auke. The remaining negative birds were from

other parts of St. Vincent’s Gulf (5), American River, Kangaroo Island (1), and

River Murray (11).

CERCARIA ;

The cetcaria has been recorded from Nucella lapillus and Urosalpinx cinereus

irom Great Britain and Massachusetts, U,S.A., and from Thais emarginata from

Oregon. Cerithidea californica trom California also harbours tediae and cer-

cariae which are very probably the larval stages of Pororchis acanthus.

The known South Australian molluscan hosts of P. acanthus var. australis

are Bembicium curatum, B. melanostoma, B. narum and Emozamia flindersi.

LITERATURE

Anperson, H. 1953 Studies on the biology of three species of Bembicium and

their trematode parasites. (M.Sc. thesis; not yet published ).

Cante, R, M., and Martin, W. E. 1935 Parorchis avitus (Linton, 1914), a

synonym of P. acanthus (Nicoll, 1906), Jour. Parasit., 21, (6), 436-437

Dawes, B. 1946 The Trematoda. University Press, Cambridge. 644 pp.

Hunter, W. S. 1943 Studies on cercariae of the common mud-flat snail,

Cerithidea californica, Unptiblished doctor's dissertation. U.C.L.A..

129 pp. (not seen)

Lesour, M. V. 1907 On three mollusk-infesting trematodes. Ann. and Mag.

Nat. Hist., 19, (7), 102-106

Lenour, M. V. 1912 A review of the British marine cercariae, Parasitol,

4, (4), 416-456

Lenour, M. V. 1914 Some larval trematodes from Millport. Parasitol., 7,

(1), 1-11

Lepour, M. V., and Ermurrest, R. 1922 A contribution towards the life his-

tory of Parorchis acanthus Nicoll, a trematode in the herring gull, Jour.

Mar. Biol. Ass. U-K., N.S., 12, 829-832

Linton, E. i Notes ona viviparous distome, Proc. U.S, Nat, Mus., 46,

551-

Lixtox, E. 1928 Notes on trematode parasites of birds, Proc. U.S, Nat. Mus.,

73, 1-36

Maxon, M. G., and Peourcnat, W. E. 1949 Cercariae from Upper Newport

Bay. Jour, Ent. and Zool., 41, (1), 30-55

Nicoun, W. 1906 Zeugorchis ecanthus, gen. and sp, n. Ann. and Mag. Nat.

Hist., 17, (7), 519-522

Nreont., W. 1907a Parerchis, n, nom. for Zeugorchis, Nicoll, 1906. Ann. and

Mag. Nat. Hist., 19, (7), 128

Nicout, W. 1907b Parorchis acanthus, the type of a new genus of trematodes.

Quart, Jour. Mier. Sci., N.S., 51, 345-355

Rees, G. 1937 The anatomy and encysttnent of Cercaria purpurae Lebour,

1911. Proce, Zool., Lond. 107, Series B, Pt. 1, 65-73

Rees, G, 1939 Studies on the germ cell cycle of the digenetic trematade,

Parorchis acanthus Nicoll, Pt. 1, Parasito!., 31, (4), 417-433

Rees, G. 1940 Studies on the germ cell cycle of the digenetic trematode,

Parorchis acanthus Nicoll, Pt. 1, Parasitol., 32, (4), 372-391

Rees, G. 1948 <A study on the effect of light, temperature and salinity on the

emergence of Cercaria purpurae Lebour from Nucella tapillus (L-)

Reis, D. J. 1950 New host and distribution records for two trematodes from

the western gull. Jour, Parasit., 36, (1), 84

174

SrunxKarp, H. W., and SHaw, C, R. 1931 The effect of dilution of sea water

on the activity and longevity of certain marine cercariae, with descrip-

tions of two new species. Biol. Bull., 61, 242-271

StunKarp, H. W., and Casrz, R. M. 1932 The life history of Parorchis avitus

(Linton), a trematode from the cloaca of the gull. Biol. Bull., 62, 328-338

Vicurras, I. P. 1941 Nota sobre varios vermes encontrados en el “flamenco”

(Phoenicopterus ruber),

AN ACCOUNT OF THE NGALIA INITIATION CEREMONIES AT

YUENDUMU, CENTRAL AUSTRALIA, JANUARY 1953

BY IAN V. HANSENL

Summary

This paper records the ceremonial dances and other rites associated with the initiation of young

men of the aboriginal Ngalia tribe of the desert country north-west of Alice Springs, Central

Australia. Illustrations include a plan of the corroboree-ground, details of body markings, and of

native totems.

175

AN ACCOUNT OF THE NGALIA INITIATION CEREMONIES AT

YUENDUMU, CENTRAL AUSTRALIA, JANUARY 1953

By lan V. Hansen

[Read 12 November 1953]

SUMMARY

This paper records the ceremonial dances atid other sites associated with the

initiation of young imen of the aboriginal Ngalia tribe of the desert country forth-

west of Alice Springs, Central Australia. Illustrations include a plan of the corroboret-

ground, details of body markings, and of native totems.

At dusk, Saturday 24 January 1953, a party of 114 aborigines from the

Ilaast Bluff area ptanced into the camp of the Ngalia tribe on the Yuendumu

Native Settlement (in the western part of the Northern Territory, lat. 22° S.,

long. 130° E,) to receive a welcome from the local tribesmen. The visitors were

principally Pintubi and Kukatja people, with some Aranda and Pitjandjara, and

the occasion was the initiation of two Ngalia boys. Both visitors and hosts were

similarly decorated with paint; a black band around the chest, edged with white

bird-down, and the same marking on the upper arms. Thrust into the hair-binding

were wooden “feathers,” made from mulga twigs with long, fine shavings giving

the decoration a bottle-brush effect. Two short “feathers” were worn on the

forehead, and two longer ones (12 to 14 inches) fanned out behind the head.

After receiving damper and water from the Ngalia, the visitors bunched them-

selves closely together, and with spears aloft moved through the scrab to their

camp-site. They walked at an easy pace, at interyals uttering a high-pitched cry

of three notes, the second nearly an octave above the fitst and third. Frequently

this call was broken by a series of loud huffs from the group, which were speeded

up, causing the men to quicken their pace to a trot to keep in time; another

triplet of whoops, and the party dropped back to a_wille.

I had made contact previously with the Haast Bluff natives, and after some

discussion with the Ngalia. “corraboree-boss” they invited me to their camp for

the duration of the ceremonies.

Next morning, at about 5.30 a.m., the men began adorning themselves. The

black and white markings of the welcome were retained, and supplemented with

rather clumsy finger-painted lines of red-ochre. When all were ready the men

left the women, and with the whooping and puffing that was to accompany all

their comings and goings, made for the ceremonial ground (the dancing area),

situated in a mulga patch some half-mile from the camp (fig. 6}. (Baldwin

Spencer 1914, 137.)

Seated in four circles were the singers, beating the ground with sticks, and

chanting. The rhythm was intricately counter-pointed from group to group, and

the chant itself syncopated from time to time with whoops from the song-leader.

During the chanting, groups ef men punctured their old sub-incision wounds

with mulga twigs, and squeezed the blood down the inside of their legs. The

singing ceased, and the first group shuffled across the ground in front of the

novices, who had been seated in front of the singers, So as to display their flow

of blood, the participants bent their knees out, and held their hands at shoulder

level, meanwhile making a buzzing noise through their teeth. (The blood from

the penises of the old men seemed to come more readily than from the younger

members of the party.) This letting of blood continued until every man had

176

played his part: it was accompanied by what appeared to be considerable flippant

talk fromthe others.

During this ceremony the novices were taken by a group of a dozen or

so men, and thrown several times high into the air (cp. Spencer and Gillen 1904,

337). They were then returned to their places, to watch the continued blood-

letting.

Fig. 1 and 2, body decorations; Fig, 3, leafed-pole dancer;

Fig. 4, painted tjurunga; Fig. 5, sacred wanigi.

After nearly fiye hours of watching, the natives returned to camp, and “sat

down” for the remainder of the day. The Haast Bluff people had had an

unpleasant dry journey to Yuendumu, and rested until nightfall, when they sang,

in their camp, till the small hours of the morning.

177

Monday morning saw no activity, but by four in the afternoon the men

were back at the corroboree ground and. preparing for their dances. The per-

formers dressed themselves in two groups, one on each side of the runway.

The blood used in decoration was taken, in the one case from the penis, and, in

the other from the forearm, and sprinkled onto the shoulders of the dancers.

The painting on the bodies was still black and white, with red ochre,

The first dance consisted of a snake ceremony. Twelve young men, hands

on hips of the man in front, formed a serpentine line, and twisted violently from

side to side in time with the chanting of the others. The “head” of the serpent

wore a head-dress of blood-stained kangaroo grass, and held a boomerang behind

his neck; after twisting the line oi men around to face the novices, he gaye a

whoop, and the actors dispersed.

More chanting prefaced the “Kangatoo and Euro” {the latter a small variety

ot kangaroo, living in rocky areas) dance. The “kangaroo,” with a magnificent

“tail” of bond grass, spluttered (a noise made with the tongue and lips) his way

onto the ground, where twenty young men lay spluttering. The “kangaroo” hopped

in) among them, and drew them with him up the runway. He turned to face the

audience, and each of the actors crawled between his legs, hopping to a point just

in front of the novices, where they began to pile one on top of another. With

much noise, this “stacks-on-the-mill” continued until the mound was complete,

and the “kangaroo,” with a leap and a shout, landed on the top. More shouling

and hilarity, and the bodies collapsed in a cloud of dust,

When the runway had been cleared, two holes were dug, about twelve inches

deep, and into these holes a solitary actor placed his legs. He was decorated with

the Black and white band, but wore a bloodstained kangaroo grass head-dress.

In his mouth was a clump of grass similarly stained, and in each hand he held

a bunch of long grass, Ile fixed his eves steadfastly on one of the novices and

began to sway to the rhythm of the chant, swinging his hands together from

side to side. Suddenly the singing stopped, and the actor drew himself up [rom

his crouching position, and quivered, to the accompaniment of two clicking

boomerangs. Then the chant recommenced, Slowly the actor stepped fram the

holes, and, hopping mysteriously, swaying with the music, moved slowly toward

the boy, still with fixed eye, and stopping only to quiver. When he was all but

upon him, his novice took a stick and threw it on the ground in front of him.

Without a sound the actor broke off. This was repeated by another solo dancer

for the other boy, and then two actors went through the same performance, only

that they approached the novices throtigh each other’s legs.

Further chanting followed, and the men made their way back to camp

for food.

After “tea-time” (ie., about 6-7 p.m.) the women were allowed on the

corroboree ground, to dance to the men’s music. Their movements were primi-

tive in the extreme, consisting solely in a jigging up and down in time to the

chant. When they had danced for an hour and a half, the women were herded

from the ground, and the novices were taken, under avuncular guard, to the slight

depression at the side of the runway (see fig. 6), Fifteen minutes after midnight

I was awakened by a renewal of the chant and thump of the sticks, I could see,

in the firelight, that the women had returned and were preparing to dance again,

Behind the men's backs, the women danced the same chorus over and over again,

at at average of sixty choruses per hour. I fell asleep, but was disturbed again at

4.30 by a sudden change in the chant The dancing continued until 6.00 a.tn.

All the women were then herded into the wind-break, save six feinale rela-

tives of the novices, who continued to jig to the chanting. When all the women’s

heads were covered (with rag scarves or open hands) a dozen warriors pranced

178

down the runway, knee-raising high, each carrying a wooden tjurunga upright

in front of him. The tjurunga were painted white (see fig. 4), and topped with

turkey-bustard feathers. After one circuit of the fan-area of the ground, the

men stuffed the tjurunga into the mulga wind-break, and broke off. All this time

a watch was kept that all the women’s faces were hidden.

Once again the women and children were herded off the ground, with the

wailing mothers cartying the be-feathered novices off on their shoulders, and

great oral confusion reigned. The men continued to sing, while the whole of the

clearing was cleansed with a bull-roarer. Then, when the novices were soon

returned, they were taken by their male relatives up to the far end of the runway.

PLAN. of — fe;

CORROROREE- GROUND .

A tribesman came forward, and with his back to the small fire in the apex

of the “fan,” scratched dust and dirt onto it with his feet. The audience was

convulsed with laughter. Then the actor worked his way up the runway towards

the novices in a most comical manner, wobbling his knees, and screwing up his

arms, yet all the while preserving a serious expression on his face, On reaching

the fire at the other end, he again scratched dirt upon it, thereby redoubling the

appreciative laughter of the onlookers. Five other men performed in the same

way, some, certainly, more amusing than others.

When the novices had been returned to their usual place, a shield was placed

in the centre of the runway, and in it a quantity of white powder, Two men

pranced in, arms folded, and the first knelt at the shield, and with his finger,

wiped a white streak onto his nose. Much laughter. Then the two pranced down

towards the novices, and, just as they were reached, the hand of the second came

over the shoulder of the other and wiped off the powder, This diversion was

enacted three times, to the immense delight of the audience. Some more chanting

followed, and the men returned to camp at about 7 a.m.

It was now Tuesday. All activities were suspended during the earlier part

of the day, but in the late afternoon the final preparations were begun.

The fathers and other relatives had remained on the corroboree-ground with

the novices, of course, and it was here that the wanigi were made, In the scrub

at the side of the runway, out of sight of ihe boys, the two fathers carefully

cleared a space of twigs and pebbles, and spread muiga branches on the ground.

Into a hole was thrust a wooden tjutunga, and a secotid was laid crosswise upon

it, with a pad of cloth to prevent scratching. The two were then bound together

by a diamond-shaped pattern of hair-string. While this winding continued, a

constant stream of blood from relatives’ forearms played on the string, and was

reverently wiped into the pattern with charcoal. Intermittently the fathers

would begin a chant, joined by the relatives; this chant was the most moving

of all those sung at the ceremonies, starting at almost a falsetto pitch, and sud-

denly plunging to a deep growl. When the binding of the wanigi was completed,

the totems were decorated with white down and bunches of blood-stained turkey

bustard feathers (see fig. 5).

They were then placed gently one on top of another on the swept ground,

with two blood-splashed bull-roarers arranged parallel, and on these, the cireum-

cision knife, Over the whole the relatives let more blood.

On hands and knees, four “uncles” shouted over the totems, with their

lips almost touching (hem, The shout began lustily, and then gradually died away.

‘An answer came from the novices’ depression through the scrub, where their

guardians had snatched up spears and boomerangs, and were brandishing them

and shouting threats. Each time the wanigi patty shouted, there was this flying

to arms. Then stiddenly, without ceremony, the totems had gone, taken off into

the bush.

While the fathers had been engaged, the novices were being painted on chest

and back in white, figured with great care and deliberation (see fig. 1 and 2).

Their hair was bound for the first time, and decorated with turkey-bustard

feathers, surmounted by white down, and when their adornment was complete,

they knelt with chin in hand in their shallow depression. Side by side, they waited,

From the scrub, in single file, came the wanigi party, and. passed by the

kneeling bays. Each man carried a sprig of mulga or witjuti (both species of

Acacia}, and with it stroked the hair of the novices, and threw the sprig onto

their backs. Last in the line carne the fathers, The semi-circle of singers was Te-

formed, and the chant made over the incomplete wamgi was resumed.

Soon the women and children arrived, led by the female relatives of the

boys. The novices were now crouched in their depression, on the backs of

‘“oncles,” and facing inwards. With nmulga and witjuti sprigs as before, the two

mothers slapped the soles of their sons’ feet, causing them to hop on all fours

from their “uncles’” backs, and over towards the seated line of relatives in the

centre of the “fan? When they reached these men, the boys were seized and

pulied hack, to lic on their backs on the now supine line. The female relatives

followed and brushed the bodies of the novices with their sprigs, chattering loudly

the while; then, suddenly, broke off and made for the far end of the runway,

where they sat down.

18)

The rest of the women and children had been arranged (see fig. 6) and the

men resumed their chanting. The novices were now sitting up.

Night had fallen, and the fires were lit. Aiter a period of song the women

and children were all bustled into the wind-break, behind the men, for the entry

of twelve dancers. These men were highly decorated, comparatively. Besides

chalk totemic marks on their backs, they each wore a design of bird-down on

the chest and arms, of brown and white, with some circles and oval shapes on

forehead and cheeks, Each dancer had, attached to his legs at ankle and thigh,

a straight pole of ten to twelve feet in length, bound with drying gum leaves,

surmounted by a gum-leaf crown (see fig, 3),

These men paraded in front of the novices, and, standing before them

singly and in a group, shook the poles with leg movements, causing the leaves

to rattle together. The women, who all this time were crouching with their faces

covered, were then herded quickly from the ceremonial ground. When they were

gone, a sudden Aare in the fire at the far end of the runway revealed the two

wang, stuck in the ground, and seeming to glow dully in the flicker of the

ames.

The pole-dancers formed a line in front of each boy in turn, and his own

wanigi was passed down through the leafed poles towards him. Each novice

was lifted up, and passed his hands over the diamond design of the string; this

done, the wanigi wag returned to its place behind the fre.

In a Iull in the chanting, the wail of the women could be heard, coming from

' the camp.

Several groups burst onta the runway from the “fan” end, each man hold-

ing, with both hands, # boomerang behind his neck. With violent shaking of

the body, and shuffling, they moved backwards into the semi-darkness. This was

repeated several times.

A number of the younger men then snatched up large branches of mulga

from the wind-break, and with a whoop, ran down the runway, dragging them

behind, They piled them on the furthest fire, and when the tinder-dry branches

burst into a brilliant flare, the human table was revealed, kneeling in position in

front of the blaze, Each “uncle” carried his boy down to the fire, and laid him

on the table. One of the leaf-poles of the earlier dance was lit, and held as a torch

above the table. Two runners bolted down to the body of the men, clapped their

hands, shouted, and raced back. At the moment when the foreskin was cut, the

flaring pole was swept down.

After the operation, the boys were seated for several nioments m front of

the fre, and then walled down among their relatives, to the accompaniment of

the triplet of processional whoops, to be formally presented to the old men.

Standing there together, each bay was confronted in tum by two pole-dancers,

who quivered, and were pushed in the chest by the boys, Thereupon these dancers

fell back with a clatter of drying leaves and lay on the ground before the newly-

inttiated.

The boys were seated, and the two bull-roarers, prepared earlier by the

fathers, were brought twirling down the runway, to be presented to the boys,

and explained, Two relatives. limped down from beyond the circumcision fire,

carrying the wanigi on one foot, made a circlé in front of the boys, and waited

while they were hoisted onto their “uncles’” shoulders. Then, clutching bull-

sparer and wanigi, the now young men were borne off into the blackness of the

scrub.

Their adult education and discipline had begun. For several months iow

they would have to five apart from the tribe

181

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

- I should like to express sincere thanks to Rev. T. J. Fleming, Baptist Mission,

Yuendumu, without whose understanding and encouragement it would not have

been possible to witness the ceremonies. Help is also acknowledged from the

Native Affairs Branch at Alice Springs, Officers B. Greenfield and L. Wilson,

and Mr. N. B. Tindale, Ethnologist, South Australian Museum.

REFERENCES

Spencer, BALDwIn 1914 Native Tribes of the Northern Territory of Aus-

tralia, 88-176

Spencer and Giten 1904 The Northern Tribes of Central Australia, 528-374

Passim Eixin, Basepow (inter al.) .

THE METAMORPHIC AND IGNEOUS HISTORY OF ROSETTA HEAD,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY D. R. BOWES

Summary

This paper gives an account of the metamorphic and igneous history of the Rosetta Head area.

Regional metamorphism of folded greywacke and subgreywacke types of ? Early Palaeozoic

age produced quartz biotite schists which were later intruded by granite. The conditions required

for metamorphic differentiation were provided by the presence of the granite magma and

andalusite, cordierite, albite and chlorite schists were formed at the expense of some quartz

biotite schists. The material not wanted in these transformations formed andalusite chlorite and

andalusite cordierite chlorite “sweats” and numerous quartz and quartz felspar veins. The final

intrusion of the granite rechrystallized and partially mobilized some of the albite chlorite schists.

A mush consisting of coarse albites and chlorites in a mobile base, which was capable of

intrusion, was produced. This mush was pushed up along the granite-country rock contact by the

intruding magma and in cooling gave rise to coarse albite chlorite rocks of igneous aspect. The

formation of the porphyritic granite of Rosetta Head and its unusual features are explained by

the assimilation of albite- and chlorite-rich rocks in a potash-rich magma.

182

THE METAMORPHIC AND IGNEOUS HISTORY OF ROSETTA HEAD,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By D. R. Bowes*

[Read 12th Nov., 1953]

SUM MARY - Se oO wee eee FO Seo 122

L Isrropuction - - - « ~ ¥. —s 3 je ry 182

II Recrowan SeTtixe any Structure - - += - - = 184

Til Tae Country Rocks - = + = = = = = + 187

IV Tse Anpatustre, Corprertte, Carorire, ALBITE Scwists - - 19]

V Tse Coarse Avsite Cuore Rocses or Ienrous AsPecT - - 200

VI Tue Granitic Rocks - - - = 2 + = . « 208

VII Tue Perrotocy oF THE SERIES - -~ - - = - 212

VIII Extent Anp AGE of THE INTRUSION - - - = - 213

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS i 213

BIBLIOGRAPHY - - = - > “ ~ A 2 2 213

SUMMARY

This paper gives an account of the metamorphic and igneous history of the

Rosetta Head area. Regional metamorphism of folded greywdcke and subgreywacke.

types of ? Early Palaeozoic age produced quartz, biotite schists which were later intruded

by granite. The conditions required for metamorphic differentiation were provided by

the presence of the granite magma and andalusite, cordierite, albite and chlorite schists

were formed at the expense of some quartz biotite schists, The material not wanted in

these transfortnations formed andalusite chlorite and andalusite cordierite chlorite

“sweats” and numerotis qttartz and quartz felspar veins, The final intrusion of the granite

recrystallized and partially mobilized some of the albite chlorite schists. A mush con-

sisting of coarse albites and chlorites in a mobile base, which was capable of inttttsion,

was produced. This mush was pushed up along the granite-country rock contact by the

intruding magma atid on cooling gave rise to coarse albite chlorite rocks of igneous

aspect. The formation of the porphyritic granite of Rosetta Head and its unusual features

are explained by the assimilation of albite- and chlorite-rich rocks in a potash-rich

granite magma,

1, INTRODUCTION

(a) Location ann PHyYSIoGRAPHY

Rosetta Head is a promontory at the western extremity of Encounter

Bay, on the south coast of South Australia, about 50 miles south of Adelaide.

This headland—better known as “The Bluff”—juts abruptly out of the sea

to a height of approximately 325 feet. The seaward end is a large granite

mass intrusive into a folded sedimentary series which is now represented by

quartz biotite schists.

Together with West Island to the west and Wright Island, Granite

Island, Seal Island, Pullen Island and Port Elliot Head to the east, Rosetta

Head is part of a chain of granite masses outcropping in the Encounter Bay

area. (Fig. 1 and Plate V., Fig. 1.)

Glacial action during late Palaeozoic times determined much of the

present topography. Rosetta Head itself is a roche moutonnée (Fig. 3.) and

large areas of the rolling hills behind the headland are covered by glacial

till, The glacial topography and deposits have been described and illustrated

by Howchin (1926 and earlier reports listed therein).

* Department of Geology, University College of Swansea

Trans, Roy Soc. S. Aust., 77, July, 1954

183

The coastline features depend on geological factors. The granite mass

rises as sheer cliffs from the sea, but a wave-cut platform with smaller

cliffs behind has been formed where the schists form the coastline (Fig. 10).

This platform has irregular and jagged features owing tu many criss-crossing

veins and the cropping out of irregular bands and lenses of knotted schist.

Where glacial till forms the coastline there is usually a sandy beach.

[+ ]oranrtic Rocks

[v ]coarse aLaire

CHLORITE. ROCKS

ny >}

E-FROSETTA HEAD

&® WEST |,

48 SEAL |.

483 PULLEN

SOUTHERN

Fig. 1

Locality plan showing the outcrops of igneous rocks in the Encounter Bay area.

(b) Previous INVESTIGATIONS

In an account of the igneous rocks-of Encounter Bay, Browne (1920)

discussed the geology of Rosetta Head. The granite mass which forms the

seaward face of the headland was considered an intrusive mass and part

of a large batholith. The associated coarse-grained albite chlorite rock was

termed an “albite mica syenite” and its origin ascribed to the flotation of

carly-formed crystals during the fractional crystallization of the granite

magma, .

The occurrence at Rosetta Head of certain fine-grained, richly albitic

and richly chloritic rocks was recorded by Browne (1920) and their forma-

tion attributed to impregnation of the surrounding quartz biotite schists by

magmatic material. Mawson (1926) suggested that “assimilation of the

intruded schist” had taken place. The presence of “andalusite mica schist”

and “cordierite mica schist” in Petrel Cove was also reported by Browne and

the origin of these rocks attributed to the contact metamorphism of the

quartz biotite schists.

No other contributions to the geology of Rosetta Head have been

published,

(c} PRESENT INVESTIGATIONS

The desirability of a further detailed petrological investigation firstly

of the albite, chlorite, andalusite and cordierite schists and secondly of

the coarse-grained albite chlorite rock was suggested by Professor Mawson

who made available material previously collected from the area. The investi-

gations were carried out during 1946 during the tenure of the James Barrans

Scholarship of the University uf Adelaide and continued during 1947. Further

field and laboratory investigations were performed during 1950-52.

184

A detailed geological map at the seafe of 20 in, =i mile was made

(Fig, 2) and fifteen rack analyses and one mineral analysis were completed.

The specimens referred to in the text are those of the Rock Catalogue.

Department of Geology, University of Adelaide where the specimens. and

corresponding thin sections are housed.

The present investigations have provided evidence to suggest that the

alhite, chlorite, cordietrite schists and most of the andalusite schist were

formed in the aureole of the intrusive granite by contact metasomatism of

the country rock (quartz biotite schist). The metasomatism was not due to

offshoots of the granite penetrating the country rocks but due to the presence

of the requisite conditions to cause metamorphic differentiation.

There is no evidence to suggest the flotation of crystals to giye rise

to the coarse-grained albite chlorite rocks but the evidence indicates thit

these unusual rock types were formed by the partial or complete mobilization

of albite chlorite schists by the intrusion of the granite. The granite over-

rides the country rock and the coarse albite chlorite rocks are mainly found

along the main granite-country rock contact. The unusual features of the

granite are explained by the assimilation of albite- and chlorite-rich maternal,

This paper gives an account of the metamorphic and igneous history af

the area with particular reference to the genesis of the fine-grained albite

chlorite schists and the coarse-grained albite chlorite rocks of igneous aspect.

If. REGIONAL SETTING AND STRUCTURE

(a) Recionar, SETTING

Investigations in south and south-eastern South Australia have revealed

Numerous occurrences of coarse-grained granite. Outcrops at Cape Wil-

loughby, Kangaroo Island (Tilley 1919), in the Encounter Bay area (Browne

1920) and in various parts of south-eastern South Australia (Mawson and

Parkin 1943, Mawson and Dallwitz 1944, and others) have heen described,

but most of these outcrops are either granite islands or completely surrounded

by Tertiary or Recent deposits. At Rosetin Head, however, the intrusive

nature of the granite can be established, the intruded country rock being a

quartz biotite schist, very similar to the unaltered xenoliths in the granite

at Granite Island and Port Elliot.

Howchin (1926) showed that this country rock is portion of the upper

part of a sedimentary series which rests uncomformably on the schists and

gneisses of the Barossian Complex (Older Precambrian). This country rock,

which is largely composed of recrystallized greywackes and subgreywackes

together with some argillaceous and same arenaceous horizons, is well

developed and exposed on the south-eastern und eastern flanks of the Mount

Lofty Ranges. In general it has been metamorphosed to the biotite grade

although in some areas metamorphism has been more intense. Its age and

stratigraphic position have not been definitely determined. Howchin (1926,

1929) heid that this series corresponded to the Adelaide System found on

the western flank of Mount Lofty Ranges but Mawson (1947) suggested

that it was of Mosquito Creek Age, Recent investigations by the South

Australian Geological Survey have suggested that these rocks are part of

the Kanmantoo Series and are of ? Early Palaezuic age.) A general account

of the regional distribution of this series together with the nature and

composition of some of the rock types has been given by Robinson (1946),

Owing to the presence of overlying irregular patches of Permian gtacia!

till, it is mot posstble to trace a continuous sedimentary succession from

Rosetta Head inland, but Howchin (1926) has published a geological map

Survey of South Australia,

185

NYSHLNOS

4S1HO5 aliLom Zuoyno

WoAasNni

Fs uaiNnoons

ANDRA

ALISOASIHIS oniaaag

M320" OSTSAIYNY 0856

SNWLesAVEL BYANTY v= alinvad DiLitAHdHOd |

pDOW Fu1eCTHO

ah wens, ] ALi 384vOo ex

SUStH3S BLOW ¥ SLlal

SHIGA IL) —

hia EJ "sargadeco’ 3LiSN1¥ONY Law

a4wa108 aA igtHos JAuoI@ ZLEvNO [4]

VIWYLSNY HLNOS

GQ¥V3H ViLasou

30 dAVW 1V9I5O01039

ASIHDS ZLu01e Eon

HSLNNGOING ,

44 —5 a 2 ‘Old

186

of a large area north of Encounter Bay and has described glacial deposits.

Apart from recent superficial deposits, these represent the last episode of

sedimentation in the area,

{b) Structure

The regional structure of the metamorphosed sedimentary series making

up the country rock is simple, From the base of the series some ten miles

inland, the beds dip regularly towards the south-east at moderate angles,

and can be traced in ascending stratigraphic order towards the sea. Close

to the granite intrusion at Rosetta Head the strike varies from N.50°E. to

N.60°E and the dips vary due to folding (Fig. 2).

Fig. 3

Rosetta Head from: the Encounter Bay shore illustrating the distribution and

relationships of the yarious rock formations.

Outside the contact metamorphic aureole but close to the headland,

bedding is a conspicuous feature. Slumped structures, one inch high, are

sometimes seen along the bedding planes as in the cliff at the side of the

road two hundred yards from the wharf, Regional: cleavage, which cuts

across the bedding and which is post-folding is a prominent structural

feature especially on the wave-cut platforms (Fig. 10 and Plate V,, Fig. 2).

Behind the headland the plane of this schistosity strikes N.25°E and dips

70° southerly. It swings gradually to N.35°E near Half Way Rock but the

dip remains constant, The general direction of the granite-country rock

contact and also of the line joining the contact at Rosetta Head to the contact

on Wright Island is approximately that of the strike of the plane of

schistosity.

Withia the area affected by contact metamorphism the bedding is

difficult to detect but the schistosity is a prominent structure. Bands, masses

and lenses of knotted andalusite and cordierite schist and light-coloured

albite chlorite schist are also conspicuous. Although showing no apparent

structural control the bands generally bear about N.50°E. They cut across

and destroy both the schistosity and the bedding. Their presence, together

with numerous associated veins and stringers has resulted in a very confused

structural pattern on parts of the wave-cut platforms.

The dip of the country rock near the granite contaet is approximately

3S°S.E, (i.e. out to sea) and this is the dip of the main granite-country rack

contact, the granite having overridden and intruded over part of the country

rock (Fig, 3). It appears as if the magma stoped its way up the dip during

its intrusion, the bedding exercising a structural control. The frontal advance

of the magma appears to have been structurally controlled by the schistosity

as the direction of the main contact corresponds with the strike of the

achistosity. A vague lineation in the granite parallel to this direction is

shown on the aerial photograph. Roof pendants have not been moved as

the orientation of the schistosity and bedding remains the same, but xenoliths

of country rock, which are common, are disoriented.

137

The granite is cut by several major joint systems which show close rela-

tionship to thuse of West Island (vide Jack 1923). Of the major joint systems

one system strikes N-S and dips 20°W. but the others are verttcal or nearly

so and strike N.10°E, N.40°E., S.70°E, and S. 40°E. respectively.

Ti. THE COUNTRY ROCKS

The country rocks are part of an extensive series now represented by

recrystallized greywackes, quartz biotite schists and impure sandy quartaites

found on the south-eastern and eastern flanks of the Mount Lofty Ranges.

Most of the rock types are dense, fine-grained, dark-grey and composed

essentially of quartz together with biotite. They are generally massive except

for some areas where the parallel orientation of some of the biotite has

produced a schistosity, The age and stratigraphic position of this series has

heen discussed in the previous section and Robinson (1946) has recorded

descriptions of the main rock types.

The composition of the upper part of the series shows little variation

4s is indicated by Kleeman (1937) who, in discussing the origin of the xeno-

liths in the granite of Granite Island states that the “granite was intruded

into a large area of hornfels of fairly uniform composition. The rocks are

well exposed in hills just north of Rosetta Head and to the north of Victor

Harbour itself,”

Two miles inland from Rosetta [lead the country rock is massive,

muicaceous-looking and almost black in colour with no traces of schistosity

(Browne, 1920). Owing to overlying patches of Permian glacial till, it is

not possible to trace a continuous series towards Rosetta Head, but within

the area mapped the country rock is a dark-grey, fine-grained quartz biotite

schist. It consists essentially of quartz and biotite, in varying proportions

together with minor amounts of felspar and muscovite and accessory mag-

netite, apatite and zircon. Some of the biotite flakes show parallel orientation

and, in general, the degree of schisiusily tends lo increase as the headland

is approached.

(a) PeTrocrapuy

The country rock outcropping by the coast at the side of the road in

the most northern part of the area mapped (Fig. 2) is a dark-grey, fine-

grained quartz biotite schist (9590). It consists essentially of uncracked

grains of recrystallized quartz, varying considerably in grain size (from

0:25 mm. to 0:05 mm.}, which form a mosaic in which the less abundant

minerals are dispersed, together with brown biotite flakes (Fig. 4a). Some

of this biotite is present as short stumpy flakes but most of the individuals

are long (up to 1-2 mm. with ratio of elongation 4:1), show parallel orienta-

tion and are pleochroic with x=light yellow. y—=2z—=dark brown. Some

orthoclase, towards which the quartz is idioblastic, is present together with a

few crystallized grains of albite (Ab,,). There are a few stumpy muscovite

flakes, magnetite is fairly abundant, zircon, apatite and tourmaline less so,

This rock ts a greywacke type which has been metamorphosed and is repre-

sentative of much of the surrounding area. Its chemical composition is

set out in Table 1,

Approaching the headland the schistosity tends ta become more pro-

nounced and the size of some of the biotite flakes increases. Two

hundred yards from the granite contact the rock (9591) in the cliffs by the

road leading to the wharf has a pronounced schistosity and consists of vague,

discontinuous bands about i mm. across which are alternately biotite-rich

aud biotite-poor, the biotite fakes generally being 0°35 mm, in length (Fig.

4b). Recrystallized quartz grains together with minor amounts of orthoclase,

188

albite, muscovite, magnetite, apatite, zircon and tourmaline make up a

mosaic which is practically even-grained with an average grain size of

007 mm. This rock represents a belter-sorted, more argillaceous sediment

than the rock previously described but the more pronounced schistosity

suggests that stress was a more important factor in its metamorphism than

int the case of the rock further inland. The chemical composition of this rock

is set aut in Table Ll,

(a) Quartz biotite schist (9599) x 27, with accessory zireda and

magnetite.

(b) Quartz biotite schist (9591) x 27,

schistosity in the andalusite porphyroblasts and a large

chlorite flake which cuts across the schistosity.

Claser to the pranite mass the rocks show a weaker schistosity and the

texture becomes decussate. A few yards from the granite, in the roof pend-

ant just south of the wharf, the country rock (9592) is a quartz biotite

hornfels although a few biotite Hakes showing preferred orientation are still

present. Most of the biotite shows randotm orientation and together with an

equigranular mosaic of recrystallized quartz grains (average prain size

0°15 mm.) makes up the decussate texture, The chemical composition of this

rack is given in Table 1 and this, together with microscopic observations

indicate that it is stmuilar to rock 9590 in mineralogical and chemical com-

position although it represents a better-sorted sediment and has undergone

contact metamorphism following regional metamorphism,

Close ta the margin of parts of the granite mass, 2 natrow zone, up to

fen feet wide, of banded quartz biotite schist has been produced. This is

well shown on the north-western side of the headland where tts schistosity

is paralle), in detail, to the pranite-schist contact, The regional schistosity

has been obliterated in these areas and the directional features of this con-

tact schist often cut across it.

In various parts of the area there ts local develapment of sericite, mus-

cavite, andalusite and chlorite. Knots of very fine sericite, irregularly

developed over a limited area some 480 yards from the contact arta were

reported by Browne (1920 p, 53). Some muscovite is also present. The

schistosity, which curves around-the knots, is very marked, A spotted anda-

lusite schist (9593) crops out next to the granite mass, just west of the albite

chlorite schist near the wharf (Fig. 11). It is distinctly schistos¢ and is made

up of alternate bands respectively rich in parallel oriented biotite and granu-

lar quartz. The schistosity curves around clear eye-shaped crystals of anda-

189

lusite which are practically free from inclusions (Fig. 4c). Browne (1920)

also reported the sporadic occurrence of rocks containing a few large flakes

of green chlorite that cut across the schistosity although small quartz

inclusions carry the schistosity through the chlorite flakes.

(b) SEDIMENTARY VARIATIONS AND CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

The country rocks in the immediate vicinity of Rosetta Head are now

composed essentially of quartz and biotite in varying proportions with

compositions ranging from subgreywacke to argillaceous greywacke. This

is borne out by the chemical compositions of the analysed rocks and a

comparison with the average composition of greywacke (Table 1). The

variation diagram (Fig. 5) shows that Al,O,, total Fe, MgO, CaO and K,O

increase as Si O, decreases. This. reflects the inverse relations of quartz and

biotite. Felspar is never present in large amounts. Often it is mainly potash

feldspar although albite is usually present as indicated by the Na,O content

of the analysed rocks. The norms of the analysed rocks are given in Table 2.

Taste 1

Analyses of the country rocks and comparisons with greywacke

A B Cc D E F G

510s wre, eee ens “O8B2 63-55 68°76 68-92 72-90 64-2 68-1

TiO ee ee O96 0-86 0-74 0-88 0-56 0°5 0-7

FesOe on ves vee 096 0-97 0:66 1-60 0-04 1-0 3450

FeQ vac) atin en 5895 4-67 4-60 5:07 3-29 4-2 34

MnO oa ae ee 0°05 0-09 0-07 0-02 n.d. O-1 0-2

MeO 2. ue ee 400 3*12 2°65 2-52 1-85 2-9 1-8

C20 taee pose dat SSS 311 2-81 2:06 2:12 35 2-3

NasO wn a. a = 339 3-33 2-54 2-80 3-02 3-4 2-6

K:0 ieiap wore ees, SON 2S 3-24 2°29 2:10 199 2:0 2-2

HaO+ a ae ae 027 0-50 053 0-96 0-46 2-2 2.1

H,O-(110°C.) 1... 0-10 0-10 0:04 0+04 0-11

POs ee ee = OD 0-19 0-21 0-17 0-15 0-1 02

ZrOy ns ee ee 005 tr. 0-19 = p.n.d. n.d. — —

BaQ ne se 0050058 A OO nd. = 3

SB ae cuee el! bee AP 0+19 0-13 0-18 tid, _ _—

C Os eee aes tare —, ay _— = — 1°6 =

99-95 100+52 100-15 99-98 100-23 100-0 102°4x

for S ee eee eee eee CC

99-94 100-44 100-10 99-91 100-23 100-0 102-4

x Probably in error; FesQ. probably should be 1-00 and the total 100-0.

Quartz biotite schist (9591) in cliff by road, 200 yards from wharf, Rosetta

Head. Analyst: D. R. Bowes,

Inclusion on Breakwater, Granite Tsland, Victor Harbour, Analyst: A. W.

Kleeman, (Kleeman 1937).

Quartz biotite schist (9590) by coast at side of road, half mile north of

Rosetta Head. Analyst: D. R. Bowes.

Quartz biotite hornfels (9592) in toof pendant south of wharf, Rosetta

Head. Analyst: D. R. Bowes.

Sedimentary inclusion, Breakwater Quarry, Granite Island, Victor Harbour.

Analyst: A. W. Kleeman (Kleeman 1937),

Average of greywacke analyses given by Pettijohn (1949, p, 250),

Average of 30 preywackes. Compiled by Tyrrell (1933, p. 26).

Ons tM Do &

190

TABLE 2

Norms of the country rocks

A B Cc D E

Quartz sue sets wre nee O15 18+36 32-52 34°14 38°76

‘Orthoclase ce ee ones | 19°46 18:90 13-34 12-23 11-68

Albite (ee eevee pees 2B4B2 28°30 21°48 23°58 25°15

Anorthite 0 a ae oe 16°96 14-18 13-34 9-45 9-73

Corundum wn. ase es ene 2486 2°35 2-24 2°45 3-06

Zircon ay ed ete ane MTB — 0°37 — _—

Hypersthene—En 10-00 7°80 6°60 6°30 4-60

i Fs ou. a = 8°51 6:07 6-60 6:20 §-15

Magnetite ws. wn ae ee 159 1-39 0-93 2°32 —

Iimenite suse! Gare tyerh oe | DBZ 1-67 1+37 1-67 1-06

Pyrite oo. a a eee O12 0°38 0-24 0-30 _

Apatite bdo power pom. “ans O94 0-44 0-34 0-34 0-34

A study of the thin sections and chemical compositions of the rocks,

together with the variation diagram, confirms that no minerals except quartz

and biotite are present in large amounts. The rocks described and analysed

are representative of the country rocks and show the extent of the minera-

logical and chemical variations in the immediate vicinity.

Variations in the conditions during deposition are reflected by changes

in grain-size, Some of the rocks are even-grained and well-sorted although

many are uneven-grained and ill-sorted with the quartz individuals varying

considerably in size,

FIG.5 VARIATION DIAGRAM OF ANALYSES OF

CST

Two separate episodes of metamorphism are recorded by the courtry

rocks in the area. The first episode was one of regional metamorphism which

took place after the folding but before the intrusion of granite and which

changed the sediments to quartz biotite schists. Shearing stress appears to

have played only a minor role in the metamorphism of the rocks inland, as

evidenced by their lack of recognizable schistosity, but as Rosetta Head is

approached shearing stress became a more important factor and the biotite

shows parallel alignment. All the rocks have been completely recrystallized

and metamorphism reached the biotite grade.

191

The second episode was one of contact metamorphism resultant upan a

magmatic invasion of the area. Close to the granite contact the schistosity

becomes less prominent and, in parts, a hornfels was produced indicating

that heat was the dominant factor. The final emplacement of the granite

mass at Rosetta Head must have been atcompanied by some shearing stress

as andalusite quartz schist and banded qnhartz biotite schist are found in

parts immediately adjacent to the granite. Andalusite, cordiecrite, albite and

chlorite schists were also produced during the phase of contact meta-

morphism but as their formation involved a considerable addition and re-

moval of material, their genesis is discussed separately in the next section.

It is possible that the local development of knots of sericite, muscovite and

chlorite previously described may represent an early stage in these metaso-

matic alterations,

IV. THE ANDALUSITE, CORDIERITE, ALBITE, CHLORITE SCHISTS

Rocks characterized by knots of andalusite or cordierite, wthers by

masses of white albite grains and yet others by the abundance of interwoven

chlorite flakes crop out extensively in parts of the area and their presence

was recorded by Browne (1920). Rocks containing knots of both andalustte

and cordierite are not common, although these two minerals, together with

quartz, are associated in smal! irregular veins and lenses. Albite and chlorite

are commonly associated with each other and together with andalusite or

cordierite. Irregular stringers of fine-grained quartz and felspar and veins

of coarse andalusite transect some of the schists and associated country

rocks.

(a) Distrinution anb FIELD RELATIONS

These schists occur as bands, lenses and irregular masses and are dis-

tributed sporadically on the wave-cut platforms and close to the main granite

contact. There is no regular distribution of any of these types. Generally

they cross-cut and obliterate hath hedding and schistosity (Fig. 2) and are

observed to have replaced the country rock to give a rock having little or

ne directional features. They are best studied in two main localities.

(1) Wave-cut platform west of Rosetta Head

Knotted andalusite and cordierite schists, as well as light-coloured,

granular albite-rich schists crop out in Petrel Cove and to the west (Figs. 2

and 10). They mainly occur as long, narrow bands which generally bear about

N.50°E, and thus cross-cut both hedding and schistosity, although a few do

run parallel to the schistosity, The bands are not very regular and do not

follow one direction continuously although many are approximately parallel

toa prominent joint plane of the country rock, Small lens-shaped masses of

schist also outcrop and relic lenses of country rock are sometimes found

in the schist outcrops.

_ The knotted schists and albite schists are readily distinguished from

the prey schistose country rock by the jagged nature of the weathered surface

(Plate V.. Fig. 3), andalusite and cordierite forming the knots, and by the

light colour respectively, but because of their intimate relations and grada-

tions it has not been possible to separate these types in mapping. Some of

the bands and’ lenses show sharp boundaries which generally cut across both

bedding and schistnsity, but many grade out into the country rock as indi-

cated by the gradual disappearance of the knots or by the gradual change

from the white of the albite schists ta the grey af the country rock,

West of Half Way Rock veins and lenses of pink andalusite occur. They

are short and have sharp baundaries, There are also irregular veins and

masses of coarse-grained rock consisting of knots of blue cordierite (up to

192

half inch across), masses of pink andalusite, colourless anhedral masses of

quartz and greenish flakes of chlorite which wrap around the other minerals,

These tocks are not regularly distributed and are only of limited occurrence.

(2) Chi near wharf

Irregular and interlocking masses of white albite schist and green

chlorite schist make up a large part of the cliff face just south of the wharf

(Fig. 11). “Veins” of chlorite which have no simple, regular shape and no

constant direction cut across the albite schist. Their presence, together with

the presence of irregular veins and masses of coarse albite chlorite rock

(Fig. 12) and veins of granite give the cliff face a very heterogeneous

appearance. No knotted schisig are present in this area

Normally the boundary between the albite-rich and chlorite-tich rovks

is sharp, but in some cases the contact appears a3 a series of distinct steps.

The ratio of albite to chlorite in these rocks varies, and all types from

albite-rich to chlorite-rich schists are found.

The boundary between these schists and the grey schistose country

rack appears sharp and cuts across the bedding and the schistosity, both of

which generally have been obliterated. Some fine parallel banding is, how-

ever, sometimes shown in the albite schists, due to the oriented growth of

smail green chlorite flakes along original bedding planes. The disposition of

these relic bedding planes corresponds with the bedding in the country rock

near the main grantte contact and also that seen in the roof pendant south

of the wharf.

(3) Other localities

Knotted schists crop out on the wave-cut platform on the eastern side

of the headland but they are neither as abundant nor as prominent as in

Petrel Cove and to the west. The rocks are cut by numerous thin, criss-

crossing quartz felspar veins together with some barren quartz veins.

Small outcrops of albite chlorite schist are found along the main granite-

country rock contact (Figs. 2, 10 and 11). In almost every instance they are

separated from the granite by masses of coarse albite chlorite rock elongated

parallel to the contact, The small patch of albite chlorite schist between the

country tock and the coarse albite chlorite rock on the landward side of the

S.W. Tip (Fig. 9) shows the gradual transformation of the country rack to

albite chlorite schist (Plate VI., Fig. 1). This transformation is best seen

near the southern boundary of the roof pendant south of the wharf and is

described in the following section. Small patches of albite chlorite schists

also crop out amongst the country rock.

A mass of chlorite schist is found on the S.W. Tip of the headland

(Fig. 9), It resembles the chlorite sthist near the wharf, but t5 coarser

grained.

{b) Country Rock — Auxerre Cauorttr Scuisr TRANSFORMATION

The transformation of the grey country rock into a white albite chlorite

schist is shown about eighty yards south of the wharf near the southern

boundary of the large roof pendant. Over a distance of twenty-four feet the

tock grades, across the strike, from a grey hornfels, through light-grey

schists in which albite and chlorite have developed, into a light-coloured

albite chlorite schist.

The country rock, a quartz biotite hornfels (9592), has been described

(p. ). With the gradual growth and increase in amount of small individuals

oY albite and flakes of light-green chlorite the character of the rock changes,

Initially the chlorite developed as. thin wisps aligned along. the original

bedding planes, The biotite, which decreased in amount remained randomly

193

oriented together with some larger chlorite flakes. Small grains of albite became

abundant but quartz decreased in amount (9594). With the continued trans-

formation there was a further decrease in the amount of quartz and biotite

and a corresponding increase in albite and chlorite, flakes of the latter being

larger and generally showing no alignment (9595), Flakes of muscovite are

more common than in the country rocks and so are zircon, apatite and tour-

maline. Finally the rock was transformed to an albite chlorite schist (9596)

similar to those described in the following section.

This transformation involved a considerable increase in albite, chlorite

and rutile together with a decrease in quartz and the almost complete dis-

appearance of biotite. Chemical analyses of these rocks set out in Table 3

reflect the mineralogical variations and show the progressive decrease in

SiO, and K,O together with the increase in Na,O, MgO, H,O and A1,Q,.

These chemical changes are graphically set out in the variation diagram,

Fig. 6,

TasLe 3

Analyses showing the country rock—albite chlorite schist transformation

A R Cc D E

SiOe ae ee cee um tee = 68492 60-07 58-45 56-39 58-63

TID: ae tee ee BB 0:96 1-03 0-92 0-73

Al sue eee cee eee eee TBS 17-65. 18*40 18-00 20-10

Fe:Os iad fied tetris «E60 1:29 0-94 2-04 1-01

FeO sade “¥en elgep wide) deed POE 5-50 5°65 4-00 2-08

MnO ye eee cee ee ee = O02 6-05 0-03 0-04 0-04

MeO a eee oe ee ee 25 3+95 4-09 8-14 6-15

CaQ oa aa am ee ue | 206 2°22 2-63 1+29 1-09

NaQO et ee eee | 2 BO 3°88 4-44 5:36 6°95

K,0 Joss -teset vtpen itpee asap “BAG 1/89 1-78 0r15 0-16

HiOF eee ee 096 2+20 2-20 2+96 2°34

HsO-(110°C.) ee O04 0+07 0-12 0-11 0-06

PaOe sass vet tte sete cae O17 0-16 0-15 0-22 0-20

ZrOe wee eee tee nee cae DEL, 0-30 020 0-11 0:22

BaQ ae ey te ee ee O01 0-08 0+08 0+20 0-04

SY dues hie ner pet ane ver Alto 0-16 0-08 0+13 0-11

99-98 100+43 100-27 100-06 99-91

Less O fot S 4. ae ne = 0°07 0-06 0-03 0-05 0-04

99-91 100 +37 100-24 100-01 99-87

A. Quartz biotite hornfels (9592) in roof petidant south of wharf, Rosetta

Head—24 ft. north of schist—coarse albite chlorite rock contact.

; Analyst: D. R. Bowes.

B. Quartz albite chlorite schist (9594), 18 ft. north of contact. Analyst: D. R.

Bowes.

C. Quartz albite chlorite schist (9595), 12 ft. north of contact. Analyst: D. R.

Rowes.

D. Albite chlorite schist (9596), 6 ft. north of contact, Analyst: D. R. Bowes.

E, Coarse albite chlorite rock (9614), 24 ft. souith of contact. Analyst: D. R.

Bowes.

An amalysis of the coarse albite chlorite rock (9614) found between the

albite chlorite schist and the granite is also given in Table 3. This shows the

similarity in composition of the albite chlorite schist and the coarse albite

chlorite rock.

FIG.6 VARIATION DIAGRAM OF ANALYSES OF

p |

For the pttrpose of description it 1s convenient to divide these schists

into two main groups: (I): those characterized by the presence of andalusite

and/or cordierite and (2) those characterized by an abundance of albite and/or

chlorite. This grouping to a large extent separates those types found in

Petrel Cove and to the west from those that crop out near the granite-

country rock contact, éspeciully at the cliff near the wharf. Detailed rock

descriptions are omitted where they haye been recorded by Browne (1920).

(1) Andalusite and cordierite schists

The knotted andalustte schists consist of irregular andalusite individuals,

which show sieve texture and are crowded with minute inclusions of quartz

and Hmenite, together with abundant smaller grains of quartz and flakes

of biotite, chlorite and muscovite. Some of the micaceous minerals show a

preferred orientation. In parts they curve around the andalusite knots, which

are up to 3 mm. across, but in other parts the andalusite has grown at the

expense of these minerals. Small knots of sericite, showing features similar

to the andalusite, are found in same of the rocks. Much of the chlorite, with

which. rutile is invariably associated, is intergrown with biotite, some of

which has a bleached appearance.

Veins and lenses consisting essentially of andalusite and chlorite are

found west of Hali Way Rock (9597). The large andalusite crystals are

irregularly cracked and contain abundant inclusions while the chlorite occurs

as fakes and rosettes (Fig. 7a). Large and smal! clear colourless masses of

quartz are also present together with biotite Hakes, zircon and ilmenite. The

texture is variable; it is usually coarse but sometimes fine-grained with an

andalusite, biotite, quartz mosaic. Roundish patches of blue cordierite, up

to 1 cm. across are sometimes found in these masses and veins (9598), some

of which now consists of a mosaic of quartz and biotite together with small

crystals of andalusite and cordierite,

The knotted cordierite schists consist of irregular roundish patches. of inter-

locking cordierite crystals, sometimes up to 1 cm. across and either bluc or

195

brownish-yellow in colour, in a fine-grained somewhat schistose base, The

knots show some traces of a preferred orientation parallel to the schistosity

of the base. In thin section (9599-9600), they are seen to be composed of

interlocking crystals, alk im optical continuity, fell of inclusions of quartz,

zircom, chlorite, biotite, muscovite and rutile giving a micro-sieve structure,

and with ragged boundaries which are frayed out into the fine-grained

groundmass (Plate V., Fig. 4). This groundmass is usually made up of

irregular laminae of fine granular quartz and albite alternating with laminae of

parallel oriented biotite flakes. Larger biotite chlorite and muscovite flakes are

present; some of these cut across the schistosity while others sweep around

the cordierite patches. There is a concentration of zircons (all surrounded

by pleochroic haloes) in these biotile flakes and a concentration of red-brown

prisms of rutile in the chlorite. The groundmass in some of the rocks shows

neither laminae nor schistosity and is a mosaic of quartz, biotite and albite

together with some larger biotite, chlorite and muscovite flakes and some

larger quarta individuals. The size and relative concentration of the cordierite

patches varies considerably. Half of some of the rocks are made of cordierite

knots, but in others they are not as common or as Jarge. The grain-size of

the groundmass also varies appreciably amongst the rocks of this group.

There is no microscopic evidence in either the andalusite or cordierite

schists on which to base the order of formation of the constituent minerals.

It appears that all these minerals were formed during the same period and

in no particular order,

A chemical analysis of a knotted cordierite schist (9599) is given in

‘Fable 4 and this indicates the relatively high proportions of Al,O, and MgO

and, the dominance of Na,O over K,O in these rocks and the differences in

their composition compared with that of the country rocks. (Table 1).

"FABLE 4

Analyses of the cordierite, albite, chlorite schists

A B Cc Dp E F

SiOs 58-75 58-91 56-39 46-39 44-33 43°81

TiOy .... 0-70 0°85 0-92 1-28 1-10 1+33

AlLOs wee 20048 21-37 18-00 21-94 16-94 24-60

FesOs . 063 0-82 204 0-65 402 1-20

FeO ..., ‘rt 3-97 1-90 4-00 $-95 4+35 5:14

MnO rt 0-03 0-03 0-04 0-09 0-08 0-08

MgO we = «793 4-50 814 11-61 16-17 12-74

CaQ aw «1578 0-78 1+29 1+28 0-70 0°53

Nav sey ates eee 3+35 8-72 5°36 4-53 1-17 1-80

K,0 1:97 0°16 0-15 O52 4-62 2-62

H,O+ site aat 1-43 1-47 2:96 5+39 4-24 5-74

HyO- (110°C.} 0-15 0-06 O-13 0-05 0-88 O17

PaO. ete mee ee = G60 Q-21 +22 0+23 0-31 0-32

ZrO— os 0-21 0-04 0-11 0-04 0-12 0:08

Bam ee tm 0-13, O13 0-20 0-05 012 0-17

5 «OS 0-06 G13 0-02 0-t5 0-06

F er oom — — _ 0701 . —_ _

LisO ot _ = _ — abs —_

100-24 100-01 100-06 100-03 99-90 100°39

Less O for S&F... 0°06 Or 6-05 0-01 0-06 0-02

100-18 99-99 100-01 106-02 99-84 100-37

196

A. Cordjerite schist (9599) on wave-cut platform at west side of Petre) Cove.

Analyst: D. R. Bowes.

. Albite schist (9601) in cliff by wharf, Rosetta Head. Analyst: D. R. Bowes.

. Albite chlorite schist (9596) in roof pendant south of wharf, Rosetta Head

—6 ft. north of schist-coarse albite chlorite rock contact, Analyst:

D, R. Bowes.

D. Chlorite albite schist (9605) adjoining coatse albite chlorite rock vein

(9606) in cliff by wharf, Rosetta Head. Analyst: D, R. Bowes.

E, Chlorite schist (9609) in cliff by wharf, Rosetta Head. Analyst: D. R.

Rowes,

F. Chlorite schist (9607) in cliff by wharf, Rosetta Head. Analyst: D, R, Bowes,

(2) Albite and chlorite schists

White albite grains and green chlorite flakes occur together in all pro-

portions in these rocks, which show all gradations between an albite schist

and a chlorite schist. The albite in all these rocks has a composition of Ab,,

and has the same composition and optical properties as the larger albite

individuals of the coarse albite chlorite rocks, the mineralogy and chemistry

of which ate discussed later (p, 203 and Table 6). The chlorite is the same

as that found in the knotted schists and in the coarse albite chlorite rocks.

An analysis of this mineral given in Table 5 indicates its richness in MgO.

The mineral is biaxial positive with a small optic axial angle (2E —10°) and

weak birefringence. It is characterized by the presence of many minute

crystals of rutile up to 0-1 mm, in length and the TiO, of the analysis should

be allotted to the rutile and not the chlorite. The derivation of much of the

chlorite from biotite is suggested by the apparent gradations from brown

biotite to a bleached biotite and finally to chlorite with abundant rutile

inclusions.

Tape 5

Analysis of chlorite

SiOs oc. ee tee eee GOST Na.Q wee cer gee 46

+ i a BE 7 FeO 2k ee OS

AlOs wee tee ane 22! BZ H:0+ Au am ane BSS

Fe,Q. Te, ce eanmis 0-21 H.O- Week he wee DNril

FeO a. anu wee oe 11-39 PuOs oe 6 ae TTR

MgO fin ter eee 2G

CaO vn. ne aye | O55 Total ... 98'65xx

« The TiOs of the analysis should be allotted to rutile crystals included in

the chlorite flakes.

xx Low total probably due to low H:O determination.

Analysis of chlorite from chlorite schist in cliff by wharf, Rosetta Head-

Analyst: A. W. Kleeman.@)

The albite schists are dull white in colour and consist essentially of a fine-

grained mosaic of both twinned and untwinned albite (Ab,,) and quartz

together with small chlorite flakes and accessory rutile, zircon, apatite and

biotite (Fig. 7b.). The average grain size is 0-1 mm. although the grain size

varies as does the composition. Chlorite is sometimes more abundant in

certain bands and in parts there are lenses and irregular segregations of larger

quartz crystals and chlorite flakes, Thin stringers of chlorite, biotite and

muscovite cut these rocks and small pockets of chlorite and muscovite are

sometimes present. No rocks consisting wholly of albite haye been dis-

covered; some chlurite is always present. An analysis of an albite schist

(9601) is set ott in Table 4.

197

With an increase in the proportion of chlorite and a decrease in albite,

the rocks become albite chlorile schists which are fine-grained and usually

banded (9596, 9602), They consist of irregular wavy bands of chlorite flakes

(up to 2 mm. long) and anhedral quartz individuals with ragged edges

alternating with finer grained bands of albite (Ab,,) and quartz together

with smail chlorite and biotite flakes, Rutile is an abundant accessory; zircon,

apatite and brown tourmaline are also present. Au analysis of an albite

chlorite schist (9596) is given in Table 4.

With a further jnercase in the amount of chlorite and a decrease in

albite, the rock becomes a chlorite albite schist, many of which are patchy

(9603-4), Long chlorite and muscovite flakes make up part of the rock,

These wrap around fine-grained masses consisting of alternating bands of

parallel-oriented chlorite flakes and granular albite and quartz. The relative

abtindance of the larger chlorite and muscovite flakes as compared with the

fine-grained banded part varies considerably amongst rocks of this group,

as does the proportion of each mineraJ. Biotite is sometimes present with

the chlorite and muscovite and often with chlorite alone, but lhe predominant

mineral is abways chlorite. Yeins of randomly oriented chlorite fiakes, up

to 1-5 mm, in length, together with anhedra! quartz containing small chlorite

inclusions sometimes transect these rocks,

(a) (b) (c)

Fig. 7

{a} Andalusite chlorite vem (9597) x LI. ; ; P

(b) Albite schist (9601) x 27, with fakes of chlorite, which

include rutile prisms, and grains of magnetite.

flakes,

In the cliff near the wharf a chlorite alhite schist (9605), the chemical

composition of which is set out in Table 4, is cut by a vein of coarse albite

chlorite ruck (9606) (Plate V1., Fig. 2). This schist consists of smal! chlorete

flakes oriented parallel to the edge of the vein in association with a fine-

grained mosaic of pellucid untwinned albite (Ab,,) and some quartz.

The chlorite schists (9607 -9) are green foliated, crenulated rocks consisting

of parallel oriented Makes of green chlorite and brown biotite, the average

length of the flakes being 0-5 mm. and the ratio of elongation 6:1, Chlorite

is generally the predominant mineral although in some of the rocks it is

subordinate to hietite, Some muscoyite is usually present. Between bundles

of flakes of the micaceous minerals are areas of a fine-grained mosaic of

quartz together with a small but variable amount of alblte (average grain

188

size 0°08 mm.} and accessory rutile, apatite and zircon (Fig. 7c), Analyses of

two chlorite schists are set out in Table 4,

A comparison of the analyses of these albite and chlorite schists (Table

4) with the analyses of the country rocks (Table 1) reveals marked differences

in chemical composition. The high proportion of Na,O associated with the

low proportion of K,O in the albite schists and the high proportion of MgO

in the chlorite schists are distinctive features of these rocks and are far from

the corresponding values for the country rocks.

Fi6.8 VARIATION DIAGRAM OF ANALYSES OF

The mineralogical dominance of albite, the scarcity of biotite and the

presence of some chlorite in the albite schists is reflected in the relatively

high amount of Na,O, the small amount of KO and the presence of MgO

in considerable amounts. As the rocks becotme more chloritic the amounts

of Na,O and SiO, decrease while K,O increases as do H,O and MgO, the

latter constituent to a very marked degree, This reflects the gradually

diminishing amount of albite, the increased Proportion of biotite and the

mineralogical dominance of chlorite. The proportion of TiO, present shows

the greater amount of rutile present in the chloritic rocks as compared with

the albitic types. These chemical changes are graphically represented in the

variation diagram, Fig. 8.

(d) Genesis

Field evidence shows that the parent rock of these andalusite, cordierite,

albite and chlorite schists was the quartz biotite schist of the country rock,

Gradations from quartz biotite schist to albite chlorite schist south of the

wharf have been described (p. 192) and similar gradations, both along and

across the strike, can be seen at the boundaries of many of the albite chiorite

schist masses on the wave-cut platform west of the headland and at the main

country rock-albite schist boundary at the §.W, Tip as illustrated in Plate

VL, Fig. 1. Relics of quartz biotite schist remain within some of the albite

chlorite schist masses although these relics usually consist of an tinaltered

core, with schistosity corresponding with the general schistosity of the

country rocks, and a periphery which grades aut into the albite chlorite

schist. Gradations: from quartz biotite schist to knotted andalusite and

cordierite schist are also shown at the boundaries of many of the knotted

schist masses on the wave-cut platforms and also at the boundaries of relics

of quartz biotite schist within them. As the gradation takes place, sa the

proportion of knots of andalusite or cordierite increases.

199

These bands and masses of andalusite, cordierite, albite and chlorite

schist generally cut across and destroy the bedding, so that their unusual com-

positions cannot be due to original sedimentary bands of tinusual composition.

"They also generally cut across and destroy the regional schistosity indicating

that their formation was after the regional metamorphism which was respon-

sible for the formation of the quartz biotite schists and the regional schistos-

ity. Their distribution is related to the granitic rocks of the area. To the

north and north-west of the contact zone of the granite at Rosetta Head

the country rocks contain no masses of andalusite, cordierite, albite and

chlorite schists, but to the west of the granite outcrop there is a concentration

af these rocks which becomes Jess intense west of Half Way Rock. Half a

mile further west none of these rocks is seen. This asymmetric arrangement

around the outcropping granite mass suggests that these rocks were prodaced

in the aureole of an underlying granite mass which fed the over-riding in-

trusion at Rosetta Head at a late stage in the general process of its emplace-

ment. The small mass of granite now exposed produced a small zone of

contact schists but, in general, it modified rather than was responsible for

the main contact metamorphic changes.

The production of andalusite, cordierite, albite and chlorite schists in

the aureole of this granite mass at the expense of the quartz biotite schists

involved a considerable transfer of material as shown by a comparison of the

analyses of Table I with those of Table 4. There is no evidence to suggest

that the granitic magma provided the necessary material and such a postulate

would involve the simultaneous production of offshoots of the granite re-

spectively rich in Na,O, MgO and Al,O, to produce the albite, chlorite,

cordierite and andalusite schists as well as offshoots rich in K,O and 5i0,

tn produce the veinlets of orthoclase and quartz which transect the wave-cut

platforms. The evidence availahle suggests that there has been no intro-

duction of material into the area of the aureole, but that the presence of

the mass of intrusive granite produced the requisite conditions for meta-

morphic differentiation. There has been a cedistribution of some material

resulting in the production of the andalusite, cordierite, albite and chlorite

schists but there has been no bulk introduction of material.

The chemical changes which took place during the formation af these

schists were considerable. In each case there was a decrease in SiO, and,

except in the case of the muscovite- and biotite-rich chlorite schists, of KO.

The excess of these constituents above that remaining in the schists is now

found as yuartz veins and thin quartz orthoclase veins and stringers which

are most abundant in the areas where the schists are most prominent. The

role of AL,Oy varied; it was added to some of the rocks while from others

it was taken away. Any excess Al,O, is found as “sweats” of andalusite

which take the form of veins, Iubes and lenses. Surplus SiO, and MgO was

also concentrated, in parts, in some of these “sweats’ in the furm of quartz,

chlorite and cordierite. Both FeO and MgO were concentrated in the chlorite

schists, the Mg@ especially, while their amounts in the more albitic types

are less than those present in the country rocks. To a lesser extent MgO is

concentrated in the cordierite schists. The albite schists, sotne of which

contain as much as 80% albite, were enriched in Na,O, but the more chloritic

iypes contain a low proportion of this constituent showing that it has been

leached out during the transformations. The ammount of H,O in all the

schists is considerably greater that the amaunt present in the country rocks

and this, together with the presence of numerous “sweats” and veins in the

area suggests that H,O was introduced into the area, possibly from the

magma below, so that the rocks were relatively rich in this consti(uent

during the rock transformations.

200

Varying proportions of andalusite, cordierite, albite, chlorite, biotite.

muscoyite and quartz are found and the various mineral assemblages repre-

sent Stages in the process of metamorphic differentiation. There is no regular

distribution of any of the various types of schist and there is no definite

order of formation of the constituent minerals: Most of the textures and

structures of the country rock’ were destroyed by the transformations but

telics of bedding and schistosity do remain in parts suggesting that the

pracess was one of “soaking” with molecular or ionic exchange. Apart from

the amount of H,O, the bulk composition of the area appears to be the same

as it was before metamorphic differentiation, The process ceased when the

granite mass cooled and the requisite conditions were no longer present.

V. THE COARSE ALBITE CHLORITE ROCKS OF IGNEOUS ASPECT

Rocks of this group—the “albite mica syenite” group of Browne (1920)—

are generally coarse-grained, light-coloured and composed essentially of

white albite crystals, up to 4x 3x3 cm, and green chlorite. In many respects

these rocks resemble plutonic igneous rocks. They are distinguished fram

ALAITE COMORES sDINST

WI PATCH e@ OF Coan

ALDINE CHCORITE MOCA

+++ 4+iHe44

++tettate

GRanite

= ©

Pio

4 +

+ +

Fig. 9

Geological Map of S.W. Tip of Rosetta Head.

the porphyritic granite by the absence of blue opalescent quartz, the lighter

colour and the abundance of white, twinned albite crystals. The proportions

of albite and chtorite vary considerably from place to place, the rock varying

from an albite-rich rock to a chlorite-rich rock although albite is generally

present in the greater amount. Because of these variations in compositior

the term “coarse albite chlorite rock of igneous aspect” is considered to lie

more appropriate than “albite mica syenite,” as the rock is, in many instances

far from syenitic in composition,

201

(a) Disrrrpution AND FIELp RELATIONS

‘These coarse albite chlorite rocks are mainly found at the main granite-

country rock contact and they crop out almost continuously between the

granite and the country rock (or albite chlorite schist in parts) on the

landward slope of the headland (Fig, 2). Outcrops completely surrounded by

granite and others completely surrounded by country rock are also seetl.

The steep nature of the terrain at the S.W. Tip of the headland and near

the wharf provides good exposures and enables (he field relations of these

rocks to be studied in three dimensions.

(1) South-west Tip of Rosetta Head

The relationships of the cnarse albite chlorite rock with both the albite

chlorite schist and the granite can be seem in this area. In the cliffs close

to the sea, by the main contact with the country rock, veins, stringers and

patches of coarse albite chlorite rock are present in the albite chlorite schist

(Plate VL, Fig. 1). They are not present in the adjoining country rock or in

the relics of country rock in the albite chlorite schist. The veins and stringers

show no ordered arrangement or distribution and in many cases they do not

connect with one another; many of thet are in the form of isolated lenticular

masses. Further from the contact there are “xenoliths” of albite chlorite

schist in the coarse albite chlorite rock. The boundaries of some of these

xenoliths’ are not sharp; a gradation from fine albite chlorite schist to

Aa eat

Ole hSe ALONE Coyonire=e ry :

Ss = _ Stange

GLACIAL a

att AIGTITE SC4iST

S4ACIAL GHAATICS

Toes hes ee pact

wWorres ScHis ine <rabaiye

~ :

SSOUARTZ BIngi7e su

——~ ~

WAVE=CUT DL WTO

= 35 :

SAND uy

~~ O™ ~ a ae

Fig, 10

Rosetta Head from the west, showing the wave-cut platform and Petrel Cove in the

foreground and the granite-country rock contact in the background.

coarse albite chlorite rock by the gradual growth of larger albites and

chlorites is shown, The contact between the coarse albite chlorite rock and

the granite is sharp in each instance, regardless of the composition of the

albite chlorite rock (Plate VL, Fig. 3) and a microscopic examination of a

thin section of this contact (9610) emphasizes its sharpness.

A geological map of the area (Fig. 9) gives the distribution of the

yariotis rocks and the variations in composition of the coarse albite chlorite

rock, Petrographic descriptions of the main types of coarse albite chlorite

rock are given in a following section. The chlorite schist-coarse albite chlorite

rock contact is not a sharp one; there is a gradua) change in rock type with

the disappearance of the large albite crystals.

(2) Along the main gromite contact

Outcrops of coarse albite chlorite rock are found along the main granite-

country rock contact (vie Figs. 2, 10, 11) and in many cases they are

associated with albite chiorite schist. As the granite contact dips 35°S,E.,

the granite mass is above the coarse albite chlorite rock which occurs as

a sheet or a series of masses in the plane of contact between the granite

above and the albite chlorite schist—if present—and the country rock below.

Where the contacts can be observed, they are all sharp—between granite

and coarse albite chlorite rock, between granite and country rock and between

coarse albite chlorite rock and albite chlorite schist.

QUART] BroTire schisT

Fig, 11

Portion of the north-eastern side of Rosetta Head from the north, showing the

granite-country rock contact and the distribution and relationships of both albite

chlorite schists and coarse albite chlorite rocks of igneous aspect.

(3) Cliff near wharf

In this cliff, thin stringers, veins and irregular masses of coarse albite

chlorite rock occur amongst the albite schists, but not amongst the chlorite

schists (Fig. 12). Their distribution, habit and relationship to the surround-

ing rocks are similar to thase of the corresponding rocks at the S.W-. Tip.

Some veins with sharp contacts transect the chlorite albite schists (9611).

Their composition is somewhat more albitic than that of the associated

schist (cf. Table 8, Analysis B, and Table 4, Analysis D) in which the

chlorites in close proximity to the vein are aligned parallel to the boundary

of the vein (Plate VI., Fig. 2). These veins give the appearance of having

been channelways along which material moved although some of the albite

individuals are considerably larger than some of the constrictions in the

veins, There are also outcrops showing a sharp, apparently intrusive contact

between the coarse albite chlorite rock and the country rock.

{4) Other localities

In some patts the coarse albite chlorite rocks crop out as masses sur-

rounded on all sides by granite; in each case the contact is sharp, There

are several such outcrops on the S.W. Tip (Fig. 9) and others on the south-

203

eastern and eastern slopes of the headland, Here, close to sea level, tongues

of coarse albite chlorite rock, ali trending S.70°E. are associated with the

gtanite, with a sharp contact between (Fig. 2). The central part of one of

these tongues is a mass of chlorite schist, three feet wide and extending for

thirty feet. In other parts the coarse albite chlorite rock crops out without

any obvious relation to either the granite or the albite chlorite schists as

small masses surrounded by country rock and bounded by sharp contacts.

Fig. 12

Geological sketch of ihe albite chlorite schist and coarse albite

chlorite rock of igneous aspect seen on the cliff face by the wharf.

(5) Similar outcrops on the neighbouring islands

On Wright Island masses of coarse albite chlorite rocks are found com-

pletely surrounded by granite, the contacts always being sharp. Close to the

sandy beach on the northern end of the island, coarse albite chlorite rock crops

out between the country reck and the granite along the contact {Fig. 2).

On the north-western side of Granite Island, Victor Harbour, and only

visible at very low tide, is a small outcrop of coarse albite chlorite rock

which has sharp contacts with the surrounding granite (Fig. 1).

(b) MInerALocicat. ComPosrTion

The alpite is mostly clear but shows some dusty incipient alteration in

places and contains inclusions of chlorite together with some muscovite,

rutile, zircon and apatile, A mineral analysis (Table 6) of this albite was

done on handpicked material (grains passed through 1 mm. seive) from a

crushed rock collected on the S.W. Tip (9613). The only impurity ef im-

portance was chlorite which could not be separated however fine the crush-

ing. Assuming all the magnesia in the analysis to be in the chlorite, the

requisite amount of the other constituents present in the chlorite was cal-

culated using the analysis of the chlorite given in Tabie 5. All the titania in

the analysis was allotted to the rutile present in the chlorite Aakes. The

calculated composition of the felspar from this analysis is Abg, An, Gry.

204

TABLE 6

Analysis of albite

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi)

SIOg a eee ee 6543 1:34 64-19 2°93

TiOa oe eee tee ee = O04 _— — 4-01 4

AlsO3 oe ce pee eee 2116 0:94 20:22 1-08

FeQ se ae cee ee O49 0-47 —

MgO ioe see tee nee O86 0-86 _

Ca ce see eee gene 056 0-04 0-52 0-02 (5)

Na2Q ae ae nee ae 10°64 0-02 10:62 0-94 of 0-99 1

KsO oe ae se cee 026 _ 0°26 0-02

HsO oe cee ee O72.

Total oo. wo 100°10

i. Analysis of albite hand picked from coarse albite chlorite rock (9613).

S.W. Tip, Rosetta Head. Analyst: D. R. Bowes,

n. Amounts of constittients present in chlorite impurity.

iii. Resultant composition of albite.

iv. Number of metal atoms on bases of 120.

v. Arrangement in groups.

vi. Ideal composition.

Recalculating column (3) to 100-00 gives:

SiOs sat Stee aay weer GOOD

AkOs bape te Se wae BEAT Proportions of felspar molecules

CaO ee cee ne ee ee OS Ab us uae a 9S

Na.O vee tee cee eee 1109 Dixie cepsay atte) -a0ce 3

K20 gees? tseel ‘atte teien P27 ROE pasate pete canes 2

1¢0-00

Determinations on the Universal Stage gave the optic axial angle of

the mineral as 81° (+2°), the sign positive and maximum extinction in the

symmetrical zone of -14°. Both these measurements indicate a composition

of Aby,. The smaller grains of albite in these rocks also have the same optical

properties and composition.

The chlorite in these rocks has the same properties as the chlorite in

schists (p. 196) and it is assumed to have the same chemical composition

(vide Table 5).

The mineralogical composition of these rocks varies from albite-rich

at one extreme to chlorite-rich at the other. In general quartz is more

common in the albite-rich rocks than in the other types and biotite and

muscovite more common in the chlorite-rich types. The large albite individ-

uals dominate the texture of the albitic types and, to a lesser degree, the

texture of the more chloritic types,

Albite-rich types, which are predominently coarse-grained and composed

almost completely of albite laths up to 3x2 cm. in cross-section, are common

(9612), Fine-grained albite individuals (average grain size 0'3 mm.) fit into

the irregular boundaries of these laths and crystals of albite between these

two extremes of grain size are also present as are smaller crystals of quartz,

chlorite, biotite and muscovite. Rutile, zircon and apatite are accessory.

The texture of such a rock is illustrated in Fig. 13a, It is noticeable that

many of the twin lamallae of the large albites are bent.

205

Browne (1920, p. 21) described a similar rock, the analysis of which is —

included in Table 8, It differs from the rock described above in that mus-

eavite is absent and the amount of chlorite is less. The chlorites are bent,

the felspars fractured and dislocated with considerable granulation and

minerals show undulose extinction, The reason given for these phenomena

is that the “rock mass has been subjected to considerable pressure,”

Albite chlorite types make up the main mass of the S.-W. Tip of the

headland, The rocks are mainly composed of large crystals of albite, many

af which are cracked and granulated while in others the twin lamallae are

bent. Small individuals of albite together with chlorite flakes are present

between the larger albites. Some of the small chlorites wrap around the

large albites but the large chlorites show random orientation and some ate

arranged as rosettes. Both muscovite and biotite are found in parallel inter-

growth with chlorite although the muscovites are often larger than the

chlorites and the biotite is usually found as small crystals pleochroic from

light-brown to almost colourless. Small amhedral crystals of quartz are

present, rutile is a common accessory being especially abundant in the

chlorite flakes, und apatite and zircon are also seen. A micrometric analysis

of one of these types (9613) is given in Table 7, its texture is illustrated

hy Fig. 13b and its chernical composition, together with that of two similar

rocks (9606, 9614), is set out in Table 8.

(a) (b) (c)

Fig. 13

(a) Coarse albite-rich rock (9612) x5 showing large Branulated

albite individuals in a matrix of albite together with small

amounts of chlorite and quartz.

(b) Coarse albite chlorite rock (9613) x 5 showing large, granu

lated, bent and fractured albite individuals in am albite

chlorite matrix.

{c) Coarse chlorite albite rock (9615) x 5 showing large albite,

chlorite and biotite individtals in a chlorite albite matrix.

TABLE 7

Micrometric analysis of a coarse albtte chlorite rock

Albtte aus pan ner SOO Biotite tie wine anne | (OF

Chlorite a se ae 3087 Apatite 4, .. .. 5

Museovite = oy eS Zircon sue pe -wiee Ord

Quart. wes ae ee

Rutile see ee ee OD Total vee ee aes TODO

Micrometric analysis of coarse albite chlorite rock (9613), S. W. Tip of Rosetta

Hence,

266

Taste &

Analyses of the coarse albite chlorite rocks.

A B Cc D

SiOs ee see oe 64°60 59-00 58°63 56:24

TiOy ee cee seen ws = 1404 0+72 0:73 0-98

AleOg oe cee vee ee 20°37 19°41 20-10 19-75

FresOp oe vee see eee OSL 0-34 1-01 0+76

FeO ise tse vee ane 067 359 2:08 1-63

MnO soe seit ontse _ 0-04 0-04 0-01

MEO™ 240 Gin sacs wee D5 6°44 6-15 7:00

CaQ sec ue ee ee 4D 1-60 1-09 0-75.

NasO say atte see D4 6-42 6:95 8-62

DO eer | CG) 0-09 0:16 0:49

H,0O+ wee ue oe 0885 2:47 234 2/90.

HzO— (110° C) ae vee OTS 0-09 0-06 0-09

On (L774 0-18 0+20 0+19

ZrOn se ee ee ee = 003 0°08 0-22 0-15

BaO oa ae ae ue) Oa 0-08 0-04 0-13

5 man span ths 0-03 Olt 0°03

99-98 99-91 99-63

Less O for Su uy 0-01. 0-04 0-01

99-90 99-97 99+87 99-62

“Albite mica syenite’ (coarse albite-rich rock). Rosetta Head. Analyst:

W. R. Browne (Browne 1920).

Coarse albite chlorite rock (9606). Vein next to chlorite albite schist €9605)

in cliff by wharf, Rosetta Head. Analyst: D. R. Bowes,

Coarse albite chlorite rock (9614), 24 ft. south of south side of roof pendant

south of wharf, Rosetta Head. Analyst: D. R. Bowes.

Coarse albite chlorite rock (9613), S.W. Tip of Rosetta Head. Analyst:

D, R. Bowes,

9 no eB p>

Chlorite albite types contain less albite and quartz and more chlorite, biotite

and muscovite than the rocks described above. The amount of micaceous

minerals is greater than the amount of albite which still occurs as large

crystals (9615-6). ‘These albites tend to weather out and from a distance

the rock has, at first sight, the appearance of a vesicular lava (Plate VI,

Fig. 3), Litle granulation is evident in these types although many of the

large albites are cracked and show displacement of the twin lamellae along

the cracks. The texture of one of these rocks is illustrated in Fig. 13c. These

rocks grade into chlorite-rich types. which appear to be identical with the

chlorite schists and have been mapped as such.

A comparison of the analyses of these coarse albite chlorite rocks (Tahle

8) with the analyses of the albite chlorite schists (Table 4) reveals very

marked similarities in chemical composition and the variations shown. As

in the case of the schists, there is a high proportion of Na,O associated with

a low proportion of K,O, especially in the more albitic types, and a high

proportion of MgO in the chloritic types. The mineralogical dominance of

albite and the scarcity of biotite in the albitic types is again reflected in

the high amount of Na,O and the low amount of K,O, The small amount

of chlorite present is reflected in the MgO: percentage. As the rocks become

207

more chloritic, the amounts of Na,O and SiO, decrease while MgO, H.O

and to a lesser extent K,O, increase. As in the case of the schists, this reflevts

the gradually diminishing amount of albite, the importance of chlorite and

the increased proportion of biotite. These chemical changes are graphically

represented im the variation diagram Fig. 14.

FIG.I4 VARIATION DIAGRAM OF

ANALYSES OF TABLE 8

(d) Genesis

The present investigations have shown that these coarse albite chlorite

rocks are related in the field to both the albite chlorite schists and to the

granite. The salient points concerning their relationship with the albite

chlorite schists are as follows: (1) Much of the coarse albite chlorite rock

is found in association with albite chlorite schists, This is the case when

granite is associated with the albite chlorite schists but not when granite

is not associated with the schists. (2) At the 5.W. Tip and in the cliff near

the wharf, lenses and masses of coarse albite chlorite rock appear to have

been developed in site at the expense of the albite chlorite schists and both

rock types have the same mineralogical and chemical compositions. (3) In

some places, veins of coarse albite chlorite rock cut the albite chlorite schist

and jin these cases, the veins are usually more albitic than the schist. (4)

Variations in both mineralogical and chemical compositions are parallel even

in respect of many details. The salient features concerning the relationship

of the coarse albite chlorite rock with the granite are as follows: (1) Coarse

albite chlorite rocks crop out almost contunuously along the main granite-

country rock boundary. Their form is .as a sheet or a series of isolated fiat

bodies in the plane of the contact {1e. dipping 35°S.E.) with the granite

above and the country rock—or albite chlorite schist—below. (2) There is

always a sharp contact between the two rocks, regardless of the composition

of the coarse albite chlorite rock. (3) In some cases the granite tongues in

and out of the coarse albite chlorite rock but in other cases the coarse albite

chlorite rock tongues in and out of the granite or is found as small plug-like

masses in the granite.

The salient features of the coarse albite chlorite rock itself are as follows:

(1) Tt shows intrusive relations with the granite and the country rock and

in some but not all cases, with the albite chlorite schists {as stated above).

(2) Many of the albites are strained, cracked and broken and show con-

siderable peripheral granulation. This is most pronounced in the albitic types

and is not common in the chlorite types. (3) Some of the chlorite flakes

208

are bent, some wrap around the large albites, and yet others are found as

rosettes of large crystals, (4) A few of the albite individuals in the veins

of coarse albite chlorite rock are considerably larger than the narrowest

parts of the veins, (5) The shapes of the walls on either side of the veins

often do not match.

This evidence suggests that the parent of the coarse albite chlorite rock

Was the albite chlorite schists and that the rock was formed during, and

because of the intrusion of the granite by recrystallization and partial

mobilization, In the eatly stages of the process, large albites and chlorites

grew in the albite chlorite schist in favourable areas, which were probably

those containing most moisture and those most affected by the heat from

the magma. Hence there developed irregular lenses, masses and stringers

of coarse albite chlorite rock in albite chlorite schist of the same composition.

As the processes proceeded there was loss of cohesion hetween some af

the smaller grains and the rock hecame capable of movement and intrusion,

The more albitic rocks were most susceptible and so a semt-mobile coarse

albite chlorite rock containing large albites and some large chlorites in a

mobile base veined the surrounding rocks. This provided the heat and Auid

necessary for parts of the vein walls to become semi-mobile and so the veins

widened and the size of the crystals increased, The more chloritic types were

not sa readily mobilized, but large albite crystals developed in them and the

grain-size of the chlorites increased. The chlorite-rich schists were not

mobilized but were recrystallized to give coarse chlorite-rich rocks.

A considerable amount of semi-mobile coarse albite chlorite rock was

farmed at the expense of albite chlorite schist along the main gramite contact

during the over-riding intrusion of the granite up the dip of the strata. This

miush of albite and chlorite crystals in a Huid base was forced along beneath

the intruding granite and incorporated into itself mare albite chlorite schist

over which it pushed, Thus the coarse albite chlorite rocks are found as a

sheet or a series of flat bodies in the plane of the main granite-country rock

contact and show sharp, intrusive relations with the vranile, the country

rocks and some of the albite chlorite schists.

With this type of intrusion the large albites were cracked, broken,

strained and granulated and the chlorites were bent and pushed arptind the

albites. With the cooling of the granite mass, the fluid base crystallized

forming some large rosettes of chlorite, but mainly the finer grained base

of albite and chlorite with some quartz.

VI. THE GRANITIC ROCKS

(a) Distaiution ann Pirin RELATIONS

The scaward part of Rosetta Head is a mass of grey porphyritic granite

(Fig. 3) which is similar in mode of outcrop, appearance and composition to

the granite found on West Island, Wright Island and in some Jocalilies

at Port Elliot (Fig. 1). Sharp contacts are shown at Lhe junction of the

granite with the country rock, the albite chlorite schist and the coarse albite

chlarite rock of igneous aspect. Small tongues of pranite are injected into

the country tock at the contact, much of the nearby rock is a hornfels and

a narrow zone of contact schist follows the contact, The granite overlies

the country rock as the main contact dips 35° S.E.

Angular disoriented xenoliths of metamorphosed and metasomatised

country rock are present in the granite anc these are concentrated near

its margins, The metasomatic alteration of the xenoliths of country rock

in the granile of Granite Island has been studied by Kleeman (1937) and

209

similar stages of alteration to those described in that area aré shown in

the xenoliths at Rosetta Head.

Two small masses of even-grained granite (9617) with sharp intrusive

contacts, outcrop on the landward side of the main granite-country tock

boundary, Directional features due to the parallel orientation of biotite

flakes are shown in some of these rocks. Small, angular disoriented xenoliths

of country rock are enclosed in the granite and some of these have dark

rims enriched in biotite (9618) due to teaction between xenolith and magma

(Plate VL. Fig. 4), There ts a small outcrop of graphic quartz felspar granite

just east of the old mine shaft,

The prophyritic granite is cut by dolerite dykes which are now uralitized.

One dolerite on the south-eastern side of the headland intrudes into both

the coarse albite chlorite rock and the granite and has a fine-grained margin

which shows parallel flow banding through four or five inches within the

contact, The associated granite shows directional features, with the orienta-

tion of biotite flakes parallel to the edge of the dyke. The dolerite itself

is cut by small quartz tourmaline veins.

(b) MINERALOGICAL COMPOSITION

Soda-microcline microperthite, The felspar phenocrysts from the granite of

Granite Island were described by Gartrell (1903) who classed them as

anorthoclase. Later Browne (1920) suggested they were microcline mucro-

perthite. The mineral shows microcline crass-hatching, has two cleavages

at right angles and measurements on the Universal Stage have shown that

it has an optic axial angle of 74° (+1°), a negative optical sign and an extinction

angle YA(010) of 54°. This suggests a composition intermediate hetween

microcline and anorthoclase. A section parallel to (010) shows intergrown

streaks of plagioclase which are roughly parallel to (100), This plagioclase

has an optic axial angle of &2° (+1°), is optically negative, has a maximum

extinction angle on a section normal to (010) of +14° and has a composition

of acid andesine (Ab,.).

The mitieral is thus. a soda-microcline microperthite, the chemical com-

position of which was recorded by Gartrell (1903) and the above determina-

tions show why the CaO percentage is high for a perthite and why the Na,O

pereentage is high for microcline and low for anorthoclase. The proportions

4 the various felspar molecules calculated from the analysis are Org,, ADag,

Nij-

Plagioclase. Albice and pericline twinning is offen shown and many of

the crystals are strongly zoned, The centre of some of the zoned. ctystals

is andesine (Ab,,} but the composition becomes progressively more albitic

towards the outer zones which are usually Ab,, although some are Ab,,.

A few small crystals in the ground muss also huve a composition pf Aby,,.

The porphyritic granite (9619) consists of large, tabular, subhedral

phenocrysts of soda-mirocline microperthite up to 4x3 cm,, together with

some large plagioclase and quartz individuals set in a coarse-grained ground-

mass, with hypidiomorphic texture, of quartz, microcline, acid plagioclase

and biotite, Muscovite, apatite, zircon, ilmenite and pyrite are accessory,

The potash felspar phenacrysls are studded with inclusions of irregularly

distributed biotites, up to 3. mm. in length, small laths of andesine and ragged

or rounded grains of quartz together with smaller biotite flakes and small

apatite prisms. All these inclusions are primary and of earlier crystallization

than the felspar, but some later quartz and muscovite fills cracks. As

210

described by Browne (1920, p. 13) a “fairly constant characteristic of these

felspar phenocrysts is the presence of a rim of variable width composed of

quartz granules graphically intergrown with felspar . . . ‘The inter edge

of the rim is usually straight. There are outgrowths of felspar beyond the

rim, the phenocrysts having as a result irregular boundaries against the other

minerals of the rock. These outgrowths are usvially notably free from

perthitic intergrowths . . .” This rim often shows up megascopically as

an outer, whiter zone, giving the appearance of a zoned felspar.

TABLE 9 P

Analyses of granites

A 8 Cc D E F

SIGq eg ee tee eee nee PS 71°44 68°20 75 +8 70-18 65-01

TiOn ae ce ee ee ee OSA OSB DH 0-39 0-57

AlsO,s vue te eee eee 1G7B 15-09 18509 12-90 14g? 15.04

FesOn 0. ce cae ee ee O80 0-86 0-39 0-25 1°57 1-74

REO i cas tai ake ats ER 2-58 0-85 1-78 2-65

MnO wee ee O01 0-02 0-04 = 0-12 0-07

MgO wn ue ke ae ee NY 8) 0-80 0-13 0-88 1-9)

CaO... n., oer ys Os F: | 0+74 1-99 4-42

NasO oo. ee ee ene cee 2h 2-09 285 231 3-48 3-70

Katd= oe co. ein pine 4035 4-46 4-60 6°06 4-11 2:75

H,O+ tin ate one cet DSS 0-24 0-64 0:60 >

HiO-(#10°C) a OE 04 et eee O84 1-04

PrOw ee cee ee OT 0-22 O14 _ 49 ‘0-20

Zr Qe ve cece cess cee aeee EB — pad. _ = —

BaO cee ay ree ee OD mil 0:04 — —_ —

Ss wets tins aork atte en "OOS —_— — _ _— —

HeSy fen can, od xine) Ane — 0-04 O11 = ~ Sn,

Cl sagh | Hite wane Yqi'e _ 0-05 — —_ ~ ~

100, +52 GO-41 =100+28 99-70 «106-00 =: 180-00

100°50 99-41 10028 99-70 100-00 100-00

A. Porphyritic granite (9619), Rosetta Head (bulk analysis), Analyst: D, R.

Bowes,

B, Porphyritic granite, West Island. Analyst: W. S. Chapman (Jack, 1923).

C. Porphyritic granite, Granite Island, Victor Harbour. Analyst: W. R.

Browne (Browne, 1920).

Even-grained granite, Port Elliot. Analyst: W. R. Browne (Browne, 1920).

. Granite of all periods: average of 546 analyses (Daly, 1933).

F. Granodiorite: average of 40 analyses (Daly, 1933).

The analysis of the porphyritic granite shows that its composition is

comparable with those of the corresponding rocks from West Island and

Granite Island (Table 9). A comparison with averages of compositions of

granite and grandiorite (Daly 1933) shows that the SiO,, MgO, CaO and

K,O percentages of the porphyritic granite from Rosetta Head are similar

to those of the average of granite, while the TiO, and FeO percentages are

similar to those of the average of granodiorite. The rock contains considerably

less Na,O than the average of either granite or granodiorite and much more

K,O than the latter, whereas the even-grained granite from Port Elliot is

even poorer in Na,O but very rich in KO. Apart from an abnormally high

241

amount of corundum in the norm of the West Island granite, the norms of

the granites (Table 10) reflect the variations shown in the different granites

in the variations of the percentages of the standard minerals.

Potash ‘felspar and acid plagioclase are present in approximately equal

proportions with quartz and biotite being abundant and the only other

‘essential minerals. Hence, petrographically, the rock should be classified

as-an adatnellite, whereas its chemical composition is similar to granite in

some respects and granodiorite in others. Field and internal evidence reveals

that the rock is a contaminated one, hence it is best termed a contaminated

granite.

Taste 10

Norms of granites

A B Cc D

Quartz ever) EYL | 37-2 26°28 36-48

Orthoclase cue wee 26713 26°69 27-24 36.14

Albite sae un pee 2308 17-82 24-30 19.39

Anorthite 2... sa. wo 8°34 4-45 11-95 361

Corundum oe ve 1+43 5-10 1-94 1-22

Zircon car wee we = O37 _ — —_

Hypersthene—En ... 2°80 2-00 2-00 0-30

” Fe .. 3:43 2:64 3-04 1-19

Magnetite 0 1. sn. 1716 1-16 1°39 0-46

Timeniteé 0 =. a 1°08 1-06 1-06 0-23

Pyrite oa eee nee 0-12 _— = —

Apatite Hiss eons ony WDA 0-50 0-4 —

ee a ee ne ee sees ee

(d) GENESIS

‘The intrusive, magmatic origin of this granite is clearly demonstrated

on field evidence. It contains hornfelsed and metasomatized disoriented

xenoliths of country rock, the granite-country rock boundary is sharp with

small veins and stringers of the granite penetrating the country rock, and

the granite mass has an associated contact metamorphic aureole. Hence it

is considered that in this area, a granite magma stoped its way upwards

and blocks of displaced country rock are strewn ahout as xenoliths.

The gtanite is in close association with the albite chlorite schists which

it veins and cuts near the wharf. It would thus appear that the granite now

occupies space formerly taken by these schists, but no remains of the albite

chlorite schists are found as xenoliths and no grains of albite or flakes of chlorite

are strewn about in the granite, As albite and chlorite are lower in the ‘reaction

series (Bowen 1928) than the plagioclase and biotite of the granite, these minerals

are thought to have been reactively dissolved by the magma. It is considered that the

assimilation of such albite- and chlorite-rich rocks into potash-rich granite

magma, possibly similar to that represented by the even-grained granite of

Port Elliot (vide Table 9), would explain the formation of the porphyritic

granite and its unusual mineralogical and textural features. The following

is an elaboration of this hypothesis,

With the incorporation of blocks of albite- and chlorite-rich rock into

the granite magma, the albite was dissolved and its heat equivalent of ande-

sine (Abg,)—the plagioclase with which the magma was saturated—was

precipitated. The chlorite, together with the associated muscovite, was alsa

dissolved with the concomitant precipitation of its heat equivalent of biotite.

Any quartz individuals present in the incorporated rock were reacted upon

by the magma giving them ragged outlines. These processes enriched the

212

magma in soda, magnesia and titania and from this melt the snda-microcline

microperthites were precipitated, The phenocrysts probably grew quickly

inclnding within themselyes crystals of the previously precipitated andesine

and biotite and the ragged-edged quartzes. The plagioclase intergrowth is

more albitic (Ab,,) than the previously precipitated crystals.

Following the formation of the phenocrysts, crystallization proceeded

normally with falling temperature, The composition of the plagioclase became

more albitic and a coarse-grained groundmass of quartz, bictite, microcline

and acid-plagioclase, together with accessory minerals, crystallized. The rim

of graphically intergrown quartz and felspar which forms a zone around the

phenocrysts grew during this period; the inner edge is straight against the

erystal face. but the outer edge dovetails inta the grotindmuss.

The occurrence of coarse albite chlorite rock on both Wright Island

and Granite Island suggests that the granite in these areas may have assimi-

lated albite- and chlorite-rich rocks during intrusion and that the genesis

suggested above is applicable to the porphyritic granite of these islands and

in othet areas of the Encounter Bay region.

The small masses of even-grained and graphic granite cropping out on

the landward slope of Rosetta Head are taken to represent two of the final

stages of crystallization of the contaminated granite magma.

VII. THE PETROLOGY OF THE SERIES

The earliest effects of metamorphism in this area were of a regional

nature with the isochemical metamorphism of greywacke and subgreywacke

types to quartz biotite schists, This was post-folding but during the period

in which stress was an active agent, The other metamorphic and igneous

events were post-tectonic and alse after all regional stresses had ceased

to operate. They were connected with the upward intrusion of magmatic

gtanite into rocks which had previously only reached the biotite grade of

regional metamorphism.

A mass of intrusive granite just below the present level of the wave-cut

platforms produced an aureole of contact metamorphism and metasotnatism.

Metamorphic differentiation took place with the exchange of material and

the production of andalusite, cordierite, albite and chlorite schists at the

expense of the quartz biotite schists, The bulk composition of the area

Temained essentially the same and “sweats” of andalusite, chlorite, cordierite

and quartz, veins of quartz and stringers of quartz and felspar represent

the material thrown out during the formation of the contact schists.

The granite intrusion reached its highest level in the crust at Rosetta

Head and this cupola-mass weakly hornfelsed the surrounding area but

partially mobilized the albite chlorite schists with which it came in contact.

The granite made its way up the bedding planes, using bedding and schist-

osity as structural controls, and over-rode both quartz biutite schists and

contact schists, Any albite chlorite schists along this gtanite contact were

made mobile and pushed as a mush along the dipping boundary of the

intrusion by the intruding granite above. This mush was capable of intrusion

and crystallized as a coarse albite chlorite rock of igneous aspect. The

original granite magma is considered ta have assimilated considerable

quantities of albite- and chlorite-rich rocks and its composition, porphyritic

nature and other features are thought ta be due to this cause,

‘A final movement in the emplacement af the granite at Rosetta Head

was either associated with, or caused some local stresses, as a zone of contact

schists up to Len feet wide, follows the main contact in must parts. These

rocks modify the hornfelsed quartz biotite schists and there was local devel-

213

opment of andalusite schists by isochemical contact metamorphism under

some stress,

Hence four periods of metamorphism and three phases of the granite

intrusion have been separated by this study. The first period of meta-

morphism was associated with regional factors, but the other three stages

are connected with one another and with the main emplacement, the emplace-

ment of the cupola-mass of Rosetta Head and the final movement of the

intfusive granite, respectively. Dolerite dykes—now uralitized—were injected

later, followed by a small amount of pegmatitic activity,

VIII. EXTENT AND AGE OF THE INTRUSION

There are many outcrops of granite in the Encounter Bay area (Browne

1920) all of which appear to be part of the same intrusion. The granite at

Cape Willoughby, Kangaroo Island, is considered by Tilley (1919) to be

part of the same batholith and a suite of similar rocks from south-eastern

South Australia has been described by Mawson and Parkin (1943) who

assume that the rocks are “an eastward extension of the Encounter Bay and

Cape Willoughby intrusions.”

As previously suggested (Bowes, 1953), it is considered that there was

a period of granite formation and intrusion in South Australia during early

Palaezoic times. At this fime the granitic rocks of southern and south-castern

South Australia formed upon the collapse of the eugeosyncline which ex-

tended to the east and south-east of the miogeosyncline in which the sedi-

ments of the Adelaide System were deposited, This period is correlated with

the migmatization and granite intrusions which took place in the North-

eastern Flinders Ranges, the final stages of which have been dated as

mid-Ordovician by an age determination of 400+ 50 million years on a

samarskite from a granite pegmatite (Kleeman, 1946), The postulated (?)

Early Palaeozoic age of the intruded and altered country rocks at Rosetta

Head appears compatible with the correlations.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I wish to record my thanks to Professor Sir Douglas Mawson for

suggesting the area and for making available specimens and data previously

collected; to Mr, A, W. Kleeman for his advice and he)pful criticism and

to the University of Adelaide for the assistance made available by the award

of the James Barrans Scholarship.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Bowen, N.L. 1928 The Evolution of the Igneous Rocks. Princetown

Bowes, D, R. 1953 The Genesis of Some Granitic and Associated Rocks in the

North-eastern Flinders Ranges, South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc,

S. Aust. 76

Browne, W, R. 1920 The Igneous Rocks of Encounter Bay, South Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 44

Day, R. A. 1933 Igneous Rocks and the Depths of the Earth. New York

Gartretr, H.W. 1903 The Port Victor Granite. Trans. Roy Soc. S, Aust., 27

Howenin, W. 1926 The Geology of the Victor Harbour, Inman Valley and

Yankalilla Districts, with special reference to the Great Inman Valley

Glacier of Permo-Carboniferous Age. Trans. Roy. Soc. S: Aust., 50

Howcutx, W. 1929 The Geology of South Australia, Adelaide

Jacx, R. L, 1923 The Building Stones of South Australia. Geol, Surv., S. Aust.,

Bull. 10

214

Kireman, A. W. 1937 The Nature and Origin of the so-called Diorite Inclu-

sions in the Granite of Granite Island. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 61

Kreeman, A. W. 1946 An Age Determination on Samarskite fram Mount

Painter, South Australia. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 70, (2)

Mawson, D. 1926 A Brief Resumé of Present Knowledge Relating to. the

Igneous Rocks of South Australia. Aust. Assn. Adv. Sci., 18

Mawson, D. 1947 The Adelaide Series as Developed along the Western Mar-

gin of the Flinders Ranges. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 71, (2)

Mawson, D. and Datiwitz, W. B. 1944 Palaeozoic Igneous Rocks of Lower

South-eastern South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 68, (2)

Mawson, D., and Parxrn, L. W. 1943 Some Granitic Rocks of South-eastern

South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (2)

Pertiyoun, F. J. 1949 Sedimentary Rocks. New York

Rozinson, E, J. 1946 The Hornfels Series of the Eastern Mt. Lofty Chain.

Portion of Thesis, University of Adelaide,

Tittey, C. E. 1919 The Petrology of the Granite Mass of Cape Willoughby

Kangaroo Island, Part I. Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 43

TYRRELL, S W. 1933 Greenstones and greywackes. Bull. Comm. géol. Finlande,

102

‘UL S— (0096) ;

"AAOD [PV ‘ISUPPS aoIpsoo Ppayouy Jo ydeasoyoyd-Oss1yy

FAL

VPALN Ty UN0 | “yao ws

SPUD BHULAIE AY PUR Jitlod

*QA07) [oted OL SpAleMjsae pray. FeSO" ULOLL

Z “8g

= ss) . ye

Me r . one

MOL WiOd, PLHe[Ssy Ht

“DAO PAI UL JST S}dorploa pyHoury Jo do1dqUg

‘Bly

‘PURS[ apiuBts

AV pure

‘

pues | ISIN TPoH PYPSOPY

Bud

Plate V1

77,

Vol.

Roy. Soe. S. Aist,, 19

Trans.

TWAYO

AJINOGD F pur aes u

‘peaH E}jesoy

‘OT X— (8196)

UoX 9} JO ML Yu-ayorg ay Surmoys yWpouaxX yso1

JIMJaq JORPUOD Jo Yydes

ayiq[e aT LO[ To

UA JO ydeisoyoyd-O1atyy

“‘pRaH Blasoyy

‘ULE CAS VE JoRyUOD ayUBIA—yoos APR ayo 2

nO}

¢ “Shy

“pray Eyosoy

LL “AVS a9 Wes

‘ Ol] F}ITe

EB ASIBOI—]S1Yos

aliqye—yoo1 Aapunas

215

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED)

Receipts and Payments for the Year ended 30th September, 1953

RECEIPTS | eu ae? ree

£s.d £ 8. d. By Tratsactions— lla i

To Balance, 1/10/52... 678. 5 10 ’ Printing and Publishing

» Subscriptions chee ah 138 14 0 Vol. 75 ow, 837 14 6

» Government Grant for Part Vol. 76. .. $61.15 81,399 10 2

PAS. 1400 0 0 =~

19 a » Reprint: ve ius

1953/84 (Istinstlt) ‘350 0 041,750 0 0 ” Tibrarian 5 ear

—<————— » Printing an St:

» Sale of Publications and ” Postage, a ationery ic i i

Reprints ike Seden i413 2 . Filing Cabinets du 6716 4

” Interest Saop) ge -eegen Qeees 214 8 9 ” Insurance nese Bn 1210 O

» Lighting bes stk 12 8 8

» Cleaning Rooms x: 38 7 0

4 Sundries 717 0

» Balance 30th Sept., 1953:

A. and N.Z.

Bank Ltd..... 672 11 5

Less Out-

standing

Chqus6 5 0

100

3 8 0 1013 0 661 18 5

Savings Bank

of S.A.:

General A/c. 536 0 0

Ex Endow-

ment Fund 11 7 9 547 7 9

Cash on Hand ay 215 61,212 1 8

£2,996 1 9 £2,996 1 9

ENDOWMENT FUND

Receipts and Payments for the Year ended 30th September 1953

£sda € a a £sd4a £ s. d.

1952—October 1 1952—Sept. 20

To Balance— By Revenue A/e. wo 214 8 9

Commonwealth Inscribed » Balance

Stock 6,010 90 0 Commonwealth In-

Savings Bank of S.A, 62 18 76,072 18 7 scribed Stock ....6,010 0 Q

————— Savings Bank of S. A. | 6218 7 6,072 18 7

1953—Sept. 30

Inscribed Stock aw =199 14 6

Savings Bank of S.A... 1414 3 214 8 9

£6,287 7 4 | £6,287 7 4

rewire oo I

Audited and. found correct. The stock and Bank Balances have been verified by certificate

from the respective institutions.

M. ANGEL Ul _-Hona.

N. ANGEL, A.U.A.Com. § Auditors T. R. N. LOTHIAN, Hoa Treasurer

Adelaide, 6th October, 1953

216

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

1929 Pror. Warrer Howcuin, F.G.S.

1930 Jown McC. Brack, A.LS.

1931 Prov. Sin DoucLas Mawsos, O.B,E., D.Sc. B-E,, F.R.S.

1933 Pror. J. Burtow Crzranp, M.D.

1935 Pror. T. Harvey Jonnston, M.A., D.Sc,

1938 Por. J. A. Prescott, D.Sv., F.A.LC.

1943 Herpert Womenstey, A.L,S,, F.R.E.S.

1944 Paor, J. G. Woon, D.Sc. Ph.D,

1945 Crem T. Manicax, M.A., B.E., D.Sc. F.G.S.

1946. Hervent M, Hare

LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC.

AS AT 30 MARCH 1953

Those marked with au asterisk (*) have contributed papers pyblished in the Society’s

Transactions. Those marked with a dagger (t+) are Life Members,

Any change in address or any other changes should be totified to the Secretary,

Noie—Yhe publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriplians

are in arrear.

Bates, Honorary Feccows

1945, *Fenner, C. A. E., D.Sc., 42 Alexandra Avenue, Rose Park, Adelaide—Fellow, 1917-45;

Council, 1925-28; President, 1930-31; Vice-President, 1928-30; Secretary, 1924-25;

Treasurer, §932-33; Editor, 1934-37.

1949. *Cretann, Pror. J, B, M.D., Dashwood Road, Beaumont, S,A.—Fellow, 1895-1949;

Verco Medal, 1933; Council, 1921-26, 1932-37; President, 1927-28: 1940-41; Vice-

President, 1926-27, 1941-42.

Frttows.

194, Appre, Prov A. A., M.D., D.Sc, Ph,D., University. of Adelaide,

1953. Apcock, Miss A., 4 Gertrude Street, Norwood, $.A.

1951. Arrcaison, G, D., B.E,, Waite Research Institute (Private Mail Bac), G.P°0.,

Adelaide.

1927. *AcperMaAK, A. R., Ph.D., D.Sc, F.G.S. , Div. Indus, Chemistry, C.S.LR.O., Box 4331,

G.P.0., Melbourne, Victoria—Couneil, 1937-42.

1951. Anpvrrson, Mrs, S. H., B.Sc., Zoology Dept., University of Adelaide, S.A.

1931. Anorew, Rev. J. R., c/o Methodist Manse, Maitland.

1951, Awprews, J., M.B., B.S., 40 Seafield Avenue, Kingswood, S.A,

1935. *Anprewarrma, H. G, M.Agr.Sc., D.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag),

Adelaide—Counctl, 1950; Vice-President, 1950-51; President, 1951-.

1935, *AnprewarrHa, Mrs. H. V., B.Agr.Sc., M.S. (nee H. V. Steele), 29 Claremont

Avenue, Netherby, S.A.

1929. *Ancer, F. M,, 34 Fullarton Road, Parkside, S.A,

1939, *AncEL, Miss L, M,, M.Sc., c/o University of Adelaide.

1945. *Bartrert, H. K., L.Th., 15 Claremont Avenue, Netherby, S.A,

1950. Brastey, A. K,, Harris Street, Marden, S.A.

1950, Brcr, R. G, B.Ag.Se., R.D.A,, Linewood Park, Mittel, S.A.

1932. Brce, P, KR. D.D.Se., L.D.S., Shell House, 170 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1928. Best, R, J., D.Sc, F.A.C.1., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide,

1953. Bro, A. F., B.Sc., Zoology Department, University, Adelaide,

1934, Bracx, E. C, M.B., B.S. Magill Road, Tranmere, Adelaide.

1950. Bonnin, N. J.. MB, B.S., FRCS. (Eng:), FR.A.CS,, 144 Hil Street, North

Adelaide, S.A.

1945, *Bonyrsoy, C. W., B.Sc, A.A.C.I.; Romalo House, Romalo Avenue, Magill, S.A.

1940. BonytHon, Sir J. Lavincron, B.A, (Camb,), 263 East Terrace, Adelaide.

1945. *Boomsma, C, D,, M.Sc., B.Sc.For., 2 Celtic Avenue, South Road Park, S.A.

1947, Bowes, D. R,, Ph.D., M.Sc,, D.1.C, F.G.S., 51 Eton Street, Malvern.

1939. Brookman, Mrs. R. D. (nee A. Harvey), B.A., Meadows, S.A,

1945. Brovucuton, A. C, Farina, S.A,

1948. Brownine, T: O., B.Sc. (Syd.), Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelside.

1944. *Burpipcr, Miss N. T., M.Sc, C.S.LR.O., Div. Plant Industry, P.O.. Box 109, Cat:-

berra, A.C.T.

Bunvon, R, S., D.Sc., University of Adelaide—Coyncil, 1946,

Oate of

Election,

1922. *Cameseir, T. D, D.DSe, D.Sc, Dental Dept, Adelaide Hospital, Adelaide—

Council, 1928-32, 1935, 1942-45; Vice-President, 1932-34; President, 1934-35, '

1953. Canten, A. N., B.Sc., 70. Madeline Street, Burwood F 13, Vict.

1951. areata, R. G, B.Sc, c/o CS.LR.O,, Div. of Fisheries, 1 Museum Street,

Perth, W.A.

1929. Curistre, W., M.B., B.S., Education Department, Social Services, 51 Pirie Street

Adelaide—Treasurer, 1933-38,

1950, Coatsran, 5. T, BSc, 6 Iampton Street, Hawthorn, S.A,

1949. Cortiver, FP, S., Geology Department, University of Queensland.

1930. *Corgunoun, T. Ty MSc., 10 French Street, Netherby, S.A. Secretary, 1942-43.

1907. *Cooxr, W. T., D.Sc, AA.C.L, 4 South Terrace, Kensington Gardens, S.A.—Counell,

1938-41; Mice-President, 1941-42, 1943-44: President, 1942-43,

1942, *Coorsr, H. M,, 51 Hastings Street, Glenelg, S_A,

1949-50, 1951; President, 1950-51.

1953, Dawe, D. M. S. MB. B.Chin, M.R.CS., L.RC.P., B.A,, Institute of Medical and

Veterinary Science, Frome Road, Adelaide;

1951, Dayne, AGL, PLD, B.Sc, Waite Research Institute, Private Mail Bag, G.P.G,

1950, Detanp, C. M, MB, BS, DPD, DJ, 29 Gilbert Street, Goodwood, S.A.

1941. Dicxtnson, S. B., M.Sc, 51 Moseley Street, Glenelg, S.A. Council, 1949-51; Vice-

President, 1951-.

1930. Dix, E. V., Hospitals Department, Rundle Street, Adelaide, $.A.

1944. Duxstows, S. M. L, M.B., B.S., 124 Payneham Road, St. Peters, Adelaide.

1931, Dwyer, Ff, M,, M.B., B,S., 105 Port Road, Hindmarsh, 5.A.

1933. *Earpizy, Mrss C. M., M.Sc. University of Adelaide—Council, 1943-46.

1945. *Enmonns, S. J, B.A. M.Sc. Zoology Department, University, Adelaide,

1902. *Epouist, A. G, 19 Farrell Street, Glenelg, S.A—Couneil, 1949-,

1944. Freres, Mrss H. M., M.Sc., 8 Taylor's Road, Mitcham, S.A.

1927. *Fintayson, H. H,, 305 Ward Street, North Adelaide—Council, 1937-40.

1951. Fismer, R. H., 265 Goexdwood Road, Kings Park, SA. |

1923. *Fry, H. K., O.S.0., M.D, B.S., B.Sc, F.R.A,C.P,, Town Hall, Adelaide—Council,

1933-37: Wier-President, 1937-38, 1939-40; President, 1938-39,

1951. Futon, Cor, D, C.MG.,, CB.E., Aldgate, S.A.

1954. Greson, A. A., A.W.A.S.M., Geologist, Mines Department, Adelaide.

1932. *Greson, E. S, H., M.Se., 297 Cross Roads, Clarence Gardens, Adelice.

1927, Goorrev, F, K,, Box 951H, G,P.O,, Adelaide,

1935. }Go.nsacx, H., Coromandel Val'ey, S.A.

1925. Gosse, Sm James H., Gilbert House, Gilbert Place, Adelaide.

1910. *Gaant, Prov. Sin Kerr, M-Sc., F.LP., 56 Fourth Avenue, Se. Peters, S.A,

1930. Gray, J. T,, Orroroo, SA,

1933, Greaves, H., 12 Edward Street, G'ynde, S.A. |

1951, Green, J, W. 4 Holden Street, Kensington Park, S.A.

1904, Grirrivn, H. B,, Dunrobin Road, Rrighton, 5.4,

1948, Gross, G F,, B.Sc, South Australian Museum, Adelaile--Secretury, 1950-—

1944, Guevy, D, J., B.Sc. Mineral Resources Survey, Canberta, A,C,T.

1922. *Hacr, H- M., Director S.A. Museum, Adelaide—Ferro Medal, 194; Council, 1931-34,

1950-; Vice-President, 1934-36, 1937-38; Presides?, 1936-37; Treasurer, 1938-1950.

1949, Hatt, D, R,, Mern Merna, via Quorn, S.A.

1953. Hansen, I. V., B.A., 34 Herbert Road, West Croydon, §.A.

1946, *Harvy, Mrs, J. E. (nee A. C. Beckwith), M.Sc., Box 62, Smithton, Tas.

1944. Harars, J. R., B.Sc, 94 Archer Street, North Adelaide, S.A.

1947. Henperson, D. L. W., P-M.B., 20 Bourke, N.S.W.

1944. Herrror, R. 1, B.Agr.Sc,, Soil Conservator, Dept. of Agriculture, S.A.

1954. Hinroy, F. J., B.AgSe., Botanist, 298 Miugill Road, Benlaly Park

1951. Hoeexrne, L. J., 57 Marino Parade, Seacliff, S.A.

1949, Horioway. B. W., B.Sc., 33 Kyre Avenue, Kingswood, S.A,

1924. *Hossrernn, P_S, MSe, (322 Fisher Street, Fullarton, S.A.

1950. Howarp, P. F., USe., c/o Great Western Consolidated, Bullfitch, W.A,

1944, Humere, D. S, W~ 238 Payneham Road. Payneham, 5.A.

1947, Hurron, J. T.. B.Sc, 18 Emily Avenue, Clapham,

1928, Irounn, P. Kurralta, Burnside, SA,

1942, Jenxins, C F. H., Department of Agriculture, St. George’s Terrace, Perth, W.A,

1918 “Jenwison, Rev. J, C., 7 Frew Street, Fuilarton, S.A

1945, *Jessur, R, W,, M.Sc. 3 Alma Road, Fullartan, 5.4.

1910. *Jonnson, FE. A., M.D. MRCS, 1 Baker Street, Glenelg.

1950. Jouns, R. K., B.Sc, Department of Mines, Flintlers Street, Adelaide, S.A.

1951, Kavarovic, D., B.A‘Sc, (Mun), 22 Grandview Road, Toorak Gardens, S.A

21g

Date of

Eleeslon,

1954. Kaars, A. L., BE, prey C/o. North Broken Hill Led, srolaope Hi

1951. KxsTine, YN. fe Dept. Ar and Ed., P.A.C, Preparatary School, 3 Hartley R

‘esp Brightan,

tKeaamy i Mi, Ph.D., MB, F.R.GS., Khakhar Buildings, C.P, Tank Read, Rom-

*Kine, D,, M.Sc. 44 een Avenue, Blair Athol, S.A.

. *KLEEMAN, A. W., M.Ses University of Adelaide—Secretary, 1945-49: [ice-Prest-

deni, 1948-49, 1950-51; President, 1949-50.

Lenpow, G. A., M. es B, Sc E.R.C. P., A.M.P, Building, King William Street, Adelaide,

Loratan, T. R. N,, N.D. i, cN. 2). er Botanic Garderis, Adelaide.

Lowek, H, F., 7 Averue Road, Highgate, S.

*Luveroor, Mrs. N. H., M.A., Pn.D. D.LC., Fo. S., Department of Mines, 31 Flinders

Street, Adelaide,

McCurtocn, R, N., M.B.E., B.Sc. (Oxon.), B.Agr.Sci. (Syd.), Roseworthy Agricul-

tural College, S.A.

Maporen, C, B., B.D.S,, D.BiSe, Shell House, North aierrace, Adelaide,

Maszeg, D. A, B.Sc. (Hons.), Waite Institute, Adelaide,

Mann, E. A., C/o Bank of Adelaide, Adelaide,

MARSHALL, T. J. M.Aer.Se, Ph,D., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag}, Adelaide—

Council, 1948

*Mawson, "Prov. ‘Sin Doors, 0.8.E, D.Sc, BE, PRS, University of Adelaide-~

Vereo Medal, 1931; President, 1924- 25, 1944-45: ¥ ice-President, 1923-24, 1925-26;

Council, 1941-43.

May, L. H., BSc, 691 Esplanade, Grange, S.A,

Mayo, THe "Hon, Me: Justice, LL.B., K.C., Supreme Court, Adelaide,

Mayo, G, M. E,, B,AgSc., Waite 2 Instimte (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide, S.A.

McCauray, Misa D, BA. & B.Sc., 70 Halton Terrace, Kensington Park,

McCautnezy, J. E,, MD. D Sc. (Edin), Institute of Medical and Veterinary Science,

rome Road, Adelaide.

F: , .

. tMmes, K. R, D.Sc. FES. Mines. Department, Flinders Street, Adelaide,

Mries, J. A. K, MA, y BChie. (Cant), 48 Gladys Strest, Edwardstown, S.A.

Mincuam, V. H. ee ene

tMrecuent, Peor. Sie W., CMC, M.A, D.Se., Fitzroy Ter, Prospect, SA.

Mitcee1, Paor, M. L, a. M Se. University, A

MitcHeiw, F. J., c/o The South Austrafian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide,

Moonnouse, F, W., M.Sc., Chief Inspector of Fisheries, Flinders Street, Adelaide.

*MounTFoRD, Cc. P., 25 First Avenue, St. Peters, Adelaide.

Mourrew., J. W., Engineering and Water Supply Dept, Port Road, Thebarton, S.A

Neat-Suirtna, C. A., B.Agr.Sci., 16 Gooreen Street, Reid, Canberra, A,C,T.

Niwnes, A. R,, B.A, 62 Shetheld Street, Malvern, 5.A.

*Nortucore, K. H,, B.Agr.Sc., A.T.A.S., Waite Institute Cena Mail Bag), Adelaide.

Ocxenoen, G. P., "B.A, Schoal House, Box 63, Kimba, S.A.

*Orpner, I. L., 65 Fifth Avenue, St. Peters, S.A.

*Oszonn, Pror. T. G. B., D. Se., Department of Botany, Oxford, England—Counedl,

1915-20, Ba President. $925-26-- Vice-President, 1924-25, 1926-27,

*Paruin, L. Me Sc, ¢/o North Broken Hill Mining Co., Melbourne, Victoria.

Parxinsox, K ‘a B. Sc, 8 Mooreland Avenue, Beverley, SIA.

Patrrson, G., 68 Partridge Street, Glenelg, S.A-

PAuLL, A. G, 10 Millon Avenue, Fulfarton Estate, S.A

. *Prrra, C. S,, 'D.Sc.. Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag}, Adelaide—Council, 1941-435;

Vice-President 1943-45, 1946-47 President. 1945-46.

Powrtr, J. K. . BSc, CSIRO., Division of Biochemistry, University, Adelaide.

Poynton, J. “O., MD. MA. ChE, MRCS, LRCP, Institute Medicine, Vet

Science, Frome Road, Adelaide.

Pratrr, R. G., 81 Park Terrace, North Unley, S

’ *Paescorr, “PROF. j. A, CBE, DSe., ALC, PES. Waite Instinite (Private Mail

Bag), Adelaide—V’erco Medai, 1938; Council, 1927-30, 1935-39; Wice-President,

1930-32; Evendent 1932-33,

Parcs, A. G., M.G., M.A., Litt.D., F.R.GS,, 46 Pennington Tersate, North Adelaide,

Pryor, L. D., se Dip. For., 32 La Perouse Street, Griffith, N.S.W.

*Rarmcay, J. H, B.Sc., Bureau of Mineral Resources, Melbourne Building. Canberra,

Raysen, P., B. Se) Bos, 111, SA.

Riceman, D. S., M.Sc., B.Agr. Sc, CSLRO, Division of Nutrition, Adelaide,

Rienen, Ww. R, BSc, Oceanographic Institute, Gettenburg, Syeeden.

*Rimes, ‘ D., B.Sc., 24 Winston Avenue, Clarence Gardens, S.A.

Rex, C. E., 42 Waymouth Avenue, Glandore, S.A,

*Restnson, E.G, M.Sc. 42 Riverside Drive, Sudbury, Ontario, Canada.

Date of

Election

1953, Rocers, W. P., Ph,D., Zoo! ent University, Adelaide,

ter Baath, LD cfg Huh Scawl, Port Pita, SA

195%, Rows, S.A, 22 Shelley Street, Firle, SA.

1951. E,, B.Sc, 22 Shelley Street, Firle, S.A.

1950. voo, Pror. E A. B.Sc, A.M,, University, Adelaide, S.A.

1945. Rv, J. R,, ne Penola Estate, Penola, S.A.

1944, *Sannars,,. Miss D B,, M.Se,, University of Queens; vie Brisbane, Queeosland.

1950, Saunneys, F. L., ‘99, Winchester Street, Malvern,

1933. Scuwmmex, M., MB, B.S, 175 North Ter, Adel

1951, Seorr, T. D,, Be c/o S.A. Museum, North. Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

1946. *Sranrt, E. R, M.Sc., C.S.LR.O., Division. of Industrial Chamistry, Box 4331, G.P.0,

1924, *5 Metbbunie, Viet BSc, En and Water. Supply Vi

‘ EGNIT, G5 gwineer ater, Supp! trnent, ictoria

Square, Adelaide—Se feretary, 1930- recone 1937-38; Vice Bes ident, 1938-39,

1940-41; President, 1939-40,

1925. *Sueaap, H., Port Elliot, $.4.

1936. *SHkaAgy, K., Fisheries Research Div, C_S.1.R.0., Universi a De of on Medians, W.A,

1945. SHEPHERD, ‘T. H,, M.Sc, B.A, ¢/o Anglo-Weatralian

1934. Suinxrievo, R. Cc. Salisbury, 5-A-

1924. Simpson, F. N., Pirie Street, Adelaide.

1949. Simpson, dD, A, M.B., B.S., 42 Lockwood Road, Burnside, S.A.

1941. *Suire, T. 1, B.Sc, Regional Planning Section, Department of National Develop-

ment, Canberra, A, CT

1M]. *5ourecoir, R. V., M.B., B.S., D.T,M. & H., 13 Jasper Street, Hyde Park, S.A—

Couneil, "1948-51; Treasurer, 1951-_

1936. Sourn won, A.R, ‘M.D., M.S. (Adel), M.R.C.P., Wootestig Ter., Glen Osmond, §.A,

1947, ean K 1. Ly MSc., 15 Main Ro d, Richmo nd, S:A.—Council, 1951+.

1936. +*Spzicc, RC. "MSc. ” Mines Menarinent Flinders Street, Adelaide.

1951. STEADMAW, Rev. W. R, 8 Blairgowrie Road, St. Georges, S.A,

1947. Spurinc, ML. B., BA Sc, Agricultural College, Roseworthy, 5.A.

1949, *Spry, A. H., B.Sc., 63 LeFevre Terrace, North Adelaide, S.A.

1938. *STEPHENS, ¢ at D.Se,, Waite Institute (Private Mail Pag), Adetaid

1935. Srrickianp, A. G, M.Agr. Sc., 11 Wootoona Terrace, Glen Osmond, SA —Council,

1947,

1932. Swan, D. C, M.Sc, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag). Adelaide—Secretary,

1940-42 ; Vie Eeeeleaet, 1946-47, 1948-49; President, 1947-48,

1M8, Swann, F. J. W., 38 Angas Road, Lower Mitcham, S.A.

1931. Swirsxt, P,, Mag. Sc, 22a Henry Street, Croydon, $.A-

1934. Symons, 1, G. 35 anreas Street, Lower Mitcham, S.A—Editor, 1947-,

1929. *Taveor, J. K., B.A, MSc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—Counecsl,

1940-43, 1947-505 "Librarian, 1951.

1950. Tavuor, G. H., BSc, Department of Mines, Old Legislative Council Building, North

Terrace, Ads S.A.

1948. eons, I. M, M.Sc. (Wales), University, Adelaide—Seerelary, 1948-50; Council,

1938, *THomas, Mrs, I, M. Mn e P, M. Mawson), M.Sc., 36 King Street, Brighton.

1940, THomson, Capt. J. M. 138 Military Road, Semaphore South,

1923. *Tinnare, N. B., BSc, South Australian Museum, Adelaide—Seeretary, 1935-36;

Corned, 1946-47 : Vice-President, 1947-48, 1949-50; President, 1948-49

7945, . §, M.Sc, B.AgrSc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bas), Adelaide.

1937. *TRUMILE, Prov. H. Cy D.Sc, M.Agr.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag),

Adelaide—Council, 1942-1945 ; Pice-President, 1945-46, 1947-48; President, 1946-47.

1925. Turner, D, C, Brookman ' Buildings, Grenfell Street, Adelaide,

1950. Vuerca, S, T, Port Lincola, 8 S.A.

1912. *Warp. L. K., 1.S.0., B.A., B.E. D.Se.. 22 Northumberland Avenue, Tusmore—Counciél,

1924-27, 1033, 353 Vice- President, 1927-28: President, 1922-3),

1941. *Warr, D. C., Agr. Se, Div, Plant Industry, C.S.LR.0,, Canberra, A.C.T,

1936, WATERHOUSE, Miss L. M, 35 King Street, Brighton, S.A

1953, Waterman, R, A, BA., M.A., PhD.. North-western University, Evanston,

Thinois, As S.A,

1954. Wens, B. P., B.Sc., Geologist, Mines Departs, onaee

1954. Wetns, C. B., ae Sc, Research Officer, C.S.LR Soils ‘Division, Adelaide.

2939, *Wrenrnc, Rev. B J. 5 York Street, Henley Beac .

1949, *Weoener, C. F., B. Se, Department Mines, Flinders Street, Adelaide, S.A.

1954. Warrecaw, A. I, B.Sc., C/o. Adelaide Boys High School, Adelaide.

16, WHrTLe, A. W. G., B.Sc., Mities Departenenit Flinders Street, Adelaide,

1950. Wruaams, L. D,, *Duntosa,” Meningie, S.

1946. *Wrison, A. FP. MSe., University of W.A., edtands, W.A.

220

Date of

Election ease se R

1938. *Wizson, J. O., C.S.LR.O., Division of Nutrition, Adelaide.

1930. *Womerstry, H., F.R.ES, ALS. (Hon. causa), S.A. Museum, Adelaide—Verco

Medal, 1943; Secretary, 1936-37; Editor, 1937-43, 1945-47; President, 1943-44; Vice-

regnient, 1944-45: Rep. Fauna and Flora Protection Committee, 1945; Treasurer,

1950-51.

1944, *Womerstey, H. B. S., M.Sc., University of Adelaide.

1944. Womerstey, J. S., B.Sc, Lae, New Guinea,

1923. *Woon, Pror. J. t, D.Sc, Ph.D., University of Adelaide—Verco Meaal, 1944;

Council, 1938-40; Vice-President, 1940-41, 1942-43; Rep. Fauna and Flora Board,

1940-; President, 1941-42; Council, 194448.

1950. Woopnarp, G. D., 20 Kensington Road, Leabrook, S.A.

1953. WoopHouse, L. R., 15 Robert Street, North Unley, S.A.

1943. Wooptanps, Harotp, Box 989 H, G.P.O., Adelaide.

1945. Worruuey, B. W., B.A. M.Sc., A. Inst. P., University, Adelaide,

1948. *Wymonp, A, P., B.Sc., 4 Woodley Road, Glen Osmond, S.A.

1949. Yeates, J. N., L.S. AM.LE, A.M.LM.E, Richards Buildings, 99 Currie Street,

Adelaide, S.A.

1944, Zier, W. J., Dip.For., F.L.S. (Lon.), 7 Rupert Street, Footscray West, W.12, Vict.

221

GENERAL INDEX

[Names in italics indicate that the forms classified are new to science]

Centenary Addresses, i-xiy

Angel, L. Madeline: Parorchis acanthits var.

australis, n. var., with an Account of the

Life Cycle in South Australia

Australonereis ehlersi, 19

Babiangia bulbifera, 98

Bowes, D. R.: The Metamorphic and Igneous

History of Rosetta Head, South Aus-

tralia, 182-214.

Boydaia derricki, 65

Ceratocephala edinondst, 23

Cleland, J. B., and N, B. Tindale: The Eco-

Jogical Surroundings of the WNealia

Natives in Central Australia, and Native

Names and Uses of Plants, 81-86

Eight New Species of Trombiculidae (Aca-

ra) from Queensland: H. Womersley,

67-80

Fuschongastia parva, 74; E. popet, 76; E.

procang, 77; E. andromeda, 80

Hansen, Tan V.: An Account of the Negalia

Initiation Ceremonies at Yuendumu, Cen-

tral Australia, January 1953, 175-181

Hartman, Olga: Australian Nereidae, 1-41

Hossfeld, Paul §.: Stratigraphy and Struc-

ture of the Northern Territory of Aus-

tralia, 103-161

ichthyostrongylus clelandi n,g., n.sp., from

an Australian Shark: Patricia M. Maw-

son, 162

Ludbrook, N. H.: The Molluscan Fauna of

the Pliocene Strata underlying the Ade-

laide Plains, Part I, 42-64

Mawson, Patricia M.: Ichthyostrongylus cle-

lendt nog, nosp, fromm an Australian

Shark, 162

Metamorphic and Igneous History of Rosetta

Head, South Austraha: D. R, Bowes,

182-214

Micromereis halei, 25

Molluscan Fauna of the Pliocene Strata

underlying the Adelaide Plains, Part I:

N, H. Ludbrook, 42-64

Mountford, Charles P.: A Carved Human

Figure from the Durack Range, north-

western Australia, 87

Nercidae, Australian; Olga Hartman, 1-41

Nealia Natives in Central Australia, Ecologi-

cal Surrotindings of: J. B. Cleland and

N. B. Tindale, 81-86

Negalia Initiation Ceremonies at Ytrendumu,

Central Australia, January 1953; An

Account of the: Ian V. Hansen, 175-181

Neotrombidium barringunense, 89-97

Northern Territory of Australia, Strati-

graphy and Structure of: Paul S. Hoss-

feld, 103-161

Parorchis acanthus var. australis, n. var.,

with an Account of the Life Cycle in

South Australia; L. Madeline Angel,

164-174

Rosetta Head, South Australia: The Meta-

morphic and Igneous History of: D. R.

Bowes, 182-214

Stratigraphy and Structure of the Notthern

Territory of Australia: Paul S. Hoss-

feld, 103-161

Sauthcatt, R. V.: The Genus Neotrombidium

(Acarina: Leeuwenhoekiidae), I, Descrip-

tion of the Ovum and Larva of Neo-

frombidium barringunense Hirst 1928,

with an Account of the Biology of the

Genus, 89-97

Southcott, R. V.; Description of a New

Genus and Species of Larval Trombiculid

Mite from New Guinea, 98-102

Trombicula derricki, 67; T. antechinus, 69;

T. thylogale, 71; T. Mackayensis, 72

Tindale, N. B., J. B. Cleland and: The Eco-

logical Surroundings of the Nealia

Natives in Central Australia and Native

Names and Uses of Plants, 81-86

Womersley, H.: Atother New Species of

Boydaia (Speleognathidae, Acarina) from

Australia, 65

Womertsley, TI: light New Species of

Trombiculidae (Acarina) from Queens-

land, 67-79

CONTENTS

CENTENARY MEETING, 24 September 1953—

Dickinson, 5. B.: Centenary of the Society

Rocers, W. P.: The Biological Sciences ....

Prescorr, J. A.:-Agricultural Sciences

Mawson, D.; The Role of Geology in the Activities of the Society

HartMan, Orca: Australian Nereidae

Lupsroox, N. H.: Molluscan Fauna of the Pliocene Strata underlying the Adelaide

; Plains

Womerstey, H.: Another New Species of Boydaia (Speleognathidae : Acariua)

from Australia

Womerstey, H.: Eight New Species of Trombiculidae (Acarina) from Queens-

land

CieLann, J. B., and Trxnare, N. B.: Ecological Surroundings of the Ngalia

Natives in Central Australia and Native Names and Uses of Plants ...

Mountrorp, C. P.: A Carved Human Figure from the Durack Ranges, North-

western Australia i Pe:

Sourncorr, R. V.: The Genus Neotrombidium (Acarina :_Leeuwenhoekiidae)

I, Description of the Ovum and Larva of Neotrombidium Barringun-

ense Hirst 1928, with an Account of the Biology of the Genus ....

Soutucorr, R. V.: Description of a New Genus and Species of Larval Trom-

biculid Mite from New Guinca

Hossrerp, P. S.: Stratigraphy and Structure of the Northern Territory of

Australia

Mawson, Partricra M.: Ichthyostrongylus clelandi, n.g., n.sp., from an Aus-

tralian Shark

ANGEL, L, Mapettne: Parorchis acanthus var. australis, n.var., with an Account

of the Life Cycle in South Australia

Hansen, tan V.: An Account of the Ngalia Initiation Ceremonies at Yuendumu,

Central Australia, January 1953

Bowes, D. R.: The Metamorphic and Igneous History of Rosetta Head, South

Australia

eee

Page

i—iii

iv—vi

Vii—xi

xii—xiv

1—41

81—86

87—88

89—97

98—102

103—161

162—163

164—174

175—181

182—214

i ee i oe